FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY

PROFECT CS/ClearView CS
CR-IR 363
Service Manual

The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which is the

unit of radiation, and μC/kg (micro-coulomb/kilogram),
which is the SI derived unit of radiation, is as follows.
1 mR = 0.258μC/kg

FCR ® is a registered trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>

Copyright © 2003 by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,

stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, with-
out the prior written permission of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Miyano-
dai Technology Development Center.

Document No. 011-202-01

1st Edition - Aug. 25, 2003

Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

Printed in Japan
BLANK PAGE
 0.1
1. Handling of This Manual 1.3 About Notation in the Manual
n Notation of cautions, warnings, etc.
1.1 About This Manual The notation formats of "warning," "caution," "Instruction," "note," and "reference" are
shown below.
n Scope
WARNING
This Service Manual is applicable to Fuji Computed Radiography CR-IR363. The
machine is categorized as Class 1 according to IEC classification. Used when death or serious injury may occur if the instruction is not observed.

n Notation of Unit Symbols

For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems CAUTION
of Units (SI) are used, as a rule. However, metric units that are allowed in the Used when minor or medium levels of physical injury may be incurred if the
Measurement Law, not in the SI, are used in some cases. instruction is not observed.
Also used when the machine may suffer serious trouble (such as unrecoverable
or difficult-to-recover trouble).
1.2 Precautions for Handling of This Manual
1. Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd reserves all rights related to this manual. INSTRUCTION
2. This manual should be accessible only to technical service personnel authorized Used when the machine may suffer damage, or any failure or malfunction may occur,
by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. if the instruction is not observed.
3. Since this manual contains confidential information of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd,
such as the internal structure of the product, appropriate measures should be NOTE
taken to prevent illegal or inappropriate disclosure and/or use of this manual.
4. The following conducts are prohibited without prior written approval of Fuji Photo Used to indicate the matters that need attention during steps of the procedure.
Film Co., Ltd.:
- Copy or transcribe a whole or part of the contents of this manual REFERENCE
- Disclose, furnish, lend, and/or transfer a whole or part of the contents of this Used to indicate terminology or supplemental explanations.
manual to persons other than the afore-described technical service personnel.
- Use a whole or part of the contents of this manual for purposes other than
technical servicing of the product. n Indication of Refer To
5. Portions of the descriptions in this manual may be revised due to improvements on
the product. The " " mark is used to indicate the chapter or section you should refer to.
Its format is as indicated below.
{MC:9.1_Erasure conveyor unit}

n Notation in the Manual

In this Service Manual, the CR-IR363 is sometimes denoted simply as the RU
(Reader Unit), and the CR-IR346/348CL as the CL.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.1
 0.2
n Notation of Symbols
- Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the
installation location when the part or component
removed is to be reinstalled.
This indicator is placed in the illustration that depicts
the procedures for removing the parts and components.
When you see this indicator, refer to its relevant
"n Check/Adjustment Procedures."
- Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches
when installing the parts or components.
However, it is not indicated for the half-punches for
improving ease of assembly or preventing erroneous
assembly procedures.

n Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/

Calibration
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and
tools that have been inspected and calibrated as appropriate.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be
guaranteed.
Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below.
Inspection/calibration procedures should be performed in accordance with the
inspection/ calibration manuals described in the ECN Information.

l Instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration

Servicing instrument inspection/
Name Inspection Calibration
calibration manual No.
Dosimeter - ¡ FF-001
Steel rule (150mm) ¡ - FF-005
Steel rule (300mm) ¡ - FF-006
Digital tester ¡ ¡ FF-012
Calipers ¡ () - FF-015

: A block gauge for use in inspection requires calibration.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.2
Contents Machine Description (MD) 0.3
CR-IR 363 Service Manual - Contents

Machine Description (MD)

1. Machine Overview............................................................ MD-1 2.6 Bootup Processing .................................................................MD-23

1.1 Features ...................................................................................MD-1 2.7 RU Shutdown Processing ......................................................MD-25
1.2 System Configuration ...............................................................MD-1
3 Descriptions of Electrical Operations .......................... MD-26
1.3 Overall Machine Configuration and Component Names ..........MD-2
3.1 Power Supply Voltage Output Detection Function .................MD-26
1.4 Machine Components ..............................................................MD-4
3.2 Erasure Unit Control...............................................................MD-29
1.4.1 Unit Locations ...................................................................................... MD-4
1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths ............................................. MD-5 3.3 LEDs on the SNS17B Board ..................................................MD-30
1.4.3 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions .......................................... MD-6 3.3.1 Meaning of LED ON (Illuminated) ...................................................... MD-30
1.4.4 Board Locations ................................................................................. MD-12 3.3.2 Correspondence between LEDs and Sensors ................................... MD-30
3.3.3 Correspondence between LEDs and Erasure Control Signals and
1.5 System Block Diagram ...........................................................MD-13
FFM Control Signals .......................................................................... MD-32

2. Descriptions of Software Control ................................. MD-15 3.4 LEDs on the DRV17A/DRV17B Boards .................................MD-33
3.4.1 Correspondence between LEDs and Loads ...................................... MD-33
2.1 Network Settings ....................................................................MD-15 3.4.2 Meaning of LED ON (Illuminated) ...................................................... MD-34
2.2 Data Flow between RU and CL..............................................MD-15
2.2.1 Data Flow during Routine Processing................................................ MD-15 4. Descriptions of Scanner Mechanism and Its
2.2.2 "Install Operation" and Data Flow ...................................................... MD-16 Operation ........................................................................ MD-35
2.2.3 "VERSION UP" Operation and Data Flow ......................................... MD-18 4.1 Descriptions of CR-IR363 Scanner Operation .......................MD-35
2.2.4 Flow of BACKUP Data ....................................................................... MD-19 4.1.1 Scanner Controller Unit Operation Sequence.................................... MD-35
2.2.5 Data Flow during Restore .................................................................. MD-19 4.1.2 Correction Data .................................................................................. MD-36
2.3 Master CL Switching Function................................................MD-20 4.1.3 Relationship between Subscan Motor Speed, Polygon Rotation
Speed, and IP Type/Reading Mode ................................................... MD-36
2.4 Error Handling ........................................................................MD-21
4.1.4 Image Data Flow ................................................................................ MD-37
2.4.1 Error Handling .................................................................................... MD-21
4.1.5 Error Detection/Processing Subsystem ............................................. MD-38
2.4.2 Cases where Retry is Impossible (FATAL Error) ................................ MD-21
4.1.6 LED Indications of I/O Status ............................................................. MD-39
2.5 SLEEP Mode ..........................................................................MD-21
2.5.1 Operation in SLEEP Mode ................................................................. MD-21
2.5.2 Transition to the SLEEP Mode ........................................................... MD-22
2.5.3 Recovery from SLEEP Mode ............................................................. MD-22

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.3
Contents Machine Description (MD) 0.4

5 Descriptions of Mechanical Components and Their

Operations ...................................................................... MD-40
5.1 Features of Components Used for Each Unit.........................MD-40
5.2 IP Conveyance Flow ..............................................................MD-43
5.3 Cassette Set Unit ...................................................................MD-44
5.3.1 Operation during IP Feed and Load................................................... MD-45
5.3.2 How to Detect the IP Size .................................................................. MD-47
5.4 Feed/Load Conveyor Unit ......................................................MD-48
5.4.1 Path Changeover Guide/Convergence Path Changeover Guide ...... MD-49
5.4.2 Brush Rollers...................................................................................... MD-51
5.5 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit..............................................MD-52
5.5.1 Side-Positioning Mechanism.............................................................. MD-52
5.5.2 Cleaning Guides ................................................................................ MD-52
5.6 Subscanning Unit ...................................................................MD-53
5.6.1 IP Stopper Mechanism....................................................................... MD-53
5.6.2 Dust Removal Mechanism ................................................................. MD-53
5.6.3 Reading Mode.................................................................................... MD-54
5.6.4 Center Guide and Grip Rollers........................................................... MD-54
5.7 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit..................................................MD-55
5.7.1 Movable Guide ................................................................................... MD-55
5.8 Erasure Conveyor Unit ...........................................................MD-55
5.8.1 Switchback Mechanism...................................................................... MD-55
5.8.2 Side-Positioning Mechanism.............................................................. MD-56
5.8.3 Filter of Erasure Lamp........................................................................ MD-56

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.4
Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.5

Troubleshooting (MT)

1. Overview of Troubleshooting...........................................MT-1 4.10 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 10.............................. MT-67
1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting ........................................................... MT-2 4.11 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 11 .............................. MT-68
1.2 Analysis and Check Flow Marks .............................................. MT-3 4.12 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 12.............................. MT-69
1.3 How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log" ................... MT-4 4.13 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 13.............................. MT-70
1.4 Troubleshooting from Error Log................................................ MT-5 4.14 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 14.............................. MT-71
1.4.1 Checking the Error Log .........................................................................MT-5 4.15 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 15.............................. MT-72
1.4.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Trouble......................MT-6
4.16 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 16.............................. MT-73
1.4.3 Viewing the Error Code Table to Locate the Associated Analysis Flow MT-7
1.4.4 Viewing the Check Flows in Accordance with an Analysis Flow ...........MT-8 4.17 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 17.............................. MT-75
4.18 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 18.............................. MT-76
2. Error Code Table .............................................................MT-10 4.19 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 19.............................. MT-78
3. Detail Code ......................................................................MT-56 4.20 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 20.............................. MT-79

3.1 How to Understand Detail Code............................................. MT-56 4.21 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 21.............................. MT-81

3.2 Detail Codes for Scanner Errors ............................................ MT-57 4.22 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 22.............................. MT-82
4.23 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 23.............................. MT-83
4. Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism.........................MT-58 4.24 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 24.............................. MT-85
4.1 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 1................................ MT-58 4.25 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 25.............................. MT-86
4.2 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 2................................ MT-59 4.26 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 26.............................. MT-88
4.3 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 3................................ MT-60 4.27 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 27.............................. MT-89
4.4 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 4................................ MT-61 4.28 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 28.............................. MT-90
4.5 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 5................................ MT-62 4.29 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 29.............................. MT-91
4.6 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 6................................ MT-63 4.30 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 30.............................. MT-92
4.7 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 7................................ MT-64 4.31 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 31.............................. MT-93
4.8 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 8................................ MT-65 4.32 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 32.............................. MT-94
4.9 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 9................................ MT-66

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.5
Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.6

5. Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner ..............................MT-95 7. Troubleshooting the Errors that Cause the Inability
5.1 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 1..................................... MT-95
to Update the Software Version or Back Up the
Machine Shipment Control Data.................................. MT-114
5.2 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 2..................................... MT-96
7.1 Checking the IIS ....................................................................MT-114
5.3 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 3..................................... MT-97
7.2 Checking the Operating Status of the FTP Server ................MT-115
5.4 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 4..................................... MT-98
7.3 Checking the IP Address of the CL........................................MT-115
5.5 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 5..................................... MT-99
7.4 Checking "LIST OF EXISTING RU" ......................................MT-116
5.6 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 6................................... MT-100
7.5 Checking the FTP Server Address of the RU ........................MT-117
5.7 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 7................................... MT-101
5.8 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 8................................... MT-102 8. Procedures for Checking the Voltage ......................... MT-119
5.9 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 9................................... MT-103 8.1 Checking the Board Locations ..............................................MT-119
5.10 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 10................................. MT-104 8.2 Checking the Voltage on the CPU91A Board Test Pins
(TP1) .................................................................................... MT-120
5.11 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 11 ................................. MT-105
8.2.1 Check Procedures ............................................................................MT-120
5.12 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 12................................. MT-106 8.2.2 Checking the Voltage on Test Pins....................................................MT-120
5.13 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 13................................. MT-107 8.3 Checking the Voltage on the SCN17A/SCT17B Board Test Pins
5.14 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 14................................. MT-108 (CN5).................................................................................... MT-121
8.3.1 Check Procedures ............................................................................MT-121
5.15 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 15................................. MT-109
8.3.2 Checking the Voltage on Test Pins....................................................MT-121

6. Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical .......................... MT-110 8.4 Checking the Voltage on the DRV17A Board Test Pins
(TP8) .................................................................................... MT-122
6.1 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 1 ..................................MT-110 8.4.1 Check Procedures ............................................................................MT-122
6.2 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 2 .................................. MT-111 8.4.2 Checking the Voltage on Test Pins....................................................MT-122
6.3 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 3 ..................................MT-112 8.5 Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Unit (PSU17A). MT-123
6.4 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 4 ..................................MT-113 8.5.1 Check Procedures ............................................................................MT-123
8.5.2 Checking the Voltage on Test Pins....................................................MT-123

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.6
Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.7

9. Procedures for Checking the Fuses............................MT-124 10.2.2 Exiting the Monitoring Function.........................................................MT-134

9.1 Checking the Fuse Locations ............................................... MT-124 10.3 Checking via the LEDs on the SNS17B Board..................... MT-135
9.1.1 Checking the Board Locations ..........................................................MT-124 10.3.1 Procedures for Starting the LED Check ............................................MT-135
9.1.2 List of Reference Sections ................................................................MT-125 10.3.2 Procedures for Exiting the LED Check .............................................MT-135

9.2 Power Supply Unit................................................................ MT-126 10.4 Sensor Check Flow 1 ........................................................... MT-136
9.2.1 Check Flow .......................................................................................MT-126 10.4.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (1) .................................MT-137
9.2.2 Procedures for Checking the Power Supply Unit Fuse .....................MT-126 10.4.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (1)..........................MT-138

9.3 SNS17B Board ..................................................................... MT-127 10.5 Sensor Check Flow 2 ........................................................... MT-139
9.3.1 Check Flow .......................................................................................MT-127 10.5.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (2) .................................MT-140
9.3.2 Procedures for Checking the SNS17B Board Fuses ........................MT-127 10.5.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (2)..........................MT-141

9.4 DRV17A/B Board ................................................................. MT-128 10.6 Sensor Check Flow 3 ........................................................... MT-142
9.4.1 Check Flow .......................................................................................MT-128 10.6.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (3) .................................MT-143
9.4.2 Procedures for Checking the DRV17A Board Fuses ........................MT-128 10.6.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (3)..........................MT-144
9.4.3 Procedures for Checking the DRV17B Board Fuses ........................MT-129 10.7 Sensor Check Flow 4 ........................................................... MT-145
9.5 SCN17A/SCT17B Board ...................................................... MT-130 10.7.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (4) .................................MT-146
9.5.1 Check Flow .......................................................................................MT-130 10.7.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (4)..........................MT-147
9.5.2 Procedures for Checking the SCN17A/SCT17B Board Fuses .........MT-130 10.8 Sensor Check Flow 5 ........................................................... MT-148
9.6 INV17A/B Board ................................................................... MT-131 10.8.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (5) .................................MT-149
9.6.1 Check Flow .......................................................................................MT-131 10.8.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (5)..........................MT-150
9.6.2 Procedures for Checking the INV17A Board Fuses ..........................MT-131 10.9 Sensor Check Flow 6 ........................................................... MT-151
9.6.3 Procedures for Checking the INV17B Board Fuses..........................MT-132 10.9.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (6) .................................MT-152
9.7 Checking the Fuse ............................................................... MT-132 10.9.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (6)..........................MT-153

9.8 Checking the Cable .............................................................. MT-132 10.10 Sensor Check Flow 7 ........................................................... MT-154
10.10.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (7) .................................MT-155
10. Procedures for Checking the Sensors........................MT-133 10.10.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (7)..........................MT-156

10.1 Checking the Sensors .......................................................... MT-133 10.11 Sensor Check Flow 8 ........................................................... MT-157
10.11.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (8) .................................MT-158
10.2 Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function........................ MT-134 10.11.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (8)..........................MT-159
10.2.1 Starting the Monitoring Function .......................................................MT-134

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.7
Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.8

10.12 Sensor Check Flow 9 ........................................................... MT-160 11.11 Checking the MD1 Operation ............................................... MT-186
10.12.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (9) .................................MT-161 11.12 Checking the MD2 and ME1 Operation................................ MT-187
10.12.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (9)..........................MT-162
11.13 Checking the ME2 Operation ............................................... MT-188
10.13 Sensor Check Flow 10 ......................................................... MT-163
11.14 Checking the ME3 Operation ............................................... MT-189
10.13.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (10) ...............................MT-164
10.13.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (10)........................MT-165 11.15 Checking the Motor Resistance Values................................ MT-190
10.14 Sensor Check Flow 11 ......................................................... MT-166
12. Procedures for Checking the Actuators .....................MT-191
10.14.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (11) ...............................MT-167
10.14.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (11) ........................MT-168 12.1 Checking the SOLA1, SOLA2, SOLA3, and SOLA4
Operation.............................................................................. MT-192
10.15 Sensor Check Flow 12 ......................................................... MT-169
10.15.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (12) ...............................MT-170 12.2 Checking the PA1, PA2, PA3, and PA4 Operation ............... MT-193
10.15.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (12)........................MT-171 12.3 Checking the SVA1, SVA2, SVA3, and SVA4 Operation...... MT-194
10.16 Sensor Check Flow 13 ......................................................... MT-172 12.4 Checking the CLA1, CLA2, CLA3, and CLA4 Operation...... MT-195
10.16.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (13) ...............................MT-173 12.5 Checking the SOLF1 Operation ........................................... MT-196
10.16.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (13)........................MT-174
12.6 Checking the Actuator Resistance Values............................ MT-197
11. Procedures for Checking the Motors ..........................MT-175
13. Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O ..................MT-198
11.1 Checking the MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4 Operation ............ MT-176
13.1 Scanner I/O Check Flow ...................................................... MT-198
11.2 Checking the MB1 and MB2 Operation................................ MT-177
13.2 Checking Laser ON in MUTL................................................ MT-199
11.3 Checking the MB3 Operation ............................................... MT-178
13.3 Checking the Cable .............................................................. MT-200
11.4 Checking the MC1 Operation ............................................... MT-179
13.4 Checking the PMT/PMR....................................................... MT-201
11.5 Checking the MC2 Operation ............................................... MT-180
11.6 Checking the MC3 Operation ............................................... MT-181 14. Line Error between CL and RU ....................................MT-202
11.7 Checking the MC4 Operation ............................................... MT-182 14.1 Analysis Flow for Line Error between CL and RU ................ MT-202
11.8 Checking the MZ2 Operation ............................................... MT-183 14.2 Checking Connection from the CL........................................ MT-203
11.9 Checking the MZ3 Operation ............................................... MT-184 14.3 Checking Configuration Information of the CL...................... MT-204
11.10 Checking the MZ4 Operation ............................................... MT-185 14.4 Checking the IP Address of the CL....................................... MT-205

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.8
Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.9

14.5 Checking the IP Address of the Master CL........................... MT-206 17. Block Diagrams .............................................................MT-227
14.6 Checking the IP Address of the RU...................................... MT-207 17.1 BCRA1, BCRA2, LED17A .................................................... MT-227
14.7 Loopback Test ...................................................................... MT-208 17.2 BCRA3, BCRA4, BCRC1, LED17A...................................... MT-227
17.3 LCD17A, LDD12A, SYN12A, POL17A................................. MT-228
15. Troubleshooting Procedures for Image
Abnormalities ................................................................MT-210 17.4 Sensors (SA1 to SA12) ........................................................ MT-229
15.1 Vertical Streaks .................................................................... MT-210 17.5 Sensors (SA13 to SA24) ...................................................... MT-230
15.2 Horizontal Streaks ................................................................ MT-212 17.6 Sensors (SC1 to SC4, SG1 to SG2, SD1 to SD2, SE1 to
15.2.1 Analysis Flow for Horizontal Streaks ................................................MT-212
SE2, SE4 to SE5)................................................................. MT-231
15.2.2 Troubleshooting Image Abnormalities Considered to be Caused by IP........ 17.7 Sensors (SB1 to SB11) ........................................................ MT-232
MT-212
17.8 Sensors (SZ1 to SZ5) and FFM Motor (MZ1) ...................... MT-233
15.2.3 Analyzing Pale Nonuniformity at the Leading Edge or Trailing
Edge of the IP ...................................................................................MT-213 17.9 Motors (MA1 to MA4, MD1 to MD2, ME1, ME3, MZ2 to
15.2.4 Analyzing Thin, Distinct Nonuniformity..............................................MT-215 MZ3) ..................................................................................... MT-234
15.2.5 Procedures for Checking the Grip Roller (Upper) .............................MT-215 17.10 Motors (MB1 to MB3, MC1 to MC4, ME2, MZ4) .................. MT-235
15.2.6 Procedures for Checking the Grounding of the PMT/PMR ...............MT-216 17.11 Actuators (SOLA1 to SOLA4, PA1 to PA4, SVA1 to SVA4,
15.2.7 Procedures for Checking the FFM Motor ..........................................MT-216 CLA1 to CLA4) ..................................................................... MT-236
15.3 Other Abnormal Images ....................................................... MT-218 17.12 Actuator (SOLE1) ................................................................. MT-237
17.13 Erasure Lamps and Fan 1.................................................... MT-238
16. Removing the IP ............................................................MT-220
17.14 Erasure Lamps and Fan 2.................................................... MT-239
16.1 Removing the IP from the Feed/Load Conveyor Unit........... MT-220
16.1.1 When the IP is Jammed in the Cassette Set Unit .............................MT-220
18. Board Test in MUTL ......................................................MT-240
16.1.2 When the IP is Jammed in the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit .......MT-221
18.1 Analysis Flow ....................................................................... MT-240
16.2 Removing the IP from the Erasure Conveyor Unit ............... MT-223
16.2.1 When the IP is Jammed in the Subscanning Unit or Post- 18.2 Board Test ............................................................................ MT-241
Reading Conveyor Unit .....................................................................MT-223 18.2.1 Procedures........................................................................................MT-241
16.2.2 When the IP is Jammed in the Erasure Conveyor Unit.....................MT-225 18.2.2 Display ..............................................................................................MT-241

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.9
Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.10

19. Gathering Various Data When Trouble Occurs ..........MT-242

20. Troubleshooting Failures where Error Code is

Undetectable and Processing Freezes .......................MT-243
20.1 Analysis Flow for Processing Freeze ................................... MT-243
20.2 Checking the LEDs on the IMG Board and CPU Board ....... MT-244
20.3 Checking the DIP SW Setting on the CPU91A Board .......... MT-245
20.3.1 Checking the DIP SW setting for the CR-IR362................................MT-245
20.3.2 Checking the DIP SW setting for the CR-IR363................................MT-245
20.4 Procedures for Restoring the RU Application....................... MT-246

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.10
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.11

Checks, Replacement and

Adjustment of Parts (MC)
1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for Each Unit ............... MC-1 5. Cassette Set Unit............................................................ MC-24
Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment ....................................... MC-1 5.1 Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit...........................................MC-24
2. Table of Contents ............................................................. MC-2 5.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit ............................................MC-27
5.3 Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf).....................................MC-29
3. Covers ............................................................................... MC-7 5.4 Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)........MC-30
3.1 Covers ......................................................................................MC-7 5.5 Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf) .................................MC-31
3.2 Filters........................................................................................MC-8 5.6 Arms (White) ..........................................................................MC-31
3.3 Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf) ............................................MC-9 5.7 Shutters ..................................................................................MC-32
5.8 LEDs (for the First, Second, and Third Shelves) ....................MC-33
4. Housing Unit................................................................... MC-10
5.9 LED (for the Fourth Shelf) ......................................................MC-34
4.1 Power Supply Unit..................................................................MC-10
5.10 Antistatic Members.................................................................MC-34
4.2 Fan (Power Supply Unit) ........................................................MC-12
5.11 Suction Cup Driving Motors (MA1, 2, 3, 4).............................MC-35
4.3 Circuit Breaker........................................................................MC-12
5.12 Barcode Reader Assembly.....................................................MC-36
4.4 Socket ....................................................................................MC-14
5.13 Exposure Markers Receiving Boxes ......................................MC-37
4.5 Fans (FANG1 and FANG2) ....................................................MC-15
5.14 Hold Release Arm ..................................................................MC-37
4.6 Fans (FANG3, FANG4, and FANG5)......................................MC-16
5.15 Hoses .....................................................................................MC-38
4.7 Barcode Reader (BCRC1)......................................................MC-17
5.16 Cassette Ejection Clutches (CLA1, 2, 3, 4) ............................MC-39
4.8 Touch Panel Assembly ...........................................................MC-17
5.17 Cassette Ejection Sensors (SA1, 7, 13, 19) ...........................MC-40
4.9 Antistatic Member (Front).......................................................MC-21
5.18 Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21) ................................MC-40
4.10 Antistatic Members (Rear)......................................................MC-21
5.19 Suction Cup HP Sensors (SA4, 10, 16, 22) ...........................MC-41
4.11 Side-Positioning Entrance IP Sensor (SG1)...........................MC-22
5.20 Suction Sensors (SA5, 11, 17, 23) .........................................MC-42
4.12 "11x14IP" Determination Sensor (SG2)..................................MC-22
5.21 Suction Cup Assemblies.........................................................MC-43
4.13 Cassette Hold Release Pin ....................................................MC-23
5.22 Suction Cups ..........................................................................MC-44
5.23 Roller Assemblies...................................................................MC-45

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.11
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.12

5.24 Cassette Ejection Rollers .......................................................MC-46 6.4 Convergence Path Changeover Sensor (SB10) ....................MC-70
5.25 Cassette Set Base Assemblies ..............................................MC-48 6.5 Path Changeover HP Sensor (SB11) .....................................MC-70
5.26 Stoppers .................................................................................MC-50 6.6 IP Jam Handling Assembly.....................................................MC-71
5.27 Inch/Metric Sensors (SA6, 12, 18, 24) ...................................MC-50 6.7 Brush Roller Assembly ...........................................................MC-71
5.28 Guide Plates...........................................................................MC-51 6.8 Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side) ...................MC-73
5.29 Cassette IN Sensors (SA2, 8, 14, 20) ....................................MC-52 6.9 Path Changeover Mechanism ................................................MC-75
5.30 Stoppers .................................................................................MC-53 6.10 Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side) ...................MC-76
5.31 Suction Pump Bracket Assemblies.........................................MC-54 6.11 Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side).....MC-77
5.32 IP Removal Arms....................................................................MC-56 6.12 Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-Reference Side).....MC-77
5.33 Bearings (IP Removal Link Shafts) ........................................MC-58 6.13 Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears) .MC-78
5.34 Solenoid Assemblies (SOLA1, 2, 3, 4) ...................................MC-60 6.14 Pre-BCR IP Sensor (SB5) ......................................................MC-79
5.35 IP Leak Valves (SVA1, 2, 3, 4) ...............................................MC-61 6.15 Pre-Convergence IP Sensor (SB6) ........................................MC-79
5.36 IP Suction Pumps (PA1, 2, 3, 4) .............................................MC-62 6.16 IP Transport Motor (MB1) .......................................................MC-80
5.37 Cassette Hold Pins.................................................................MC-63 6.17 Convergence Unit IP Transport Motor (MB2) .........................MC-81
5.38 Movable Guide Assemblies ....................................................MC-63 6.18 Convergence Path Changeover Guide Driving Motor (MB3) .MC-82
5.39 Movable Guides .....................................................................MC-64 6.19 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies (for the First, Second,
and Third Shelves) .................................................................MC-83
5.40 Tapes......................................................................................MC-65
6.20 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf) .......MC-83
5.41 Guides ....................................................................................MC-66
6.21 Antistatic Members.................................................................MC-84
5.42 IP Stoppers.............................................................................MC-66
6.22 Shock-Absorbing Rollers (Convergence Unit)........................MC-84
6. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit.............................................. MC-67 6.23 Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H) ...........................MC-85
6.1 Feed/Load Conveyor Unit ......................................................MC-67 6.24 Arm and Bearing (for the First Shelf)......................................MC-86
6.2 IP Feed/Load Sensors (SB1, 2, 3, 4) .....................................MC-69 6.25 Arms and Bearings (for the Second, Third, and Fourth
6.3 Path Changeover Shelf Sensors (SB7, 8, 9)..........................MC-69 Shelves) .................................................................................MC-87

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.12
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.13

6.26 Path Changeover Guides (for the First, Second, Third, and 7.13 Latch Assembly (Latch Driver) ............................................. MC-115
Fourth Shelves) ......................................................................MC-88
7.14 Latch Assembly (Reference Side) ........................................ MC-116
6.27 Guides (for the First, Second, Third, and Fourth Shelves).....MC-89
7.15 Tensioner.............................................................................. MC-117
6.28 Guide (Convergence Unit Lower Side)...................................MC-90
7.16 Planetary Gear Assembly..................................................... MC-117
6.29 Rubber Rollers (I, J, K, and L)................................................MC-91
7.17 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) ................................. MC-118
6.30 Rubber Rollers (M and N) ......................................................MC-92
7.18 Antistatic Members............................................................... MC-118
6.31 Rubber Rollers (O and P).......................................................MC-94
7.19 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side) ....................................... MC-119
6.32 Rubber Rollers (Q and R).......................................................MC-95
7.20 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)........................MC-120
6.33 Convergence Path Changeover Guide ..................................MC-97
7.21 Grip Shaft .............................................................................MC-121
6.34 Rubber Rollers (S and T) .......................................................MC-98
7.22 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly .......................................MC-121
6.35 Guide (Convergence Unit Upper Side)...................................MC-99
7.23 Rubber Roller (A) .................................................................MC-122
7. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit ................................. MC-101 7.24 Rubber Roller (B) .................................................................MC-123
7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit............................................MC-101 7.25 Rubber Roller (C and D).......................................................MC-124
7.2 Side-Positioning Mechanism HP Sensor (SC1) ...................MC-105 7.26 Rubber Roller (E) .................................................................MC-126
7.3 Spur Gears (Reference Side)...............................................MC-105 7.27 Rubber Roller (F)..................................................................MC-128
7.4 Grip Release HP Sensor (SC2)............................................MC-106 7.28 Guide....................................................................................MC-130
7.5 Side-Positioning IP Sensor (SC3) ........................................MC-107 7.29 Cleaning Guide Assembly ....................................................MC-131
7.6 Cleaning Guide HP Sensor (SC4) ........................................MC-107 7.30 Cleaning Guide.....................................................................MC-133
7.7 Timing Belt............................................................................MC-108 8. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit ...................................... MC-135
7.8 Side-Positioning Motor (MC1) ..............................................MC-109
8.1 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit................................................MC-135
7.9 Grip Release Motor (MC2) ................................................... MC-110
8.2 Tensioner Assembly .............................................................MC-137
7.10 IP Transport Motor (MC3)..................................................... MC-111
8.3 Timing Belt............................................................................MC-137
7.11 Cleaning Guide Driving Motor (MC4) ................................... MC-112
8.4 Spur Gears (Opposite Reference Side) ...............................MC-138
7.12 Latch Drive Unit (Overall) ..................................................... MC-113

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.13
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.14

8.5 Grip Release HP Sensor (SD1)............................................MC-139 9.6 Fan (FANE2) ........................................................................MC-163

8.6 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side) .......................................MC-139 9.7 Fan (FANE3) ........................................................................MC-164
8.7 Planetary Gear Assembly.....................................................MC-140 9.8 Filter .....................................................................................MC-165
8.8 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)........................MC-141 9.9 Lamps...................................................................................MC-166
8.9 Grip Release Motor (MD1) ...................................................MC-141 9.10 Reflection Plate Assembly....................................................MC-168
8.10 Post-Reading Conveyance IP Sensor (SD2) .......................MC-142 9.11 Lamp Temperature Sensor (THE1) ......................................MC-169
8.11 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly .......................................MC-142 9.12 Safety Thermostat Sensor (TSWE1) ....................................MC-170
8.12 Spur Gears (Reference Side)...............................................MC-143 9.13 Sockets.................................................................................MC-171
8.13 IP Transport Motor (MD2).....................................................MC-143 9.14 INV17A Board.......................................................................MC-172
8.14 Variable Guide Assembly .....................................................MC-144 9.15 INV17B Board ......................................................................MC-173
8.15 Rubber Rollers (A and B) .....................................................MC-146 9.16 IP Switchback Assembly ......................................................MC-174
8.16 Rubber Rollers (C and D).....................................................MC-148 9.17 Post-Reading Conveyance Standby IP Sensor (SE1) .........MC-175
8.17 Rubber Rollers (E and F) .................................................................. 9.18 Switchback Standby IP Sensor (SE2) ..................................MC-175
.............................................................................................MC-150
9.19 Erasure Side-Positioning Standby HP Sensor (SE4) ...........MC-176
8.18 Rubber Rollers (G and H).....................................................MC-151
9.20 Brackets ...............................................................................MC-177
8.19 Guide (A) ..............................................................................MC-152
9.21 Grip Release HP Sensor (SE5) ............................................MC-178
8.20 Guide (B) ..............................................................................MC-153
9.22 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly .......................................MC-178
8.21 Grip Shaft .............................................................................MC-154
9.23 Branch Path Guide Driving Solenoid (SOLE1).....................MC-179
9. Erasure Conveyor Unit ................................................ MC-155 9.24 Reflection Plate ....................................................................MC-180
9.1 Erasure Conveyor Unit .........................................................MC-155 9.25 Timing Belt (A)......................................................................MC-181
9.2 Lamp Assembly ....................................................................MC-158 9.26 Timing Belt (B)......................................................................MC-182
9.3 Duct ......................................................................................MC-160 9.27 Timing Belt (C)......................................................................MC-183
9.4 Duct Assembly......................................................................MC-161 9.28 Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gears)MC-184
9.5 Fan (FANE1) ........................................................................MC-162 9.29 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side) .......................................MC-185

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.14
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.15

9.30 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)........................MC-186 11.3 PMT17A Board .....................................................................MC-220
9.31 Tensioner Assembly .............................................................MC-187 11.4 PMR17B Board ....................................................................MC-222
9.32 Guide (A) ..............................................................................MC-187
12. Subscanning Unit......................................................... MC-224
9.33 Guide (B) ..............................................................................MC-188
12.1 Subscanning Unit .................................................................MC-224
9.34 Guide (C)..............................................................................MC-189
12.2 Transparent Cover................................................................MC-228
9.35 Latch Drive Unit....................................................................MC-190
12.3 Antistatic Member.................................................................MC-228
9.36 Latch Assembly (Reference Side) ........................................MC-192
12.4 SUS Belt...............................................................................MC-229
9.37 IP Transport Motor (ME1) .....................................................MC-192
12.5 Kapton® Belt ........................................................................MC-230
9.38 Side-Positioning Motor (ME2) ..............................................MC-193
12.6 Tensioner (Right-Hand Side) ................................................MC-231
9.39 Grip Release Motor (ME3) ...................................................MC-193
12.7 Tensioner (Left-Hand Side) ..................................................MC-231
9.40 Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, and F) ..................................MC-194
12.8 Flywheel ...............................................................................MC-232
9.41 Rubber Rollers (G and H).....................................................MC-196
12.9 FFM Motor (MZ1) .................................................................MC-233
9.42 Rubber Rollers (I and J) .......................................................MC-197
12.10 Cleaning Brush Assembly ....................................................MC-236
9.43 Guide (D)..............................................................................MC-199
12.11 Driving-Side Grip Release HP Sensor (SZ2) and Driven-
9.44 Guide (E) ..............................................................................MC-201 Side Grip Release HP Sensor (SZ3) ....................................MC-237
9.45 Grip Shaft .............................................................................MC-202 12.12 IP Stopper HP Sensor (SZ5) ................................................MC-238
9.46 Guide (F) ..............................................................................MC-203 12.13 Grip Drive Motor (MZ2) ........................................................MC-239
9.47 Branch Path Changeover Guide ..........................................MC-204 12.14 Dust Removal Motor (MZ3) ..................................................MC-240

10. Scanning Optics Unit................................................... MC-207 12.15 IP Stopper Drive Motor (MZ4) ..............................................MC-242
12.16 Driving Shaft Grip Release Arm ...........................................MC-243
10.1 Scanning Optics Unit............................................................MC-207
12.17 Driven Shaft Grip Release Arm and IP Stopper ...................MC-245
11. Light-Collecting Unit.................................................... MC-210 12.18 Spur Gears ...........................................................................MC-247
11.1 Upper Light-Collecting Guide ...............................................MC-210 12.19 Dust Removal HP Sensor (SZ4) ..........................................MC-248
11.2 Lower Light-Collecting Guide ...............................................MC-215 12.20 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) ..........................................MC-249

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.15
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.16

12.21 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) .........................................MC-250 13.9 Battery ..................................................................................MC-284
12.22 Antistatic Member.................................................................MC-251
14. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations ................. MC-286
12.23 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) ............................................MC-252
14.1 Fuse of Power Supply Unit...................................................MC-287
12.24 Light-Collecting Mirror ..........................................................MC-253
14.2 DRV17A Board Fuses ..........................................................MC-288
12.25 Light-Collecting Shaft ...........................................................MC-254
14.3 DRV17B Board Fuses ..........................................................MC-289
12.26 Glass Guide..........................................................................MC-255
14.4 SNS17B Board Fuses ..........................................................MC-290
12.27 Center Guide ........................................................................MC-257
14.5 SCT17B Board Fuses ..........................................................MC-291
12.28 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) and Driven Shaft Grip
Roller (Lower).......................................................................MC-258 14.6 INV17A Board Fuses............................................................MC-292
12.29 Grounding Wires ..................................................................MC-259 14.7 INV17B Board Fuses............................................................MC-292
12.30 Shock-Absorbing Rubbers ...................................................MC-260
15 Updating Software Versions ....................................... MC-293
12.31 Subscanning Unit (Top) ........................................................MC-261
12.32 Bracket Assembly.................................................................MC-262 16. Format Adjustment ...................................................... MC-299
12.33 Lower Light-Collecting Guide Brace Assembly ....................MC-263 16.1 Main Scan Format Adjustment .............................................MC-299
16.1.1 Main Scan Position (Pixel) Adjustment ............................................ MC-299
13. PC Boards..................................................................... MC-264 16.1.2 Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment .............................................. MC-300
13.1 Board Bracket Assembly ......................................................MC-264 16.1.3 Optic Setting..................................................................................... MC-302

13.2 CPU91A Board .....................................................................MC-266 16.2 IP Leading-Edge Adjustment (Sub-scanning) ......................MC-303

13.3 IMG17A/B Board ..................................................................MC-268 17. Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST .......... MC-305
13.4 Scanner Board .....................................................................MC-276 17.1 Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST......................MC-305
13.4.1 SCT17B Board ................................................................................. MC-276
17.2 Shading Speed Correction ...................................................MC-306
13.5 DRV17A Board .....................................................................MC-278
17.3 Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST....................................MC-308
13.6 DRV17B Board .....................................................................MC-279
13.7 SNS17B Board .....................................................................MC-281
13.8 SNS17A Board .....................................................................MC-282

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.16
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.17

18. Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR ......... MC-310

18.1 Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR ...................................MC-310
18.2 Shading Correction for IP Type HR ......................................MC-312
18.3 Special Sensitivity Adjustment for IP Type HR .....................MC-314
18.3.1 When Sensitivity Adjustment is Performed on the IP Type HR with the
Tungsten X-Ray Tube ...................................................................... MC-314
18.3.2 When Sensitivity Adjustment is Performed on the IP Type HR with the
Molybdenum X-ray Tube .................................................................. MC-315

19. Data Backup/Image Checks ........................................ MC-317

19.1 Backing Up the Scanner Data ..............................................MC-317
19.2 Checking the Image .............................................................MC-318

20. Image/Conveyance Checks......................................... MC-320

20.1 Check Before Procedures ....................................................MC-320
20.2 Image/Conveyance Checks .................................................MC-321

21. List of Jigs and Tools .................................................. MC-323

21.1 Jigs and Tools.......................................................................MC-323

22. Installing the RU Software........................................... MC-324

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.17
Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.18

Maintenance Utility (MU)

1. Overview of RU Service Utility........................................ MU-1 4. Functions of RU PC-TOOL ............................................ MU-19

1.1 Tree of RU Service Utility .........................................................MU-1 4.1 Tree of RU PC-TOOL .............................................................MU-19
4.2 Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL .........................................MU-20
2. User Utility ........................................................................ MU-2 4.2.1 Starting RU PC-TOOL........................................................................ MU-20
2.1 Overview of User Utility ............................................................MU-2 4.2.2 Exiting RU PC-TOOL ......................................................................... MU-20
2.2 Starting and Exiting the User Utility..........................................MU-3 4.3 Details of RU PC-TOOL .........................................................MU-21
2.2.1 Starting the User Utility ........................................................................ MU-3 4.3.1 RU NAME/RU IP ADDR ..................................................................... MU-21
2.2.2 Exiting the User Utility .......................................................................... MU-3 4.3.2 LIST OF EXISTING RU...................................................................... MU-21
2.3 Master CL Setting.....................................................................MU-3 4.3.3 NEW................................................................................................... MU-22
4.3.4 DELETE ............................................................................................. MU-22
3. Machine Maintenance ...................................................... MU-4 4.3.5 MUTL ................................................................................................. MU-22
4.3.6 PING .................................................................................................. MU-23
3.1 Tree of Machine Maintenance ..................................................MU-4
4.3.7 MON................................................................................................... MU-24
3.2 Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance ........................MU-5 4.3.8 FTP .................................................................................................... MU-26
3.2.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance during Initialization........................ MU-5 4.3.9 INSTALL............................................................................................. MU-27
3.2.2 Starting the Machine Maintenance in READY State ............................ MU-6 4.3.10 VERSION UP ..................................................................................... MU-28
3.2.3 Exiting the Machine Maintenance ........................................................ MU-6 4.3.11 EDIT HISTORY .................................................................................. MU-29
3.2.4 Starting the Machine Maintenance when Error Occurred .................... MU-7 4.3.12 EDIT CONFIGURATION .................................................................... MU-31
3.3 Details of Machine Maintenance ..............................................MU-8 4.3.13 EDIT CL NAME .................................................................................. MU-32
3.3.1 RU IP Address...................................................................................... MU-8 4.3.14 BACKUP ............................................................................................ MU-34
3.3.2 FTP Server........................................................................................... MU-9 4.3.15 RESTORE.......................................................................................... MU-35
3.3.3 Default Gateway ................................................................................ MU-10 4.3.16 I/O TRACE EXPERT.......................................................................... MU-37
3.3.4 Subnet Mask ...................................................................................... MU-11 4.3.17 ERROR DB ........................................................................................ MU-38
3.3.5 Secure Host ....................................................................................... MU-12 4.3.18 UNINSTALL: ALL RUs........................................................................ MU-41
3.3.6 Secure Net ......................................................................................... MU-13 4.3.19 VERSION UP: ALL RUs..................................................................... MU-43
3.3.7 Network Check................................................................................... MU-14 4.4 Configuration ..........................................................................MU-45
3.3.8 Loop back Test ................................................................................... MU-15 4.4.1 FTP SERV.......................................................................................... MU-45
3.3.9 Adjust Touch Point ............................................................................. MU-16 4.4.2 CDPath............................................................................................... MU-45
3.3.10 Touch Point Check ............................................................................. MU-17
3.3.11 HV ON/OFF........................................................................................ MU-18

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.18
Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.19

5. MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions......................... MU-48 [4-2] Virtual Image Test .............................................................................. MU-59
[4-2-1] IMG Board Pattern Output ................................................................. MU-59
5.1 Tree of MUTL .........................................................................MU-48 [4-2-2] IMG Board Frame Memory Re-Output............................................... MU-62
5.2 Starting and Exiting the MUTL................................................MU-52 [4-2-3] LED Virtual Read ............................................................................... MU-64
5.2.1 Starting the MUTL .............................................................................. MU-52 [4-2-4] PMT Virtual Read............................................................................... MU-66
5.2.2 Exiting the MUTL................................................................................ MU-52 [4-2-5] SCN/SCT Board Virtual Read ............................................................ MU-68
5.3 Details of MUTL......................................................................MU-53 [4-2-6] Virtual Image Check Cancel............................................................... MU-69
[1] Conveyance Check ............................................................................ MU-53 [5] Scanner Check .................................................................................. MU-70
[1-1] Conveyance Setting ........................................................................... MU-53 [5-1] Diagnostic .......................................................................................... MU-70
[1-2] Processing Mode Setting ................................................................... MU-53 [5-2] Polygon Motor .................................................................................... MU-70
[1-3] Number of Conveyance Setting ......................................................... MU-54 [5-3] Laser .................................................................................................. MU-71
[2] Board Check ...................................................................................... MU-55 [5-4] HV Diagnostic .................................................................................... MU-72
[2-1] All Board............................................................................................. MU-56 [5-5] Format Adjustment ............................................................................. MU-72
[2-2] CPU Board ......................................................................................... MU-56 [5-5-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ) ............................................................... MU-73
[2-3] IMG Board.......................................................................................... MU-56 [5-5-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel) ................................................................. MU-73
[2-4] SCN/SCT Board................................................................................. MU-56 [5-5-3] Default Setting (FREQ) ...................................................................... MU-73
[2-5] SNS/DRV Board................................................................................. MU-57 [5-5-4] Default Setting (Pixel) ........................................................................ MU-73
[2-6] INV Board........................................................................................... MU-57 [5-5-5] Optic Setting (FREQ) ......................................................................... MU-74
[2-7] CPU Board Setting Display ................................................................ MU-57 [5-5-6] Optic Setting (Pixel) ........................................................................... MU-74
[2-8] IP Sensor Check ................................................................................ MU-57 [5-5-7] IP Leading-Edge Adjustment (Sub-scanning) .................................... MU-74
[3] Software Check.................................................................................. MU-58 [5-6] Correction........................................................................................... MU-74
[3-1] Backup Memory Clear (CPU Board) .................................................. MU-58 [5-6-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction ........................................................... MU-75
[3-2] Ver. Display (FLASH) ......................................................................... MU-58 [5-6-2] Shading Speed Correction ................................................................. MU-75
[3-3] Ver. Display (FTP SERV) ................................................................... MU-58 [5-6-3] Sensitivity Correction ......................................................................... MU-76
[3-4] MAC Address Display ........................................................................ MU-58 [5-6-4] Special Sensitivity Adjustment ........................................................... MU-76
[3-5] VERSION UP ..................................................................................... MU-58 [5-6-5] Sensitivity S-Value Correction............................................................ MU-77
[3-5-1] Main CPU IPL Ver. Up........................................................................ MU-58 [5-6-6] Trouble Shooting................................................................................ MU-78
[3-5-2] Sub CPU IPL Ver. Up ......................................................................... MU-58 [5-6-7] HV ON/OFF........................................................................................ MU-78
[3-5-3] Sub CPU APPL Ver. Up ..................................................................... MU-58 [6] Mechanical 1 Check........................................................................... MU-79
[4] Virtual Image Check........................................................................... MU-59 [6-1] IP Removal Unit ................................................................................. MU-79
[4-1] CORRECTION ST/HR ....................................................................... MU-59 [6-1-1] Suction Cup Arm HP .......................................................................... MU-79

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.19
Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.20

[6-1-2] IP Removal (F/L) ................................................................................ MU-80 [6-5-5] Stopper Diagnostic........................................................................... MU-103

[6-1-3] IP Removal Step Operation ............................................................... MU-81 [6-5-6] Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic (MZ2) .............................................. MU-104
[6-1-4] Clutch ................................................................................................. MU-82 [6-6] Sub Scanning 2................................................................................ MU-105
[6-1-5] Pump.................................................................................................. MU-83 [6-6-1] Dust Removal HP............................................................................. MU-105
[6-1-6] Valve .................................................................................................. MU-84 [6-6-2] Dust Removal Operation.................................................................. MU-106
[6-1-7] Solenoid ............................................................................................. MU-85 [6-6-3] Dust Removal Step Operation ......................................................... MU-106
[6-1-8] Electrical............................................................................................. MU-85 [6-6-4] Conveyance Motor Direction Selection ............................................ MU-106
[6-2] Feed/Load Unit .................................................................................. MU-86 [6-6-5] Conveyance Motor Speed Selection................................................ MU-106
[6-2-1] Feed Path Change Guide HP (MB3).................................................. MU-86 [6-6-6] Conveyance Motor Stop/Drive ......................................................... MU-107
[6-2-2] Feed Path Change Guide .................................................................. MU-87 [6-7] All Sensor LED ON .......................................................................... MU-108
[6-2-3] Feed Path Change Diagnostic ........................................................... MU-88 [7] Mechanical 2 Check......................................................................... MU-109
[6-2-4] Feed Conveyance (MB1/MB2/MC3) .................................................. MU-89 [7-1] Post-Reading Conveyor ................................................................... MU-109
[6-2-5] Post-Erasure Conveyance (ME1/MB1/MB2) ..................................... MU-90 [7-1-1] Grip Release HP (MD1) ................................................................... MU-109
[6-2-6] Join Path Change Guide .................................................................... MU-91 [7-1-2] Grip Position Movement (MD2)........................................................ MU-110
[6-3] Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.............................................................. MU-92 [7-1-3] Post-Conveyance Grip Diagnostic ....................................................MU-111
[6-3-1] Side-Positioning HP (MC1) ................................................................ MU-92 [7-1-4] Post-Conveyance (MD2/ME1) ......................................................... MU-112
[6-3-2] Side-Positioning Step (MC1/MC2) ..................................................... MU-93 [7-2] Erasure Conveyor 1 ......................................................................... MU-113
[6-3-3] Side-Positioning Grip Movement (MC2) ............................................ MU-93 [7-2-3] Erasure Side-positioning HP (ME2) ................................................. MU-113
[6-3-4] Side-Positioning Grip HP (MC2) ........................................................ MU-94 [7-2-4] Erasure Side-positioning (ME2/ME3)............................................... MU-114
[6-3-5] Side-Positioning Grip Diagnostic (MC2) ............................................ MU-95 [7-2-5] Erasure Side-positioning Step (ME2/ME3) ...................................... MU-115
[6-3-6] Side-Positioning (MC1/MC2).............................................................. MU-96 [7-2-6] Erasure Grip HP (ME3) .................................................................... MU-115
[6-4] Side-Positioning Conveyor 2.............................................................. MU-97 [7-2-7] Erasure Grip Diagnostic (ME3) ....................................................... MU-116
[6-4-1] Cleaning Guide HP (MC4) ................................................................. MU-97 [7-2-8] Erasure Grip Movement (ME3) ........................................................ MU-117
[7-3] Erasure Conveyor 2 ......................................................................... MU-118
[6-4-2] Cleaning Guide Position Movement (MC4)........................................ MU-98
[7-3-1] Path Change Guide (SOLF1)........................................................... MU-118
[6-4-3] Cleaning Guide Diagnostic ................................................................ MU-99
[7-3-2] FANE2 (INV) .................................................................................... MU-119
[6-4-4] Side-Positioning (BCRC1) ................................................................. MU-99
[7-3-3] FANE3 (LAMP)................................................................................. MU-119
[6-5] Sub Scanning 1................................................................................ MU-100
[7-3-4] Erasure Conveyor (ME1) ................................................................. MU-120
[6-5-1] Sub-Scanning Grip HP (MZ2) .......................................................... MU-100
[7-3-5] LAMP (LAMP1-5) ............................................................................. MU-120
[6-5-2] Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic Step Operation (MZ2) ..................... MU-101
[7-3-6] Erasure Unit Thermal Sensor Display.............................................. MU-120
[6-5-3] Stopper HP....................................................................................... MU-101
[7-4] Control Unit ...................................................................................... MU-121
[6-5-4] Stopper Movement........................................................................... MU-102
[7-4-1] FAN (G1 to G5) ................................................................................ MU-121

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.20
Contents Service Parts List (SP) 0.21

Service Parts List (SP)

How to Use Service Parts List ...............................................................SP-1 05A SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1.......................................SP-21
INDEX .................................................................................................SP-2 05B SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2.......................................SP-22
01A COVER 1...................................................................................SP-3 05C SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3.......................................SP-23
01B COVER 2...................................................................................SP-4 05D SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4.......................................SP-24
02A FRAME 1...................................................................................SP-5 05E SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5.......................................SP-25
02B FRAME 2...................................................................................SP-6 06A AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 1 ........................................SP-26
02C FRAME 3...................................................................................SP-7 06B AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 2 ........................................SP-27
03A CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 ...........................................................SP-8 06C AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 3 ........................................SP-28
03B CASSETTE SET UNIT 2 ...........................................................SP-9 06D AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 4 ........................................SP-29
03C CASSETTE SET UNIT 3 .........................................................SP-10 06E AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 5 ........................................SP-30
03D CASSETTE SET UNIT 4 .........................................................SP-11 07A ERASURE CONVEYOR 1 ......................................................SP-31
03E CASSETTE SET UNIT 5 .........................................................SP-12 07B ERASURE CONVEYOR 2 ......................................................SP-32
04A FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 1 ...................................................SP-13 07C ERASURE CONVEYOR 3 ......................................................SP-33
04B FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 2 ...................................................SP-14 07D ERASURE CONVEYOR 4 ......................................................SP-34
04C FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 3 ...................................................SP-15 07E ERASURE CONVEYOR 5 ......................................................SP-35
04D FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 4 ...................................................SP-16 07F ERASURE CONVEYOR 6 ......................................................SP-36
04E FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 5 ...................................................SP-17 07G ERASURE CONVEYOR 7 ......................................................SP-37
04F FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 6 ...................................................SP-18 07H ERASURE CONVEYOR 8 ......................................................SP-38
04G FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 7 ...................................................SP-19 07I ERASURE CONVEYOR 9 ......................................................SP-39
04H FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 8 ...................................................SP-20 08A SCANNING OPTICS UNIT......................................................SP-40
09A LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT 1 .................................................SP-41
09B LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT 2 .................................................SP-42

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.21
Contents Service Parts List (SP) 0.22

10A SUB SCANNING UNIT 1.........................................................SP-43

10B SUB SCANNING UNIT 2.........................................................SP-44
10C SUB SCANNING UNIT 3.........................................................SP-45
10D SUB SCANNING UNIT 4.........................................................SP-46
10E SUB SCANNING UNIT 5.........................................................SP-47
10F SUB SCANNING UNIT 6.........................................................SP-48
10G SUB SCANNING UNIT 7.........................................................SP-49
10H SUB SCANNING UNIT 8.........................................................SP-50
11A CONTROLLER........................................................................SP-51
12 CABLE.....................................................................................SP-52
13 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................SP-53
14 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE ...............................................SP-71
15 TABLE OF SCREWS / WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS .SP-75
16 LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS........................................SP-75

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.22
Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.23

Preventive Maintenance (PM)

1. Preventive Maintenance Program .................................. PM-1 6. Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch .......................... PM-15
1.1 How To Use the Preventive Maintenance Volume ................... PM-1
7. Cassette Set Unit............................................................ PM-16
1.2 Notations of Intervals................................................................ PM-1
7.1 Removing the Feed/Load Conveyor Unit ............................... PM-16
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List ..................................... PM-2
7.2 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers and Suction Cups..................... PM-17
1.4 Preventive Maintenance Flow .................................................. PM-5
8. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit.............................................. PM-19
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures ............................... PM-6
8.1 Cleaning the Shock Absorbing Rollers, Guides, and Rubber
2.1 Checking the Error Log ............................................................ PM-6 Rollers .................................................................................... PM-19
2.2 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time .............................. PM-8 8.2 Cleaning the Guides and Rubber Rollers............................... PM-22

3. Checking the Image/Conveyance ................................... PM-9 8.3 Cleaning the Guides and Rubber Rollers............................... PM-23
8.4 Brush Roller............................................................................ PM-27
3.1 Check Before Procedures ........................................................ PM-9
8.4.1 Cleaning the Brush Roller .................................................................. PM-27
3.2 Image/Conveyance Checks ................................................... PM-10 8.4.2 Cleaning/Replacing the Brush Roller ................................................. PM-28
Film output conditions: "TEST", "Image Format-1", 8.5 Cleaning the Antistatic Members............................................ PM-29
"SINGLE"................................................................................ PM-10
8.6 Reinstalling the Feed/Load Conveyor Unit............................. PM-29
3.3 Checking the Output Characters ............................................ PM-11
9. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit ................................... PM-31
4. Pulling Out the Machine ................................................ PM-12
9.1 Removing the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit ...................... PM-31
4.1 Unlocking the Retainers ......................................................... PM-12
9.2 Cleaning the Guide................................................................. PM-33
4.2 Disconnecting the Cables....................................................... PM-12
9.3 Cleaning Guide Assembly ...................................................... PM-33
5. Removing the Covers .................................................... PM-13 9.3.1 Cleaning the Cleaning Guide Assembly............................................. PM-33
9.3.2 Cleaning the Cleaning Guide Assembly............................................. PM-34
5.1 Removing the Covers (1 Year Intervals)................................. PM-13
9.3.3 Replacing the Cleaning Guide ........................................................... PM-35
5.2 Removing the Covers (2 Year Intervals)................................. PM-14 9.4 Cleaning the Shock-Absorbing Roller, Guide, and Rubber
5.3 Removing the Covers (3 Year Intervals)................................. PM-15 Roller ...................................................................................... PM-38
9.5 Reinstalling the Cleaning Guide Assembly and Guide ........... PM-39

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.23
Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.24

10. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit ........................................ PM-40 13.3 Cleaning the IP Switchback Assembly ................................... PM-72
10.1 Removing the Retaining Member........................................... PM-40 13.4 Cleaning the Reflection Plate Guide and Rubber Rollers ...... PM-73
10.2 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Unit........................... PM-41 13.5 Cleaning the Shock-Absorbing Roller and Guide................... PM-74
10.3 Cleaning the Guides, Shock Absorbing Rollers, and Rubber 13.6 Removing the Latch Drive Unit............................................... PM-75
Rollers .................................................................................... PM-44 13.7 Cleaning the Rubber Roller and Guide .................................. PM-78
10.4 Cleaning the Movable Guide Assembly.................................. PM-45 13.8 Reinstalling the Guides .......................................................... PM-81

11. Subscanning Unit........................................................... PM-47 13.9 Reinstalling the Latch Drive Unit ............................................ PM-83
13.10 Cleaning the Antistatic Members............................................ PM-86
11.1 Removing the Upper Light-Collecting Guide .......................... PM-47
13.11 Reinstalling the Erasure Conveyor Unit ................................. PM-87
11.2 Cleaning the Antistatic Brush Assembly ................................. PM-49
11.3 Removing the Driving-Shaft Grip Roller ................................. PM-51 14. Lamp Assembly.............................................................. PM-89
11.4 Removing the Flywheel .......................................................... PM-51 14.1 Cleaning/Replacing the Lamps .............................................. PM-89
11.5 Cleaning the Glass Guide ...................................................... PM-52 14.2 Cleaning the Filter .................................................................. PM-91
11.6 Cleaning the Driving Shaft Grip Rollers.................................. PM-58 14.3 Replacing the Filter ................................................................ PM-92
11.7 Cleaning the Driven Shaft Grip Rollers .................................. PM-59 14.4 Reinstalling the Lamp Assembly ............................................ PM-93
11.8 Cleaning the Flywheel and Kapton® Belt............................... PM-60
11.9 Cleaning the SUS Belt............................................................ PM-61 15. Cleaning Inside the Machine......................................... PM-94
11.10 Reinstalling the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit .................... PM-63 16. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch............................ PM-94
12. Light-Collecting Guide................................................... PM-65 17. Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers and Louvers........... PM-95
12.1 Cleaning the Upper Light-Collecting Guide ............................ PM-65
12.2 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyor Unit ........................ PM-67 18. Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filter.................................. PM-95

13. Erasure Conveyor Unit .................................................. PM-70 19. Securing the Machine .................................................... PM-96
13.1 Removing the Lamp Assembly............................................... PM-70 19.1 Connecting the Cables ........................................................... PM-96
13.2 Removing the Erasure Conveyor Unit.................................... PM-71 19.2 Securing the Machine............................................................. PM-96

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.24
Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.25

20. Checking the Image/Conveyance ................................. PM-96 8.7 Replacing the Guide ............................................................................ PM-4
8.8 Replacing the Guide (Convergence Unit Lower Side) ......................... PM-4
21. Checking the Error Log ................................................. PM-96 8.9 Replacing the Guides (for the First, Second, Third, and Fourth
Shelves) ............................................................................................... PM-4
8.10 Replacing the Path Changeover Guides (for the First, Second, Third,
22. Resetting the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time................. PM-97 and Fourth Shelves)............................................................................. PM-4
8.11 Replacing the Shock-Absorbing Rollers (Convergence Unit) .............. PM-4
Appendix 1. Preventive Maintenance for 6 Year Intervals ... PM-1 8.12 Replacing the Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies (for the First,
1. Parts to be Replaced................................................................ PM-1 Second, and Third Shelves)................................................................. PM-4
8.13 Replacing the Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly (for the Fourth
2. Preventive Maintenance Program List ..................................... PM-2
Shelf).................................................................................................... PM-5
3. Detailed Procedures for Servicing............................................ PM-4 8.14 Replacing the Brush Roller Assembly .................................................. PM-5
3.1 Checking the Error Log ........................................................................ PM-4 8.15 Reinstalling the Feed/Load Conveyor Unit .......................................... PM-5
3.2 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time .......................................... PM-4
9. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit................................................ PM-5
4. Checking the Image/Conveyance ............................................ PM-4 9.1 Removing the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit .................................... PM-5
4.1 Check Before Procedures .................................................................... PM-4 9.2 Replacing the Guide ............................................................................ PM-5
4.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance ........................................................ PM-4 9.3 Replacing the Shock-Absorbing Rollers .............................................. PM-5
4.3 Checking the Output Characters.......................................................... PM-4 9.4 Replacing the Cleaning Guide ............................................................. PM-5
5. Pulling Out the Machine ........................................................... PM-4 10. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit.................................................... PM-5
5.1 Pulling Out the Machine ....................................................................... PM-4 10.1 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Unit ........................................ PM-5
5.2 Disconnecting the Cables .................................................................... PM-4 10.2 Replacing the Guide (B)....................................................................... PM-5
6. Removing the Covers............................................................... PM-4 10.3 Replacing the Guide (A)....................................................................... PM-5
10.4 Replacing the Movable Guides ............................................................ PM-5
7. Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch ...................................... PM-4
11. Subscanning Unit ..................................................................... PM-5
8. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit ........................................................ PM-4
11.1 Replacing the Center Guide................................................................. PM-5
8.1 Removing the Feed/Load Conveyor Unit ............................................. PM-4
11.2 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyor Unit ...................................... PM-5
8.2 Replacing the Guide (Convergence Unit Upper Side) ......................... PM-4
11.3 Reinstalling the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit.................................. PM-5
8.3 Replacing the Convergence Path Changeover Guide ......................... PM-4
8.4 Replacing the Guide ............................................................................ PM-4 12. Erasure Conveyor Unit ............................................................. PM-6
8.5 Replacing the Guide ............................................................................ PM-4 12.1 Removing the Erasure Conveyor Unit ................................................. PM-6
8.6 Replacing the Guide ............................................................................ PM-4 12.2 Replacing the Guide (IP Switchback Assembly) .................................. PM-6
12.3 Reinstalling the IP Switchback Assembly............................................. PM-6

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.25
Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.26

12.4 Replacing the Branch Path Changeover Guide ................................... PM-6

12.5 Replacing the Guide (F) ....................................................................... PM-6
12.6 Replacing the Guide (E)....................................................................... PM-6
12.7 Replacing the Guide (D) ...................................................................... PM-6
12.8 Replacing the Guide (C) ...................................................................... PM-6
12.9 Replacing the Guide (B)....................................................................... PM-6
12.10 Replacing the Guide (A)....................................................................... PM-6
12.11 Reinstalling the Erasure Conveyor Unit ............................................... PM-6
12.12 Replacing the Filter .............................................................................. PM-6
12.13 Reinstalling the Lamp Assembly .......................................................... PM-6
13. Cleaning Inside the Machine .................................................... PM-7
14. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch........................................ PM-7
15. Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers and Louvers ........................ PM-7
16. Replacing the Air Filters ........................................................... PM-7
17. Securing the Machine............................................................... PM-7
17.1 Connecting the Cables......................................................................... PM-7
17.2 Securing the Machine .......................................................................... PM-7
18. Checking the Image/Conveyance ............................................ PM-7
19. Checking the Error Log ............................................................ PM-7
20. Resetting the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time .............................. PM-7

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.26
Contents Installation (IN) 0.27

Installation (IN)

1. Specifications of Machine ................................................. IN-1 6. Final Placement................................................................ IN-16

6.1 Securing the Cable...................................................................IN-16
2. Installation Work Flowchart .............................................. IN-2
6.2 Securing the Machine...............................................................IN-17
3. Preparation for Installation ............................................... IN-3
7. CL Installation Procedures.............................................. IN-17
3.1 Precautions Regarding Installation.............................................IN-3
3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements ............................................................... IN-3 8. Installing the RU Software............................................... IN-18
3.1.2 Precautions on Patient Environment...................................................... IN-3
8.1 Setting the IP Address of the RU..............................................IN-18
3.1.3 Handling Precautions for Printed Circuit Boards and Optical Unit ......... IN-3
3.1.4 Precautions for System Connection....................................................... IN-3 8.2 Setting the CL and Checking Connection.................................IN-20
3.2 Unloading ...................................................................................IN-4 8.3 Installing Setup PC-TOOL ........................................................IN-20
3.3 Transfer ......................................................................................IN-9 8.4 Installing RU Software..............................................................IN-21
3.4 Temporary Placement ..............................................................IN-10
9. Image/Conveyance Checks............................................. IN-25
3.5 Checking the Items Supplied....................................................IN-10
9.1 Check Before Procedures ........................................................IN-25
4. Installation Procedures ................................................... IN-11 9.2 Image/Conveyance Checks .....................................................IN-26
4.1 Removing Tapes from the Machine .......................................... IN-11
10. Powering OFF the CL/RU ................................................ IN-28
4.2 Removing the Light Protect Plates ........................................... IN-11
4.3 Repositioning the Retaining Members .....................................IN-12 11. Cleaning the CL/RU.......................................................... IN-28
4.4 Installing the Cover...................................................................IN-14

5. Connecting the Cables .................................................... IN-14

5.1 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking Resistance Value IN-14
5.2 Connecting the Interface Cable................................................IN-15

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.27
Contents Installation (IN) 0.28

Appendix 1. Additional Protective Grounding........................ IN-1

Appendix 2. Setting the Master CL .......................................... IN-2

1. Additionally Registering the Master CL (Procedures on the
CL1)............................................................................................IN-2
2. Registering the RU (Procedures on the CL2).............................IN-4
3. Registering the Machine Information (CONNECTING
EQUIPMENT).............................................................................IN-5
4. Saving Configuration and Exiting Service Utility ........................IN-6
5. Verifying Switching of Master CL................................................IN-7

Appendix 3. Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple

Retainers .............................................................. IN-8
1. Components of Anti-Topple Retainer Kit ....................................IN-8
2. Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple Retainers ................IN-9

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual 0.28
 Control Sheet
Issue date Revision Pages affected
number Reason

08.25.2003 01 New release (FM4098) All pages

CR-IR 363 Service Manual

Safety Precaution

011-202-01 CR-IR 363 Service Manual

08.25.2003 FM4098
 Safety Precaution-1

1. Safety Precautions n Optical Parts

l When servicing the optical parts with the protective housings removed, be sure to
Warnings and cautions regarding the procedures should be observed to avoid turn OFF the power switch.
possible physical hazards and serious accidents that may occur during installation l Never remove the scanning optics unit covers.
and servicing. l For dust removal procedures, observe the instructions described in the service
Labels that describe relevant precautions are attached on the machine. manual.
The instructions on such labels should also be observed during procedures. l Some high-voltage parts, such as the photomultiplier, may not be sufficiently
discharged even after power is turned OFF. When servicing such parts, exercise
1.1 General Precautions due care to avoid electric shock hazards (not to touch the connector and terminal
carelessly).
n Power Supply l Before removing the protective housings, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage
switch (HV switch). If the machine is powered ON with any of the protective
Unless otherwise instructed in the Service Manual, be sure to turn OFF the power housings removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged.
of the machine and unplug the power plug before servicing. With the power plug
still plugged, you may experience electric shock, burn, or secondary damage due to n Other Working Precautions
short circuit even when the machine is powered OFF. It should be noted, however,
that some servicing procedures, such as voltage measurement, cannot be performed l When performing servicing procedures with the protective housings removed
under power-OFF condition. In such cases, use due care to avoid electric shock, under the powered condition, turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV switch).
burn, or secondary damage due to short circuit, as instructed in this manual. Carefully proceed with the procedures while checking the instructions described
in the service manual, and, when the procedures are completed, put the removed
n Drive Mechanism protective housings back exactly where they were.
l Do not remove or install any part or component while the machine is powered,
Be sure to turn OFF the power before servicing the gears, cams, belts, and other because of possible electric shock hazards.
drive mechanism parts. Otherwise, your body or clothing may be entangled.
l When performing checks or adjustments under the powered condition, exercise
However, there may be cases where the procedures cannot be performed under due care against electric shock or other hazards.
power-OFF condition. In such cases, use due care to avoid entanglement of your
hand, foot, hairs, and clothing with any rotating mechanism, as instructed in this l Do not touch the parts (such as erasure lamps) that remain at high temperature
manual. because you may suffer burns.
l When servicing the scanning optics unit and printed circuit boards, be sure to wear
n Heavy Objects an antistatic wristband to remove static electricity built on the human body. Static
electricity may cause damage to the printed circuit boards.
Exercise due care regarding your working posture to avoid back pain during removal
l Secure the machine onto the floor in place by use of its adjustable feet or retainers.
and installation of heavy objects.
l Keep clean the product labels, safety standards labels, product serial number
n Safety Devices indications, and so forth attached on the machine, and do not peel them or put
another label over them.
Safety devices (such as fuses, circuit breakers, interlock switches, panels, and l Before powering ON the machine after completion of the servicing procedures,
covers) should always be enabled. Never attempt to make any alteration or make sure that all the parts, screws, connectors, and so forth that were removed
modification that may impair their safety features. have been reinstalled as appropriate, and that no tool is left in the machine.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-1
 Safety Precaution-2

1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation 1.3 Precautions on Patient Environment

As indicated in the Certification and Indication Label attached on the lower left-hand Before the machine is installed, the supervisor at the machine installation site (the
side cover of the machine, the machine complies with “Laser Products - Conformance hospital’s director) should check to see whether the machine is installed in the patient
with IEC 60825-1, Am. 2 and IEC 60601-2-22; Final Guidance for Industry and environment or not.
FDA (Laser Notice No. 50) and NE60825-1 (Amendment 2).” The image reader
incorporates a laser with a maximum output of 50 mW (Class 3B, semiconductor laser n Additional Protective Grounding
wavelength of 660 nm, red visible light), but you will not be exposed to any hazard if
If the CR-IR363 is installed in the patient environment with the connected equipment
you perform tasks as instructed in the service manual.
in the non-medically used room, the additional protective grounding will be required.
n Precautions Against Laser Exposure Definitions of "patient environment", "medically-used room", and "non-medically used
room" are given below.
Observe the following precautions to avoid laser exposure.
l Patient Environment
l Procedures that require precautions against laser exposure Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures
When performing the following procedures, observe the instructions exactly as (treatment, tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four
described in this manual to avoid laser exposure. After the procedures are completed, directions and 2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
put the removed protective housings and screws back exactly in their original position It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
to prevent leakage of a laser beam out of the machine.
- Removal and reinstallation of the scanning optics unit. l Medically-Used Room
- Replacement and cleaning of subscanning unit parts. Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
l Preventive maintenance for keeping the machine in compliance grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
In order to keep the machine in compliance, perform preventive maintenance grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
programs described in "Preventive Maintenance Volume" at intervals specified. used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
l Things that should not be done to avoid laser exposure
Observe the following precautions to avoid laser exposure. l Non-Medically Used Room
- Never attempt to perform procedures other than instructed in this manual because Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
you may be exposed to laser beam radiation.
- Do not reflect a laser beam by placing a mirror or the like in the laser beam path.
- Do not alter the light path of a laser beam.
- Do not replace optical parts while the laser is energized.
- Do not attempt to make optical axis adjustment in the field. Although the
semiconductor laser beam is red visible light, field adjustment of the optical axis
cannot be done.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-2
 Safety Precaution-3

2. Labels

2.1 Laser Precaution Labels

2.1.1 Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations
Below are illustrated the protective housings and attachment locations of laser
precaution labels, as specified in "Laser Products - Conformance with IEC 60825-1,
Am. 2 and IEC 60601-2-22; Final Guidance for Industry and FDA (Laser Notice No.
50) and NE60825-1 (Amendment 2).” issued by the FDA of the U.S.

l Machine main body

l Scanning Optics Unit

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-3
 Safety Precaution-4

2.1.2 List of CR-IR363 Laser Precaution Labels n IEC/EN60825-1:2001 Class 3B Panel Label
n HHS Certification and Identification Label

n Manufacturer Label
l Scanning optics unit manufacturer label

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-4
 Safety Precaution-5

2.2 Other Labels

2.2.1 Attachment Locations for Ratings Indication Label
and Other Labels

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-5
 Safety Precaution-6

n Ratings Indication Label

l For use in Japan

l For use outside Japan

n Manufacturer Label

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-6
 Safety Precaution-7

2.2.2 Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment n Feed/Load Conveyor Unit

Locations

n Cassette Set Unit

n Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-7
 Safety Precaution-8

n Post-reading conveyor unit n Erasure Conveyor Unit

n Light-Collecting Guide (Front)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-8
 Safety Precaution-9

n Light-Collecting Guide (Back)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-9
 Safety Precaution-10

n Covers n Cassette Insertion Operation Labels

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-10
 Safety Precaution-11

3. Protective Housings Against Laser 4. CLASSIFICATION

Exposure
Even when the protective housings are removed for servicing, laser beams will never
1. According to the type of protection against electrical shock
leak out from the machine unless the optical path is intentionally changed. However, if CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
the optical path is changed inadvertently during optics-related procedures, the service
engineer or other people around the machine may be possibly exposed to laser 2. According to the degree of protection against electrical shock
radiation.
NO APPLIED PART
During optics-related procedures, carefully perform the procedures while checking the
instructions described in this manual, and after the procedures are completed, restore
the protective housings removed back exactly where they were.
3. Protection against harmful ingress of water
n Protective Housing of the Machine IPXO
The removable protective housings of the machine are illustrated below. The four 4. According to the degree of safety of application in the presence
covers marked by ø in the illustration below are protective housings against laser
exposure. of a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or
nitrous oxide.
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics mixture
with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.

5. According to the mode of operation

CONTINUOUS OPERATION

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Safety Precaution-11
 Control Sheet
Issue date Revision Pages affected
number Reason

08.25.2003 01 New release (FM4098) All pages

CR-IR 363 Service Manual

Product Specifications

011-202-01 CR-IR 363 Service Manual

08.25.2003 FM4098
 Product Specifications-1

1. Specifications of Machine 1.2 List of Optional Items

Product code Item Qty. Remarks
1.1 Product Code IR 362 FLOOR FIX Anti-topple retainer kit 1
For retaining the
machine
Patient environment
Product code Item Qty. Remarks IR 362 AC CORD P 100-120V 1
installation kit
CR-IR 363 Machine main body 1 IR 362 AC CORD 100-120V 100-120V AC power cable 1
IR REMOTE POWER Remote power controller
1
CONTROLLER kit

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Product Specifications-1
 Product Specifications-2

1.3 Product Specifications 1.4 Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity

n Maximum Heat Generation n Dimensions
Standby: 340 W approx. W655×D740×H1470 (mm)
Operating: 500 W approx.

n Noise
Standby: 50 dB or less
Operating: 60 dB or less

n Warm-up Time
l Power non-interlinked setting (when RU is started up alone)
2 min 30 sec approx.

l Power interlinked setting (when RU is started up by CL)

2 min 30 sec approx.

n Weight
285 kg approx.

n Center of Gravity
Height: 485 mm
From right-hand side: 345 mm
From front: 355 mm

NOTE
The center of gravity is as measured from the adjustable foot.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Product Specifications-2
 Product Specifications-3

1.5 Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine 1.6 Environmental Conditions
n Moving Means n Climate Conditions
Double-wheel caster (variable-direction/no-brake) x4
l Operating
n Fixing Means Temperature: 15 to 30°C
- Adjustable foot x4, or retaining member x2 Relative humidity: 40 to 80% RH
Atmospheric pressure: 70 to 1030 hPa
Heat generation: 500 W approx.

l Non-operating
Temperature: 0 to 45°C
Relative humidity: 10 to 90% RH (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 500 to 1030 hPa

l Transit/storage
Temperature: -10 to 50°C
Relative humidity: 10 to 90% RH (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 500 to 1060 hPa

n Floor (Machine Surface) Vibration

10 to 55 Hz in frequency and 0.0075 mm or less in amplitude

n Floor Levelness
10 mm/m (inclination: 1/100 or less), for front, rear, right, and left

n Floor Flatness
10 mm/m or less

n Variable Magnetic Field

DC 0.3 Gauss or less

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Product Specifications-3
 Product Specifications-4

1.7 Electrical Specifications 1.8 Installation Space and Servicing Space

n Frequency n Installation Space
Single-phase, 50-60Hz, ±3%

n Input Voltage
Single-phase, 120-240VAC ±10%

n Capacity
0.77 kVA

n Rated Amperage
Single-phase, 100VAC, 50-60Hz : 7A
Single-phase, 120-240VAC, 50-60Hz : 7A

n Power Consumption
Maximum: 770 W n Servicing Space
When servicing the machine, the space indicated below should be secured.
n Watt-Hour
Operating: 420 Wh
Standby: 300 Wh
Power-down mode: 300 Wh
Sleep mode: 200 Wh
Remote standby: 15 Wh or less

n Grounding
Class D grounding (former Class 3 grounding) (100 Ω or less)

n Overload Protection
10 A

n Power Cord
3 m, with 3P plug and connector

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Product Specifications-4
 Product Specifications-5

1.9 Disposal of Machine

When the machine is to be disposed of, the IMG17A/B board, which contains a
battery, should be removed from the machine before its disposal.
Be sure to return the removed IMG17A/B board to the Parts Center.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Product Specifications-5
 Control Sheet
Issue date Revision Pages affected
number Reason

08.25.2003 01 New release (FM4098) All pages

CR-IR 363 Service Manual

Machine Description (MD)

011-202-01 CR-IR 363 Service Manual

08.25.2003 FM4098
 MD-1
1. Machine Overview 1.2 System Configuration
The machine (CR-IR363) may be connected to a network to achieve various system
configurations.
1.1 Features Basic system configuration examples are described here.

n Features of the Machine n System Configuration Example (1)

The machine is connected to the CL via a network.
l The machine is network connectable via TCP/IP (100BASE-TX). A connection with the CL is established over Ethernet (100Base-TX).

l A commonly available power source may be used to supply power to

the machine.

l Improved throughput
To support institutions that conduct large amounts of processing, four shelves of
cassette inserting entrances are provided to ensure improved throughout.

l Removal of IP static electricity

IP static electricity is removed by the electrically-conductive ball bearing and bearing n System Configuration Example (2)
for each conveyance roller, as well as by the antistatic brush.
The machine may be connected to a plurality of CLs, including a single master CL.
The master CL contains the RU's configuration data and other information.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-1
 MD-2
1.3 Overall Machine Configuration and
Component Names
n External View of Machine

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-2
 MD-3
n Nomenclature and Functions n Operation Panel
Name Function
Operation panel Operation panel for the RU main body.
POWER lamp It is lit (in green) when the circuit breaker is pushed in the "I"
position and power is turned ON. Since the circuit breaker
remains in the ON state, the POWER lamp is always lit.

System power switch Power switch for the RU. When this switch is pressed with the
system power switch in the RU setting and the circuit breaker in
the ON state, the RU is powered ON.

Cassette set unit This unit accommodates cassettes that contain exposed IPs. A
(four shelves) cassette may be loaded into an unloaded shelf of the cassette
feeder.
Cassette loading lamp It is lit (in green) when the RU starts up normally, indicating that
cassette loading is ready. While it is not lit, a cassette cannot be
loaded.
Cassette removal It is lit (in green) when removal of a processed cassette is ready.
lamp
Dust filter It is attached in the entrance of the air-intake fan.
Circuit breaker It should normally be in the ON position.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-3
 MD-4
1.4 Machine Components
1.4.1 Unit Locations

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-4
 MD-5
1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-5
 MD-6
1.4.3 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions A list of sensor and barcode reader names and functions is presented below.

l Cassette set unit

n I/O Locations: Cassette Set Unit and Feed/Load Conveyor Unit
Symbol Name Type Function
Locations of the sensors and barcode reader are illustrated below.
SA1, 7, 13, 19 Cassette ejection PI (5mm) Detects that the cassette has
sensor been ejected.
SA2, 8, 14, 20 Cassette IN sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the cassette has
been inserted.
SA3, 9, 15, 21 Cassette hold sensor PI (5mm) Detects that cassette hold has
been completed.
SA4, 10, 16, Suction cup HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the suction cup
22 arm is in its home position.
SA5, 11, 17, Suction sensor Suction Detects that the suction cup
23 sensor has sucked the IP.
SA6, 12, 18, Inch/metric sensor PI (5mm) Determines the IP width.
24
BCRA1, 2, 3, 4 Barcode reader Scans the barcode of a dual-
surface IP cassette.

l Feed/load conveyor unit

Symbol Name Type Function
SB1, 2, 3, 4 IP feed/load sensor PI (19mm) Detects that an IP being
(cassette side) conveyed is present.
SB5 Pre-BCR IP sensor PI (19mm) Detects that an IP being
conveyed is present.
SB6 Pre-convergence IP PI (19mm) Detects that an IP being
sensor conveyed is present.
SB7, 8, 9 Path changeover shelf PI (5mm) Detects the position of the path
sensor changeover guide.
SB10 Convergence path PI (5mm) Detects the position of the
changeover sensor convergence path changeover
guide.
SB11 Path changeover HP PI (5mm) Detects the machine's initial
sensor position and the position of the
path changeover guide.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-6
 MD-7
n I/O Locations: Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit, Subscanning A list of sensor and barcode reader names and functions is presented below.
Unit, and Post-Reading Conveyor Unit l Side-positioning conveyor unit
Locations of the sensors and barcode reader are illustrated below.
Symbol Name Type Function
SC1 Side-positioning PI (5mm) Detects that the side-positioning
mechanism HP sensor mechanism is in its home position.
SC2 Grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the grip roller is in its
home position.
SC3 Side-positioning IP PI (19mm) Detects that an IP being conveyed
sensor is present.
SC4 Cleaning guide HP PI (5mm) Detects that the cleaning guide is
sensor in its home position.
BCRC1 Barcode reader Scans the barcode of an IP of
single-surface type.

l Subscanning unit
Symbol Name Type Function
SZ1 IP leading-edge sensor Laser light- Detects the leading edge of the
receiving element IP when it is read.
SZ2 Driving-side grip PI (5mm) Detects the driving-side grip
release HP sensor state.
SZ3 Driven-side grip release PI (5mm) Detects the driven-side grip
HP sensor state.
SZ4 Dust-removal HP PI (5mm) Detects that the antistatic
sensor member is in its home position.
SZ5 IP stopper HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the IP stopper is in
its home position.

l Post-reading conveyor unit

Symbol Name Type Function
SD1 Grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the grip roller is in its
home position.
SD2 Post-reading conveyance PI (19mm) Detects that an IP being conveyed
IP sensor is present.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-7
 MD-8
n I/O Locations: Erasure Conveyor Unit and Housing A list of sensor and thermistor names and function is presented below.
Locations of the sensors and thermistor are illustrated below. l Erasure conveyor unit
Symbol Name Type Function
SE1 Post-reading conveyance PI (19mm) Detects that an IP being
standby IP sensor conveyed is present.
SE2 Switchback standby IP PI (19mm) Detects that an IP being
sensor conveyed is present.
SE4 Erasure side-positioning PI (5mm) Detects that the side-
mechanism HP sensor positioning mechanism is in its
home position.
SE5 Grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the grip roller is in
its home position.
TSWE1 Safety thermostat sensor Thermal Detects the temperature at the
switch reflection plate of the erasure
unit.
THE1 Lamp temperature Thermistor Detects the temperature within
detection thermistor the erasure lamp assembly.

l Housing
Symbol Name Type Function
SG1 Side-positioning entrance PI (19mm) IP conveyance sensor
IP sensor
SG2 “11x14 IP” determination PI (19mm) IP conveyance sensor
sensor

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-8
 MD-9
n I/O Locations: Cassette Set Unit and Feed/Load Conveyor Unit A list of motor, clutch, solenoid, pump, and solenoid valve names and functions is
presented below.
Locations of the motors, clutches, solenoids, pumps, and solenoid valves are
illustrated below. l Cassette set unit
Symbol Name Type Function
SOLA1, 2, 3, Cassette hold solenoid Power-down Holds and releases the
4 solenoid cassette hold pin.
MA1, 2, 3, 4 Suction cup driving Pulse motor Drives the suction cup arm
motor and ejects a cassette when the
clutch is turned ON.
PA1, 2, 3, 4 IP suction pump Pump Sucks when turned ON.
SVA1, 2, 3, 4 IP leak valve Solenoid Leaks when turned ON.
valve
CLA1, 2, 3, 4 Cassette ejection clutch Clutch Transfers the motive power of
the suction cup driving motor
to the rollers during cassette
ejection.

l Feed/load conveyor unit

Symbol Name Type Function
MB1 IP transport motor Pulse motor Transports an IP.
MB2 IP transport motor Pulse motor Transports an IP.
MB3 Convergence path Pulse motor Changes the conveyance path.
changeover guide driving
motor

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-9
 MD-10
n I/O Locations: Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit, Subscanning A list of motor names and functions is presented below.
Unit, and Post-Reading Conveyor Unit l Side-positioning conveyor unit
Locations of the motors are illustrated below.
Symbol Name Type Function
MC1 Side-positioning motor Pulse motor Drives the side-positioning
mechanism
MC2 Grip release motor Pulse motor Grips and releases the grip
roller.
MC3 IP transport motor Pulse motor Transports an IP.
MC4 Cleaning guide driving Pulse motor Drives the cleaning guide.
motor

l Subscanning unit
Symbol Name Type Function
MZ1 Subscanning motor FFM Transports an IP.
MZ2 Grip driving motor DC motor Grips and releases the driving
and driven shafts.
MZ3 Dust removal motor DC motor Removes dust deposited on
the light-collecting guide and
mirror.
MZ4 IP stopper driving motor Pulse motor Drives the IP stopper.

l Post-reading conveyor unit

Symbol Name Type Function
MD1 Grip release motor Pulse motor Grips and releases the grip
roller.
MD2 IP transport motor Pulse motor Transports an IP.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-10
 MD-11
n I/O Locations: Erasure Conveyor Unit and Housing A list of motor, solenoid, and fan names and functions is presented below.
Locations of the motors, solenoids, and fans are illustrated below. l Erasure conveyor unit
Symbol Name Type Function
ME1 IP transport motor Pulse motor Transports an IP.
ME2 Side-positioning motor Pulse motor Drives the side-positioning
mechanism.
ME3 Grip release motor Pulse motor Grips and releases the grip
roller.
SOLF1 Branch path changeover Power-down Effects path changeover.
guide driving solenoid solenoid
FANE1 Erasure unit cooling fan DC fan Cools the erasure unit.
FANE2 Inverter cooling fan DC fan Cools the inverter board.

FANE3 Inverter cooling fan DC fan Cools the inverter board.

l Housing
Symbol Name Type Function
FANG1, 2, 3, 4, Board cooling fan DC fan Cools the boards within the
5 housing.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-11
 MD-12
1.4.4 Board Locations

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-12
 MD-13
1.5 System Block Diagram
n Power Supply System

Power supply unit

+5V(A) +5V(S) +15V(D) PSU17A +15V(F) -15V(H)
+12V(K) +24V(B) +5V(C) +24V(E) +24V(B) +15V(G) +24V(J)

FAN
CN5 CN25
Driver board Driver board
DRV17A DRV17B Inverter board
INV17A
CN1
+24V(B) +24V(B)

CN2

M SOL P SV CL M(DC) M FAN SOL

FAN LAMP1, 2, 3
CN4 CN20
Sensor board Sensor board
SNS17A SNS17B CN1 Inverter board
INV17B
+5V(A) CN16 CN2

Image processing board LED board S BCR FFM

IMG17A/B LED17A
Switch board THE1 LAMP4, 5
SWT17A

CN4
Scanner board
SCN17A/SCT17B
+5V(A)
+5VAS +15V(G) CN7
-15V(H)
+5V(A)
CPU board
CPU91A
Polygon driver Symbol Name
IP leading-edge Start-point Photomultiplier Photomultiplier
board S Sensor
LD driver board board
detection board detection board board PMR17B POL17A/ M Pulse motor
LDD12A
SED17A SYN12A PMT17A (SCT17B only) POL17B M (DC) DC motor
SOL Solenoid
SV Solenoid valve
CL Clutch
CN6 LCD board
LDA12A P Pump
LCD17A FFM Motor
BCR Barcode reader
: For board operation
LD assembly TSWE1 Thermal switch
THE1 Thermistor
FR9H1103.EPS

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-13
 MD-14
n Signal System

Power supply unit

PSU17A
CN1 +24V (B)

FAN
Driver board Driver board
Driver DRV17A Driver DRV17B Inverter board
circuit circuit INV17A
CN2 Inverter
CN1 CN2 CN21 CN22
circuit

M SOL P SV CL M (DC) M FAN SOL

FAN LAMP1, 2, 3

Sensor board CN5 CN6 CN7 CN8 Sensor board

SNS17A SNS17B Inverter board
INV17B
CN1 CN16 CN5 CN2 Inverter
circuit
CN3 Image S BCR FFM TSWE1
LED board
processing board
LED17A THE1 LAMP4, 5
CN4 IMG17A/B Switch board
SWT17A

Scanner board
H8S SCN17A/SCT17B
CPU

CPU board
CPU91A
Photomultiplier Symbol Name
LAN Main IP leading-edge Start-point LD driver board Photomultiplier Polygon driver S Sensor
CN6
detection board board
detection board LDD12A board board
CPU SED17A PMR17B M Pulse motor
SYN12A PMT17A POL17B
(SCT17B only) M (DC) DC motor
SOL Solenoid
SV Solenoid valve
CN1 CN3 CL Clutch
LDA12A P Pump
CN3 CN2 FFM Motor
LCD board BCR Barcode reader
LCD17A LD assembly TSWE1 Thermal switch
THE1 Thermistor
FR9H1104.EPS

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-14
 MD-15
2. Descriptions of Software Control 2.2 Data Flow between RU and CL
The exchange of data between the RU and CL is described below.
u NOTE u
In this chapter, the "RU Application," "RU IP Address," and "RU Configuration" are
2.2.1 Data Flow during Routine Processing
referred to shortly as RU-AP, RU IP ADDR, and CONFIGURATION, respectively.
l Flow of image data
The image data read from the IP is stored in the SDRAM of the image processing
2.1 Network Settings board (IMG17A/B), and transferred to the CL via the network.

Settings for respective network items are made as follows. l Flow of log data
The contents that have been set from Machine Maintenance (LCD panel) are retained - The log data is written into the FTP server upon RU shutdown processing or upon
in the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/B board. occurrence of a FATAL error.
- The log data is retained in the FTP server until a certain amount of that data is
Setup items Setting means Factory default values reached, and, once that amount is exceeded, the data is overwritten on a first-in,
first-out basis.
RU IP address Machine Maintenance 172.16.1.10
RU subnet mask Machine Maintenance 255.255.0.0
RU default gateway Machine Maintenance 0.0.0.0
FTP server IP address Machine Maintenance 172.16.1.20
CL IP address RU PC-TOOL EDIT CL 172.16.1.20
NAME

u NOTE u
The IP address of the RU can only be set from Machine Maintenance (LCD panel).

REFERENCE
As a rule, the IP addresses of the CL and RU are used as the same setting.
However, if the FTP server is centrally managed at a single location by distinguishing
between the IP addresses of the FTP server and CL, you should gain full
understanding of this setup before use.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-15
 MD-16
2.2.2 "Install Operation" and Data Flow (4) Set "CONFIGURATION".
→ It is written into the FTP server.
(1) In the Machine Maintenance mode (LCD panel), set "RU IP ADDR" and
"FTP IP ADDR".
→ They are written into the FLASH ROM located on the IMG17A/B board.

(2) In the RU PC-TOOL (CL), start "INSTALL".

→ Check the setting of the DIP switches (device type) located on the CPU91A board
of the RU.

(3) Set the language/brand.

→ The language displayed on the LCD panel of the RU is set.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-16
 MD-17
(5) Set "IP ADDR" of the CL. n Data Flow Block Diagram
→ RU-AP is written from the CD-ROM to the FTP server and to the SDRAM
located on the CPU91A board. CONFIGURATION and CL IP ADDR are
written from the FTP server to the SDRAM.

→ RU-AP, CONFIGURATION, and CL IP ADDR are written from the SDRAM

located on the CPU91A board to the FLASH ROM.

u NOTE u
If the version appears in red text, or when the version does not appear at all, it is
a sign that the install has not been done correctly. In that case, it is necessary to
perform the install procedures all over again.

CAUTIONS
- While data is being written into the FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the power of
the RU.
- If the power of the RU is turned OFF, the program residing in the memory is
corrupted, so that the RU cannot be rebooted.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-17
 MD-18
2.2.3 "VERSION UP" Operation and Data Flow (2) Set "IP ADDR" of the CL.
→ RU-AP is written from the CD-ROM to the FTP server and to the SDRAM
n Overview of Version Update located on the CPU91A board.
- A version update for the RU-AP is performed from the CL via the FTP server by use → RU-AP, CONFIGURATION, and CL IP ADDR are written from the SDRAM
of [VERSION UP] of the RU PC-TOOL. located on the CPU91A board to the FLASH ROM.
- With [VERSION UP], only a version update for the RU-AP should be done, but not u NOTE u
for CONFIGURATION.
If the version appears in red text, or when the version does not appear at all, it is
n Data Flow a sign that the install has not been done correctly. In that case, it is necessary to
perform the install procedures all over again.
(1) In the RU PC-TOOL (CL), start "VERSION UP".
→ Check the setting of the DIP switches (device type) located on the CPU91A CAUTIONS
board of the RU.
- While data is being written into the FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the power of
the RU.
- If the power of the RU is turned OFF, the program residing in the memory is
corrupted, so that the RU cannot be rebooted.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-18
 MD-19
2.2.4 Flow of BACKUP Data 2.2.5 Data Flow during Restore
The following data are copied to a floppy diskette (FD) by use of "BACKUP" of the RU The following data are restored from the FD to the FLASH ROM of the RU by use of
PC-TOOL. "RESTORE" of the PC-TOOL.
- Configuration data (CONFIGURATION)
- Configuration data (CONFIGURATION)
- Scanner data (SCN ALL DATA)
- Scanner data (SCN ALL DATA)
- Log data (ERROR LOG, TRACE LOG, HISTORY LOG)
- Log data (HISTORY alone)
l Data flow CAUTIONS
(1) The configuration data and scanner data are copied to the FD from the - While data is being restored, never turn OFF the power of the RU.
FLASH ROM of the RU via the FTP server. - If the power of the RU is turned OFF, the program residing in the memory is
(2) The log data is copied to the FD from the CPU91A board memory corrupted, so that the RU cannot be rebooted.
(SDRAM) of the RU via the FTP server.
u NOTE u
The data restored is made effective by powering OFF the RU once and back ON.

REFERENCE
Of the log data, only HISTORY LOG is restored.

l Data flow

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-19
 MD-20
2.3 Master CL Switching Function n Example of Master CL Switching
Once several master CL's are registered in the RU PC-TOOL, the User Utility allows Scenario where the system is operated with RU-A set in master CL-A and RU-B/C set
the user to selectively switch the master CL; provided that the following restrictions in master CL-B, but is switched to a system with RU-A/B/C under control of CL-B.
should be met.
{IN:Appendix 2._Setting the Master CL}
n Restrictions {Instruction Manual}

l When the master CL is switched, the following service information

and service procedures are inaccessible while switching is being
done.
Exercise due care when the master CL switching function is used.
Service information: ERRLOG, HISTORYLOG
Service procedures: All procedures performed from the RU PC-TOOL

l The RU should have been registered in CONFIGURATION of the CL to

be switched.
REFERENCES
- The master CL is a CL that controls the RU. If the master CL goes down,
system processing cannot be executed.
- Up to four master CL's may be registered into the RU.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-20
 MD-21
2.4 Error Handling 2.5 SLEEP Mode
The RU resumes its operation by attempting a retry(s), except under condition where The "SLEEP mode" is such that in order to conserve power, the state within the
it is inoperable. machine automatically transitions to the power-saving mode when the RU is not
operated within a specified period of time.
2.4.1 Error Handling
When an I/O error (mechanical, scanner, etc.) occurs between cassette insertion and 2.5.1 Operation in SLEEP Mode
IP reading, the IP is returned to the cassette.
(1) When the machine transitions to the SLEEP mode, the following
2.4.2 Cases where Retry is Impossible (FATAL Error) operations are performed and the power-saving mode is activated.
- The energization of the motors, except for the cassette set unit, is stopped.
(1) When the function of the CPU located on the CPU91A board or The cassette set unit keeps its motors energized in order to allow the cassette
IMG17A/B board stops. to be loaded at all times.
(2) When the power supply voltage output stops. - The temperature adjustment function of the erasure lamp is stopped.
- The LCD backlight is turned OFF.
(3) When the communication between the RU and CL stops. → The LCD screen turns blank.
- The control of the scanner unit is stopped.
(2) Even in the SLEEP mode, the cassette removal lamp and cassette
loading lamp remain unchanged. That is because they indicate that
the cassette may be loaded or removed even in the SLEEP mode.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-21
 MD-22
2.5.2 Transition to the SLEEP Mode 2.5.3 Recovery from SLEEP Mode

n Transition Requirements n Recover Requirements

(1) If "SLEEP Mode ON" is set in the User Utility and the RU is not (1) When the LCD panel is touched.
operated within the preset "SLEEP mode transition time" while the
(2) When the cassette is loaded.
RU remains in READY state, then the state transitions to the SLEEP
mode. (3) When the cassette is removed.
REFERENCE - Recovers when the cassette is removed from the eject position.
- Does not recover when the cassette is removed from any halfway position.
The SLEEP mode is not activated while operation is being performed in the User
Utility and while an error message is being displayed.

(2) When "SLEEP Mode ON" is set from the LCD panel during shutdown
processing.
→ The state immediately transitions to the SLEEP mode.

n Setting of Transition Time

- The setting of "SLEEP Mode" is made by the "Sleep Timer" of the User Utility.
- Time setting may be done with "SLEEP Mode ON" enabled. n Diagnosis upon Recovery
- The time is settable in 1-minute or 10-minute increments. The RU performs the following diagnostics upon recovery.
- Mechanical diagnostics 3 (home positioning)
Because motor energization is stopped while in the SLEEP mode, it always
performs mechanical home positioning before recovering to the Ready state.
- Scanner unit self-diagnostics
{MD:4.1.5_Error Detection/Processing Subsystem}
Because the scanner unit control is stopped while in the SLEEP mode, it always
performs scanner unit self-diagnostics before recovering to the Ready state.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-22
 MD-23
2.6 Bootup Processing (2) Load RU-IPL, RU-AP, etc. from the FLASH ROM to the SDRAM.
After power is turned ON, diagnostic processing is performed in order of steps (1)
through (7).

(1) Check the connection with the FTP server.

REFERENCE
If the connection with the FTP server is abnormal, a connection retry takes
about 3 minutes; thus, the time required to display the bootup screen varies, as
compared to the normal bootup time.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-23
 MD-24
(3) Perform diagnostics on each board. (6) Perform "Mechanical Initialization 2". (Subscanning unit grip
Boards to be diagnosed: SNS17A board, SNS17B board, correction)
DRV17A board, DRV17B board,
(7) Perform "Scanner Initialization".
SCN17A/SCT17B board, IMG17A/B board
→ When the diagnostics on the sub CPU located on the IMG17A/B board are → When the scanner diagnostics are completed normally, the "Main CPU LED"
completed normally, the "Sub CPU LED" flicks right and left. located on the CPU91A board flicks right and left.

(4) Perform "barcode reader COMMUNICATION check" and "fuse check".

(8) Perform "Mechanical Initialization 3". (Home positioning for each

(5) Perform "Mechanical Initialization 1". (IP search within the machine) mechanism)
→ When it is completed normally, the time data is obtained from the CL.

(9) The RU enters the READY state.

→ The CL is notified that the RU is now READY.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-24
 MD-25
2.7 RU Shutdown Processing
Mechanical shutdown processing and saving of log data are referred to as "RU
shutdown processing."
u NOTE u
If the power is turned OFF without performing RU shutdown processing, log data will
not be saved.

n Flow of RU Shutdown Processing

(1) "Shutdown processing" command
There are two scenarios: "when system shutdown is performed for the CL" and
"when the system is shut down from the RU operation panel."
(2) Execute "mechanical shutdown processing" and "saving of log data",
and turn OFF the power.
- Mechanical shutdown processing
Move the IP stopper (MZ4 motor) of the subscanning unit to its home position.
Put the grip mechanism (MZ2 motor) of the subscanning unit in its gripped
condition.
- Saving of log data
Save HISTORY LOG, TRACE LOG, and ERROR LOG to the FTP server.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-25
 MD-26
3 Descriptions of Electrical Power
Supply
Fuse-Equipped
Component
Fuse
No.
Blown-Fuse
Detection Circuit
Target for Protection

Operations DRV17A board

F14 B141 Solenoid valve : SVA1/SVA2/SVA3/SVA4

F15 B151 Clutch: CLA1/CLA2/CLA3/CLA4

3.1 Power Supply Voltage Output Detection F1 B161 Pulse motor: MC1
Function F2 B171 Pulse motor: MC2
To facilitate early recovery from a failure, the RU incorporates the power supply F3 B181 Pulse motor: MC3
voltage output detection function, which offers the following features: F4 B191 Pulse motor: MC4

- Each load circuit incorporates a fuse that serves to isolate a fault. +24V (B)
F5 B201 DC motor: MZ4
- The isolation points are provided with a current detection circuit, which constantly F6 B211 Pulse motor: ME2
DRV17B board
monitors the power supply voltage output. F7 B221 Pulse motor: MB1
- The detection point can be identified by checking the combination of current
F8 B241 Pulse motor: MB3
detection circuits (points) in which an error has occurred. For the lamps, however,
their point is detected as either the INV17A and/or INV17B board. F9 B231 Pulse motor: MB2
F10 B251 Solenoid: SOLB1
n Fuses and Detection Points
F11 B261 Solenoid: SOLE1
Power Fuse-Equipped Fuse Blown-Fuse F12 B281 Fan: FAN (1-6)
Target for Protection
Supply Component No. Detection Circuit
F18 D011 DC motor: MZ2
PSU17A power supply A011 Panel: LCD17A board +15V (D) DRV17A board
F19 D021 DC motor: MZ3
F1 A021 Sensor F1 - Lamp: LAMP1
F2 A031 LED F2 - Lamp: LAMP2
+5V (A) SNS17B board INV17A board
F3 A041 Barcode reader F3 - Lamp: LAMP3
+24V (E)
F4 - Fan: FANE1/FANE2/FANE3
F4 A051 INV17A/B board
F1 - Lamp: LAMP4
SCN17A/SCT17B board F5 A061 IP leading-edge sensor: SED17A INV17B board
F2 - Lamp: LAMP5
F1 B011 Pulse motor: MA1
F1 G041 Laser: LDD12A board
F2 B021 Pulse motor: MA2 Start-point sensor: SYN12A board
F3 G011
F3 B031 Pulse motor: MA3 +15V (G) Photomultiplier (front): PMT17A board
F8 G031 +5VAS protection
F4 B041 Pulse motor: MA4
F7 G051 Photomultiplier (back): PMR17B board
F5 B051 Solenoid: SOLA1
SCN17A/SCT17B Photomultiplier (front): PMT17A board
F6 B061 Solenoid: SOLA2 Photomultiplier (back): PMR17B board
-15V (H) board F2 H011
Laser: LDD12A board
+24V (B) DRV17A board F7 B071 Solenoid: SOLA3
Start-point sensor: SYN12A board
F8 B081 Solenoid: SOLA4
+24V (J) F6 J011 Polygon: POL17B board
F9 B091 DC motor: MD1 F4 G021 Start-point sensor: SYN12A board
F10 B101 DC motor: MD2 +5V (A) Start-point sensor: SYN12A board
F5 G061
IP leading-edge sensor: SED17A
F11 B111 Pulse motor: ME1

F12 B121 Pulse motor: ME3

F13 B131 Pump: PA1/PA2/PA3/PA4

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-26
 MD-27
n Overcurrent Protection Circuit Block Diagram

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-27
 MD-28

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-28
 MD-29
3.2 Erasure Unit Control n Components
- The control circuit for the erasure lamp unit is located on the SNS17B board. A
control signal from the SNS17B board causes the relay circuit and lamp inverter
n Overview circuit of the driver board (INV17A/B) to operate, thereby turning ON or OFF the
The erasure unit provides idle illumination control, IP erasure control, and fan control. lamps and fans.
- To enable discrimination between failures of the control board (SNS17A) and driver
Feature: Erasure unit initialization is effected after verifying that the machine is
board (INV17A/B), LEDs are provided on the SNS17B board to indicate the status
emptied of IPs.
of the control signal.
l Idle illumination control {MD:3.3.3_Correspondence between LEDs and Erasure Control Signals and
To obtain an adequate lamp light intensity for IP erasure after RU power ON, lamp FFM Control Signals}
(LAMP1 - LAMP5) illumination and erasure unit cooling fan (FANE1) operation are
controlled so as to maintain a constant temperature inside the erasure unit.
Power supply unit
l IP erasure control PSU17A
+5V(A) +24V(E)
To effect IP erasure, the erasure unit pass time is controlled in accordance with the CN1 CN2
dose received by a processed IP.
Sensor board CN20
l Fan control SNS17B FANE3 FANE2 LAMP2
Safety CN5
Control is exercised so as to operate the erasure unit cooling fan (FANE1) when the thermostat
TSWE1 FANE1 LAMP1 LAMP3
temperature inside the erasure unit is high. control circuit CN9 CN7 CN6 CN3 CN4 CN5

l Temperature adjustment control LED F4 F1 F2 F3

- The heat generated during lamp (LAMP1 - LAMP5) illumination is detected by the
temperature thermistor (THE1) and used to exercise control of the erasure unit CN2 Relay Lamp CN1
cooling fan (FANE1) operation and lamp illumination. circuit inverter
Lamp circuit
- While the machine is idle and processing no IP, control is exercised to automatically temperature CN16
illuminate the lamps for temperature adjustment purposes. control circuit Inverter board
- Before the lamps are illuminated, they are subjected to preheating. INV17A CN8
Unlit lamp
detection
circuit Inverter board CN6

Temperature INV17B
control fan Lamp
(FANE1) CN2 Relay CN1
circuit inverter
control circuit circuit F1 F2

Sensor board CN3 CN4

SNS17A
CN1 THE1 LAMP4 LAMP5
CN3
Image
processing board FANE1: Erasure unit cooling fan
IMG17A/B FANE2: Inverter board cooling fan
FANE3: Inverter board cooling fan
CPU board TSWE1: Thermal switch
CPU91A THE1: Temperature thermistor
Main CPU
FR9H1085.EPS

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-29
 MD-30
3.3 LEDs on the SNS17B Board I/O No. Load name Significance when LED is illuminated

By checking the illumination state of the LEDs on the SNS17B board, the status of SA1 Cassette ejection sensor (first shelf) The shutter is opened, with the sensor in CLOSE state.
each sensor can be verified. Furthermore, by checking the illumination state of the SA2 Cassette IN sensor (first shelf) The cassette is inserted, with the sensor in CLOSE state.
LEDs, the status of the FFM and lamp, among others, can also be verified.
SA3 Cassette hold sensor (first shelf) The cassette hold pin is released, with the sensor in CLOSE
state.
3.3.1 Meaning of LED ON (Illuminated) SA4 Suction cup HP sensor (first shelf) The IP removal arm is in its home position, with the sensor in
When the sensor is CLOSE, a signal is sent from the senor to the board. CLOSE state.
When the LED is illuminated, it means that the corresponding sensor is in CLOSE SA5 Suction sensor (first shelf) The IP is sucked, with the sensor in CLOSE state.
state.
SA6 Inch/metric sensor (first shelf) The inch cassette is inserted, with the sensor in CLOSE state.

3.3.2 Correspondence between LEDs and Sensors SA7 Cassette ejection sensor (second The shutter is opened, with the sensor in CLOSE state.
shelf)
The 7-segment LEDs on the SNS17B board correspond to each of the following
SA8 Cassette IN sensor (second shelf) The cassette is inserted, with the sensor in CLOSE state.
sensors as listed in the table below.
SA9 Cassette hold sensor (second shelf) The cassette hold pin is released, with the sensor in CLOSE
state.

SA10 Suction cup HP sensor (second shelf) The IP removal arm is in its home position, with the sensor in
CLOSE state.

SA11 Suction sensor (second shelf) The IP is sucked, with the sensor in CLOSE state.

SA12 Inch/metric sensor (second shelf) The inch cassette is inserted, with the sensor in CLOSE state.

SA13 Cassette ejection sensor (third shelf) The shutter is opened, with the sensor in CLOSE state.

SA14 Cassette IN sensor (third shelf) The cassette is inserted, with the sensor in CLOSE state.

SA15 Cassette hold sensor (third shelf) The cassette hold pin is released, with the sensor in CLOSE
state.

SA16 Suction cup HP sensor (third shelf) The IP removal arm is in its home position, with the sensor in
CLOSE state.

SA17 Suction sensor (third shelf) The IP is sucked, with the sensor in CLOSE state.

SA18 Inch/metric sensor (third shelf) The inch cassette is inserted, with the sensor in CLOSE state.

SA19 Cassette ejection sensor (fourth shelf) The shutter is opened, with the sensor in CLOSE state.

SA20 Cassette IN sensor (fourth shelf) The cassette is inserted, with the sensor in CLOSE state.

SA21 Cassette hold sensor (fourth shelf) The cassette hold pin is released, with the sensor in CLOSE
state.

SA22 Suction cup HP sensor (fourth shelf) The IP removal arm is in its home position, with the sensor in
CLOSE state.

SA23 Suction sensor (fourth shelf) The IP is sucked, with the sensor in CLOSE state.

SA24 Inch/metric sensor (fourth shelf) The inch cassette is inserted, with the sensor in CLOSE state.

SB1 IP feed/load sensor (first shelf) An IP is found, with the sensor in CLOSE state.

SB2 IP feed/load sensor (second shelf) An IP is found, with the sensor in CLOSE state.

SB3 IP feed/load sensor (third shelf) An IP is found, with the sensor in CLOSE state.

SB4 IP feed/load sensor (fourth shelf) An IP is found, with the sensor in CLOSE state.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-30
 MD-31
I/O No. Load name Significance when LED is illuminated

SD1 Grip release HP sensor The grip mechanism is in its home position, with the sensor
in CLOSE state.

SD2 Post-reading conveyance IP sensor An IP is found in the post-reading conveyor unit, with the
sensor in CLOSE state.

SE1 Post-reading standby IP sensor An IP is found in the post-reading conveyance standby unit,
with the sensor in CLOSE state.

SE2 Switchback standby IP sensor An IP is found in the switchback standby unit, with the
sensor in CLOSE state.

SE4 Erasure side-positioning mechanism The erasure side-positioning mechanism is in its home
HP sensor position, with the sensor in CLOSE state.

SE5 Grip release HP sensor The grip mechanism is in its home position, with the sensor
in CLOSE state.

(SE6) Not used -

SZ2 Driving-side grip release HP sensor The driving-side grip mechanism is in its home position, with
the sensor in CLOSE state.

SZ3 Driven-side grip release HP sensor The driven-side grip mechanism is in its home position, with
the sensor in CLOSE state.

SZ4 Dust removal HP sensor The dust removal mechanism is in its home position, with
I/O No. Load name Significance when LED is illuminated the sensor in CLOSE state.
SB5 Pre-BCR IP sensor An IP is found, with the sensor in CLOSE state.
SZ5 IP stopper HP sensor The IP stopper mechanism is in its home position, with the
SB6 Pre-convergence IP sensor An IP is found, with the sensor in CLOSE state.
sensor in CLOSE state.
SB7 Path changeover shelf sensor (second The path changeover guide is in the feed/load position, with
shelf) the sensor in CLOSE state. SN1 Unlit lamp 1 sensor The lamp 1 is in OFF or unlit state.
SB8 Path changeover shelf sensor (third The path changeover guide is in the feed/load position, with SN2 Unlit lamp 2 sensor The lamp 2 is in OFF or unlit state.
shelf) the sensor in CLOSE state.
SN3 Unlit lamp 3 sensor The lamp 3 is in OFF or unlit state.
SB9 Path changeover shelf sensor (fourth The path changeover guide is in the feed/load position, with
shelf) the sensor in CLOSE state. SN4 Unlit lamp 4 sensor The lamp 4 is in OFF or unlit state.
SB10 Convergence path changeover sensor The path changeover guide is in the feed/load position, with
SN5 Unlit lamp 5 sensor The lamp 5 is in OFF or unlit state.
the sensor in CLOSE state.
SB11 Path changeover shelf sensor (first The path changeover guide is closed, with the sensor in
shelf) CLOSE state.
SC1 Side-positioning mechanism HP sensor The side-positioning mechanism is in its home position, with
the sensor in CLOSE state.
SC2 Grip release HP sensor The grip release mechanism is in its home position, with the
sensor in CLOSE state.
SC3 Side-positioning IP sensor An IP is found in the side-positioning conveyor unit, with the
sensor in CLOSE state.
SC4 Cleaning guide HP sensor The cleaning guide is in its home position, with the sensor in
CLOSE state.
SG1 Side-positioning entrance IP sensor An IP is found in the entrance of the side-positioning
conveyor unit, with the sensor in CLOSE state.
SG2 11x14 IP determination sensor An IP is found for “11x14 IP” determination, with the sensor
in CLOSE state.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-31
 MD-32
3.3.3 Correspondence between LEDs and Erasure Control I/O No. Load name Significance when LED is illuminated
Signals and FFM Control Signals FFM OK Drive signal to the FFM The FFM is driven.
The LEDs, excluding the 7-segment LEDs, on the SNS17B board correspond as LON1 Status of the control signal sent to the The LAMP1 lamp outputs the ON control signal.
listed in the table below. LAMP1 lamp

LON2 Status of the control signal sent to the The LAMP2 lamp outputs the ON control signal.
LAMP2 lamp

LON3 Status of the control signal sent to the The LAMP3 lamp outputs the ON control signal.
LAMP3 lamp

LON4 Status of the control signal sent to the The LAMP4 lamp outputs the ON control signal.
LAMP4 lamp

LON5 Status of the control signal sent to the The LAMP5 lamp outputs the ON control signal.
LAMP5 lamp

LSTB1 Status of the lamp preheat signal sent to The LAMP1 lamp outputs the preheat control signal.
the LAMP1 lamp

LSTB2 Status of the lamp preheat signal sent to The LAMP2 lamp outputs the preheat control signal.
the LAMP2 lamp

LSTB3 Status of the lamp preheat signal sent to The LAMP3 lamp outputs the preheat control signal.
the LAMP3 lamp

LSTB4 Status of the lamp preheat signal sent to The LAMP4 lamp outputs the preheat control signal.
the LAMP4 lamp

LSTB5 Status of the lamp preheat signal sent to The LAMP5 lamp outputs the preheat control signal.
the LAMP5 lamp

FUOPEN1 Status of the lamp fuse State where the F1, F2, or F3 fuse on the INV17A
board is not blown.

FUOPEN2 Status of the lamp fuse State where the F4 or F5 fuse on the INV17B board is
not blown.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-32
 MD-33
3.4 LEDs on the DRV17A/DRV17B Boards I/O No. Load name Significance when LED is illuminated

By checking the LEDs on the DRV17A and DRV17B boards, the status of solenoid SOLA1 Cassette hold solenoid (first shelf) Solenoid ON: The hold pin is in the released state.
and motor operations can be verified. SOLA2 Cassette hold solenoid (second shelf) Solenoid ON: The hold pin is in the released state.

3.4.1 Correspondence between LEDs and Loads SOLA3 Cassette hold solenoid (third shelf) Solenoid ON: The hold pin is in the released state.

SOLA4 Cassette hold solenoid (fourth shelf) Solenoid ON: The hold pin is in the released state.
The 7-segment LEDs on the DRV17A and DRV17B boards correspond to each of the
following loads as listed in the table below. MA1 Suction cup driving motor (first shelf) The motor is driven: The IP removal arm is actuated.

MA2 Suction cup driving motor (second shelf) The motor is driven: The IP removal arm is actuated.

MA3 Suction cup driving motor (third shelf) The motor is driven: The IP removal arm is actuated.

MA4 Suction cup driving motor (fourth shelf) The motor is driven: The IP removal arm is actuated.

PA1 IP suction (first shelf) The pump is driven: State where the IP is sucked

PA2 IP suction (second shelf) The pump is driven: State where the IP is sucked

PA3 IP suction (third shelf) The pump is driven: State where the IP is sucked

PA4 IP suction (fourth shelf) The pump is driven: State where the IP is sucked

SVA1 IP leak (first shelf) Valve ON: State where the IP sucking air is leaked

SVA2 IP leak (second shelf) Valve ON: State where the IP sucking air is leaked

SVA3 IP leak (third shelf) Valve ON: State where the IP sucking air is leaked

SVA4 IP leak (fourth shelf) Valve ON: State where the IP sucking air is leaked

CLA1 Cassette ejection clutch (first shelf) The clutch is driven: The cassette is ejected.

CLA2 Cassette ejection clutch (second shelf) The clutch is driven: The cassette is ejected.

CLA3 Cassette ejection clutch (third shelf) The clutch is driven: The cassette is ejected.

CLA4 Cassette ejection clutch (fourth shelf) The clutch is driven: The cassette is ejected.

MZ2 Grip release motor The motor is driven: The grip mechanism of the
subscanning unit is actuated.

MZ3 Dust removal motor The motor is driven: The dust removal mechanism of the
subscanning unit is actuated.

MD 1 Grip release motor The motor is driven: The grip mechanism of the post-
reading conveyor unit is actuated.

MD 2 IP transport motor The motor is driven: The IP in the post-reading conveyor

unit is conveyed.

ME 1 IP transport motor The motor is driven: The IP in the post-reading conveyor

unit is conveyed.

ME 3 Grip release motor The motor is driven: The grip mechanism of the erasure
conveyor unit is actuated.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-33
 MD-34
3.4.2 Meaning of LED ON (Illuminated)
An LED segment ON (illuminated) means that its corresponding load is being driven.
Note, however, that the signal for detecting whether it is being driven differs
depending on each load.
Signals marked by a circle are detected.

I/O No. Control signal Drive signal to I/O No. Control signal Drive signal to
in the board the load in the board the load
SOLA1 ¡ CLA3 ¡
SOLA2 ¡ CLA4 ¡
SOLA3 ¡ MB1 ¡
I/O No. Load name Significance when LED is illuminated SOLA4 ¡ MB2 ¡
MB1 IP transport motor The motor is driven: The IP in the feed/load conveyor unit is
MA1 ¡ MB3 ¡
conveyed.

MB2 IP transport motor The motor is driven: The IP in the feed/load conveyor unit is MA2 ¡ MC1 ¡
conveyed.
MA3 ¡ MC2 ¡
MB3 Convergence path changeover guide The motor is driven: The convergence conveyance
driving motor changeover guide of the feed/load conveyor unit is MA4 ¡ MC3 ¡
actuated.
PA1 ¡ MC4 ¡
MC 1 Side-positioning motor The motor is driven: The side-positioning mechanism of the
side-positioning conveyor unit is actuated. PA2 ¡ MZ2 ¡
MC 2 Grip release motor The motor is driven: The grip mechanism of the side- PA3 ¡ MZ3 ¡
positioning conveyor unit is actuated.
PA4 ¡ MZ4 ¡
MC 3 IP transport motor The motor is driven: The IP in the side-positioning conveyor
unit is conveyed. SVA1 ¡ MD1 ¡
MC 4 Cleaning guide driving motor The motor is driven: The cleaning guide of the side- SVA2 ¡ MD2 ¡
positioning conveyor unit is actuated.
SVA3 ¡ ME1 ¡
MZ4 IP stopper driving motor The motor is driven: The IP stopper of the subscanning unit
is actuated. SVA4 ¡ ME2 ¡
ME 2 Side-positioning motor The motor is driven: The side-positioning mechanism of the
CLA1 ¡ ME3 ¡
erasure conveyor unit is actuated.

SOLE1 Branch path changeover guide driving Solenoid ON: The branch path changeover guide of the
CLA2 ¡ SOLE1 ¡
solenoid feed/load conveyor unit is actuated.

SOLB1 Not used Not used

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-34
 MD-35
4. Descriptions of Scanner n IP Moved to the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit

Mechanism and Its Operation m Polygon (POL); Polygon diagnostics

{MD:4.1.5_Error Detection/Processing Subsystem}

4.1 Descriptions of CR-IR363 Scanner m Housing conveyance sensors (SB5 and SG2); IP size measurement
Operation m Side-positioning conveyor unit barcode reader (BCR); acquisition of IP
4.1.1 Scanner Controller Unit Operation Sequence information through IP barcode reading (only for the single-side type)
The H8CPU located on the scanner board (SCT17B) controls the scanning optics m SCT17B board; Conditions settings for main scan and subscan
unit and photomultiplier, while communicating with the main CPU located on the
CPU board (CPU91A) board. Two H8CPU's are mounted on the scanner board Conditions are set according to a combination of the IP size, IP type, and the
(SCT17B), which are responsible for controlling the front side and back side of the IP, reading mode that is preset with the CL.
respectively, when the both-side type IP is processed.
m Laser (LDD); ON
REFERENCE
The I/O names in the following sequence correspond to the I/O names in the
n IP Moved to the Subscanning Unit
illustrations of the scanner controller unit, and are denoted in the form of:
m Subscanning motor (MZ1); Start
m I/O name; description of operation for that I/O name
It is rotated at speed corresponding to a combination of the IP type and reading
[Example] m SCT17B board; Correction data initial setting mode.
This means that the SCT17B board performs initial setting of the correction data. {MD:4.1.3_Relationship between Subscan Motor Speed, Polygon Rotation
Speed, and IP Type/Reading Mode}
n Machine Power ON
m Leading-edge sensor (SED); IP leading-edge detection
m SCT17B board; Correction data initial setting
Reflection type (detects the laser light reflected from the IP)
{MD:4.1.2_Correction Data}
m PMT17A board, PMR17B board, SCT17B board; Start of image reading
m SCT17B board; Scanner self-diagnostics {MD:4.1.4_Image Data Flow}
{MD:4.1.5_Error Detection/Processing Subsystem}
m Subscanning unit grip drive motor (MZ2); Gripping/releasing of driving shaft/
n Cassette Loading driven shaft
m Cassette set unit barcode reader; Determination of whether the IP is of both- In order to reduce nonuniformity during reading, the grip/release speed is allowed
side type or single-side type to correspond to the speed of the subscanning motor.
(For the both-side type IP, IP information reading) m PMT17A board, PMR17B board, SCN17A board; End of image reading
m Polygon (POL); Start
m Laser (LED); OFF
Because the polygonal mirror takes time until it becomes stable since it is
activated, it is started earlier. m Polygon (POL); Stop
The polygon rotation speed is set corresponding to the IP type.
{MD:4.1.3_Relationship between Subscan Motor Speed, Polygon Rotation n IP Moved to the Post-Reading Conveyor Unit
Speed, and IP Type/Reading Mode}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-35
 MD-36
4.1.2 Correction Data
(1) The shading correction data, sensitivity data, format data, and speed
correction data reside in the FLASH ROM located on the image
processing board (IMG17B), and are copied to the SDRAM upon
power-ON of the machine; then it is further loaded onto the scanner
board (SCT17B) and used for operation.
(2) For the correction data, the types(s) (denoted by m) shown in the
table below is created according to the IP type and reading mode.
Reading Shading Sensitivity
IP type
mode correction data correction data
SR mode ST single side m m
GR mode ST single side m -
FR mode ST single side m -
HR mode HR single side m m
HR-BD mode HR both side m m

4.1.3 Relationship between Subscan Motor Speed, Polygon

Rotation Speed, and IP Type/Reading Mode

Reading Subscan motor Polygon

IP type
mode speed rotation speed
FR mode ST single side Fast Normal speed
SR mode ST single side Normal speed
GR mode ST single side Normal speed
HR mode HR single side Normal speed
HR-BD mode HR both side Slow Low speed

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-36
 MD-37
4.1.4 Image Data Flow
The flow of image data is described below.
Numerals (1), (2), and so forth at the beginning of the items correspond to (1), (2),
and so forth in the image data flow illustration.
It should be noted that the image data is sent to the CL nearly concurrently with
reading.

(1) When the laser light from the scanning optics unit hits the IP, it
becomes luminescence data, which is read by the photomultiplier
through the light-collecting guide. For the both-side type IP, the data
is read simultaneously from both the front side and back side.
(2) The resulting data is sent, in the form of analog data, from the
PMT17A board (front-side photomultiplier) to the scanner board
(SCT17B).
For the both-side type IP, the data is also sent simultaneously, in the form of analog
data, from the PMR17B (back-side photomultiplier) to the scanner board (SCT17B).
(3) The analog data is subjected to shading correction and other
processing on the scanner board (SCT17B), before it is converted
to digital data (analog-to-digital conversion). For the both-side
type IP, the analog data for the back side is also subject to shading
processing and analog-to-digital conversion independently and
concurrently.
(4) The digital data, after analog-to-digital conversion, is sent, in the
form of digital data, from the scanner board (SCT17B) to the image
processing board (IMG17B).
(5) For processing of the both-side type IP, the digital data for the front
side and back side is subject to addition by the image processing
board (IMG17B).
(6) The resulting data is subjected to image processing by the sub
CPU located on the image processing board (IMG17B), and then
temporarily stored, on a FIFO basis, into the SDRAM located on the
CPU board (CPU91A).
(7) The image data stored in the SDRAM is sent to the CL via the network
under control of the main CPU located on the CPU board (CPU91A).

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-37
 MD-38
4.1.5 Error Detection/Processing Subsystem
(1) Error code
The scanner-related error codes, which are created by a combination of the
control signal of each I/O and the reference signal of the board, are configured to
facilitate identification of their causes.
(2) Scanner unit self-diagnostics
The following diagnostics are performed in accordance with the device type
determined by the DIP switches located on the CPU91A board. The sequence is
as follows.
m Diagnostics where the polygon rotation is at normal speed
(A) Check for communication between H8CPU and CPU91A board
(B) Polygon start (normal speed)
(C) Polygon diagnostics
(D) Laser ON
(E) Scanner self-diagnostics
- Check the reference signal from the board
- Check the level of the image signal through the quasi-signal
- Check the laser
(F) Laser OFF
(G) Polygon stop
(H) Error check for self-diagnostics
m Diagnostics where the polygon rotation is at low speed
- The polygon rotation speed is set to low speed.
- The sync signal is aligned to the low rotation speed.
- Diagnostics at normal speed.
(3) Polygon diagnostics
It is checked to see whether the polygonal mirror is operating normally a
predetermined time after the polygon is started.
(4) Error detection during reading
During reading, an error caused by a timeout is detected.
(5) Check after reading is completed
In order to check whether abnormal is found with reading operation, error check
is performed upon completion of reading.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-38
 MD-39
4.1.6 LED Indications of I/O Status LED
Not
By observing the LEDs located on the scanner board (SCT17B), the status of each LED Significance illuminated/
illuminated
blinking
I/O of the scanner unit can be checked.
High-voltage switch status signal
HVON ON: When SW setting is ON ON OFF
OFF: When SW setting is OFF
Detection signal from the leading-edge
SOH Detected Not detected
sensor (SED)
Detection signal from the start-point
SOS Detected Not detected
sensor (SYN)
POLLOCK OK signal form the polygon (POL) GOOD NG
Reference signal issued by the SCT17B GOOD (lit)
PCLK board * Only during IP -
reading
Reference signal issued by the SCT17B GOOD (lit)
FCLK board * Only during IP -
reading
Operation status signal of H8CPU GOOD
ZLCLK Blinking: Idling NG
Lit: Operating
Operation status signal of H8CPU for
R-ZLCLK GOOD (blinking) NG
back-side control
OK signal from the laser (LDD)
LD1OK (50% or more of laser power) GOOD NG

Rotation speed control signal sent from

PSLOW Slow rpm Fast rpm
the SCT17B board to the polygon (POL)
ON signal from the SCT17B board to the
POLON ON OFF
polygon (POL)
LD2ON Reserved - -
Control signal from the SCT17B board to
the laser (LDD)
LD1IDLE ON OFF
ON: Outputted
OFF: Not outputted
Control signal from the SCT17B board to
LD1ON ON OFF
the laser (LDD)
Quasi data output signal created by the
PMTDIG ON OFF
LOG amp located on the PMT17A board
Quasi data output signal by illuminating
LIGHT ON OFF
the LED located on the PMT17A board
Quasi data output signal created by the
R-PMTDIG ON OFF
LOG amp located on the PMR17B board
Quasi data output signal by illuminating
R-LIGHT ON OFF
the LED located on the PMR17B board

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-39
 MD-40
5 Descriptions of Mechanical n Half-Clutch
The half-clutch that conveys the driving force only in one direction is used. This
Components and Their Operations permits a single motor to provide driving forces for several mechanisms.

5.1 Features of Components Used for Each

Unit
n Electrically-Conductive Bearing
Because an electrically-conductive housing and bearing are employed, static
electricity charged from the IP to the roller is removed.

n Grip Cam
The cams used in the grip mechanism are identical for both right and left sides of the
unit.
By changing the gear engaging position with reference to the timing marks on the
spur gears that drive the cam, identical components can be used for both right and left
sides of the machine.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-40
 MD-41
n Guides n Snap-Fit Pinion Gears
The IP that is being conveyed is protected by use of guides and shock absorbers. The employed pinion gears can be installed and removed without using retaining
members or tools.
Guides Servicing precautions
u NOTE u
Shock absorbers
Never use ethanol or a moistened cloth. When installing the pinion gear over the shaft, ensure that it is properly oriented.
Rubber guides They should be cleaned only by use of a
vacuum cleaner. If you install it over the shaft while it is reversed, its claws may become damaged.
Brushing guides

n Photosensors
A photosensor of claw-locked type (for preventing misalignment) is used.

u NOTE u
When removing or installing the photosensor, use a steel rule or the like and exercise
care not to damage the sensor claws.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-41
 MD-42
n Engraved Marks on the Side Plate n Lengths of Grip Springs
Gear attachment orientations, sensor numbers, and other marks are directly engraved With conventional machines, grip springs with different strengths are employed on
in the side plate of the unit to enhance ease of servicing. the reference side and opposite reference side in order to prevent obliquing of the IP.
With the CR-IR363, the tensile strengths of the springs are varied by changing the
hooking positions of the springs on the side plate. As a result, the same type of spring
may be used.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-42
 MD-43
5.2 IP Conveyance Flow

[1] Feed the IP. {MD:5.3_Cassette Set Unit}

[2] Convey the IP to the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MD:5.4_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

[3] Side-position the IP. {MD:5.5_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}

[4] Read the image. {MD:5.6_Subscanning Unit}

[5] Convey the IP from the subscanning unit to the {MD:5.7_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}
erasure conveyor unit.

[6] Erase the IP. {MD:5.8_Erasure Conveyor Unit}

[7] Side-position the IP again. {MD:5.8_Erasure Conveyor Unit}

[8] Convey the IP to the cassette set unit. {MD:5.4_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

[9] Load the IP. {MD:5.3_Cassette Set Unit}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-43
 MD-44
5.3 Cassette Set Unit

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-44
 MD-45
l Continued from the previous page 5.3.1 Operation during IP Feed and Load
A flow of cassette set unit operation is illustrated below. The cassette set unit is
No. Name Symbol Function Detail either in the feed state where the cassette is set ([A] in illustration below) and in the
Detects that the cassette is load state where the IP, after being read, is returned to the cassette ([B] in illustration
[1] Cassette ejection sensor SA1, 7, 13, 19 below).
ejected.
Detects that the cassette is The operation is identical for all of the four shelves of the cassette set unit.
[2] Cassette IN sensor SA2, 8, 14, 20
inserted.
Detects that cassette hold is
[3] Cassette hold sensor SA3, 9, 15, 21
completed.
SA4, 10, 16, Detects that the suction cup
[4] Suction cup HP sensor
22 arm is in its home position.
Detects that the suction cups
[5] Suction sensor SA5, 11, 17, 23
suck the IP.
SA6, 12, 18,
[6] Inch/metric sensor Determines the IP width. {MD:5.3.2}
24
Eliminates the need for
Movable guide assembly
[7] - switching the inch/metric {MD:5.3.2}
common to inch/metric
setting.
Holds/releases the cassette
[8] Cassette hold solenoid SOLA1, 2, 3, 4
hold pin.
Drives cassette ejection when
the suction cup arm and
[9] Suction cup drive motor MA1, 2, 3, 4
cassette ejection clutch are
ON.
The suction cups suck the IP
[10] IP suction pump PA1, 2, 3, 4
when ON.
Suck the IP. They are of
type with greater durability
[11] Suction cups -
that eliminates the need for
periodic replacement.
Integral hose that relays
between the suction cups and
[12] Hose -
pump. Conventionally, the
branch joint was used.
[13] IP leak valve SVA1, 2, 3, 4 Leaks when ON.
Clutch that translates the force
of the suction cup drive motor
[14] Cassette ejection clutch CLA1, 2, 3, 4
to the cassette ejection rubber
roller.
Cassette ejection rubber Rubber roller that is intended
[15] -
roller to eject the cassette.
Rubber roller shock Prevent scratches on the IP
[16] -
absorbers surface.
Reads the barcode of the
[17] Barcode reader BCRA1, 2, 3, 4
both-side IP cassette

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-45
 MD-46
n Operation during Feed n Operation during Load

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-46
 MD-47
5.3.2 How to Detect the IP Size n Inch/Metric Movable Guide Assembly
The CR-IR363 recognizes the IP sizes by use of the following three types of Inch and metric cassettes are identified by the movable guide (identification guide).
mechanisms. The mechanism of identification is illustrated below.

l Inch metric movable guide assembly: SA6 (SA12, SA18, SA24)

It distinguishes between the inch cassette and metric cassette, and recognizes the
IPs of inch size and metric size. For more detail on how to determine the cassette,
see "n Inch/Metric Movable Guide Assembly."

l IP detection by SB5 (feed/load conveyor unit)

It counts the passing time, thereby recognizing the length of the IP.

l IP detection by SG2 (between feed/load conveyor unit and side-

positioning unit)
It determines the width of the IP, thereby recognizing whether the IP is of large width
size (14"x17" or 14"x14") or not.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-47
 MD-48
5.4 Feed/Load Conveyor Unit

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-48
 MD-49
l Continued from the previous page 5.4.1 Path Changeover Guide/Convergence Path
Changeover Guide
No. Name Symbol Function Detail
Detects whether the IP is The feed/load conveyor unit employs two types of changeover guides, i.e., path
[1] IP feed/load sensor SB1, 2, 3, 4 changeover guide and convergence path changeover guide, to change the
present or not.
conveyance path of the IP.
Provides force to convey the
[2] IP transport motor MB1
IP. The path changeover guide effects a changeover to convey the IP to one of the four
Detects the size (length) of cassette inserting entrances. The convergence path changeover guide effects a
[3] Pre-BCR IP sensor SB5 changeover of a convergence point for the erasure conveyor unit and side-positioning
the IP.
conveyor unit.
Pre-convergence IP Detects whether the IP is
[4] SB6
sensor present or not. The same single motor is used to provide two types of changeover guide operations.
Path changeover shelf Detects the position of the As the motor rotates clockwise, the path changeover guide is activated; as it rotates
[5] SB7, 8, 9
sensor path changeover guide. counterclockwise, the convergence path changeover guide is activated. To avoid
Detects the home position reverse operation for each of the changeover guides, half-clutches act to prevent
Convergence path reverse rotations.
[6] SB10 of the convergence path
changeover sensor
changeover guide.
Detects the machine
Path changeover HP initial position and detects
[7] SB11
sensor the position of the path
changeover guide.
Provides force to convey the
[8] IP transport motor MB2
IP.
Changeover guide drive Provides force to change the
[9] MB3 {MD:5.4.1}
motor path of the IP.
Changes the conveyance
[10] Path changeover guide - {MD:5.4.1}
path of the IP.
Convergence path Changes the conveyance
[11] - {MD:5.4.1}
changeover guide path of the IP.
Remove dust deposited on
[12] Brush roller - {MD:5.4.2}
the IP.
Handle used to manually
[13] IP jam handling handle - rotate the rubber rollers when
an IP jam occurs.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-49
 MD-50
n Operation of Path Changeover Guide n Convergence Path Changeover Guide
The path changeover guides effect a changeover for the second, third, and fourth The convergence path changeover guide effects a changeover for the conveyance
shelves of the cassette inserting entrances (the first guide always remains open). The path of the IP that is conveyed to the side-positioning conveyor unit and the IP that is
path changeover guide opens the IP conveyance path by its associated cam, and the returned from the erasure conveyor unit.
three path changeover guides operate according to the mechanism illustrated below.
Their feature is such that the three cams are arranged as offset by 90 degrees,
thereby ensuring that two or more path changeover guides will not open at the same
time.

REFERENCE
The cam is prevented from rotating in reverse direction by the ratchet head.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-50
 MD-51
5.4.2 Brush Rollers
The brush rollers clean (remove dust from) the IP.
The operation of the brush rollers differ depending on whether the IP is passed or not.

IP passed or not Motor driving Condition of brush rollers

The half-clutch stops the brush rollers.
Passed Normal direction As they are stopped, the dust is removed from the
IP.
The brush rollers rotate.
Not passed Reverse direction Dust deposited on the brush rollers is removed by
the edges of the box.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-51
 MD-52
5.5 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit 5.5.2 Cleaning Guides
They clean the both-side IP (mammography).
5.5.1 Side-Positioning Mechanism As the IP starts to pass, the two guides clean it by sandwiching it between them.
It performs side-positioning operation prior to IP reading. It prevents reading error due
to obliquing of the IP.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-52
 MD-53
5.6 Subscanning Unit 5.6.2 Dust Removal Mechanism
It remove dust deposited on the upper light-collecting guide and light-collecting mirror.
5.6.1 IP Stopper Mechanism Dust removal operation may be initiated by the user.
The IP stopper mechanism stops the IP during side-positioning operation performed
at the side-positioning conveyor unit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-53
 MD-54
5.6.3 Reading Mode 5.6.4 Center Guide and Grip Rollers
The subscanning unit has five reading modes. Because the reading speed (IP The center guide and grip rollers of the subscanning unit are subjected to positional
conveyance speed) varies with each of the reading modes, the grip-down/grip- adjustments in units of 10 microns.
up timings and speeds for the grip rollers are changed in order to avoid gripping When servicing the subscanning unit, exercise due care not to bend or fold the center
unevenness relative to their respective reading speeds. guide and grip rollers or not to hit them against each other or other objects.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-54
 MD-55
5.7 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit 5.8 Erasure Conveyor Unit
5.7.1 Movable Guide 5.8.1 Switchback Mechanism
This guide leads the IP to the rubber rollers. It is intended to prevent IP jams. It performs IP switchback (operation to switch front to back, and vice versa).
The conveyance path where the switchback is performed is a location where the IP is
bent most within the machine. As such, an IP jam is likely to occur. To prevent such
IP jams, consideration is given to the conveyance speed and timing.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-55
 MD-56
5.8.2 Side-Positioning Mechanism 5.8.3 Filter of Erasure Lamp
It performs side-positioning prior to cassette insertion. It is intended to prevent Do not use ethanol for cleaning the filter face of the erasure lamp. Clean it with a
cassette insertion error. moistened cloth. It differs from those used in its predecessors.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MD-56
 Control Sheet
Issue date Revision Pages affected
number Reason

08.25.2003 01 Corrections (FM4098) All pages

CR-IR 363 Service Manual

Troubleshooting (MT)

011-202-01 CR-IR 363 Service Manual

08.25.2003 FM4098
 MT-1

1. Overview of Troubleshooting
n Flow of Troubleshooting
The flow of RU troubleshooting greatly varies depending on whether the associated
error log exists.
When you start a troubleshooting procedure, be sure to confirm the error log.

l When the error is logged

Note the error code table, analysis flow, and check flow to identify the cause of the
error.

l When the error is not logged

Note the check flow to identify the cause of the error.

n How to Use the Analysis Flow

If many parts are in error, the checks to be performed and procedural reference
sections (check flow) are sequentially indicated in the flow.

n Check Flow
The checks to be performed are sequentially indicated in the flow.
Typical check flows are indicated below.
- "4. Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism"
- "14. Line Error between CL and RU"
- "15. Troubleshooting Procedures for Image Abnormalities"

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-1
 MT-2

1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting n Error Classifications

RU errors can be roughly classified into the following five categories:
1. Errors causing the CL screen to display an error code
Trouble occurred
Mechanical, electrical, scanner, or software errors that cause the CL screen to display
an error code upon error detection
Checking the Error Log
2. Errors preventing the RU from becoming ready
{MT:1.4.1_Checking the Error Log} CL-to-RU communication errors that inhibit the RU from becoming ready
3. Errors causing image abnormalities
1. Errors causing the CL screen to display an error code
Errors that result in image abnormalities due to laser light blockage caused by a
scratched IP or dust or due to electrical/scanner system component abnormalities
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting with Error Log} 4. Errors interrupting the progress of a process and causing the inability to detect an
error code
{MT:2._Error Code Table } Errors that occur when many interrupts are initiated by a barcode
{MT:3._Detail Code} 5. Errors causing the inability to upgrade the software or save data
Errors that cause a problem between the FTP server and CPU91A board due to an
“Analysis Flow” improper FTP server setting, IP address setting, or RU name setting

“Check Flow”

2. Errors causing the LCD of the RU to display a "line error".

{MT:14._Line Error between CL and RU}

3. Errors causing image abnormalities

{MT:15._Troubleshooting Procedures for Image Abnormalities}

4. Errors interrupting the progress of a process and causing the

inability to detect an error code
{MT:20._Troubleshooting the errors that interrupt the progress of a
process and cause the inability to detect an error code}
5. Errors causing the inability to update the software or save data

{MT:7._Troubleshooting the Errors that Cause the Inability to Update

the Software Version or Back Up the Machine Shipment Control
Data}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-2
 MT-3

1.2 Analysis and Check Flow Marks n Examples of Analysis/Check Flow Mark Usage
In the Troubleshooting volume, troubleshooting procedures are described in the form
of a flow. Various marks are used for flow simplification.
l Example 1: Example of operation item

n Marks Used in Flows

l Example 2: Example where check is performed

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-3
 MT-4

1.3 How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with

Error Log"
Each page consists of two vertical columns lying side by side. The left-hand side
describes the "analysis procedure" and the right-hand side furnishes "detailed
information".
When you read the Troubleshooting volume for the first time, you should read not
only the left-hand side but also the "detailed information" on the right-hand side
to understand the background, objective, and other details of the troubleshooting
procedure.
When performing a troubleshooting procedure, follow the steps indicated in the left-
hand "analysis procedure" column.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-4
 MT-5

1.4 Troubleshooting from Error Log n Purpose of Gathering Various Types of Data
An error log is added to the file whenever an error occurs during the operation of the
1.4.1 Checking the Error Log machine, and when the file becomes full, its entries are overwritten on a first-in, first-
out basis.
Using the RU PC-TOOL ERROR DB, view the error log and check the occurrence of In order to save error logs that are available immediately before the error occurred
error codes. while the user is operating the machine, the error logs should be backed up before
starting the troubleshooting.

n Purpose of Viewing the Error Log

START
When an error occurs, it generally causes two or more additional errors. The error
code displayed on the CL represents the last-encountered error.
You must therefore view the error log to locate the error code related to the
encountered trouble before proceeding to perform troubleshooting.
Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} n Purpose of Exiting the CL Software
If you start RU PC-TOOL while the CL software is running, the CL may give erratic on-
screen indications or fail to operate normally. Therefore, exit the CL software before
starting RU PC-TOOL.
Back Up the ERROR LOG.
{MT:19._Gathering Various Data When Trouble Occurs}

Start the ERROR DB to view the error log.

{MU:4.3.17_ERROR DB}

END

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-5
 MT-6
1.4.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered n Error Occurrence Time Recording in Error Log
Trouble When errors occur at RU startup, their occurrence time indications vary with the error
occurrence timing.
1. Group the errors that occurred.
l When errors occurred after "time data" was acquired from the CL
2. Locate the error that is responsible for the encountered trouble (the Determine the order of error occurrences in accordance with the "occurrence time"
error that occurred first). indications.
(Example)
- Error occurrence groups A and B are judged as separate error occurrence
groups, because the difference between their error occurrence times is 14
minutes.
- The first error in Group A is "12302".

n When an error occurred after "time data" was acquired from the
CL l When errors occurred before "time data" was acquired from the CL
The resulting occurrence date/time indications look like "0000.00.00 00.00.25".
Note, however, that the time elapsed after power ON is indicated in the "seconds"
position (underlined) of the "occurrence time" field.
The error having the smallest "seconds" value occurred first.

n Purpose of Grouping Errors and Identifying Error that Occurred

n When an error occurred before "time data" was acquired from First
the CL
If two or more errors are logged and you perform troubleshooting in accordance with
the error that is not responsible for the encountered trouble, troubleshooting will not
easily be accomplished. It is therefore necessary to locate the error responsible for
the encountered trouble (the error that occurred first) before proceeding to conduct
troubleshooting.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-6
 MT-7
1.4.3 Viewing the Error Code Table to Locate the n Error Code Table Description
Associated Analysis Flow The error code table lists error codes in ascending order to facilitate your error code
search.
Each error code is furnished with an error name and a brief description of error
occurrence conditions.
It is also provided with the information (page number or section number) that indicates
the most appropriate analysis flow you should refer to.

n Viewing the Error Table to Locate the Reference Analysis Flow

1. Search the error code table for the error code that is most likely to be
responsible for the encountered trouble.
2. Note the section number suggested in the "Analysis Flow" column for
the error code, and then see the suggested page.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-7
 MT-8
1.4.4 Viewing the Check Flows in Accordance with an
Analysis Flow

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-8
 MT-9
n Error Code Detail l Y: Error category
0: OS (operating system software), libraries
1: Image processing CPU
2: Scanner control (for front side)
3: Conveyance control
4: Overall control
5: Network control
6: Scanner control (for back side)
7: Electrical/hardware related
8: Reserved
l X: Error level 9: Others (software installation, version update, etc.)
Error level notations
l ZZ: Reference number
FATAL error: 0
- The user is notified of an error occurrence. It is managed according to each error category.
- Level of error where the routine processing cannot be resumed.
- It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 2
- An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
- Level of error where the function associated with the error is rendered unusable.
- It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 1
- The user is notified of an error occurrence.
- Errors that occur due to erroneous user operation (incorrect loading of the cassette
or IP, etc.).
- If this level of error occurred at the same time with another level of warning, it is
necessary to troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 4
- An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
- Errors that occur when a retry operation is performed.
- If the same error occurs frequently and if this level of error occurs at the same time
with another level of warning, it is necessary to troubleshoot and take remedial
action.
WARNING: 3
- An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
- Errors that occur when servicing procedures are performed.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-9
 MT-10
2. Error Code Table
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMG17B board into the SD RAM,
10001 File open error (1) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in {MT:18.}
the SD RAM.

During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMG17B board into the SD RAM,
10002 File read error (1) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in {MT:18.}
the SD RAM.

During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMG17B board into the SD RAM,
10003 File format error (1) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in {MT:18.}
the SD RAM.

During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMG17B board into the SD RAM,
10004 File write error (1) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in {MT:18.}
the SD RAM.

During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMG17B board into the SD RAM,
10005 File close error (1) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in {MT:18.}
the SD RAM.

During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMG17B board into the SD RAM,
10010 File open error (2) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in {MT:18.}
the SD RAM.

During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMG17B board into the SD RAM,
10011 File read error (2) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in {MT:18.}
the SD RAM.

During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMG17B board into the SD RAM,
10012 File format error (2) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in {MT:18.}
the SD RAM.

During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMG17B board into the SD RAM,
10013 File write error (2) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in {MT:18.}
the SD RAM.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-10
 MT-11

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMG17B board into the SD RAM,
10014 File close error (2) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in {MT:18.}
the SD RAM.

When an attempt is made to operate a motor or the like during bootup or routine processing, the specified device
10060 Device open error cannot be opened.
{MT:18.}

Barcode reader communication During bootup or during routine processing, communication error occurs between the CPU91A board and barcode
10061 reader (BCR), so that communication cannot be established. {MT:18.}
error
S c a n n e r B U S Y c o n fi r m a t i o n During bootup or during routine processing, the status of the scanner board is checked before sending a command
10062 from the CPU91A board to the scanner board (SCN17A/SCT17B), but it is in BUSY state. {MT:18.}
timeout
During bootup and routine processing, a timeout occurs for communication between the main CPU (CPU91A
10063 Scanner command timeout board) and scanner H8CPU (SCN17A/SCT17B board).
{MT:18.}

During bootup or during routine processing, a command is sent from the CPU91A board to the SCN17A/SCT17B
10064 "CPU-SCN" command retry over board, but a retry-over occurs.(Retry; three times)
{MT:18.}

Image processing CPU error During routine processing, because the data sent from the "IMG17A/B board: sub-CPU" has an insufficient or
10065 excess number of pixels, the software performs processing to supplement or cut the insufficient or excess number {MT:18.}
during operation of pixels in the line direction.

10066 IMG board type error During bootup, an invalid IMG board is detected. (IMG17A board is installed in CR-IR363.) {MT:18.}

Various types of error occur for the socket communication which is used to establish a network connection
10070 Socket error between the RU and CL
{MT:14.}

During bootup or during Maintenance Utility, the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMA17B board is accessed, but
10090 FLASH-ROM access error error is detected.
{MT:18.}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-11
 MT-12

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Image processing initialization During bootup or during routine processing, when an attempt is made to initialize the image processing section of
10100 the IMG board, 12101 error is detected. {MT:18.}
error Because it is detected three or more times, fatal error results.

Image processing CPU sequence During IP read processing, an attempt is made to activate the sub-CPU (image processing section) of the IMG
10120 board, but 12101 error is detected three times or more, so that fatal error results. {MT:18.}
error
During bootup or during routine processing, because the connector (CN1 on the PMT17A/PMR17B board, CNZ31
on the scanning optics unit, CNZ32 on the scanning optics unit, CN1 on the SYN12A board, CN1 on the LDD17B
board) is disconnected, the laser (LDD), start-point detection (SYN), and photomultiplier (PMT/PMR) functions are
10230 Scanner functional error disabled.
{MT:5.1}
Because the laser is not enabled, the leading-edge detection (SED) cannot be performed (detail code: D0E503).
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is D0E403.

During bootup or during routine processing, because +15V is not supplied to the SCN17A/SCT17B board due to
blow of the fuse (G011 on the SCNS17A/CT17B board) or +15V power supply error, most of the functions, except
10231 Scanner power supply error (1) for the polygonal mirror (POL) and laser (LDD), are disabled (detail code: A00300).
{MT:5.2}
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is A00000.

During bootup or during routine processing, because the fuse (G011 and G041 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board)
is blown, the photomultiplier (PMT/PMR) and start-point detection (SYN) functions are disabled (detail code:
10232 Scanner power supply error (2) 809500).
{MT:5.3}
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is 808400.

During bootup or during routine processing, because the fuse (H011 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board) is blown or
because -15V is not supplied to the SCN17A/SCT17B board, the photomultiplier (PMT/PMR), start-point detection
10233 Scanner power supply error (3) (SYN), and laser (LDD) functions are disabled. {MT:5.4}
Because the laser (LDD) is not enabled, the leading-edge detection (SED) cannot be performed (detail code:
A00300).

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-12
 MT-13

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
- During bootup or during routine processing, because the fuse (H011 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board) is blown,
±15V is not supplied to the SCN17A/SCT17B board, and the photomultiplier (PMT/PMR), start-point detection
(SYN), laser (LDD), and SCN board (PLL) functions are disabled. Because the laser (LDD) is not enabled, the
leading-edge detection (SED) cannot be performed (detail code: A00303).
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is A00003.
10234 Scanner power supply error (4) - During bootup, all the fuses except for the fuse (G04 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board) are blown, ±15V is not {MT:5.5}
supplied to the SCN17A/SCT17B board, and the photomultiplier (PMT/PMR), start-point detection (SYN), laser
(LDD), and SCN board (PLL) functions are disabled. Because the laser (LDD) is not enabled, the leading-edge
detection (SED) cannot be performed (detail code: B00300).
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is B00000.

- During bootup or during routine processing, because +24V is not supplied to the SCN17A/SCT17B board due
to blow of the fuse (J011 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board) or +24V (SLOT-J) power supply error, the polygonal
mirror (POL) function is disabled (detail code: 902403).
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is 903403.
10235 Scanner power supply error (5) - During bootup or during routine processing, because +5V is not supplied to the SYN12A board and SED17A
{MT:5.6}
board due to blow of the fuse (A061 or G021 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board) or +5V (SLOT-A) power supply
error, the leading-edge detection (SED) and start-point detection (SYN) functions are disabled (detail code:
C01400).

During bootup or during routine processing, because ±15V is not supplied to the SYN12A board, PMT17A/
PMR17B board, and LDD12A board due to blow of the fuses (G011 and H011 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board),
10236 Scanner power supply error (6) the photomultiplier (PMT/PMR), start-point detection (SYN), and laser (LDD) functions are disabled. Because the {MT:5.7}
laser (LDD) is not enabled, the leading-edge detection (SED) cannot be performed (detail code: 80D500).
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is 80D400.

During bootup, an SCN17A/SCT17B board diagnostic error associated with polygon error is detected.
10244 Scanner control board error (4) Because the PLL on the SCN17A/SCT17B board does not oscillate, a polygon sync signal cannot be detected.
{MT:18.}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-13
 MT-14

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup, error for the polygon lock signal (PONL, POKL) is detected so that the polygonal mirror function
10261 Polygon rotation error (1) is disabled. The start-point detection (SYN) and leading-edge detection (SED) functions are also disabled (detail {MT:5.8}
code: 903403, 003400, 902403).

During bootup, the laser (LDD) and start-point detection (SYN) functions are disabled due to blow of the fuse
10271 Laser unlit error (1) (G011 and H011 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board) or laser failure (detail code: 805413, C05413, 00503).
{MT:5.9}

During routine processing or during self-diagnostics, because the signal from the start-point detection (SYN) is
10281 Start-point detection error (1) faulty, the SCN17A/SCT17B board does not operate normally (detail code: 801C03).
{MT:5.10}

For self-diagnostics prior to reading during routine processing, the SCN17A/SCN17BA board diagnostic error
Scanning optics unit board error associated with polygon error is detected.
10283 The laser is unlit due to a disconnected connector at the scanning optics unit, etc., so that an error related to the
{MT:18.}
(1) polygon error occurs, as well.

10293 Printed board type error During bootup, an invalid SCN board type is detected. (SCN17A board is installed in CR-IR363.) {MT:18.}

10294 H8 CPU version error During bootup, an invalid H8 CPU version on the SCN17A/SCT17B is detected. {MT:18.}

During bootup, because the scanner-related error is detected, the IP is returned to the cassette and the scanner is
10298 Scanner retry error initialized. {MT:5.11}
The routine processing is retried again, but the scanner-related error recurs.

During routine processing, the IP transport motor (MB2, MC3) is driven for barcode reading retry operation (return
10343 IP barcode reading retry error (2) conveyance), but the side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified {MT:4.1}
period of time.

During routine processing, the IP transport motor (MC3) is driven for barcode reading retry operation, but the side-
10344 IP barcode reading retry error (1) positioning IP sensor (SC3) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.
{MT:4.1}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-14
 MT-15

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Side-positioning unit IP During routine processing, the IP transport motor (MC3) is driven for IP side-positioning conveyance, but the side-
10346 positioning IP sensor (SC3) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. {MT:4.1}
conveyance error
Subscanning unit IP leading-edge During routine processing excluding "secondary erasure," the subscanning motor (MZ1) is driven, but the IP
10347 leading-edge sensor (SZ1) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. {MT:4.2}
detection error
Subscanning unit IP ejection error During routine processing excluding "secondary erasure," the subscanning motor (MZ1) is driven, but the post-
10348 reading conveyance IP sensor (SD2) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. {MT:4.2}
(1)
Side-positioning unit IP ejection During secondary erasure processing, the IP transport motor (MC3, MD2) and subscanning motor (MZ1) are
10349 driven to read the IP after IP side-positioning, but the side-positioning IP sensor (SC3) does not transition to OPEN {MT:4.3}
error (2) within the specified period of time.

Erasure unit entrance IP sensor During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (MD2, ME1) is driven to convey the IP to the erasure
10350 conveyor unit after the IP is read; however, the CLOSE state of the switchback standby IP sensor (SE2) is {MT:4.4}
status error (1) detected before the post-reading conveyance standby IP sensor (SE1) transitions to CLOSE.

During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (MD2, ME1) is driven to convey the IP to the erasure
Erasure unit entrance IP sensor conveyor unit after the IP is read, and the switchback standby IP sensor (SE2) transitions to CLOSE; however,
10351 after the MD2, ME1 stops, the post-reading conveyance standby IP sensor (SE1) does not transition to CLOSE, so
{MT:4.4}
status error (2) that the system goes down.

Post-reading conveyor unit IP During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (MD2, ME1) is driven to convey the IP to the erasure
10352 conveyor unit after the IP is read; however, the post-reading conveyance standby IP sensor (SE1) does not {MT:4.4}
ejection error (1) transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.

Post-reading conveyor unit IP During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (MD2, ME1) is driven to convey the IP to the erasure
10353 conveyor unit after the IP is read; however, the post-reading conveyance standby IP sensor (SE1) does not {MT:4.4}
ejection error (2) transition to OPEN within the specified period of time.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-15
 MT-16

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Switchback unit IP conveyance During bootup/routine processing, the branch path changeover guide drive solenoid (SOLE1) and IP transport
10354 motor (ME1) are driven for IP switchback operation, but the CLOSE state of the post-reading conveyance standby {MT:4.5}
error (1) IP sensor (SE1) is detected.

Switchback unit IP conveyance During routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1) is driven for IP switchback operation, but the CLOSE state
10355 of the post-reading conveyance standby IP sensor (SE1) is detected before the switchback standby IP sensor {MT:4.5}
error (2) (SE2) transitions to OPEN.

Switchback unit IP conveyance During routine processing, the IP erasure processing conveyance ends by driving the IP conveyance motor (ME1),
10356 however, the CLOSE of the switchback standby IP sensor (SE2) is detected, so that the system goes down. {MT:4.5}
error (3)
Erasure lamp unit IP conveyance During routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1) is driven for IP conveyance (erasure conveyor unit), but
10357 the switchback standby IP sensor (SE2) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. {MT:4.5}
error
During routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1) is driven to convey the IP to the feed/load conveyor unit,
10358 Erasure unit IP ejection error but the pre-convergence IP sensor (SB6) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.
{MT:4.5}

Post-erasure feed/load unit IP During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1, MB1, MB2) is driven to convey the IP to the
10359 cassette after the IP is erased; however, the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) does not transition to CLOSE within the {MT:4.6}
conveyance error (1) specified period of time.

During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1, MB1, MB2) is driven to convey the IP to the
10360 Load IP conveyance error (1) cassette after the IP is erased, and the pre-BCR sensor (SB5) transitions to CLOSE; however, the IP feed/load {MT:4.6}
sensor (SB1/2/3/4) for the shelf of interest does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.

Post-erasure path guide status During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1, MB1, MB2) is driven to eject the IP to the cassette
10361 after the IP is erased; however, the IP feed/load sensor (SB1/2/3/4) transitions to CLOSE before the CLOSE state {MT:4.6}
error (1) of the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) is detected.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-16
 MT-17

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Post-erasure path guide status During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1, MB1, MB2) is driven to convey the IP to the
10362 cassette after the IP is erased, and the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) transitions to CLOSE; however, the IP feed/load {MT:4.6}
error (2) sensor (SB1/2/3/4) for other than the shelf of interest transitions to CLOSE.

During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1, MB1, MB2) is driven to convey the IP to the
10363 Load IP conveyance error (4) feed/load conveyor unit after the IP is erased; however, the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) does not transition to OPEN {MT:4.6}
within the specified period of time.

During bootup/routine processing/abnormality processing, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2) is driven to convey
10364 Load IP conveyance error (2) the IP to the cassette; however, the IP feed/load sensor (SB1/2/3/4) for the shelf of interest does not transition to {MT:4.6}
OPEN within the specified period of time.

During abnormality processing, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to eject the IP to the cassette;
10365 Load IP conveyance error (3) however, the IP feed/load sensor (SB1/2/3/4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. {MT:4.6}

During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven to
perform home-positioning of the path changeover guide (feed/load conveyor unit); however, the path changeover
10369 Path guide HP detection error shelf sensor (SB7/8/9) and path changeover HP sensor (SB11) do not transition to CLOSE within the specified
{MT:4.7}
period of time, resulting in a retry (twice or more).

Path guide changeover detection During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven
10371 to perform path changeover operation (feed/load conveyor unit); however, the path changeover shelf sensor {MT:4.7}
error (SB7/8/9) and path changeover HP sensor (SB11) do not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.

Convergence path guide HP During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven
10372 to perform path changeover operation (feed/load conveyor unit) after IP erasure; however, the convergence path {MT:4.7}
positioning error changeover sensor (SB10) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-17
 MT-18

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Side-positioning unit grip HP During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MC2) is driven to perform grip home-positioning of the side-
10374 positioning conveyor unit; however, the OPEN or CLOSE of the grip release HP sensor (SC2) is not detected. After {MT:4.8}
detection error two retries are executed, this is not detected, so that the system goes down.

Post-reading conveyor unit grip During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MD1) is driven to perform grip home-positioning of the post-reading
10378 conveyor unit; however, the OPEN or CLOSE of the grip release HP sensor (SD1) is not detected. After two retries {MT:4.9}
HP detection error are executed, this is not detected, so that the system goes down.

Erasure unit grip HP detection During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (ME3) is driven to perform grip home-positioning of the erasure
10382 conveyor unit; however, the OPEN or CLOSE of the grip release HP sensor (SE5) is not detected. After two retries {MT:4.10}
error are executed, this is not detected, so that the system goes down.

Side-positioning unit side- During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor (MC1) is driven to perform side-positioning
mechanism home-positioning of the side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the OPEN or CLOSE of the side-
10386 positioning mechanism HP positioning mechanism HP sensor (SC1) is not detected. After two retries are executed, this is not detected, so that {MT:4.11}
the system goes down.
detection error
During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor (ME2) is driven to perform side-positioning
Erasure unit side-positioning mechanism home-positioning of the erasure conveyor unit; however, the OPEN or CLOSE of the side-positioning
10390 mechanism HP sensor (SE4) is not detected. After two retries are executed, this is not detected, so that the system
{MT:4.11}
mechanism HP detection error goes down.

During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the suction cup drive motor (MA1/2/3/4) is driven to perform suction cup
10394 Suction cup HP detection error home-positioning; however, the OPEN or CLOSE of .the suction cup HP sensor (SA4/10/16/22) is not detected. {MT:4.12}
After two retries are executed, this is not detected, so that the system goes down.

During bootup/M-Utility, the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) is driven to perform home-positioning of the cleaning
10398 Cleaning guide HP detection error guide; however, the OPEN or CLOSE of the cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4) is not detected. After two retries are {MT:4.13}
executed, this is not detected, so that the system goes down.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-18
 MT-19

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup/M-Utility, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) is driven to perform home-positioning of the IP stopper;
10403 IP stopper HP detection error however, the OPEN or CLOSE of the IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5) is not detected. After two retries are executed, {MT:4.14}
this is not detected, so that the system goes down.

During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) is stopped to protrude the IP stopper;
10406 IP stopper protrusion error however, the OPEN or CLOSE of the IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5) is not detected. After two retries are executed, {MT:4.14}
this is not detected, so that the system goes down.

During routine processing/M-Utility, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to perform grip release operation for the
10410 Driving-shaft grip release error driving shaft; however, the driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) does not transition to CLOSE within the {MT:4.15}
specified period of time.

During routine processing/M-Utility except for secondary erasure, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to perform
10411 Driving-shaft grip error grip operation for the driving shaft; however, the driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) does not transition to {MT:4.15}
OPEN within the specified period of time.

During routine processing/M-Utility, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven at high speed to perform grip operation for
10412 Driving-shaft fast grip error the driving shaft; however, the driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) does not transition to OPEN within the {MT:4.15}
specified period of time.

During routine processing/M-Utility except for secondary erasure, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven at high
10413 Driven-shaft grip release error speed to perform grip release operation for the driven shaft; however, the driven-side grip release HP sensor (SZ3) {MT:4.15}
does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time.

During routine processing/M-Utility, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to perform grip release operation for
10414 Driven-shaft grip error the driven shaft; however, the driven-side grip release HP sensor (SZ3) does not transition to CLOSE within the {MT:4.15}
specified period of time.

Driven-shaft fast grip release During secondary erasure/M-Utility, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven at high speed to perform grip release
10415 operation for the driven shaft; however, the driven-side grip release HP sensor (SZ3) does not transition to OPEN {MT:4.15}
error within the specified period of time.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-19
 MT-20

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
For the correction processing during bootup/at the end of reading, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to correct
Driving-shaft grip correction error the grip speed of the driving shaft for the GR type; however, the driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) does not
10416 transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. {MT:4.15}
(4) After three times or more grip speed correction are executed, SZ2 does not transition to OPEN within the specified
period of time, so that the system goes down.

For the correction processing during bootup/at the end of reading, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to correct
the grip speed of the driving shaft for the ST type; however, the driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) does not
Driving-shaft grip correction error transition to OPEN within the specified period of time.
10417 Alternatively, the MZ2 does not transition to the interlocked state, then three times or more grip speed correction
{MT:4.15}
(1) are executed, however, SZ2 does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time, so that the system
goes down.

For the correction processing during bootup/at the end of reading, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to correct
the grip speed of the driving shaft for the HR single-side type; however, the driving-side grip release HP sensor
Driving-shaft grip correction error (SZ2) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time.
10418 Alternatively, the MZ2 does not transition to the interlocked state, then three times or more grip speed correction
{MT:4.15}
(2) are executed, however, SZ2 does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time, so that the system
goes down.

For the correction processing during bootup/at the end of reading, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to correct
the grip speed of the driving shaft for the HR both-side type; however, the driving-side grip release HP sensor
Driving-shaft grip correction error (SZ2) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time.
10419 Alternatively, the MZ2 does not transition to the interlocked state, then three times or more grip speed correction
{MT:4.15}
(3) are executed, however, SZ2 does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time, so that the system
goes down.

During bootup, two or more sensors of the IP feed/load sensors (SB1/2/3/4) are CLOSE for the remaining IP
10420 IP-initialization IP search error (1) search processing, so that the system goes down. {MT:4.16}
Several IPs are detected at the cassette set unit.

During bootup, two or more sensors of the path changeover HP sensor (SB11) and path changeover shelf sensor
10421 IP-initialization IP search error (2) (SB7/8/9) are CLOSE for the remaining IP search processing.
{MT:4.16}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-20
 MT-21

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup, the pre-convergence IP sensor (SB6) and side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) are CLOSE,
10422 IP-initialization IP search error (3) and the post-reading conveyance standby IP sensor (SE1) or switchback standby IP sensor (SE2) is CLOSE for {MT:4.16}
the remaining IP search processing. There are three or more IPs in the machine.

During bootup, when the presence of the cassette is checked, the IP is detected at the cassette set unit, but no
10425 IP-initialization IP search error (1) cassette is present at the cassette set unit. {MT:4.16}
Additionally, the hold pin (SOLA1/2/3/4: ON) is not lowered.

Initialization remaining IP ejection During bootup, the IP is detected, one by one, at the feed/load conveyor unit, erasure conveyor unit, and side-
10426 positioning conveyor unit for the remaining IP search. {MT:4.16}
error
During bootup, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (counterclockwise) to perform home-positioning of the dust
Dust removal HP detection error removal mechanism; however, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition from CLOSE to OPEN to
10430 CLOSE. After the retries (four times) are executed, the transition of SZ4 is not detected, so that the system goes
{MT:4.17}
(1) (CCW) down.

Dust removal HP detection error During bootup, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (counterclockwise) to perform home-positioning of the dust
10431 removal mechanism; however, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified {MT:4.17}
(2) (CCW) period of time.

Dust removal HP detection error During bootup, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (clockwise) to perform home-positioning of the dust removal
10432 mechanism; however, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period {MT:4.17}
(3) (CW) of time.

Dust removal HP detection error During bootup, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (clockwise) to perform home-positioning of the dust removal
10433 mechanism; however, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of {MT:4.17}
(4) (CW) time.

Dust removal HP detection error During bootup, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (clockwise) to perform home-positioning of the dust removal
10434 mechanism; however, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period {MT:4.17}
(5) (CW) of time.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-21
 MT-22

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During M-Utility, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (clockwise) to perform dust removal operation; however,
10435 Dust removal operation error (1) the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.
{MT:4.17}

During M-Utility, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (clockwise) to perform dust removal operation; however,
10436 Dust removal operation error (2) the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. {MT:4.17}

During M-Utility, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (counterclockwise) to perform dust removal operation;
10437 Dust removal operation error (3) however, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.
{MT:4.17}

During M-Utility, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (counterclockwise) to perform dust removal operation;
10438 Dust removal operation error (4) however, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time.
{MT:4.17}

During routine processing, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) is driven (clockwise) to perform the system shutdown
10439 Dust removal operation error (5) processing; however, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period {MT:4.17}
of time.

Initialization convergence path IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing;
10440 however, the side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) and pre-convergence IP sensor (SB6) do not transition to {MT:4.18}
conveyance error (1) OPEN within the specified period of time.

During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, ME1) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing;
Initialization convergence path IP however, the side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of
10441 time. {MT:4.18}
conveyance error (2) Alternatively, the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) and pre-convergence IP sensor (SB6) do not transition to OPEN within
the specified period of time.

During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing;
Initialization convergence path IP however, the side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) and pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) do not transition to OPEN
10442 within the specified period of time. {MT:4.18}
conveyance error (3) Alternatively, the pre-convergence IP sensor (SB6) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of
time.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-22
 MT-23

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Initialization feed path IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing;
10443 however, the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. {MT:4.18}
conveyance error (1) (UP)
Initialization feed path IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing;
10444 however, the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. {MT:4.18}
conveyance error (2) (DOWN)
Initialization feed entrance IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing;
10445 however, the IP feed/load sensor (SB1/2/3/4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. {MT:4.18}
conveyance error (1) (DOWN)
Initialization feed entrance IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, ME1) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing;
10446 however, the IP feed/load sensor (SB1/2/3/4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. {MT:4.18}
conveyance error (2) (DOWN) (When the IP in the feed/load conveyor unit is moved into the side-positioning conveyor unit.)

Initialization side-positioning unit During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven in the direction of subscanning conveyance to
10447 perform the remaining IP search processing; however, the side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) does not {MT:4.19}
IP conveyance error (1) (DOWN) transition to OPEN within the specified period of time.

Initialization side-positioning unit During bootup, the IP transport motor (MC3) is driven in the direction of feed/load conveyor unit to perform the
10448 remaining IP search processing; however, the side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) does not transition to {MT:4.19}
IP conveyance error (2) (UP) CLOSE within the specified period of time.

Initialization side-positioning unit During bootup, the IP transport motor (MC3) and subscanning motor (MZ1) are driven to perform the remaining IP
10449 search processing; however, the side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) does not transition to CLOSE within {MT:4.19}
IP conveyance error (3) (UP) the specified period of time.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-23
 MT-24

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup, the IP transport motor (MC3) and subscanning motor (MZ1) are driven to perform the remaining IP
Initialization side-positioning unit search processing; however, the side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) does not transition to CLOSE within
10450 the specified period of time. (In the case that the IP is detected in the side-positioning unit for the subscanning
{MT:4.19}
IP conveyance error (4) (UP) conveyor unit processing.)

Initialization erasure unit IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, ME1) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing;
10451 however, the pre-convergence IP sensor (SB6) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. {MT:4.20}
ejection error (1)
Initialization erasure unit IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (ME1) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing; however, the
10452 pre-convergence IP sensor (SB6) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. {MT:4.20}
ejection error (2)
Initialization erasure unit IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MD2, ME1) is driven at low speed to perform the remaining IP search
10453 processing; however, the post-reading conveyance standby IP sensor (SE1) does not transition to OPEN within the {MT:4.20}
conveyance error specified period of time.

Initialization post-reading During bootup, the IP transport motor (MD2) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing; however,
the post-reading conveyance IP sensor (SD2) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time.
10454 conveyor unit IP ejection error (1) (In the case that the IP is detected in the post-reading conveyor unit also, during the IP search processing in the {MT:4.20}
subscanning unit.)
(UP)
Initialization post-reading During bootup, the IP transport motor (MD2) and subscanning motor (MZ1) are driven to perform the remaining IP
search processing; however, the post-reading conveyance IP sensor (SD2) does not transition to OPEN within the
10455 conveyor unit IP ejection error (2) specified period of time. {MT:4.20}
(UP)
Initialization post-reading During bootup, the IP transport motor (MD2) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing; however, the
post-reading conveyance IP sensor (SD2) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.
10456 conveyor unit IP ejection error (3) {MT:4.20}
(DOWN)
Initialization subscanning unit IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MD2) and subscanning motor (MZ1) are driven to perform the remaining IP
10457 search processing; however, the post-reading conveyance IP sensor (SD2) does not transition to OPEN within the {MT:4.20}
ejection error (1) specified period of time.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-24
 MT-25

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Initialization subscanning unit IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MC3) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing; however, the
10458 post-reading conveyance IP sensor (SD2) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. {MT:4.20}
ejection error (2)
Initialization IP position During bootup, the CMOS information of the machine (IP found) does not coincide with the remaining IP search
10459 processing result (IP not found) so that the system goes down by user selection. {MT:4.20}
information error
Initialization IP load conveyance During bootup, when an IP is loaded into the cassette, the IP feed/load sensor (SB1/2/3/4) on the shelf of interest
10460 does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. {MT:4.6}
error (1)
Initialization IP load conveyance During bootup, when an IP is loaded into the cassette from the erasure conveyor unit, the pre-BCR IP sensor
10461 (SB5) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. {MT:4.6}
error (2)
Initialization IP load conveyance During bootup, when an IP is loaded into the cassette from the erasure conveyor unit, the IP feed/load sensor
10462 (SB1/2/3/4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. {MT:4.6}
error (3)
10694 Back-side H8 CPU version error During bootup, an invalid H8 CPU version on the SCT17B is detected. {MT:18.}

During bootup, the SDRAM, or main memory of the CPU91A board, is tested, and a retry is executed twice, but
10700 SDRAM test error error is detected.
{MT:18.}

10799 CPU bus error During bootup or during routine processing, a bus error for the main CPU on the CPU91A board is detected. {MT:18.}

11200 Initialization HV-OFF status During bootup, HV(high voltage) on PMT17A/PMR17B board is OFF. {MT:13.}

11273 Laser life warning During bootup, the laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times the factory default value. {MT:5.15}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-25
 MT-26

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
<User operation>
After the cassette is loaded, the cassette is pulled out immediately.
<Occurrence condition>
11320 Cassette setting status error (1) During routine processing/M-Utility, the cassette hold solenoid (SOLA1/2/3/4) is turned OFF to hold the
{MT:4.21}
cassette, and the cassette hold sensor (SA3/9/15/21) detects the OPEN state; however, the cassette IN sensor
(SA2/8/14/20) detects the OPEN state.

During routine processing/M-Utility, the cassette hold solenoid (SOLA1/2/3/4) is turned OFF to hold the cassette,
11321 Cassette setting status error (2) and the hold pin protrudes; however, the cassette hold sensor (SA3/9/15/21) does not transition to OPEN. Though {MT:4.21}
the retries (twice or more) are executed, the cassette is not held. (A message is notified.)

During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the OPEN state of the cassette IN sensor (SA2/8/14/20) is detected for
11322 Cassette setting status error (3) the sensor check processing just before the IP is sucked after cassette loading.
{MT:4.21}

During routine processing/M-Utility, the CLOSE state of the cassette hold sensor (SA3/9/15/21) is detected for the
11323 Cassette setting status error (4) sensor check processing just before the IP is sucked after cassette loading.
{MT:4.21}

During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the cassette hold solenoid (SOLA1/2/3/4) is turned ON to release the
11324 Hold pin release error cassette hold; however, the cassette hold sensor (SA3/9/15/21) does not transition to CLOSE. Though the retries {MT:4.21}
(twice) are executed, the cassette hold is not released. (A message is notified.)

11325 Cassette loading inlet disabled During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the user disables the shelf after occurrence of "11324" error. {MT:4.21}

During routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP suction pump (PA1/2/3/4) is driven to convey the
11328 Feed IP suction error (1) IP from the cassette to the feed/load conveyor unit; however, the suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) does not transition {MT:4.22}
to OPEN within the specified period of time. Though the retries (twice) are executed, the IP is not sucked.

During routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP is sucked to perform suction conveyance of

the IP from the cassette to the feed/load conveyor unit; however, the CLOSE state (IP drop) of the suction sensor
11329 Feed IP suction error (2) (drop) (SA5/11/17/23) is detected during IP conveyance. Though the retries (twice) for the IP suction are executed, the IP
{MT:4.22}
drop is detected again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-26
 MT-27

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Feed/load unit entrance IP feed During routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, an attempt is made to convey the IP from the cassette
11330 to the feed/load conveyor unit; however, the IP feed/load sensor (SB1/2/3/4) does not transition to CLOSE. Though {MT:4.22}
retry the retries (twice) for the IP suction are executed, the IP is not transported to the IP feed/load sensor.

During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the
11332 Feed IP conveyance error (1) feed/load conveyor unit to the side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) does not {MT:4.23}
transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.

During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the
11333 Feed IP conveyance error (2) feed/load conveyor unit to the side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the side-positioning entrance IP sensor {MT:4.23}
(SG1) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.

During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the
11334 Feed IP conveyance error (3) feed/load conveyor unit to the side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) does not {MT:4.23}
transition to OPEN within the specified period of time.

During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the
11335 Feed IP conveyance error (4) feed/load conveyor unit to the side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the side-positioning IP sensor (SC3) does {MT:4.23}
not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.

During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the
Feed IP sensor failure (1) feed/load conveyor unit to the side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the side-positioning IP sensor (SC3) or
11336 side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) transitions to CLOSE before the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) transitions to
{MT:4.23}
(SB5 failure) CLOSE.

Feed IP sensor failure (2) During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to convey the IP from
11337 the feed/load conveyor unit to the side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the side-positioning IP sensor (SC3) {MT:4.23}
(SG1 failure) transitions to CLOSE before the side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) transitions to CLOSE.

During routine processing/M-Utility, an out-of-spec cassette is loaded into the machine (CR-IR362) equipped with a
11338 Cassette type error both-side cassette error detection option.
{MT:4.24}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-27
 MT-28

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
<User operation>
A cassette that is not compatible with the machine is loaded.
11339 Cassette barcode reading error <Occurrence condition>
{MT:4.24}
During routine processing, the barcode of the cassette can be read, but the data is defective.

During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2), convergence path changeover guide drive
motor (MB3), and side-positioning motor (MC1) are driven to determine the IP size; when the IP passage time for
11340 IP size detection error (1) the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5), the detection status of the "11x14 IP" determination sensor (SG2), and the sensor {MT:4.25}
status of the inch/metric sensor (SA6, SA12, SA18, SA24) are checked, the result does not indicate a sensor
combination that is used for IP size determination. Nonconformance of the IP size is detected.

During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP size detected by the machine is compared with the IP barcode
11341 IP size detection error (2) information; however, error is detected in the barcode information.
{MT:4.25}

During routine processing, the barcode cannot be read by the barcode reader (BCRC1) of the side-positioning
11343 IP barcode reading error conveyor unit. Though the retries (twice) for reading the barcode are executed, it also cannot read, so that a -
barcode data message which is inputted manually by user is displayed.

During routine processing/M-Utility, the barcode information of the IP and the IP type that is set in CONFIG are
11345 IP type error compared; however, the barcode information of an IP type other than the CONFIG setting is detected.
-

During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP suction pump (PA1/2/3/4) is driven to

11366 Load IP suction error (1) load the IP to the cassette; however, the suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) does not transition to OPEN within the {MT:4.26}
specified period of time. Though the retries (twice) are executed, the IP cannot be sucked.

During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the IP is sucked to perform suction conveyance of the IP from the feed/
load conveyor unit to the cassette; however, the CLOSE state (IP drop) of the suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) is
11367 Load IP suction error (2) (drop) detected during IP conveyance. Though the retries (twice) for the IP suction are executed, the IP drop is detected
{MT:4.26}
again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-28
 MT-29

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup, the IP is detected in the cassette set unit; however, the OPEN state of the cassette IN sensor
11425 Initialization cassette status error (SA2/8/14/20) or the CLOSE state of the cassette hold sensor (SA3/9/15/21) is detected for the confirmation of the {MT:4.27}
presence of cassette, so that inconsistency of the sensor status is detected.

Initialization IP position During bootup, the CMOS information (IP found) of the machine does not coincide with the remaining IP search
11459 processing result (IP not found), so that the user is notified. {MT:4.20}
information error
11510 Unread IP ejection (1) During routine processing, the IP is ejected, without being read, to the cassette for some reason on the CL side. -

<User operation>
This error occurs during image output when the menu is not selected .
11511 Patient information not registered <Occurrence condition> -
The patient information corresponding to the barcode of the processed IP has not been registered in the CL.
Alternatively, the barcode cannot be read because the barcode affixed on the IP is soiled or the like.

11530 Image data retransmission The RU has retransmitted the image data to the CL -

During routine processing, an attempt is made to retransmit the unsent image data from the RU to the CL after
11531 Retransmission retry failure communication with the CL is suspended; however, the CL rejects it, so that the image data is lost and the cassette -
is ejected.

Thermistor failure detection During bootup, it is detected that temperature control of the erasure unit is disabled due to temperature thermistor
11731 (THE1) error. {MT:6.4}
(during erasure initialization)
Lamp unlit detection (during During bootup, the erasure lamps are turned on to check their lighting, but a single center lamp (socket L3) of the
11737 five erasure lamps is unlit. Or, two or more erasure lamps are unlit. {MT:6.2}
erasure initialization)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-29
 MT-30

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Thermistor failure detection During routine processing, error for the temperature thermistor (THE1) is detected.
11751 {MT:6.4}
(during IP processing)
Lamp unlit detection (during During machine idle state, in order to perform erasure temperature control, the erasure lamps are turned on to
11757 check their lighting, but a single center lamp (socket L3) of the five erasure lamps is unlit. Or, two or more erasure {MT:6.2}
erasure idle temperature control) lamps are unlit.

Lamp unlit detection (during IP During IP erasure, the erasure lamps are turned on to check their lighting, but a single center lamp (socket L3) of
11767 the five erasure lamps is unlit. Or, two or more erasure lamps are unlit. {MT:6.2}
erasure lighting)
Thermistor failure detection During idle state after machine bootup, error for the temperature thermistor (THE1) is detected.
11781 {MT:6.4}
(during idling)
During bootup, loading of the bitmap file from the FLASH ROM to SD RAM fails.
12030 Bitmap file load error {MT:18.}

During bootup and during routine processing, the FTP server cannot be accessed for communication from the RU
12071 FTP server access error to the CL. Or, the FTP server may be accessed, but a connection cannot be established.
{MT:7.}

MUTL mode multiple access - "MUTL mode" functions are simultaneously activated for the RU.
12080 - The function that is entered first is activated, but the function that is entered second is not activated, and error is -
warning logged.

Image processing CPU data - A warning log indicating that dummy data was sent from the IMG17A/IMG17B board due to image data shortage.
12101 - During routine processing, the image data sent from the SCN17SCT17B board to the IMG17A/IMG17B board is {MT:18.}
output shortage insufficient.

During routine processing, a timeout of the frame clock lock (information indicative of the leading edge of the
12148 Image frame clock timeout image data) sent from the SCN17A/SCT17B board is detected by the sub-CPU. (30 seconds)
{MT:6.1}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-30
 MT-31

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
An error is detected for the pixel clock from the sub-CPU of the IMG17A/IMG17B board to the SCN17A/SCT17B
Image processing pixel clock board.
12149 - The pixel clock that is larger than the parameter value is detected.
{MT:6.1}
excess error - The pixel clock, which is part of image data, denotes the number of pixels for one line of image data.

Image processing pixel clock During routine processing, when the image data from the SCN17A/SCT17B board is processed, an insufficient
12150 number of pixels for a certain line is detected by the sub-CPU. {MT:6.1}
shortage error
Image processing line clock During routine processing, when the image data from the SCN17A/SCT17B board is processed, an excess
12151 number of lines is detected. {MT:6.1}
excess error
Image processing line clock During routine processing, when the image data from the SCN17A/SCT17B board is processed, an insufficient
12152 number of lines is detected, or even when five seconds have passed after the trailing edge of a certain line clock, {MT:6.1}
shortage error the trailing edge of its subsequent line clock is not detected.

Image processing frame clock During routine processing, when an image processing command is accepted from the SCN17A/SCT17B board to
12153 the sub-CPU, the sub-CPU has already received the frame clock from the SCN. {MT:6.1}
error
12154 Image processing overrun error During routine processing, the main CPU loses some of the image data from the sub-CPU. {MT:18.}

During routine processing, the sub-CPU completes its processing normally, but the number of pixels received by
12164 FIFO data count shortage error the main CPU via the FIFO is insufficient.
{MT:18.}

During routine processing, the sub-CPU completes its processing normally, but the number of pixels received by
12165 FIFO data count excess error the main CPU via FIFO is excessive.
{MT:18.}

12201 Start-point detection error During bootup, error for the start-point detection signal (SSH, SSL) is detected. {MT:5.1}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-31
 MT-32

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
12202 Leading-edge detection error During bootup, only error for the leading-edge detection signal (SED1L) is detected. {MT:5.1}

During bootup, an SCN board diagnostic error (no main-scan sync signal is generated) associated with polygon
12203 SCN sync signal error error occurs.
{MT:5.1}

During bootup, an SCN board diagnostic error (no polygon index signal is generated) associated with polygon
12204 Polygon index signal error error occurs.
{MT:5.1}

During bootup and routine processing, error for the PMT analog power supply signal (+15VOKH, +15VOKL) is
12211 PMT analog power supply error detected.
{MT:5.2}

12212 Laser light intensity error During bootup and routine processing, error for the laser OK signal (LD1OKH, LD1OKL) is detected. {MT:5.1}

12213 Polygon lock error During bootup and routine processing, error for the polygon lock signal (POKL, PONL) is detected. {MT:5.1}

During bootup and routine processing, error is detected for the polygon rotation detection function on the SCN17A/
12214 Polygon rotation error SCT17B board.
{MT:5.1}

12215 PLL function error During bootup and routine processing, error is detected for the PLL function on the SCN17A/SCT17B board. {MT:5.1}

During bootup and routine processing, error is detected for the start-point interval function on the SCN17A/
12216 Start-point interval error SCT17B board.
{MT:5.1}

High-voltage command value During bootup and routine processing, error is detected for the high-voltage command value diagnostics signal on
12217 the SCN17A/SCT17B board. {MT:5.3}
error
During bootup and routine processing, error is detected for the high-voltage detection value diagnostics signal on
12218 High-voltage detection value error the SCN17A/SCT17B board.
{MT:5.3}

During bootup and routine processing, the laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times the factory
12222 Laser drive current value error default value.
{MT:5.4}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-32
 MT-33

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
12225 Reading status error During routine processing, error is detected for the VSYNC signal on the SCN17A/SCT17B board. {MT:18.}

12226 Operation line status error During routine processing, error is detected for the SEDTM/FCLKTM signal on the SCN17A/SCT17B board. {MT:18.}

During bootup or during routine processing, error is detected for the PLL function, polygon rotation function, start-
12241 Scanner control board error (1) point interval function on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.
{MT:5.1}

During routine processing, because the PMT high-voltage value is not set correctly on the SCN17A/SCT17B
12242 Scanner control board error (2) board, error is detected for the high-voltage command diagnostics.
{MT:5.1}

During bootup or during routine processing, error is detected for the start-point mask signal generated from the
12243 Scanner control board error (3) SCN17A/SCT17B board and the index signal (PINDXL) from the polygonal mirror (POL).
{MT:5.1}

During routine processing, an SCN board diagnostic error associated with polygon error is detected. Because the
12244 Scanner control board error (4) PLL on the SCN17A/SCT17B board does not oscillate, a polygon sync signal cannot be detected.
{MT:5.1}

Photomultiplier control board error During bootup or during routine processing, only error for the PMT analog power supply signal (+15VOKH,
12251 +15VOKL) is detected (detail code: 008100). Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is 008000. {MT:5.12}
(1)
Photomultiplier control board error During bootup or during routine processing, only error for the high-voltage power supply signal (HVOKH, HVOKL)
12252 is detected. {MT:5.12}
(2)
During bootup or during routine processing, only error for the leading-edge detection signal (SED1, SED2L) is
12255 Leading-edge detection error (1) detected.
{MT:5.13}

Leading-edge detection timing During routine processing, IP conveyance overrun occurs due to mechanical error or SCN17A/SCT17B board
12256 control error, and only error for the SEDTM and FCLKTM signals on the SCN17A/SCT17B board is detected. {MT:5.14}
error

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-33
 MT-34

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup, error for the polygon lock signal (PONL, POKL) is detected so that the polygonal mirror function is
12261 Polygon rotation error (1) disabled. The start-point detection (SYN) and leading-edge detection (SED) functions are also disabled. {MT:5.8}

During bootup, error for the polygon lock signal (PONL, POKL) and error for the start-point interval function and
12262 Polygon rotation error (2) polygon rotation detection function on the SCN17A/SCT17B board are detected (detail code: 003400).
{MT:5.8}

During bootup, only error for the lock signal (POKL, PONL) from the polygonal mirror (POL) is detected (detail
12263 Polygon rotation error (3) code: 002001). {MT:5.8}
If error for the SEDTM or FCLKTM signal on the SCN17A/SCT17B board is detected, the detail code is 002003.

During bootup or during routine processing, error for the signals (PONL, POKL, PINDXL) from the polygonal mirror
and the SEDTM signal on the SCN17A/SCT17B board is detected (detail code: 001002).
Alternatively, error for the index signal (PINDXL) from the polygonal mirror and the SEDTM and FCLKTM signals
12264 Polygon rotation error (4) on the SCN17A/SCT17B board is detected (detail code: 001000).
{MT:5.8}
Alternatively, error for the signals (POKL, PINDXL) from the polygonal mirror and the SEDTM signal on the
SCN17A/SCT17B board is detected (error code: 101000).

During routine processing, the laser (LDD) and start-point detection (SYN) functions are disabled due to blow of
12271 Laser unlit error (1) the fuse (G011 and H011 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board) or laser failure (detail code: 805413, C05413, 00503).
{MT:9}

During routine processing, the laser light intensity is less than 50%, and the laser light intensity error signal
(LD1OKL, LD1OKH) is detected (detail code: 004000).
12272 Insufficient laser light intensity Alternatively, the laser light intensity error signal (LD1OKL, LD1OKH) and laser drive current value (LDIF) error are
{MT:13}
detected (detail code: 014000).

12273 Laser life warning During routine processing, the laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times the factory default value. {MT:5.15}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-34
 MT-35

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup, the disabled state of the start-point detection (SYN) function, and error for the PLL function and
polygon rotation detection function on the SCN17A/SCT17B board are detected (detail code: 801C03).
Alternatively, the disabled state of the start-point detection (SYN) function, and error for the PLL function on the
12281 Start-point detection error (1) SCN17A/SCT17B board are detected (detail code: 800C03). {MT:5.10}
Alternatively, during routine processing, the disabled state of the start-point detection (SYN) function, and error for
the PLL function and polygon rotation detection function on the SCN17A/SCT17B board are detected (detail code:
801401).

During bootup and routine processing, only error for the start-point interval function on the SCN17A/SCN17B
board is detected (detail code: 000400).
12282 Start-point detection error (2) Alternatively, error for the start-point interval function and polygon rotation detection function on the SCN17A/
{MT:13}
SCN17B board is detected (detail code: 001401).

Scanning optics unit board error During bootup, the laser (LDD), start-point detection (SYN), and leading-edge detection (SED) functions are
12283 disabled due to laser failure or disconnected connector. {MT:5.15}
during bootup
12284 LD monitor value error warning During IP reading, the laser drive current value (LDIF) becomes more than 1.4 times the factory default value. {MT:5.4}

During IP reading, error is detected for the HV command value signal sent from the SCN17A/SCT17B board to the
12285 HV command value error warning PMT17A/PMR17B board. The difference between MIN and MAX of the monitor value relative to the setup value is {MT:5.7}
out of specification.

During routine processing, error is detected for the HV detection value signal of the PMT17A/PMR17B board. The
12286 HV detection value error warning difference between MIN and MAX of the monitor value relative to the setup value is out of specification.
{MT:5.7}

Image data variation or image For quasi-data transfer diagnostics during bootup, error for the quasi-data variations is detected, alternatively any
one of image data variations, unplugged image signal connector or wrong connection of connector is detected.
12287 signal connector error during {MT:5.1}
bootup

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-35
 MT-36

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During routine processing, error for the VSYNC signal on the SCN17A/SCT17B board is detected after IP reading
12291 Reading sequence error is completed (detail code: 000002).
{MT:18.}

Reading sequence error during Reading is completed by any interrupt other than the leading-edge detection interrupt or end-of-screen interrupt.
12292 At the same time, an insufficient number of output lines and a too-early start of reading are detected (detail code: -
routine (2) 000003).

During bootup, or during routine processing, or in the Maintenance Utility, control communication between the
12295 Scanner send/receive error CPU91A board and SCN17A/SCT17B board is performed; however, because error for the scanner unit is detected, {MT:6.1}
the control communication does not end normally.

During bootup, during routine processing, or in the Maintenance Utility, control communication between the
12296 Scanner send sum check error CPU91A board and SCN17A/SCT17B board can be done; however, sum check error is detected from the {MT:6.1}
SCN17A/SCT17B board.

During bootup, or during routine processing, or in the Maintenance Utility, communication between the CPU91A
12297 Communication receive size error board and SCN17A/SCT17B board can be done; however, data size error is detected from the SCN17A/SCT17B {MT:6.1}
board.

During routine processing, because scanner-related error is detected, the IP is returned to the cassette and
12298 Scanner retry error scanner initialization is performed, with a retry made for routine processing.
{MT:5.11}

During bootup or routine processing, a combination of errors that should not have logically occurred were
12299 Error for scanner, etc. generated.
-

<User operation>
Cassette setting status warning After the cassette is loaded, the cassette is pulled out immediately.
12320 <Occurrence condition> {MT:4.21}
(1) During routine processing/M-Utility, the cassette hold solenoid (SOLA1/2/3/4) is turned OFF to hold the cassette,
and the hold pin protrudes; however, the cassette ejection sensor (SA1/7/13/19) transitions to OPEN.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-36
 MT-37

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During routine processing/M-Utility, the cassette hold solenoid (SOLA1/2/3/4) is turned OFF to hold the cassette,
12321 Cassette hold retry and the hold pin protrudes; however, the cassette hold sensor (SA3/9/15/21) does not transition to OPEN, thus {MT:4.21}
resulting in a retry.

Cassette setting status warning During routine processing/M-Utility, when a sensor check is made after cassette loading, the OPEN state of the
12322 cassette ejection sensor (SA1/7/13/19) is detected. {MT:4.21}
(2)
During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the cassette hold solenoid (SOLA1/2/3/4) is turned ON to release the
12324 Hold pin release retry cassette hold; however, the cassette hold sensor (SA3/9/15/21) does not transition to CLOSE, thus resulting in a {MT:4.21}
retry.

During routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP suction pump (PA1/2/3/4) is driven to convey the
12328 Feed IP suction retry (1) IP from the cassette to the feed/load conveyor unit; however, the suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) does not transition {MT:4.22}
to OPEN within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.

During routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP is sucked to convey the IP from the cassette to
12329 Feed IP suction retry (2) (drop) the feed/load conveyor unit; however, the CLOSE state of the suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) is detected during IP {MT:4.22}
conveyance, thus resulting in a retry.

Feed/load unit entrance IP feed During routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, an attempt is made to convey the IP from the cassette
12330 to the feed/load conveyor unit; however, the IP feed/load sensor (SB1/2/3/4) does not transition to CLOSE, thus {MT:4.22}
conveyance retry resulting in retries (twice) for suction operation.

During routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP leak valve (SVA1/2/3/4) is driven to convey the
12331 IP-feed air leak warning IP from the cassette to the feed/load conveyor unit, and the IP suction pump (PA1/2/3/4) is stopped; however, the {MT:4.22}
suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.

During routine processing, the barcode cannot be read by the IP barcode reader (BCRC1) of the side-positioning
12343 IP barcode reading retry conveyor unit.
{MT:4.28}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-37
 MT-38

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
FFM motor rpm out of During routine processing except for secondary erasure, the motor rotation W.F. error of the subscanning motor
12348 (MZ1) for the W.F. monitoring operation is detected. {MT:4.29}
specification
During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (MD2, ME1) is driven to convey the IP to the erasure
12350 SE2 IP sensor status warning conveyor unit after the IP is read, and the post-reading conveyance standby IP sensor (SE1) transitions to CLOSE; {MT:4.30}
however, the switchback standby IP sensor (SE2) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.

During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1, MB1, MB2) is driven to convey the IP to the
12359 SB5 IP sensor status warning cassette after the IP is erased; however, the IP feed/load sensor (SB1/2/3/4) transitions to CLOSE before the {MT:4.31}
CLOSE state of the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) is detected.

During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP suction pump (PA1/2/3/4) is driven to

12366 Load IP suction retry (1) return the processed IP to the cassette; however, the suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) does not transition to OPEN {MT:4.26}
within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a suction retry.

During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the IP suction pump (PA1/2/3/4) is driven to perform IP load
12367 Load IP suction retry (2) (drop) conveyance, and the suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) transitions to OPEN; however, the SA5/11/17/23 transitions to {MT:4.26}
CLOSE (IP drop) during IP load conveyance, thus resulting in a suction retry.

During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP lead valve (SVA1/2/3/4) is driven to

return the processed IP from the feed/load conveyor unit to the cassette, and the IP suction pump (PA1/2/3/4) is
12368 IP-load air leak warning stopped; however, the suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of
{MT:4.26}
time.

During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven to
12369 Path guide HP detection retry (1) perform home-positioning of the path changeover guide (feed/load conveyor unit); however, the path changeover {MT:4.7}
HP sensor (SB11) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-38
 MT-39

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven to
12370 Path guide HP detection retry (2) perform home-positioning of the path changeover guide (feed/load conveyor unit); however, the path changeover {MT:4.7}
shelf sensor (SB7/8/9) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.

During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven
to perform path changeover operation (feed/load conveyor unit); however, the path changeover shelf sensor
12371 Path guide changeover retry (SB7/8/9) and path changeover HP sensor (SB11) do not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time,
{MT:4.7}
thus resulting in a retry.

During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven
Convergence path guide to perform path changeover operation (feed/load conveyor unit) after IP erasure; however, the convergence path
12372 changeover sensor (SB10) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time, thus resulting in HP
{MT:4.7}
changeover warning positioning.

Convergence path guide HP During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven
12373 to perform path changeover operation (feed/load conveyor unit) after IP erasure; however, the convergence path {MT:4.7}
detection retry (2) changeover sensor (SB10) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.

Side-positioning unit grip HP During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MC2) is driven for one pulse to perform grip home-positioning of
12374 the side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the grip release HP sensor (SC2) does not transition to CLOSE within {MT:4.8}
detection retry (1) the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.

Side-positioning unit grip HP During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MC2) is driven to perform grip home-positioning of the side-
12375 positioning conveyor unit; however, the grip release HP sensor (SC2) does not transition to CLOSE within the {MT:4.8}
detection retry (2) specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.

Side-positioning unit grip HP During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MC2) is driven to perform grip home-positioning of the side-
12376 positioning conveyor unit; however, the grip release HP sensor (SC2) does not transition to OPEN within the {MT:4.8}
detection retry (3) specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-39
 MT-40

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Side-positioning unit grip HP During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MC2) is driven to perform grip operation of the
12377 side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the grip release HP sensor (SC2) does not transition to CLOSE, so that {MT:4.8}
detection warning home-positioning is performed.

Post-reading conveyor unit grip During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MD1) is driven for one pulse to perform grip home-positioning of
12378 the post-reading conveyor unit; however, the grip release HP sensor (SD1) does not transition to CLOSE within the {MT:4.9}
HP detection retry (1) specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.

Post-reading conveyor unit grip During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MD1) is driven to perform grip home-positioning of the post-reading
12379 conveyor unit; however, the grip release HP sensor (SD1) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period {MT:4.9}
HP detection retry (2) of time, thus resulting in a retry.

Post-reading conveyor unit grip During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MD1) is driven to perform grip home-positioning of the post-reading
12380 conveyor unit; however, the grip release HP sensor (SD1) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period {MT:4.9}
HP detection retry (3) of time, thus resulting in a retry.

Post-reading conveyor unit grip During routine processing/primary erasure/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MD1) is driven after IP reading;
12381 however, the grip release HP sensor (SD1) does not transition to CLOSE, so that home-positioning is performed. {MT:4.9}
HP detection retry (4)
Erasure unit grip HP detection During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (ME3) is driven for one pulse to perform grip home-positioning of
12382 the erasure conveyor unit; however, the grip release HP sensor (SE5) does not transition to CLOSE within the {MT:4.10}
retry (1) specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.

Erasure unit grip HP detection During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (ME3) is driven to perform grip home-positioning of the erasure
12383 conveyor unit; however, the grip release HP sensor (SE5) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period {MT:4.10}
retry (2) of time, thus resulting in a retry.

Erasure unit grip HP detection During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (ME3) is driven to perform grip home-positioning of the erasure
12384 conveyor unit; however, the grip release HP sensor (SE5) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period {MT:4.10}
retry (3) of time, thus resulting in a retry.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-40
 MT-41

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Erasure unit grip HP detection During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (ME3) is driven to convey the IP after IP erasure; however, the grip
12385 release HP sensor (SE5) does not transition to CLOSE, so that home-positioning is performed. {MT:4.10}
warning
Side-positioning unit side- During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor (MC1) is driven for one pulse to perform
home-positioning of the side-positioning mechanism (side-positioning conveyor unit); however, the side-positioning
12386 positioning mechanism HP mechanism HP sensor (SC1) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a {MT:4.11}
retry.
detection retry (1)
Side-positioning unit side- During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor (MC1) is driven to perform home-positioning
of the side-positioning mechanism (side-positioning conveyor unit); however, the side-positioning mechanism HP
12387 positioning mechanism HP sensor (SC1) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry. {MT:4.11}
detection retry (2)
Side-positioning unit side- During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor (MC1) is driven to perform home-positioning
of the side-positioning mechanism (side-positioning conveyor unit); however, the side-positioning mechanism HP
12388 positioning mechanism HP sensor (SC1) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry. {MT:4.11}
detection retry (3)
Side-positioning unit side- During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, when the home position is checked after the side-positioning operation
is completed at the side-positioning conveyor unit, the side-positioning mechanism HP sensor (SC1) does not
12389 positioning mechanism HP transition to CLOSE, so that home-positioning is performed. {MT:4.11}
detection warning
During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor (ME2) is driven for one pulse to perform
Erasure unit side-positioning side-positioning mechanism home-positioning of the erasure conveyor unit; however, the erasure side-positioning
12390 mechanism HP sensor (SE4) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a
{MT:4.11}
mechanism HP detection retry (1) retry.

Erasure unit side-positioning During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor (ME2) is driven to perform side-positioning
12391 mechanism home-positioning of the erasure conveyor unit; however, the erasure side-positioning mechanism HP {MT:4.11}
mechanism HP detection retry (2) sensor (SE4) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-41
 MT-42

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Erasure unit side-positioning During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor (ME2) is driven to perform side-positioning
12392 mechanism home-positioning in the erasure conveyor unit; however, the erasure side-positioning mechanism HP {MT:4.11}
mechanism HP detection retry (3) sensor (SE4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.

Erasure unit side-positioning During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the erasure side-positioning mechanism HP sensor (SE4) does not
12393 transition to CLOSE after the side-positioning operation of the IP erasure conveyance is completed, so that home- {MT:4.11}
mechanism HP detection warning positioning is performed.

During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the suction cup drive motor (MA1/2/3/4) is driven for one pulse to
12394 Suction cup HP detection retry (1) perform suction cup home-positioning; however, the suction cup HP sensor (SA4/10/16/22) does not transition to {MT:4.12}
CLOSE within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.

During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the suction cup drive motor (MA1/2/3/4) is driven to perform suction
12395 Suction cup HP detection retry (2) cup home-positioning; however, the suction cup HP sensor (SA4/10/16/22) does not transition to CLOSE within the {MT:4.12}
specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.

During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the suction cup drive motor (MA1/2/3/4) is driven to perform suction
12396 Suction cup HP detection retry (3) cup home-positioning; however, the suction cup HP sensor (SA4/10/16/22) does not transition to OPEN within the {MT:4.12}
specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.

Cleaning guide HP detection retry During bootup/M-Utility, the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) is driven for one pulse to perform cleaning guide
12398 home-positioning; however, the cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified {MT:4.13}
(1) period of time, thus resulting in a retry.

Cleaning guide HP detection retry During bootup/M-Utility, the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) is driven to perform cleaning guide home-
12399 positioning; however, the cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period {MT:4.13}
(2) of time, thus resulting in a retry.

Cleaning guide HP detection retry During bootup/M-Utility, the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) is driven to perform cleaning guide home-
12400 positioning; however, the cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period {MT:4.13}
(3) of time, thus resulting in a retry.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-42
 MT-43

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Cleaning guide grip operation During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) is driven to grip the cleaning
12401 guide (guide-down); however, the cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4) does not transition to OPEN. {MT:4.13}
detection warning
Cleaning guide HP detection During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) is driven to release the grip of
12402 the cleaning guide (guide-up); however, the cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4) does not transition to CLOSE, so that {MT:4.13}
warning home-positioning is performed.

During bootup/M-Utility, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) is driven for one pulse to perform IP stopper home-
12403 IP stopper HP detection retry (1) positioning; however, the IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5) dose not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of {MT:4.14}
time, thus resulting in a retry.

During bootup/M-Utility, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) is driven to perform IP stopper home-positioning;
12404 IP stopper HP detection retry (2) however, the IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5) dose not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time, thus {MT:4.14}
resulting in a retry.

During bootup/M-Utility, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) is driven to perform IP stopper home-positioning;
12405 IP stopper HP detection retry (3) however, the IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5) dose not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time, thus {MT:4.14}
resulting in a retry.

IP stopper protrusion detection During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) is driven for IP stopper protruding
12406 operation; however, the IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5) dose not transition to OPEN, thus resulting in HP positioning. {MT:4.14}
warning
During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) is driven for IP stopper retreating
12407 IP stopper HP detection warning operation; however, the IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5) dose not transition to CLOSE, so that home-positioning is {MT:4.14}
performed.

Suction cup HP detection warning During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, when the suction cup home position is checked, the suction cup HP
12408 sensor (SA4/10/16/22) does not transition to CLOSE, so that home-positioning is performed. {MT:4.32}
(1)
Suction cup HP detection warning During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, when the suction cup home position is checked, the suction cup HP
12409 sensor (SA4/10/16/22) does not transition to CLOSE, so that home-positioning is performed. {MT:4.32}
(2)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-43
 MT-44

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Driving-shaft grip velocity During routine processing/M-Utility except for secondary erasure, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to perform
12411 driving shaft grip operation; however, the variation of the grip speed within the allowable range is detected, so that {MT:4.15}
correction process operation the speed is corrected after reading is completed.

Driven-shaft grip release velocity During routine processing/M-Utility except for secondary erasure, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to perform
12413 driven shaft grip release operation; however, the variation of the grip release speed within the allowable range is {MT:4.15}
correction process operation detected, so that the speed is corrected after reading is completed.

Driving-shaft grip speed For the correction processing during bootup/at the end of reading, the grip speed of the driving shaft is corrected;
12417 however, the driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of {MT:4.15}
correction value warning time, thus resulting in a retry for grip speed correction.

Driving-shaft grip speed For the correction processing during bootup/at the end of reading, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to perform
12418 operation for correcting the grip speed of the driving shaft; however, the driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) {MT:4.15}
correction failure does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time.

Dust removal HP detection retry During bootup, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (counterclockwise) to perform home-positioning of the dust
12433 removal mechanism; however, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to OPEN within the specified {MT:4.17}
(1) period of time, resulting in a retry.

Dust removal HP detection retry During bootup, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (counterclockwise) to perform home-positioning of the
12434 dust removal mechanism; however, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to CLOSE within the {MT:4.17}
(2) specified period of time, resulting in a retry.

During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing,
Initialization convergence path IP and before the side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) and pre-convergence IP sensor (SB6) transition to
12440 OPEN, the OPEN state of the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) is detected.
{MT:4.18}
conveyance warning (1) Because the IP may have been scratched, the IP should be checked for any scratch.

During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing,
Initialization convergence path IP and the MB1, MB2, ME1 is stopped after the pre-convergence IP sensor (SB6) transitions to CLOSE; however, the
12441 pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) does not transition to OPEN.
{MT:4.18}
conveyance warning (2) Because the IP may have been scratched, the IP should be checked for any scratch.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-44
 MT-45

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
12510 Image format error During bootup or during routine processing, an illegal command is received from the CL. -

12520 Message transmission failure During bootup or routine processing, a message transmission from RU to CL is failed. {MT:14.}

During bootup or routine processing, a REQUEST message is transmitted from RU to CL, however, RU cannot
12521 RES message receiving time-out receive a RESPONSE message, thus resulting in a time-out.
{MT:14.}

During bootup or routine processing, a message is transmitted from RU to CL, however, RU cannot receive ACK,
12522 ACK receiving time-out thus resulting in a time-out.
{MT:14.}

Back-side PMT analog power During bootup and routine processing, only error for the PMT analog power supply signal (+15VOKH, +15VOKL)
12611 for back-side is detected. {MT:5.4}
supply error
Back-side High-voltage command During bootup and routine processing, error is detected only for the high-voltage command value diagnostics
12617 signal for back-side on the SCT17B board. {MT:5.7}
value error
Back-side High-voltage detection During bootup and routine processing, error is detected only for the high-voltage detection value diagnostics signal
12618 for back-side on the SCT17B board. {MT:5.7}
value error
Back-side scanner control board During routine processing, because the PMR high-voltage value is not set correctly on the SCT17B board, error is
12642 detected for the high-voltage command diagnostics for back side. {MT:5.1}
error (2)
Back-side photomultiplier control During bootup and routine processing, only error for the PMR analog power supply signal (+15VOKH, +15VOKL)
12651 is detected (detail code: 008100). Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is 008000. {MT:5.2}
board error (1)
Back-side photomultiplier control During bootup and routine processing, only error for the high voltage power supply signal (HVOKH, HVOKL) for
12652 back-side is detected. {MT:5.3}
board error (2)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-45
 MT-46

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Back-side image data variation or - For image data transfer diagnostics during bootup, any one of image data variations error, unplugged image
signal connector or wrong connection of connector is detected.
12687 back-side image signal connector - For image data transfer diagnostics during idling of routine processing, image data variation error is detected. {MT:5.3}
error
Back-side scanner send/receive During bootup, or during routine processing, or in the Maintenance Utility, control communication between the
12695 CPU91A board and SCT17B board is performed; however, because error for the scanner unit is detected, the {MT:5.3}
error control communication does not end normally.

Back-side scanner send sum During bootup, during routine processing, or in the Maintenance Utility, control communication between the
12696 CPU91A board and SCT17B board can be done; however, sum check error is detected from the SCT17B board. {MT:5.3}
check error
Back-side communication receive During bootup, or during routine processing, or in the Maintenance Utility, communication between the CPU91A
12697 board and SCT17B board can be done; however, data size error is detected from the SCT17B board. {MT:5.3}
size error
CPU board initial diagnostic test <Servicing>
12700 It occurs when setup is made through DIP SW setting on the CPU91A board to perform total memory test during -
error bootup. During bootup, error is detected for the total memory test.

An error is detected for the bus error detection function on the CPU91A board performed during bootup or routine
12701 Bus error detection function error processing.
{MT:18.}

During bootup or during routine processing, an interrupt test is conducted for "H8 CPU" of the scanner board
12702 H8 CPU interrupt error (SCN17A/SCT17B) from the CPU91A board, but it does not end normally.
{MT:6.1}

During bootup or during routine processing, an interrupt test is conducted for the sensor board (SNS17A/SNS17B)
12703 Sensor board interrupt error from the CPU91A board, but it does not end normally.
{MT:6.3}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-46
 MT-47

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
12705 LCD bus error During bootup, the CPU91A board detects a bus error for the LCD panel. {MT:18.}

High-temperature error detection During bootup, the temperature thermistor (THE1) detects high-temperature error.
12733 {MT:6.4}
(during erasure initialization)
Single lamp unlit detection (during During bootup, because one of the five lamps is unlit, the machine is booted up in the mode where the erasure
12736 time is extended. {MT:6.4}
erasure initialization)
During bootup and routine processing, 12733 or 12753 occurs and the temperature of the erasure unit lamp
Erasure unit high-temperature reaches an abnormal level, so that the no-erasure mode is temporarily entered.
12743 Subsequently, because the erasure lamp temperature drops below the specified temperature (erasable
{MT:6.4}
error cancel temperature), the normal mode is returned.

Erasure unit high-temperature During routine processing and idling, the temperature thermistor (THE1) detects high-temperature error.
12753 {MT:6.4}
error
Single lamp unlit detection (during During idling, when the erasure lamps are turned on for erasure temperature control, a single lamp that is normally
12756 lit does not turn on, so that it enters the erasure time extension mode. {MT:6.4}
erasure idle temperature control)
Single lamp unlit detection (during During bootup and routine processing, when the erasure lamps are turned on during IP erasure, a single lamp is
12766 unlit, so that it enters the erasure time extension mode. {MT:6.4}
IP erasure lighting)
An interrupt is received such that the main CPU has accessed the self-reset register that is usually accessed
12799 Self-reset procedure error during shutdown processing, using improper procedure. {MT:18.}

Erasure unit safety thermostat During bootup and routine processing, because the erasure unit lamp housing reaches an abnormally high
12800 temperature, the safety thermostat TSWE1 is activated. {MT:6.4}
"TSWE1" operation

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-47
 MT-48

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "A021" fuse (F1) on the SNS17B board is
12810 Power supply A021 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "A041" fuse (F3) on the SNS17B board is
12812 Power supply A041 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "A051" fuse (F4) on the SNS17B board is
12813 Power supply A051 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "A061" fuse (F5) on the SCN17A/SCT17B
12814 Power supply A061 error board is blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the voltage of the DRV17A-related +24V power
12820 Power supply B error 1 supply is not outputted.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B011" fuse (F1) on the DRV17A board is
12821 Power supply B011 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B041" fuse (F4) on the DRV17A board is
12824 Power supply B041 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B051" fuse (F5) on the DRV17A board is
12825 Power supply B051 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B061" fuse (F6) on the DRV17A board is
12826 Power supply B061 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B071" fuse (F7) on the DRV17A board is
12827 Power supply B071 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B081" fuse (F8) on the DRV17A board is
12828 Power supply B081 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B091" fuse (F9) on the DRV17A board is
12829 Power supply B091 error blown.
{MT:9.}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-48
 MT-49

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B101" fuse (F10) on the DRV17A board is
12830 Power supply B101 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B111" fuse (F11) on the DRV17A board is
12831 Power supply B111 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B121" fuse (F12) on the DRV17A board is
12832 Power supply B121 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B131" fuse (F13) on the DRV17A board is
12833 Power supply B131 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B141" fuse (F14) on the DRV17A board is
12834 Power supply B141 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B151" fuse (F15) on the DRV17A board is
12835 Power supply B151 error blown.
{MT:9.}

Power supply B series detection During bootup and during routine processing, even though it is detected that the voltage of the DRV17A-related
12840 +24V power supply is not outputted, the output is detected at either of the detection points of "B011" through {MT:9.}
error (1) "B151".

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the voltage of the DRV17B-related +24V power
12841 Power supply B error 2 supply is not outputted.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B161" fuse (F1) on the DRV17B board is
12842 Power supply B161 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B171" fuse (F2) on the DRV17B board is
12843 Power supply B171 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B181" fuse (F3) on the DRV17B board is
12844 Power supply B181 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B191" fuse (F4) on the DRV17B board is
12845 Power supply B191 error blown.
{MT:9.}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-49
 MT-50

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B201" fuse (F5) on the DRV17B board is
12846 Power supply B201 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B211" fuse (F6) on the DRV17B board is
12847 Power supply B211 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B221" fuse (F7) on the DRV17B board is
12848 Power supply B221 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B231" fuse (F8) on the DRV17B board is
12849 Power supply B231 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B241" fuse (F9) on the DRV17B board is
12850 Power supply B241 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B251" fuse (F10) on the DRV17B board is
12851 Power supply B251 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B261" fuse (F11) on the DRV17B board is
12852 Power supply B261 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B281" fuse (F12) on the DRV17B board is
12853 Power supply B281 error blown.
{MT:9.}

Power supply B series detection During bootup and during routine processing, even though it is detected that the voltage of the DRV17B-related
12854 +24V power supply is not outputted, the output is detected at either of the detection points of "B161" through {MT:9.}
error (2) "B281".

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the voltage of the DRV17A-related +5V power
12860 Power supply C error 1 supply is not outputted.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the voltage of the DRV17B-related +5V power
12861 Power supply C error 2 supply is not outputted.
{MT:9.}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-50
 MT-51

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "D021" fuse (F19) on the DRV17A board is
12863 Power supply D021 error blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "G021" fuse (F4) on the SCN17A/SCT17B
12872 Power supply G021 error board is blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "G031" fuse (F8) on the SCN17A/SCT17B
12873 Power supply G031 error board is blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "G041" fuse (F1) on the SCN17A/SCT17B
12874 Power supply G041 error board is blown.
{MT:9.}

During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "G051" fuse (F7) on the SCN17A/SCT17B
12875 Power supply G051 error board is blown.
{MT:9.}

<Service>
Touch panel calibration file load - Because the touch panel is not calibrated after replacement of the IMG board and LCD panel, the file cannot be
13032 loaded.
-
log - During bootup, the touch panel calibration file cannot be loaded from the FLASH ROM to the SD RAM.

13034 UI debug information Unlikely error condition associated with the RU software occurs. -

13200 High-voltage OFF during bootup During bootup, the photomultiplier (PMT17A/PMR17B board) high voltage is OFF. -

During bootup and routine processing, the polygon OK signal is not detected within 7 seconds after turn-ON of the
13210 Polygon timeout polygonal mirror.
-

The IP of the size other than the input size is inserted for shading correction of the M-Utility, so that error is
13227 Reading IP size error detected.
-

SHD/POLYGON correction data - The correction is performed with the cleared portion due to image format displacement or with the image other
13228 than FLAT. The shading correction should be performed again. -
error - During shading correction of the Maintenance Utility, error is detected for the correction calculation.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-51
 MT-52

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
13229 HVCNT value error During M-Utility operation, an out-of-spec HV is inputted. -

- During bootup or during routine processing, the start-point mask signal issued from the SCN17A/SCT17B board
13240 Start-point mask signal warning varies by 0.02%, peak to peak. -
- During bootup or during routine processing, the detection of 12241 error is done with 2% variations.

During bootup or during routine processing, the range of variations in the main-scan interval is beyond the upper or
13260 Main-scan interval warning lower limit of the error decision value parameter.
-

This error occurs when the surrounding temperature around the machine changes drastically.
During routine processing checks, it is detected that the LD drive current value varies by more than 5 mA.
13270 LDIFMAX update In order to adjust the insufficient luminosity due to degraded LD (to maintain the same level of luminosity), it is -
necessary to vary the LD drive current by more than 5 mA. During LDIFMAX update, variations of 5 mA or more
are detected.

During routine processing, the difference between MIN and MAX of the laser drive current monitor value is out of
13284 LD monitor value error warning specification.
{MT:5.10}

During routine processing, error is detected for the HV command value signal sent from the SCN17A/SCT17B
13285 HV command value error warning board to the PMT17A board. The difference between MIN and MAX of the monitor value relative to the setup value {MT:5.10}
is out of specification.

During routine processing, error is detected for the HV detection value signal of the PMT17A board. The difference
13286 HV detection value error warning between MIN and MAX of the monitor value relative to the setup value is out of specification.
{MT:5.10}

13289 Format adjustment data error In the Maintenance Utility, when format adjustments are performed, out-of-range data is inputted. -

CL communication suspension During bootup or during routine processing, it is detected that the communication between the CL and RU is
13520 broken. -
detected
CL communication failure During bootup or during routine processing, because the communication between the CL and RU is broken, the
13521 connection is suspended and initialization of communication between the CL and RU is performed again. -
detected

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-52
 MT-53

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The CL was too late receiving the image data sent from the RU, so that the image was retransmitted from the RU.
13530 CL image data receive timeout The network is overloaded, or a communication error occurs due to hardware failure of the network, thereby -
causing frequent retries.

13629 Back-side HVCNT value error During M-Utility operation, an out-of-spec HV is inputted. -

Back-side start-point mask signal - During bootup and routine processing, the start-point mask signal issued from the SCT12B board varies by
13640 0.02%, peak to peak. -
warning - During bootup and routine processing, the detection of 12241 error is done with 2% variations.

Back-side main scan interval During bootup or during routine processing, the scope of main-scan interval variations is outside the upper or lower
13660 limit of the error determination value parameter. -
warning
Back-side HV command value During routine processing, error is detected for the HV command value signal sent from the SCT17B board to the
13685 PMR17B board. The difference between MIN and MAX of the monitor value relative to the setup value is out of {MT:5.10}
error warning specification.

Back-side HV detection value During routine processing, error is detected for the HV detection value signal of the PMR17B board. The
13686 difference between MIN and MAX of the monitor value relative to the setup value is out of specification. {MT:5.10}
error warning
During bootup and routine processing, a combination of errors that should not have logically occurred were
13699 Error for back-side scanner, etc. generated.
-

13700 Backup SRAM test error An error is detected for the backup SRAM test in MUTL: Board Check. {MT:18.}

13701 SDRAM test error An error is detected for the SDRAM test in MUTL: Board Check. {MT:18.}

13702 Checksum error The data in the flash ROM (IPL or APPL portion) of the RU is corrupted. {MT:18.}

13703 Flash ROM read/write error An error is detected for the flash ROM read/write test in MUTL: Board Check. {MT:18.}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-53
 MT-54

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
13704 CPU91A interrupt error An error is detected for the CPU91A interrupt test in MUTL: Board Check. {MT:18.}

13705 Network register error An error is detected for the network register check in MUTL: Board Check. {MT:18.}

SCN17A/SCT17B register test An error is detected for the register read/write test of SCN17A/SCT17B in MUTL: Board Check.
13706 {MT:18.}
error
13707 SCN17A/SCT17B interrupt error An error is detected for the interrupt test of SCN17A/SCT17B in MUTL: Board Check. {MT:18.}

SCN17A/SCT17B H8 An error is detected for the H8 communication test of SCN17A/SCT17B in MUTL: Board Check.
13708 {MT:18.}
communication error
13709 SNS17A/B board register error An error is detected for the SCN17A/SNS17B register test in MUTL: Board Check. {MT:18.}

13710 Sensor test error An error is detected for the sensor test in MUTL: Board Check. {MT:18.}

13711 Panel LED error An error is detected for the panel LED test in MUTL: Board Check. {MT:18.}

13712 Solenoid error An error is detected for the solenoid test in MUTL: Board Check. {MT:18.}

13713 Pulse motor error An error is detected for the pulse motor test in MUTL: Board Check. {MT:18.}

13714 SNS17A/B board interrupt error An error is detected for the SNS17A/B interrupt in MUTL: Board Check. {MT:18.}

13715 INV17A/B register error An error is detected for the register of the INV17A/B board in MUTL: Board Check. {MT:18.}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-54
 MT-55

Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
13716 Erasure lamp test error An error is detected for the erasure lamp test in MUTL: Board Check. {MT:18.}

Image processing CPU SDRAM An error is detected for the SDRAM test of the image processing CPU in MUTL: Board Check.
13717 {MT:18.}
test error
13718 Image processing FIFO test error An error is detected for the FIFO test of the image processing CPU in MUTL: Board Check. {MT:18.}

An error is detected for the barcode communication test in MUTL: Board Check.
13719 Barcode communication error {MT:18.}

13820 Barcode data read test error An error is detected for the barcode reading test in MUTL: Board Check. {MT:18.}

Power supply monitoring register An error is detected for the power supply monitoring register check in MUTL: Board Check.
13821 {MT:18.}
error
Insufficient resource for timer During bootup or during routine processing, the resource for the timer device becomes insufficient.
19066 {MT:8.}
device
Insufficient resource for sync During bootup or during routine processing, the resource for the sync processing device becomes insufficient.
19067 {MT:8.}
processing device

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-55
 MT-56
3. Detail Code

3.1 How to Understand Detail Code

The error log contains the operation mode of the RU and detail code associated with
the error that occurred.
This section describes the detail code display format and meaning of each item.

n Display of Detail Code

l Sensor status
0: OPEN
1: CLOSE

l IP size
1. 14" x 17"
2. 14" x 14"
3. 10" x 12"
4. 8" x 10"
5. 1824
6. 24 x 30 ST
7. 24 x 30 HR
8. 11" x 14"

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-56
 MT-57
3.2 Detail Codes for Scanner Errors n Meaning of Six-Digit Detail Code
Scanner errors are detected by checking a plurality of scanner I/O states and finding a To each bit of a six-digit detail code is assigned an object to be checked during error
combination of defects and/or failures. check, so that a bit value of “1” indicates that the object to checked is in error.
Each I/O status at the time of error occurrence can be identified by checking the detail
code in the error log.

n Display of Detail Code

The detail code is displayed in six hexadecimal digits, located in the error log as
shown below.
NO. Object to be checked Signal source Value of bit
Hexadecimal
1 Start-point sensor SYN12A board 1 2 3 4
2 Leading-edge sensor SED17A board 0 0 0 0 0
I
3 Start-point mask signal SCN17A/SCT17B board 1 0 0 0 1
4 Polygon index POL (polygon) 2 0 0 1 0
1 - - 3 0 0 1 1
2 - - 4 0 1 0 0
II
3 - - 5 0 1 0 1
4 - - 6 0 1 1 0
1 PMT analog power supply PMT17A/PMR17B board 7 0 1 1 1
2 Laser light intensity error LDD12A board 8 1 0 0 0
III
3 Polygon lock POL (polygon) 9 1 0 0 1
4 Polygon rpm POL (polygon) A 1 0 1 0
1 PLL function SCN17A/SCT17B board B 1 0 1 1
2 Start-point period SYN12A board C 1 1 0 0
IV 3 High-voltage command
SCN17A/SCT17B board D 1 1 0 1
value diagnostics
4 High-voltage detection
SCN17A/SCT17B board E 1 1 1 0
value diagnostics
1 - - F 1 1 1 1
2 - -
V
3 - -
4 LD drive current LDD12A board
1 - -
2 - -
VI
3 Reading status error SCN17A/SCT17B board
4 Operation line status error SCN17A/SCT17B board

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-57
 MT-58
4. Error Code Analysis Flow: Q4 Check the sensor (SC3).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Mechanism
Q5 Check the sensor (SG1).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
4.1 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 1
Q6 Check the motor (MB2).
10343, 10344, 10346 {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

n Analysis Flow
Q7 Check the motor (MC3).
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?

{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
Q8 Error recurs?
N N
A
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Y

Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? m Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SNS17A/B board
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Y {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
2. DRV17A/B board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. 3. CPU91A board
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
A N
A
Y
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards.
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage} m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
N
Q9
Y

Q4

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-58
 MT-59
4.2 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 2 Q5 Check the sensor (SD2).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

10347, 10348
Q6 Check the motor (MZ1).
n Analysis Flow {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q7 Error recurs?
N
A
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
Y

N m Replace the boards in the order named.

Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} 1. SNS17A/B board
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? 2. DRV17A/B board
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
Y {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. 3. CPU91A board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

m Perform preparation procedures in the order named.

1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
2. Remove the covers. Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. N
A
A Y

m Replace the error-causing board.

m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y

Q4 Check the sensor (SZ1).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-59
 MT-60
4.3 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 3 Q5 Check the motor (MZ1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

10349
Q6 Check the motor (MD2).
n Analysis Flow {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q7 Check the motor (MC3).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
Q8 Error recurs?
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. N
Y A
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Y
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs?
m Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SNS17A/B board
Y {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
2. DRV17A/B board
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. 3. CPU91A board
2. Remove the covers. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

A
Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.

m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. N

A
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage} Y

m Replace the error-causing board.

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
N {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
Q9 {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Y {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}

Q4 Check the sensor (SC3).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-60
 MT-61
4.4 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 4 Q5 Check the sensor (SE2).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

10350, 10351, 10352, 10353

Q6 Check the motor (MD2)
n Analysis Flow {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q7 Check the motor (ME1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
Q8 Error recurs?
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. N
Y A
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Y
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs?
m Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SNS17A/B board
Y {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
2. DRV17A/B board
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. 3. CPU91A board
2. Remove the covers. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

A
Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.

m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. N

A
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage} Y

m Replace the error-causing board.

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board
N {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
Q9 {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Y {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}

Q4 Check the sensor (SE1).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-61
 MT-62
4.5 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 5 Q5 Check the sensor (SE2).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

10354, 10355, 10356, 10357, 10358

Q6 Check the sensor (SB6).
n Analysis Flow {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q7 Check the motor (ME1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
Q8 Check the solenoid (SOLE1).
N {MT:12._Procedures for Checking the Actuators}
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}

Q9 Error recurs?
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs?
N
A
Y Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
m Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SNS17A/B board
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
2. Remove the covers. 2. DRV17A/B board
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
A {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. Q10 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}
N
A
Y
Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
m Replace the error-causing board.
N {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
Q10 {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
Y {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Q4 Check the sensor (SE1). {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-62
 MT-63
4.6 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 6 Q5 Check the sensor (SB5).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

10359, 10360, 10361, 10362, 10363, 10364, 10365,

10460, 10461, 10462 Q6 Check the motor (MB1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

n Analysis Flow
Q7 Check the motor (MB2).
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Check the motor (ME1).
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"} {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} Q9 Error recurs?
N
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? A
Y
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. m Replace the boards in the order named.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} 1. SNS17A/B board
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. 2. DRV17A/B board
2. Remove the covers. {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
A {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Q10 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. N
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage} A
Y

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? m Replace the error-causing board.
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
N {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Q10
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
Y

Q4 Check the sensors (SB1, SB2, SB3, and SB4).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-63
 MT-64
4.7 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 7 Q5 Check the sensor (SB10).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

10369, 10371, 10372, 12369, 12370, 12371, 12372,

12373 Q6 Check the sensor (SB11).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

n Analysis Flow
Q7 Check the motor (MB3).
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Error recurs?
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
N
N A
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. Y
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
m Replace the boards in the order named.
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? 1. SNS17A/B board
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Y {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. 2. DRV17A/B board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. 3. CPU91A board
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

A Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. Y
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}
m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
N {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
Q9
Y

Q4 Check the sensors (SB7, SB8, and SB9).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-64
 MT-65
4.8 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 8 Q5 Check the motor (MC2).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

10374, 12374, 12375, 12376, 12377

Q6 Error recurs?
n Analysis Flow N
A
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? 1. SNS17A/B board
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"} {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
N 2. DRV17A/B board
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Q7 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. A
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Y
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
A
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y

Q4 Check the sensor (SC2).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-65
 MT-66
4.9 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 9 Q5 Check the motor (MD1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

10378, 12378, 12379, 12380, 12381

Q6 Error recurs?
n Analysis Flow N
A
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? 1. SNS17A/B board
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"} {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
N 2. DRV17A/B board
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Q7 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. A
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Y
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
A
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y

Q4 Check the sensor (SD1).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-66
 MT-67
4.10 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 10 Q5 Check the sensor (SE5).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

10382, 12382, 12383, 12384, 12385

Q6 Error recurs?
n Analysis Flow N
A
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? 1. SNS17A/B board
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"} {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
N 2. DRV17A/B board
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Q7 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. A
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Y
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
A
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y

Q4 Check the motor (ME3).

{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-67
 MT-68
4.11 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 11 Q5 Check the sensor (SE4).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

10386, 10390, 12386, 12387, 12388, 12389, 12390,

12391, 12392, 12393 Q6 Check the motor (MC1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

n Analysis Flow
Q7 Check the motor (ME2).
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Error recurs?
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
N
N A
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. Y
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
m Replace the boards in the order named.
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? 1. SNS17A/B board
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Y {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. 2. DRV17A/B board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. 3. CPU91A board
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

A Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. Y
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}
m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
N {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
Q9
Y

Q4 Check the sensor (SC1).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-68
 MT-69
4.12 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 12 Q5 Check the motors (MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

10394, 12394, 12395, 12396

Q6 Error recurs?
n Analysis Flow N
A
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? 1. SNS17A/B board
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"} {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
N 2. DRV17A/B board
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Q7 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. A
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Y
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
A
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y

Q4 Check the sensors (SA4, SA10, SA16, and SA22).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-69
 MT-70
4.13 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 13 Q5 Check the motor (MC4).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

10398, 12398, 12399, 12400, 12401, 12402

Q6 Error recurs?
n Analysis Flow N
A
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? 1. SNS17A/B board
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"} {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
N 2. DRV17A/B board
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Q7 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. A
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Y
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
A
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y

Q4 Check the sensor (SC4).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-70
 MT-71
4.14 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 14 Q5 Check the motor (MZ4).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

10403, 10406, 12403, 12404, 12405, 12406, 12407

Q6 Error recurs?
n Analysis Flow N
A
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? 1. SNS17A/B board
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"} {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
N 2. DRV17A/B board
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Q7 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. A
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Y
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
A
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y

Q4 Check the sensor (SZ5).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-71
 MT-72
4.15 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 15 Q5 Check the sensor (SZ3).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

10410, 10411, 10412, 10413, 10414, 10415, 10417,

10418, 10419, 12411, 12413, 12417, 12418 Q6 Check the motor (MZ2).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

n Analysis Flow
Q7 Error recurs?
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
N
A
Y
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
m Replace the boards in the order named.
N 1. SNS17A/B board
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
2. DRV17A/B board
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
Y {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}

m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. N
2. Remove the covers. A
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. Y
A
m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage} {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y

Q4 Check the sensor (SZ2).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-72
 MT-73
4.16 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 16 Q5 Check the sensor (SB6).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

10420, 10421, 10422, 10425, 10426

Q6 Check the sensors (SB7, SB8, and SB9).
n Analysis Flow {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q7 Check the sensor (SB11).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?

{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
Q8 Check the sensor (SG1).
N {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q9 Check the sensor (SE1).
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. Q10 Check the sensor (SE2).
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

m Perform preparation procedures in the order named.

1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Q11 Check the solenoids (SOLA1, SOLA2, SOLA3, and SOLA4).
2. Remove the covers. {MT:12._Procedures for Checking the Actuators}
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

A
Q12

m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards.

{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q13
Y

Q4 Check the sensors (SB1, SB2, SB3, and SB4).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-73
 MT-74
Q12 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

1. SNS17A/B board
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
2. DRV17A/B board
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Q13 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
Y

m Replace the error-causing board.

{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}}
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-74
 MT-75
4.17 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 17 Q5 Check the sensor (SC3).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

10430, 10431, 10432, 10433, 10434, 10435, 10436,

10437, 10438, 10439, 12433, 12434, 12440, 12441 Q6 Check the sensor (SZ4).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

n Analysis Flow
Q7 Check the motor (MZ3).
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Error recurs?
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
N
A
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. Y
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
m Replace the boards in the order named.
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? 1. SNS17A/B board
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Y {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. 2. DRV17A/B board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

A Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
Y
Q3 Molykote lubricant applied to the worm gear?
{MC:12.14_Dust Removal Motor (MZ3)}
m Replace the error-causing board.
N {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
Apply Molykote lubricant to the worm gear.
Y {MC:12.14_Dust Removal Motor (MZ3)} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q4 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q9
Y

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-75
 MT-76
4.18 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 18 Q5 Check the sensor (SB5).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

10440, 10441, 10442, 10443, 10444, 10445, 10446,

12440, 12441 Q6 Check the sensor (SB6).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

n Analysis Flow
Q7 Check the sensor (SG1).
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Check the motor (ME1).
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"} {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} Q9 Check the motor (ME2).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs?
Q10 Check the motor (MB1).
Y {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}

m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. Q11 Check the motor (MB2).
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board.
Q12 Check the motor (MC3).
A {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. Q13 Initialize the backup memory in MUTL and check if the error occurs again.
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage} {MU:5.3 [3-1]_Backup Memory Clear (CPU Board)}
N
END
Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? Y
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N Q14
Q15
Y

Q4 Check the sensors (SB1, SB2, SB3, and SB4).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-76
 MT-77
Q14 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

1. SNS17A/B board
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}}
2. DRV17A/B board
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}}

Q15 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
Y

m Replace the error-causing board.

{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-77
 MT-78
4.19 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 19 Q5 Check the motor (MC3).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

10447, 10448, 10449, 10450

Q6 Check the motor (MB1).
n Analysis Flow {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q7 Check the motor (MB2).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?

{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
Q8 Check the motor (MZ1).
N {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q9 Check the motor (MB1).
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. Q10 Error recurs?
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
N
A
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. Y
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
2. Remove the covers.
m Replace the boards in the order named.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. 1. SNS17A/B board
A {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
2. DRV17A/B board
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage} 3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} Q11 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N N
Q11 A
Y Y

Q4 Check the sensor (SG1). m Replace the error-causing board.

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
Q5 {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-78
 MT-79
4.20 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 20 Q5 Check the sensor (SE1).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

10451, 10452, 10453, 10454, 10455, 10456, 10457,

10458, 10459, 11459 Q6 Check the sensor (SE2).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

n Analysis Flow
Q7 Check the sensor (SB6).
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Check the motor (ME1).
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"} {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} Q9 Check the motor (MC3).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs?
Q10 Check the motor (MD2).
Y {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}

m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. Q11 Check the motor (MB1).
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board.
Q12 Check the motor (MB2).
A {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. Q13 Check the motor (MZ1).
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage} {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? Q14

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q15
Y

Q4 Check the sensor (SD2).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-79
 MT-80
Q14 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

1. SNS17A/B board
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
2. DRV17A/B board
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Q15 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
Y

m Replace the error-causing board.

{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-80
 MT-81
4.21 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 21 Q6 Check the sensors (SA2, SA8, SA14, and SA20).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

11320, 11321, 11322, 11323, 11324, 11325, 12320,

12321, 12322, 12324 Q7 Check the sensors (SA3, SA9, SA15, and SA21).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

n Analysis Flow
Q8 Check the solenoids (SOLA1, SOLA2, SOLA3, and SOLA4).
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MT:12._Procedures for Checking the Actuators}

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q9 Error recurs?
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
N
A
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. Y
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
m Replace the boards in the order named.
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? 1. SNS17A/B board
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Y {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. 2. DRV17A/B board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

A Q10 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
Y
Q3 Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards.
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}
m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
Q4 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
N {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
Q10
Y

Q5 Check the sensors (SA1, SA7, SA13, and SA19).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q6

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-81
 MT-82
4.22 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 22 Q5 Check the sensors (SB1, SB2, SB3, and SB4).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

11328, 11329, 11330, 12328, 12329, 12330, 12331

Q6 Check the pumps (PA1, PA2, PA3, and PA4).
n Analysis Flow {MT:12._Procedures for Checking the Actuators}

m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q7 Check the valves (SVA1, SVA2, SVA3, and SVA4).
{MT:12._Procedures for Checking the Actuators}

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?

{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
Q8 Check the motor (MB1).
N {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q9 Error recurs?
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs?
N
A
Y Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
m Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SNS17A/B board
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
2. Remove the covers. 2. DRV17A/B board
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
A
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards.

{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}
Q10 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? A
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} Y
N
Q10 m Replace the error-causing board.
Y {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
Q4 Check the sensors (SA5, SA11, SA17, and SA23). {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-82
 MT-83
4.23 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 23 Q5 Check the sensor (SG1).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

11332, 11333, 11334, 11335, 11336, 11337

Q6 Check the sensor (SB5).
n Analysis Flow {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q7 Check the motor (MB1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?

{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
Q8 Check the motor (MB2).
N {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q9 Check the motor (MC3).
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. Q10 Initialize the backup memory in MUTL and check if the error occurs again.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MU:5.3 [3-1]_Backup Memory Clear (CPU Board)}
N
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. END
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Y
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. Q11
A

m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards.

{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q12
Y

Q4 Check the sensor (SC3).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-83
 MT-84
Q11 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

1. SNS17A/B board
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
2. DRV17A/B board
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Q12 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
Y

m Replace the error-causing board.

{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-84
 MT-85
4.24 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 24 Q5 Check the sensors (SA1, SA7, SA13, and SA19).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

11338, 11339
Q6 Check the sensors (SA2, SA8, SA14, and SA20).
n Analysis Flow {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q7 Barcode readers (BCRA1, BCRA2, BCRA3, and BCRA4) normal?
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?

{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"} N
Replace the barcode readers (BCRA1, BCRA2, BCRA3, and BCRA4).
N Y {MC:5.12_Barcode Reader Assembly}
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q8 Error recurs?
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? N
A
Y
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} m Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SNS17A/B board
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. 2. DRV17A/B board
2. Remove the covers. {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
Q3 Cassette set?

N Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
Set the cassette and retry.
Y N
A
A
Y

m Replace the error-causing board.

{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards.
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage} {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
Q4 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q9
Y

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-85
 MT-86
4.25 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 25 Q5 Check the sensor (SG2).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

11340, 11341
Q6 Check the sensors (SA6, SA12, SA18, and SA24).
n Analysis Flow {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q7 Check the motor (MB1).
{MT11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?

{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
Q8 Check the motor (MB2).
N {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q9 Check the motor (MC3).
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. Q10
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}

m Perform preparation procedures in the order named.

1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards.

{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q11
Y

Q4 Check the sensor (SB5).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-86
 MT-87
Q10 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

1. SNS17A/B board
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
2. DRV17A/B board
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Q11 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
Y

m Replace the error-causing board.

{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-87
 MT-88
4.26 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 26 Q5 Check the sensors (SA4, SA10, SA16, and SA22).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

11366, 11367, 12366, 12367, 12368

Q6 Check the pumps (PA1, PA2, PA3, and PA4).
n Analysis Flow {MT:12._Procedures for Checking the Actuators}

m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q7 Check the valves (SVA1, SVA2, SVA3, and SVA4).
{MT:12._Procedures for Checking the Actuators}

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?

{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
Q8 Check the motors (MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4).
N {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q9 Error recurs?
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs?
N
A
Y Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
m Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SNS17A/B board
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
2. Remove the covers. 2. DRV17A/B board
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
A
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards.

{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}
Q10 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? A
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} Y
N
Q10 m Replace the error-causing board.
Y {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
Q4 Check the sensors (SA5, SA11, SA17, and SA23). {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-88
 MT-89
4.27 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 27 Q5 Check the sensors (SA3, SA9, SA15, and SA21).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

11425
Q6 Error recurs?
n Analysis Flow N
A
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? 1. SNS17A/B board
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"} {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
N 2. DRV17A/B board
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Q7 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. A
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Y
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
A {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y

Q4 Check the sensors (SA2, SA8, SA14, and SA20).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-89
 MT-90
4.28 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 28 Q5 IP barcode free from scratch, soil, or peeling?

12343 N
Replace the IP.
Y
n Analysis Flow
Q6 Error recurs?
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. N
A
Y
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"} m Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SNS17A/B board
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
2. DRV17A/B board
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
Y {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}

m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. Q7 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
N
2. Remove the covers. A
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. Y
A
m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage} {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
- Replace the barcode reader.
Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MC:4.7_Barcode Reader (BCR1)}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y

Q4 IP type normal?

N
Replace the IP.
Y

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-90
 MT-91
4.29 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 29 Q4 Check the motor (MZ1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

12348
Q5 Error recurs?
n Analysis Flow N
A
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? 1. SNS17A/B board
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"} {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
N 2. DRV17A/B board
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Q6 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. A
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Y
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
A {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q6
Y

Q4

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-91
 MT-92
4.30 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 30 Q5 Check the sensor (SE2).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

12350
Q6 Check the motor (MD2).
n Analysis Flow {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q7 Check the motor (ME1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?

{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
Q8 Error recurs?
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. N
A
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Y
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs?
m Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SNS17A/B board
Y {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
2. DRV17A/B board
{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. 3. CPU91A board
2. Remove the covers. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

A
Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. A
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage} Y

m Replace the error-causing board.

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
N {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Q9
Y {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}

Q4 Check the sensor (SE1).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-92
 MT-93
4.31 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 31 Q5 Check the sensor (SB5).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

12359
Q6 Check the motor (MB1).
n Analysis Flow {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q7 Check the motor (MB2).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?

{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"}
Q8 Check the motor (ME1).
N {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q9 Error recurs?
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs?
N
A
Y Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
m Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SNS17A/B board
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
2. Remove the covers. 2. DRV17A/B board
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
A
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards.

{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage} Q10 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? Y
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N m Replace the error-causing board.
Q10 {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
Y {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Q4 Check the sensors (SB1, SB2, SB3, and SB4). {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-93
 MT-94
4.32 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 32 Q5 Check the motors (MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

12408, 12409
Q6 Error recurs?
n Analysis Flow N
A
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? 1. SNS17A/B board
{MT:1.3_How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"} {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
N 2. DRV17A/B board
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
Q2 Power supply error (12810-12875) occurs? {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Q7 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
m Perform preparation procedures in the order named. A
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Y
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B board. m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
A {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board}
{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
m Check the voltage on the CPU91A and DRV17A/B boards. {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y

Q4 Check the sensors (SA1, SA7, SA13, and SA19).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-94
 MT-95
5. Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner Q7 Check the leading-edge sensor (SED).
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

5.1 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 1

Q8 Check the polygon (POL).
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}
10230, 10288, 12201, 12202, 12203, 12204, 12212,
12213, 12214, 12215, 12216, 12241, 12242, 12243,
Q9 Check the laser (LDD).
12244, 12287, 12642 {MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

n Analysis Flow
Q10 Check the start-point sensor (SYN).
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? Q11 Error recurs?

N
A
Y Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
A m Reseat the boards in the order named, and if the error is detected, replace the board.
1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
2. Scanning optics unit
Q2 Check the voltage of CN5 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.
{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Q3 CPU91A and SCN17A/SCT17B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N Q12 Reseat the error-causing board, and check if the error occurs again.
Q12
Y N
A
Y
Q4 Connectors connected?
m Replace the error-causing board.
N {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
Restore {MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
Y

Q5 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

Q6 Check the photomultipliers (PMT/PMR).

{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

Q7

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-95
 MT-96
5.2 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 2 Q8 Check the start-point sensor (SYN).
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

10231, 12211, 12651

Q9 Error recurs?
n Analysis Flow N
A
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Y

m Reseat the boards in the order named, and if the error is detected, replace the board.
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? 1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
2. Scanning optics unit
Y {MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N 3. CPU91A board
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
A

Q2 Check the voltage of CN5 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board. Q10 Reseat the error-causing board, and check if the error occurs again.
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}
N
A
Y
Q3 Check the fuse H011 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses} m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
Q4 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

Q5 CPU91A and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q10
Y

Q6 Check the photomultipliers (PMT/PMR).

{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

Q7 Check the laser (LDD).

{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

Q8

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-96
 MT-97
5.3 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 3 Q7 Check the leading-edge sensor (SZ1).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

10232, 12217, 12218, 12652, 12687, 12695, 12696,

12697 Q8 Check the start-point sensor (SYN).
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

n Analysis Flow
Q9 Error recurs?
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
N
A
Y
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged?
m Replace the boards in the order named.
Y 1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. {MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} 2. Scanning optics unit
A {MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
Q2 Check the voltage of CN5 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}
Q10 Reseat the error-causing board, and check if the error occurs again.
Q3 Check the fuses G011 and G041 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board. N
A
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses}
Y

Q4 Error recurs? m Replace the error-causing board.

{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
N {MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
A
Y

Q5 CPU91A and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q11
Y

Q6 Check the photomultipliers (PMT/PMR).

{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

Q7

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-97
 MT-98
5.4 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 4 Q8 Check the laser (LDD).
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

10233, 12222, 12284, 12611

Q9 Check the start-point sensor (SYN).
n Analysis Flow {MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q10 Error recurs?
N
A
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged?
Y

Y m Reseat the boards in the order named, and if the error is detected, replace the board.
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} 1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
A
2. Scanning optics unit
{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}
3. CPU91A board
Q2 Check the voltage of CN5 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 Check the fuse H011 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board. Q11 Reseat the error-causing board, and check if the error occurs again.
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses}
N
A
Y
Q4 Error recurs?
N m Replace the error-causing board.
A {MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
Y {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Q5 CPU91A and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q11
Y

Q6 Check the photomultipliers (PMT/PMR).

{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

Q7 Check the leading-edge sensor (SZ1).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q8

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-98
 MT-99
5.5 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 5 Q8 Check the laser (LDD).
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

10234
Q9 Check the start-point sensor (SYN).
n Analysis Flow {MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q10 Error recurs?
N
A
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged?
Y

Y m Replace the boards in the order named.

Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} 1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
A
2. Scanning optics unit
{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}
3. CPU91A board
Q2 Check the voltage of CN5 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 Check all the fuses, except for G041, on the SCN17A/SCT17B board. Q11 Reseat the error-causing board, and check if the error occurs again.
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses}
N
A
Y
Q4 Error recurs?
N m Replace the error-causing board.
A {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
Y {MC:13.4_Scanner Board}

Q5 CPU91A and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q11
Y

Q6 Check the photomultipliers (PMT/PMR).

{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

Q7 Check the leading-edge sensor (SZ1).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q8

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-99
 MT-100
5.6 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 6 Q8 Check the start-point sensor (SYN).
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

10235
Q9 Error recurs?
n Analysis Flow N
A
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Y

m Reseat the boards in the order named, and if the error is detected, replace the board.
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? 1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
2. Scanning optics unit
Y {MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N 3. CPU91A board
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
A

Q2 Check the voltage of CN5 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board. Q10 Reseat the error-causing board, and check if the error occurs again.
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}
N
A
Y
Q3 Check the fuses A061, J011, and G021 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses} m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
Q4 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

Q5 CPU91A and SCN17A/SCT17B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q10
Y

Q6 Check the leading-edge sensor (SZ1).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q7 Check the polygon (POL).

{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

Q8

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-100
 MT-101
5.7 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 7 Q8 Check the start-point sensor (SYN).
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

10236, 12285, 12286, 12617, 12618

Q9 Error recurs?
n Analysis Flow N
A
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Y

m Reseat the boards in the order named, and if the error is detected, replace the board.
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? 1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
2. Scanning optics unit
Y {MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N 3. CPU91A board
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
A

Q2 Check the voltage of CN5 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board. Q10 Reseat the error-causing board, and check if the error occurs again.
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}
N
A
Y
Q3 Check the fuses G011, G041 and H011 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses} m Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
Q4 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

Q5 CPU91A and SCN17A/SCT17B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q10
Y

Q6 Check the photomultipliers (PMT/PMR).

{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

Q7 Check the laser (LDD).

{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

Q8

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-101
 MT-102
5.8 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 8 Q6 Reseat the error-causing board, and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
10261, 12261, 12262, 12263, 12264 Y

n Analysis Flow m Replace the error-causing board.

{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MC:13.4_Scanner Board}

Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged?

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
A

Q2 Check the voltage of CN5 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 CPU91A and SCN17A/SCT17B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q6
Y

Q4 Check the polygon (POL).

{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

Q5 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

m Reseat the boards in the order named, and if the error is detected, replace the board.
1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
2. Scanning optics unit
{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-102
 MT-103
5.9 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 9 Q6 Check the laser (LDD).
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

10271
Q7 Check the start-point sensor (SYN).
n Analysis Flow {MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

m Check the error log in the ERROR DB.

Q8 Error recurs?
N
B
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged?
Y

Y m Replace the boards in the order named.

Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} 1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
A
2. Scanning optics unit
{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}
3. CPU91A board
Q2 Check the fuses G011 and H011 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses}

Q3 Error recurs? Q9 Reseat the error-causing board, and check if the error occurs again.
N N
A A
Y Y

Q4 CPU91A and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? m Replace the error-causing board.
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
N
Q9
Y

Q5 Check the leading-edge sensor (SZ1).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
B

Q6

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-103
 MT-104
5.10 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 10 Q6 Reseat the error-causing board, and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
10281, 12281, 13284, 13285, 13286, 13685, 13686 Y

n Analysis Flow m Replace the error-causing board.

{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MC:13.4_Scanner Board}

Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged?

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
A

Q2 Check the voltage of CN5 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 CPU91A and SCN17A/SCT17B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q6
Y

Q4 Check the start-point sensor (SYN).

{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

Q5 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

m Reseat the boards in the order named, and if the error is detected, replace the board.
1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
2. Scanning optics unit
{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-104
 MT-105
5.11 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 11 Q7 Error recurs?
N
A
10298, 12298 Y

n Analysis Flow m Replace the boards in the order named.

1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
2. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
3. Scanning optics unit
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged?
{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Q8 Reseat the error-causing board, and check if the error occurs again.
A
N
A
Y
Q2 Other software exited before RU startup?
N m Replace the error-causing board.
Exit the other software. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
Y {MC:13.4_Scanner Board}

Q3 Check the voltage of CN5 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q4 Check all the fuses on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses}

Q5 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

Q6 CPU91A and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y

Q7

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-105
 MT-106
5.12 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 12 Q6 Reseat the error-causing board, and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
12251, 12252, 12651 Y

n Analysis Flow m Replace the error-causing board.

{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MC:13.4_Scanner Board}

Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged?

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
A

Q2 Check the voltage of CN5 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 CPU91A and SCN17A/SCT17B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q6
Y

Q4 Check the photomultipliers (PMT/PMR).

{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

Q5 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

m Reseat the boards in the order named, and if the error is detected, replace the board.
1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
2. PMT17A/PMR17B board
{MC:11.3_PMT17A Board}
{MC:11.4_PMR17B Board}
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-106
 MT-107
5.13 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 13 Q6 Reseat the error-causing board, and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
12255 Y

n Analysis Flow m Replace the error-causing board.

{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MC:13.4_Scanner Board}

Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged?

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
A

Q2 Check the voltage of CN5 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 CPU91A and SCN17A/SCT17B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q6
Y

Q4 Check the leading-edge sensor (SZ1).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

m Reseat the boards in the order named, and if the error is detected, replace the board.
1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
2. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
3. Leading-edge sensor (SZ1)
{MC:12.23_IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-107
 MT-108
5.14 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 14 Q6 Reseat the error-causing board, and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
12256 Y

n Analysis Flow m Replace the error-causing board.

{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MC:13.4_Scanner Board}

Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged?

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
A

Q2 Check the voltage of CN5 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

m Check the subscanning unit mechanism.

{MC:12.1_Subscanning Unit}

Q3 CPU91A and SCN17A/SCT17B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q6
Y

Q4 Check the leading-edge sensor (SZ1).

{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}

Q5 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

m Reseat the boards in the order named, and if the error is detected, replace the board.
1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
2. Scanning optics unit
{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-108
 MT-109
5.15 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 15 Q7 Reseat the error-causing board, and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
11273, 12273, 12283 Y

n Analysis Flow m Replace the error-causing board.

{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
m Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MC:13.4_Scanner Board}

Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged?

Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
A

Q2 Check the voltage of CN5 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q3 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

Q4 CPU91A and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y

Q5 Check the laser (LDD).

{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}

Q6 Error recurs?
N
A
Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
2. Scanning optics unit
{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}
3. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-109
 MT-110

6. Error Code Analysis Flow: Q5 Reseat the SCN17A/SCT17B board and check if the error occurs again.
N
Electrical Y
A

m Replace the boards in the order named.

6.1 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 1 1. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
2. SNS17A/B board
12148, 12149, 12150, 12151, 12152, 12153, 12295, {MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
12296, 12297, 12702 {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}

n Analysis Flow
Q6 Check the voltage on the power supply unit.
m START {MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q7 Check the fuses on each board.

{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses}
Q1 Booted up normally?

N m Replace the board in the order named.

Troubleshoot the bootup failure.
1. CPU91A board
Y {MT:20._Troubleshooting Failures where Error Code is Undetectable and
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
Processing Freezes}

Q2 Voltages of TP1 on the CPU91A board and CN5 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board normal?
{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage} Q8 Reseat the CPU91A board and check if the error occurs again.
N N
Q6 A
Y Y

Q3 CPU91A board tested in MUTL normal? m Replace the CPU91A board.

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
N
Q8
Y
Q9 Reseat the SCN17A/SCT17B board and check if the error occurs again.
Q4 SCN17A/SCT17B board tested in MUTL normal? N
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} A
Y
N
Q9
Y m Replace the SNS17A/B board.
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
Q5 {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-110
 MT-111
6.2 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 2

11737, 11757, 11767

n Analysis Flow
m START

Q1 Use the MUTL to turn on the erasure lamps. LED and LSTB1-5 on the SNS17B indicate
preheat, subsequently with LED and LON1-5 lit normally?

N
Replace the SNS17A/B board.
Y {MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}

Q2 Use MUTL to turn on the erasure lamps. LED8 and SN1-5 on the SNS17B lit normally?
N
Check the harness between SNS17A and INV17A/B, and, if it is acceptable,
Y replace the INV17A/B board.

{MC:9.14_INV17A Board}
{MC:9.15_INV17B Board}

m Check the following harnesses.

1. Between INV17A and INV17B
2. INV17A/B and lamp
If there is no problem, replace the INV17A/B board.
{MC:9.14_INV17A Board}
{MC:9.15_INV17B Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-111
 MT-112
6.3 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 3

12703

n Analysis Flow
m START
A

Q1 Booted up normally?

N
Troubleshoot the bootup failure.
Y {MT:20._Troubleshooting Failures where Error Code is Undetectable and
Processing Freezes}

Q2 CPU91A and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal?

{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q4
Y

Q3 Check the voltage of TP1 on the CPU91A board.

{MT:8._Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

END

Q4 Reseat the CPU91A and SNS17A/B boards and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

1. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
2. SNS17A/B board
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}
{MC:13.8_SNS17A Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-112
 MT-113
6.4 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 4

11731, 11751, 11781, 12800, 12733, 12736, 12743,

12753, 12756, 12766

n Analysis Flow
m START

Q1 Error 12813 logged?

N
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}

Q2 INV17A/B board connectors connected?

N
After replacement of the safety thermostat, if the error persists, replace the
Y INV17A/B board.
{MC:9.14_INV17A Board}
{MC:9.15_INV17B Board}

m Check for continuity of the following harnesses, and if there is no problem, replace the
INV17A/B board.
1. Harness between SNS17A and INV17A/B
2. Harness between INV17A and INV17B
{MC:9.14_INV17A Board}
{MC:9.15_INV17B Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-113
 MT-114

7. Troubleshooting the Errors that 7.1 Checking the IIS

Cause the Inability to Update the Unless the IIS ("Internet Information Service") is not installed, the FTP server cannot
be used.
Software Version or Back Up the Make sure that the IIS has been installed in the CL that is used as the FTP server.
Machine Shipment Control Data n Check Procedures
This chapter summarizes the procedures for troubleshooting the errors that causes
the inability to update the software version or back up the machine shipment control
data.
1. Press the key.
Troubleshoot the errors in accordance with the check procedures in each section. 2. Select [Settings] - [Control Panel].
n Analysis Procedures
3. Exit the CL software.
u NOTE u
Troubleshoot the errors in accordance with the following steps. Otherwise, they 4. Double-click the "Administrative Tools" icon in "Control Panel".
cannot be troubleshooted.

m START

Q1 "CL line error" displayed on the LCD panel of the RU?

Y
Restore 5. Make sure that "IIS (Internet Information Service)" has been installed
N {MT:14.1_Analysis Flow for Line Error between CL and RU} in "Administrative Tools".

Q2 Network Check from the RU OK?

Y
END
N
If the IIS has not been installed, install it.
Q3 Check the IIS.
{FCR XG-1/CR CL Service Manual}
{MT:7.1_Checking the IIS}

Q4 Check the FTP server operating status.

{MT:7.2_Checking the Operating Status of the FTP Server}

Q5 Check the IP address of the CL.

{MT:7.3_Checking the IP Address of the CL}

Q6 Make sure that the RU has been registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU" of the RU PC-
TOOL.
{MT:7.4_Checking the IP Address of the RU}

END
011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-114
 MT-115

7.2 Checking the Operating Status of the FTP 7.3 Checking the IP Address of the CL
Server
n Check Procedures
n Check Procedures
1. Press the key.
1. Press the key. 2. Select [Settings] - [Control Panel].
2. Select [Settings] - [Control Panel]. 3. Exit the CL software.
3. Exit the CL software.
4. Double-click on the desktop.
4. Double-click “Administrative Tools” in “Control Panel”.
→ The “My Computer” window opens.

5. Double-click .

→ The “Control Panel” window opens.

5. Double-click “Internet Service Manager”.
6. Double-click .

→ The “Network and Dial-up connection” window opens.

6. Make sure that “Default FTP Site” has been started (i.e., “Stopped” is 7. Double-click .
not displayed).
If it has been started, this procedure is completed. → The “Local Area Connection” window opens.

REFERENCE
On Windows 2000, the “Local Area Connection” icon may not appear on the
display if your PC is not connected to other equipment (RU) with a network cable.

7. If “Stopped” is displayed, select [Start] from the [Action] menu.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-115
 MT-116
8. Click . 7.4 Checking "LIST OF EXISTING RU"
→ The “Local Area Connection Properties” window opens.
9. Choose and then click . n Check Procedures
→ The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens. 1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}

10. Make sure that the IP address of the FTP server matches “FTP-
SERVER IP ADDRESS” that is set in the RU.
If they are not matched, set the IP addresses of the RU and CL as appropriate.
{MT:7.5_Checking the FTP Server Address of the RU}
u INSTRUCTION u
If the RU is not registered yet, install it.
{IN:8_Installing the RU Software}

2. Exit the RU PC-TOOL.

{MU:4.2.2_Exiting RU PC-TOOL}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-116
 MT-117

7.5 Checking the FTP Server Address of the 3. Check the IP address of the FTP server.
RU
n Check Procedures
1. Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

2. Touch the [FTP Server] button.

u INSTRUCTION u
Check to see whether the IP address of the FTP server is identical to the IP
address of the CL checked in Section 7.3; if it is not identical, modify the setup
value so as to be identical to the IP address of the CL.

REFERENCES
- Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be modified, and
touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits.
- To set the FTP server address of the RU to "172.16.1.11", enter all the digits in
the form of "172.016.001.011".

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-117
 MT-118
4. Touch the [OK] button.

5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.

{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-118
 MT-119

8. Procedures for Checking the n Reference Sections

Voltage l CPU91A Board

{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the CPU91A Board Test Pins (TP1)}

8.1 Checking the Board Locations l SCN17A/SCT17B Board

{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the SCN17A/SCT17B Board Test Pins
(CN5)}

l DRV17A Board
{MT:8.4_Checking the Voltage on the DRV17A Board Test Pins (TP8)}

l Power Supply Unit (PSU17A)

{MT:8.5_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Unit}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-119
 MT-120

8.2 Checking the Voltage on the CPU91A 8.2.2 Checking the Voltage on Test Pins
Board Test Pins (TP1) n Voltage Check Procedures
WARNING 1. Check if the voltage on the test pins is normal.
To avoid possible electric shock hazard from high voltage, observe the
following precautions.
- Do not touch the power supply terminals.
- When making voltage measurements, do not touch the probe (metal portion)
of a tester.

8.2.1 Check Procedures

m START

m Remove the upper right-hand side cover. Power

Measurement point Power supply voltage inspection standard
{MC:3.1_Covers} supply
Between 1
m Turn OFF the HV. CPU91A +5V (A) Should be within a range from +4.8 to +5.2 V
and 4 of TP1
Between 2
CPU91A +5V (S) Should be within a range from +4.8 to +5.2 V
Q1 Voltage on the CPU91A board normal? and 4 of TP1
{MT:8.2.2_Checking the Voltage on Test Pins}

Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
2. Check to ensure that all the cables of the CPU91A board are
connected.
N
{MT:17_Block Diagrams}
Q2 Voltage on the power supply unit normal?
{MT:8.5_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Unit}
N
Replace the power supply unit.
Y {MC:4.1_Power Supply Unit}

m Turn ON the HV.

m Reinstall the upper right-hand side cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}

m Return to the error code analysis flow.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-120
 MT-121

8.3 Checking the Voltage on the SCN17A/ 8.3.2 Checking the Voltage on Test Pins
SCT17B Board Test Pins (CN5) n Voltage Check Procedures
WARNING 1. Check if the voltage on the test pins is normal.
To avoid possible electric shock hazard from high voltage, observe the
following precautions.
- Do not touch the power supply terminals.
- When making voltage measurements, do not touch the probe (metal portion)
of a tester.

8.3.1 Check Procedures

m START

m Remove the upper right-hand side cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}

m Turn OFF the HV.

Q1 Voltage on the SCN17A/SCT17B board normal?

{MT:8.3.2_Checking the Voltage on Test Pins}

Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q2 Voltage on the power supply unit normal?

{MT:8.5_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Unit} Power
Measurement point Power supply voltage inspection standard
N supply
Replace the power supply unit.
Y Between 2 and
{MC:4.1_Power Supply Unit} SCN17A +15V (G) Should be within a range from +14.4 to +15.6V
5 of CN5
Between 3 and
m Turn ON the HV. SCN17A -15V (H) Should be within a range from -15.6 to -14.4V
6 of CN5
Between 1 and
SCN17A +24V (J) Should be within a range from +24.06 to +25.54V
4 of CN5
m Reinstall the upper right-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Check to ensure that all the cables of the SCN17A/SCT17B board are
m Return to the error code analysis flow. connected.
{MT:17_Block Diagrams}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-121
 MT-122

8.4 Checking the Voltage on the DRV17A 8.4.2 Checking the Voltage on Test Pins
Board Test Pins (TP8) n Voltage Check Procedures
WARNING 1. Check if the voltage on the test pins is normal.
To avoid possible electric shock hazard from high voltage, observe the
following precautions.
- Do not touch the power supply terminals.
- When making voltage measurements, do not touch the probe (metal portion)
of a tester.

8.4.1 Check Procedures

m START

m Remove the upper right-hand side cover and top cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}

m Turn OFF the HV.

Q2 Voltage on the DRV17A board normal?

{MT:8.4.2_Checking the Voltage on Test Pins}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q1 Voltage on the power supply unit normal? Power

{MT:8.5_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Unit} Measurement point Power supply voltage inspection standard
supply
N
Replace the power supply unit. Between
Y {MC:4.1_Power Supply Unit} DRV17A 1 and 3 of +24V (B) Should be within a range from +23.04 to +24.96V
TP8
m Turn ON the HV. Between
DRV17A 2 and 3 of +5V (C) Should be within a range from +4.8 to +5.2V
TP8
m Reinstall the upper right-hand side cover and top cover. Between
{MC:3.1_Covers} DRV17A 4 and 3 of +15V (D) Should be within a range from +14.4 to +15.6V
TP8
m Return to the error code analysis flow.
2. Check to ensure that all the cables of the DRV17A board are
connected.
{MT:17_Block Diagrams}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-122
 MT-123

8.5 Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply 8.5.2 Checking the Voltage on Test Pins
Unit (PSU17A) n Voltage Check Procedures
WARNING 1. Check if the voltage on the test pins is normal.
To avoid possible electric shock hazard from high voltage, observe the
following precautions.
- Do not touch the power supply terminals.
- When making voltage measurements, do not touch the probe (metal portion)
of a tester.

8.5.1 Check Procedures

m START

m Power OFF.

m Remove the upper right-hand side cover, lower front cover, and upper left-hand side cover. Power
Measurement point Power supply voltage inspection standard
{MC:3.1_Covers} supply
Between 1
m Turn OFF the HV. PSU17A +24V (E) Should be within a range from +23.47 to +24.93V
and 5 of TP1
Between 2
PSU17A +15V (F) Should be within a range from +14.4 to +15.6V
m Power ON. and 6 of TP1
Between 3
PSU17A +12V (K) Should be within a range from +11.52 to +12.48V
and 7 of TP1
Q1 Voltage on the power supply unit normal?
{MT:8.5.2_Checking the Voltage on Test Pins}
2. Check to ensure that all the cables of the power supply unit are
N connected.
Replace the power supply unit.
Y {MC:4.1_Power Supply Unit} {MT:17_Block Diagrams}

m Power OFF.

m Turn ON the HV.

m Reinstall the upper right-hand side cover, lower front cover, and upper left-hand side cover.
{MC:3.1_Covers}

m Return to the error code analysis flow.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-123
 MT-124

9. Procedures for Checking the Fuses

9.1 Checking the Fuse Locations

After checking the fuse locations on each of the boards, check the fuses in
accordance with the procedures described in the reference section.

9.1.1 Checking the Board Locations

n Fuse Locations on Each of the Boards

{MT:9.1.2_List of Reference Sections}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-124
 MT-125
9.1.2 List of Reference Sections Fuse blow
Fuse Fuse-mounted
detection Reference section
No. component
circuit
Fuse blow
Fuse Fuse-mounted
detection Reference section F1 B161
No. component
circuit
F2 B171
PSU17A power
A011
supply
{MT:9.2_Power Supply Unit}
F3 B181
F1 A021 F4 B191
F2 A031 F5 B201
SNS17B board {MT:9.3_SNS17B Board}
F3 A041 F6 B211
DRV17B board {MT:9.4_DRV17A/B Board}
F4 A051 F7 B221
SCN17A/ F8 B241
F5 A061
SCT17B board
{MT:9.5_SCN17A/SCT17B Board}
F9 B231
F1 B011
F10 B251
F2 B021
F11 B261
F3 B031
F12 B281
F4 B041
F1 G041
F5 B051
F3 G011
F6 B061
F8 G031
F7 B071
F7(*) G051 SCN17A/SCT17B
F8 B081 board
{MT:9.5_SCN17A/SCT17B Board}
F2 H011
F9 B091 DRV17A board {MT:9.4_DRV17A/B Board}
F6 J011
F10 B101
F4 G021
F11 B111
F5 G061
F12 B121
F1 -
F13 B131
F2 -
F14 B141 INV17A board
F3 -
F15 B151 {MT:9.6_INV17A/B Board}
F4 -
F18 D011
F1 -
F19 D021 INV17B board
F2 -
( )
* Mounted only on the SCT17B board.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-125
 MT-126

9.2 Power Supply Unit 9.2.2 Procedures for Checking the Power Supply Unit Fuse
1. Check the location of the fuse on the power supply unit.
9.2.1 Check Flow
m START

m Turn OFF the power and circuit breaker.

m Remove the lower front cover and lower left-hand side cover.
{MC:3.1_Covers}

Q1 Fuse on the power supply unit normal?

{MT:9.2.2_Procedures for Checking the Power Supply Unit Fuse}
2. Contact the test pins to check the fuse.
N {MT:9.7_Checking the Fuse}
Replace the fuse.
Y
3. Check the cable.
Q2 Load protected by the fuse normal? {MT:9.8_Checking the Cable}
{MT:17_Block Diagrams}
N
Restore the load.
Y

m Reinstall the lower front cover and lower left-hand side cover.
{MC:3.1_Covers}

m Return to the error code analysis flow.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-126
 MT-127

9.3 SNS17B Board 9.3.2 Procedures for Checking the SNS17B Board Fuses
1. Check the locations of the fuses on the SNS17B board.
9.3.1 Check Flow
m START

m Turn OFF the power and circuit breaker.

m Remove the upper right-hand side cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}

Q1 Fuse on the SNS17B board normal?

{MT:9.3.2_Procedures for Checking the SNS17B Board Fuses}
N
Replace the fuse.
Y

Q2 Load protected by the fuse normal?

{MT:17_Block Diagrams}
N
Restore the load.
Y

m Reinstall the upper right-hand side cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}

m Return to the error code analysis flow.

2. Contact the test pins to check the fuse.

{MT:9.7_Checking the Fuse}

3. Check the cable.

{MT:9.8_Checking the Cable}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-127
 MT-128

9.4 DRV17A/B Board 9.4.2 Procedures for Checking the DRV17A Board Fuses
1. Check the locations of the fuses on the DRV17A board.
9.4.1 Check Flow
m START

m Turn OFF the power and circuit breaker.

m Remove the upper right-hand side cover and top cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}

Q1 Fuse on the DRV17A/B board normal?

{MT:9.4.2_Procedures for Checking the DRV17A Board Fuses}
{MT:9.4.3_Procedures for Checking the DRV17B Board Fuses}
N
Replace the fuse.
Y

Q2 Load protected by the fuse normal?

{MT:17_Block Diagrams}
N
Restore the load.
Y

m Reinstall the upper right-hand side cover and top cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}

m Return to the error code analysis flow.

2. Contact the test pins to check the fuse.

{MT:9.7_Checking the Fuse}

3. Check the cable.

{MT:9.8_Checking the Cable}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-128
 MT-129
9.4.3 Procedures for Checking the DRV17B Board Fuses
1. Check the locations of the fuses on the DRV17B board.

2. Contact the test pins to check the fuse.

{MT:9.7_Checking the Fuse}

3. Check the cable.

{MT:9.8_Checking the Cable}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-129
 MT-130

9.5 SCN17A/SCT17B Board 9.5.2 Procedures for Checking the SCN17A/SCT17B Board
Fuses
9.5.1 Check Flow 1. Check the locations of the fuses on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.
m START

m Turn OFF the power.

m Remove the upper right-hand side cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}

Q1 Fuse on the SCN17A/SCT17B board normal?

{MT:9.5.2_Procedures for Checking the SCN17A/SCT17B Board Fuses}
N
Replace the fuse.
Y

Q2 Load protected by the fuse normal?

{MT:17_Block Diagrams}
N
Restore the load.
Y

m Reinstall the upper right-hand side cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}

m Return to the error code analysis flow.

2. Contact the test pins to check the fuse.

{MT:9.7_Checking the Fuse}

3. Check the cable.

{MT:9.8_Checking the Cable}
011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-130
 MT-131

9.6 INV17A/B Board 9.6.2 Procedures for Checking the INV17A Board Fuses
1. Check the locations of the fuses on the INV17A board.
9.6.1 Check Flow
m START

m Turn OFF the power and circuit breaker.

m Remove the INV board.

- INV17A board
{MC:9.14_INV17A Board}
- INV17B board
{MC:9.15_INV17B Board}

Q1 Fuse on the INV17A/B board normal?

- INV17A board
{MT:9.6.2_Procedures for Checking the INV17A Board Fuses} 2. Contact the test pins to check the fuse.
- INV17B board {MT:9.7_Checking the Fuse}
{MT:9.6.3_Procedures for Checking the INV17B Board Fuses}
N 3. Check the cable.
Replace the fuse.
Y {MT:9.8_Checking the Cable}

Q2 Load protected by the fuse normal?

{MT:17_Block Diagrams}
N
Restore the load.
Y

m Reinstall the INV board.

- INV17A board
{MC:9.14_INV17A Board}
- INV17B board
{MC:9.15_INV17B Board}

m Return to the error code analysis flow.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-131
 MT-132
9.6.3 Procedures for Checking the INV17B Board Fuses 9.7 Checking the Fuse
1. Check the locations of the fuses on the INV17B board. Check for continuity as illustrated below.

2. Contact the test pins to check the fuse.

{MT:9.7_Checking the Fuse}

3. Check the cable.

{MT:9.8_Checking the Cable}
9.8 Checking the Cable
Referring to "17. Block Diagrams", check the following.
{MT:17_Block Diagrams}

1. Check for shorts between each of the pins and GND → 2Ω or greater
2. Check for shorts between each of the pins → 2Ω or greater
3. Check for continuity of each of the pins → 1Ω or less

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-132
 MT-133

10. Procedures for Checking the l SE5

{MT:10.13_Sensor Check Flow 10}
Sensors l SZ2, 3
Whether the sensor is normal or not is checked by sensor monitoring via the RU PC- {MT:10.14_Sensor Check Flow 11}
TOOL and the display of the LEDs on the SNS17A/B board.
l SZ4
{MT:10.15_Sensor Check Flow 12}
10.1 Checking the Sensors
Because the sensor checking procedures differ for each of the sensors, refer to the l SZ5
check procedures for the sensor to be checked. {MT:10.16_Sensor Check Flow 13}

n Reference Sections for Check Procedures of Each Sensor

l SA1-3, 6-9, 12-15, 18-21, 24
{MT:10.4_Sensor Check Flow 1}

l SA5, 11, 17, 23, SB1-7, 10, SC3, SZ1, SD2, SE1, 2, SG1, 2, BCRA1-4,
BCRC1
{MT:10.5_Sensor Check Flow 2}

l SA4, 10, 16, 22

{MT:10.6_Sensor Check Flow 3}

l SB7-9, 11
{MT:10.7_Sensor Check Flow 4}

l SC1
{MT:10.8_Sensor Check Flow 5}

l SC2
{MT:10.9_Sensor Check Flow 6}

l SC4
{MT:10.10_Sensor Check Flow 7}

l SD1
{MT:10.11_Sensor Check Flow 8}

l SE4
{MT:10.12_Sensor Check Flow 9}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-133
 MT-134

10.2 Starting and Exiting the Monitoring 10.2.2 Exiting the Monitoring Function
Function 1. Click on the [STOP] button.
With the RU PC-TOOL sensor monitoring function activated, turn ON/OFF the sensor
to be checked. If the sensor status changes corresponding to the ON/OFF timing, it
can be judged that the sensor is normal.

10.2.1 Starting the Monitoring Function

1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU.

2. Click on the button.

2. Click on the [MON] button.

3. Click on the [START] button.

→ When the RU operates under this condition, display entries are added whenever
the I/O changes.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-134
 MT-135

10.3 Checking via the LEDs on the SNS17B 10.3.2 Procedures for Exiting the LED Check
Board 1. Exit the MUTL.
The ON or OFF status of each sensor can be checked via the display of the LEDs of {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
the SNS17B board.
However, in order to make the LED display effective, it is necessary to execute All
2. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
Sensor LED ON by use of the MUTL. CAUTION
10.3.1 Procedures for Starting the LED Check After checking the LEDs, be sure to turn OFF the power of the machine, thereby
canceling "All Sensor LED ON".
1. Remove the upper right-hand side cover. Unless "All Sensor LED ON" is canceled, image abnormality will occur.
{MC:3.1_Covers}
3. Turn ON the high-voltage switch located on the SCN17A/SCT17B
2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch located on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.
board.
4. Reinstall the upper right-hand side cover.
3. Start the MUTL.
{MC:3.1_Covers}
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Execute All Sensor LED ON.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-135
 MT-136

10.4 Sensor Check Flow 1

In Sensor Check Flow 1, allow the sensor to transition to OPEN or CLOSE by setting
the cassette, and check to ensure that the sensor status changes accordingly.
It is also checked to see whether the barcode can be read by the barcode reader.

n Check Flow 1
m START

Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?

{MT:10.4.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (1)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q2 Result of SNS board LED check normal?

{MT:10.4.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (1)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q3 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.4_Sensors (SA1 to SA12)}
{MT:17.5_Sensors (SA13 to SA24)}
N
Restore
Y

m Replace the error-causing sensor.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-136
 MT-137
10.4.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (1) 4. Check the monitoring display.
Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} l Example of GOOD indication

2. Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}

3. Set a cassette corresponding to the sensor to be checked.

l To check SA1, 2, 3, 6: Set a cassette in shelf 1.

l To check SA7, 8, 9, 12: Set a cassette in shelf 2.

l To check SA13, 14, 15, 18: Set a cassette in shelf 3.

l NO GOOD indication
l To check SA19, 20, 21, 24: Set a cassette in shelf 4.
For the sensor to be checked, neither "OPEN" nor "CLOSE" is displayed.
REFERENCE u NOTE u
To check SA6, SA12, SA18, and SA24 (inch/metric sensors), swap cassettes of Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
inch size and metric size for checking them. beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.

5. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-137
 MT-138
10.4.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (1) l Shelf 4

1. Perform the procedures for starting the LED check.

{MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check}

2. Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board.

l Shelf 1

3. Set a cassette corresponding to the sensor to be checked.

l To check SA1, 2, 3, 6: Set a cassette in shelf 1.

l To check SA7, 8, 9, 12: Set a cassette in shelf 2.

l To check SA13, 14, 15, 18: Set a cassette in shelf 3.

l Shelf 2
l To check SA19, 20, 21, 24: Set a cassette in shelf 4.
REFERENCE
To check SA6, SA12, SA18, and SA24 (inch/metric sensors), swap cassettes of
inch size and metric size for checking them.

4. Check the display of LEDs located on the SNS17B board.

Make sure that the LEDs checked at step 2 change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF
to ON).
l Shelf 3
l GOOD indication
The status changes at steps 2 and 4.
l NO GOOD indication
The status does not change at steps 2 and 4.
5. Perform the procedures for exiting the LED check.
{MT:10.3.2_Procedures for Exiting the LED Check}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-138
 MT-139

10.5 Sensor Check Flow 2

In Sensor Check Flow 2, allow the sensor to transition to OPEN or CLOSE by
conveying the IP in the "Erasure" mode, and check to ensure that the sensor status
changes accordingly.

n Check Flow 2
m START

Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?

{MT:10.5.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (2)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q2 Result of SNS board LED check normal?

{MT:10.5.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (2)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q3 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.1_BCRA1, BCRA2, LED17A}
{MT:17.2_BCRA3, BCRA4, BCRC1, LED17A}
{MT:17.4_Sensors (SA1 to SA12)}
{MT:17.5_Sensors (SA13 to SA24)}
{MT:17.6_Sensors (SC1 to SC4, SG1 to SG2, SD1 to SD2, SE1 to SE2,
SE4 to SE5)}
{MT:17.7_Sensors (SB1 to SB11)}
N
Restore
Y

m Replace the error-causing sensor.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-139
 MT-140
10.5.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (2) 5. Check the monitoring display.
Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} l Example of GOOD indication

2. Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}

3. Navigate on the LCD panel of the RU to enter the "Erasure" Mode.

{See the Instruction Manual}

4. Set a cassette corresponding to the sensor to be checked.

l To check SA5, SB1, SB5, 6, 10, SC3, SZ1, SD2, SE1,2, SG1,2, BCRA1,
BCRC1:
l NO GOOD indication
Set a cassette in shelf 1.
For the sensor to be checked, neither "OPEN" nor "CLOSE" is displayed.
l To check SA11, SB2, SB5-7, 10, SC3, SZ1, SD2, SE1, 2, SG1, 2, BCRA2, u NOTE u
BCRC1
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
Set a cassette in shelf 2. beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.
l To check SA17, SB3, SB5, 6, 8, 10, SC3, SZ1, SD2, SE1, 2, SG1, 2, BCRA3,
BCRC1
Set a cassette in shelf 3.
6. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
l To check SA23, SB4, SB5, 6, 9, 10, SC3, SZ1, SD2, SE1, 2, SG1, 2, BCRA4,
BCRC1
Set a cassette in shelf 4.
REFERENCE
To check the SG2 (11" x 14" size determination sensor), set a 11" x 14" size
cassette.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-140
 MT-141
10.5.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (2) 4. Set a cassette corresponding to the sensor to be checked.

1. Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. l To check SA5, SB1, SB5, 6, 10, SC3, SZ1, SD2, SE1, 2, SG1, 2, BCRA1,
{MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check} BCRC1
Set a cassette in shelf 1.
2. Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board.
l To check SA11, SB2, SB5-7, 10, SC3, SZ1, SD2, SE1, 2, SG1, 2, BCRA2,
BCRC1
Set a cassette in shelf 2.
l To check SA17, SB3, SB5, 6, 8, 10, SC3, SZ1, SD2, SE1, 2, SG1, 2, BCRA3,
BCRC1
Set a cassette in shelf 3.
l To check SA23, SB4, SB5, 6, 9, 10, SC3, SZ1, SD2, SE1, 2, SG1, 2, BCRA4,
BCRC1
Set a cassette in shelf 4.
REFERENCE
To check the SG2 (11" x 14" size determination sensor), set a 11" x 14" size
cassette.

5. Check the display of the LEDs on the SNS17B board.

Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during
operation.
3. Navigate on the LCD panel of the RU to enter the "Erasure Mode". l GOOD indication
{See the Instruction Manual}
The LEDs change.
l NO GOOD indication
The LEDs do not change.
6. Perform the procedures for exiting the LED check.
{MT:10.3.2_Procedures for Exiting the LED Check}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-141
 MT-142

10.6 Sensor Check Flow 3

n Check Flow 3
m START

Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?

{MT:10.6.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (3)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q2 Result of SNS board LED check normal?

{MT:10.6.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (3)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q3 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.4_Sensors (SA1 to SA12)}
{MT:17.5_Sensors (SA13 to SA24)}
N
Restore
Y

m Replace the error-causing sensor.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-142
 MT-143
10.6.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (3) 5. Check the monitoring display.
Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} l Example of GOOD indication

2. Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}

3. Select IP Removal Unit.

4. Execute Suction Cup Arm HP corresponding to the sensor to be

l NO GOOD indication
checked.
For the sensor to be checked, neither "OPEN" nor "CLOSE" is displayed.
l To check SA4: Click on the [Shelf 1] button.
u NOTE u
l To check SA10: Click on the [Shelf 2] button. Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window
l To check SA16: Click on the [Shelf 3] button. even when the sensor changes its status.

l To check SA22: Click on the [Shelf 4] button.

6. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-143
 MT-144
10.6.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (3) 5. Check the display of the LEDs on the SNS17B board.
Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during
1. Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
{MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check}
l GOOD indication
2. Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. The LEDs change.
l NO GOOD indication
The LEDs do not change.
6. Perform the procedures for exiting the LED check.
{MT:10.3.2_Procedures for Exiting the LED Check}

3. Select IP Removal Unit.

4. Execute Suction Cup Arm HP corresponding to the sensor to be

checked.
l To check SA4: Click on the [Shelf 1] button.

l To check SA10: Click on the [Shelf 2] button.

l To check SA16: Click on the [Shelf 3] button.

l To check SA22: Click on the [Shelf 4] button.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-144
 MT-145

10.7 Sensor Check Flow 4

n Check Flow 4
m START

Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?

{MT:10.7.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (4)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q2 Result of SNS board LED check normal?

{MT:10.7.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (4)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q3 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.7_Sensors (SB1 to SB11)}
N
Restore
Y

m Replace the error-causing sensor.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-145
 MT-146
10.7.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (4) 5. Check the monitoring display.
Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} l Example of GOOD indication

2. Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}

3. Select Feed/Load Unit.

4. Execute Feed Path Change Guide HP (MB3).

l NO GOOD indication
For the sensor to be checked, neither "OPEN" nor "CLOSE" is displayed.
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.

6. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-146
 MT-147
10.7.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (4) 5. Check the display of the LEDs on the SNS17B board.
Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during
1. Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
{MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check}
l GOOD indication
2. Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. The LEDs change.
l NO GOOD indication
The LEDs do not change.
6. Perform the procedures for exiting the LED check.
{MT:10.3.2_Procedures for Exiting the LED Check}

3. Select Feed/Load Unit.

4. Execute Feed Path Change Guide HP (MB3).

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-147
 MT-148

10.8 Sensor Check Flow 5

n Check Flow 5
m START

Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?

{MT:10.8.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (5)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q2 Result of SNS board LED check normal?

{MT:10.8.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (5)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q3 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.6_Sensors (SC1 to SC4, SG1 to SG2, SD1 to SD2, SE1 to SE2,
SE4 to SE5)}
N
Restore
Y

m Replace the error-causing sensor.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-148
 MT-149
10.8.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (5) 5. Check the monitoring display.
Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} l Example of GOOD indication

2. Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}

3. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.

4. Select Side-Positioning Unit HP (MC1).

l NO GOOD indication
For the sensor to be checked, neither "OPEN" nor "CLOSE" is displayed.
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.

6. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-149
 MT-150
10.8.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (5) 5. Check the display of the LEDs on the SNS17B board.
Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during
1. Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
{MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check}
l GOOD indication
2. Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. The LEDs change.
l NO GOOD indication
The LEDs do not change.
6. Perform the procedures for exiting the LED check.
{MT:10.3.2_Procedures for Exiting the LED Check}

3. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.

4. Select Side-Positioning Unit HP (MC1).

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-150
 MT-151

10.9 Sensor Check Flow 6

n Check Flow 6
m START

Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?

{MT:10.9.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (6)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q2 Result of SNS board LED check normal?

{MT:10.9.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (6)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q3 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.6_Sensors (SC1 to SC4, SG1 to SG2, SD1 to SD2, SE1 to SE2,
SE4 to SE5)}
N
Restore
Y

m Replace the error-causing sensor.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-151
 MT-152
10.9.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (6) 5. Check the monitoring display.
Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} l Example of GOOD indication

2. Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}

3. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.

4. Select Grip Release HP (MC2).

l NO GOOD indication
For the sensor to be checked, neither "OPEN" nor "CLOSE" is displayed.
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.

6. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-152
 MT-153
10.9.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (6) 5. Check the display of the LEDs on the SNS17B board.
Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during
1. Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
{MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check}
l GOOD indication
2. Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. The LEDs change.
l NO GOOD indication
The LEDs do not change.
6. Perform the procedures for exiting the LED check.
{MT:10.3.2_Procedures for Exiting the LED Check}

3. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.

4. Select Grip Release HP (MC2).

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-153
 MT-154

10.10 Sensor Check Flow 7

n Check Flow 7
m START

Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?

{MT:10.10.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (7)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q2 Result of SNS board LED check normal?

{MT:10.10.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (7)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q3 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.6_Sensors (SC1 to SC4, SG1 to SG2, SD1 to SD2, SE1 to SE2,
SE4 to SE5)}
N
Restore
Y

m Replace the error-causing sensor.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-154
 MT-155
10.10.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (7) 5. Check the monitoring display.
Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} l Example of GOOD indication

2. Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}

3. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 2.

4. Select Cleaning Guide HP (MC4).

l NO GOOD indication
For the sensor to be checked, neither "OPEN" nor "CLOSE" is displayed.
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.

6. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-155
 MT-156
10.10.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (7) 5. Check the display of the LEDs on the SNS17B board.
Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during
1. Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
{MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check}
l GOOD indication
2. Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. The LEDs change.
l NO GOOD indication
The LEDs do not change.
6. Perform the procedures for exiting the LED check.
{MT:10.3.2_Procedures for Exiting the LED Check}

3. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 2.

4. Select Cleaning Guide HP (MC4).

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-156
 MT-157

10.11 Sensor Check Flow 8

n Check Flow 8
m START

Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?

{MT:10.11.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (8)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q2 Result of SNS board LED check normal?

{MT:10.11.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (8)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q3 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.6_Sensors (SC1 to SC4, SG1 to SG2, SD1 to SD2, SE1 to SE2,
SE4 to SE5)}
N
Restore
Y

m Replace the error-causing sensor.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-157
 MT-158
10.11.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (8) 5. Check the monitoring display.
Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} l Example of GOOD indication

2. Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}

3. Select Post-Reading Conveyor.

4. Select Grip Release HP (MD1).

l NO GOOD indication
For the sensor to be checked, neither "OPEN" nor "CLOSE" is displayed.
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.

6. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-158
 MT-159
10.11.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (8) 5. Check the display of the LEDs on the SNS17B board.
Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during
1. Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
{MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check}
l GOOD indication
2. Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. The LEDs change.
l NO GOOD indication
The LEDs do not change.
6. Perform the procedures for exiting the LED check.
{MT:10.3.2_Procedures for Exiting the LED Check}

3. Select Post-Reading Conveyor.

4. Select Grip Release HP (MD1).

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-159
 MT-160

10.12 Sensor Check Flow 9

n Check Flow 9
m START

Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?

{MT:10.12.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (9)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q2 Result of SNS board LED check normal?

{MT:10.12.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (9)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q3 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.6_Sensors (SC1 to SC4, SG1 to SG2, SD1 to SD2, SE1 to SE2,
SE4 to SE5)}
N
Restore
Y

m Replace the error-causing sensor.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-160
 MT-161
10.12.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (9) 5. Check the monitoring display.
Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} l Example of GOOD indication

2. Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}

3. Select Erasure Conveyor 1.

4. Select Erasure Side-positioning HP.

l NO GOOD indication
For the sensor to be checked, neither "OPEN" nor "CLOSE" is displayed.
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.

6. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-161
 MT-162
10.12.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (9) 5. Check the display of the LEDs on the SNS17B board.
Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during
1. Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
{MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check}
l GOOD indication
2. Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. The LEDs change.
l NO GOOD indication
The LEDs do not change.
6. Perform the procedures for exiting the LED check.
{MT:10.3.2_Procedures for Exiting the LED Check}

3. Select Erasure Conveyor 1.

4. Select Erasure Side-positioning HP.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-162
 MT-163

10.13 Sensor Check Flow 10

n Check Flow 10
m START

Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?

{MT:10.13.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (10)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q2 Result of SNS board LED check normal?

{MT:10.13.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (10)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q3 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.6_Sensors (SC1 to SC4, SG1 to SG2, SD1 to SD2, SE1 to SE2,
SE4 to SE5)}
N
Restore
Y

m Replace the error-causing sensor.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-163
 MT-164
10.13.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (10) 5. Check the monitoring display.
Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} l Example of GOOD indication

2. Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}

3. Select Erasure Conveyor 1.

4. Select Erasure Grip HP.

l NO GOOD indication
For the sensor to be checked, neither "OPEN" nor "CLOSE" is displayed.
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.

6. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-164
 MT-165
10.13.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (10) 5. Check the display of the LEDs on the SNS17B board.
Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during
1. Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
{MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check}
l GOOD indication
2. Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. The LEDs change.
l NO GOOD indication
The LEDs do not change.
6. Perform the procedures for exiting the LED check.
{MT:10.3.2_Procedures for Exiting the LED Check}

3. Select Erasure Conveyor 1.

4. Select Erasure Grip HP.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-165
 MT-166

10.14 Sensor Check Flow 11

n Check Flow 11
m START

Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?

{MT:10.14.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (11)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q2 Result of SNS board LED check normal?

{MT:10.14.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (11)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q3 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.8_Sensors (SZ1 to SZ5) and FFM Motor (MZ1)}
N
Restore
Y

m Replace the error-causing sensor.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-166
 MT-167
10.14.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (11) 5. Check the monitoring display.
Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} l Example of GOOD indication

2. Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}

3. Select Sub Scanning 1.

4. Select Grip HP (MZ2).

l NO GOOD indication
For the sensor to be checked, neither "OPEN" nor "CLOSE" is displayed.
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.

6. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-167
 MT-168
10.14.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (11) 5. Check the display of the LEDs on the SNS17B board.
Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during
1. Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
{MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check}
l GOOD indication
2. Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. The LEDs change.
l NO GOOD indication
The LEDs do not change.
6. Perform the procedures for exiting the LED check.
{MT:10.3.2_Procedures for Exiting the LED Check}

3. Select Sub Scanning 1.

4. Select Grip HP (MZ2).

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-168
 MT-169

10.15 Sensor Check Flow 12

n Check Flow 12
m START

Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?

{MT:10.15.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (12)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q2 Result of SNS board LED check normal?

{MT:10.15.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (12)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q3 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.8_Sensors (SZ1 to SZ5) and FFM Motor (MZ1)}
N
Restore
Y

m Replace the error-causing sensor.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-169
 MT-170
10.15.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (12) 5. Check the monitoring display.
Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} l Example of GOOD indication

2. Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}

3. Select Sub Scanning 2.

4. Select Dust Removal HP.

l NO GOOD indication
For the sensor to be checked, neither "OPEN" nor "CLOSE" is displayed.
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.

6. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-170
 MT-171
10.15.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (12) 5. Check the display of the LEDs on the SNS17B board.
Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during
1. Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
{MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check}
l GOOD indication
2. Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. The LEDs change.
l NO GOOD indication
The LEDs do not change.
6. Perform the procedures for exiting the LED check.
{MT:10.3.2_Procedures for Exiting the LED Check}

3. Select Sub Scanning 2.

4. Select Dust Removal HP.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-171
 MT-172

10.16 Sensor Check Flow 13

n Check Flow 13
m START

Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?

{MT:10.16.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (13)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q2 Result of SNS board LED check normal?

{MT:10.16.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (13)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q3 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.8_Sensors (SZ1 to SZ5) and FFM Motor (MZ1)}
N
Restore
Y

m Replace the error-causing sensor.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-172
 MT-173
10.16.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (13) 5. Check the monitoring display.
Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} l Example of GOOD indication

2. Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}

3. Select Sub Scanning 1.

4. Select Stopper HP.

l NO GOOD indication
For the sensor to be checked, neither "OPEN" nor "CLOSE" is displayed.
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.

6. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.

{MT:10.2.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-173
 MT-174
10.16.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (13) 5. Check the display of the LEDs on the SNS17B board.
Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during
1. Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
{MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check}
l GOOD indication
2. Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. The LEDs change.
l NO GOOD indication
The LEDs do not change.
6. Perform the procedures for exiting the LED check.
{MT:10.3.2_Procedures for Exiting the LED Check}

3. Select Sub Scanning 1

4. Select Stopper HP.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-174
 MT-175

11. Procedures for Checking the n Reference Sections

Motors I/O NO. Reference section I/O NO. Reference section

MA1 MD1 {MT:11.11}
It can be checked, via the LEDs on the DRV17A/B board, to see that the signal sent
when the motor is driven is received by the DRV17A/B board. MA2 MD2
{MT:11.1} {MT:11.12}
MA3 ME1
n Check Flow
MA4 ME2 {MT:11.13}
m START MB1 ME3 {MT:11.14}
{MT:11.2}
MB2 MZ2 {MT:11.8}
Q1 Operation of the motor normal?
{n Reference Sections} MB3 {MT:11.3} MZ3 {MT:11.9}
Y MC1 {MT:11.4} MZ4 {MT:11.10}
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N MC2 {MT:11.5}

Q2 Cable normal? MC3 {MT:11.6}

Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following points.
MC4 {MT:11.7}
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.8_Sensors (SZ1 to SZ5) and FFM Motor (MZ1)}
{MT:17.9_Motors (MA1 to MA4, MD1 to MD2, ME1, ME3, MZ2 to MZ3)}
{MT:17.10_Motors (MB1 to MB3, MC1 to MC4, ME2, MZ4)}
N
Restore
Y

Q3 Resistance value of the motor normal?

{MT:11.15_Checking the Motor Resistance Values}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

m Replace the motor.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-175
 MT-176

11.1 Checking the MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4 7. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs.
Operation l Checking the result of the operation
The methods for checking the operation are common to MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4. If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.
n Check Procedures
l Checking the display of the LEDs
1. Remove the top cover. Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17A board.
{MC:3.1_Covers} The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the motor
activation.
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 7 again to check them.
Start the User Utility. If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the motor (which may be
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility} checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
motor is normal.
3. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select IP Removal Unit.

5. Select Suction Cup Arm HP.

8. Exit the MUTL.

6. Perform suction cup arm HP for the third shelf. {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

9. Reinstall the top cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-176
 MT-177

11.2 Checking the MB1 and MB2 Operation 6. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs.
The methods for checking the operation are common to MB1 and MB2. l Checking the result of the operation
n Check Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.
1. Remove the top cover. l Checking the display of the LEDs
{MC:3.1_Covers} Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17B board.
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the motor
activation.
Start the User Utility.
If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 6 again to check them.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility} If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the motor (which may be
3. Start the MUTL. checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
motor is normal.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select Feed/Load Unit.

5. Select Feed Conveyance (MB1/MB2/MC3).

7. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

8. Reinstall the top cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-177
 MT-178

11.3 Checking the MB3 Operation l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17B board.
n Check Procedures The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the motor
activation.
1. Remove the top cover. If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 6 again to check them.
If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the motor (which may be
{MC:3.1_Covers}
checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. motor is normal.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select Feed/Load Unit.

5. Select Feed Path Change Guide HP (MB3).

7. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

6. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs.

8. Reinstall the top cover.
{MC:3.1_Covers}
l Checking the result of the operation
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-178
 MT-179

11.4 Checking the MC1 Operation l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17B board.
n Check Procedures The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the motor
activation.
1. Remove the top cover. If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 6 again to check them.
If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the motor (which may be
{MC:3.1_Covers}
checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. motor is normal.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.

5. Select Side-Positioning Unit HP (MC1).

7. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

6. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs.

8. Reinstall the top cover.
{MC:3.1_Covers}
l Checking the result of the operation
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-179
 MT-180

11.5 Checking the MC2 Operation l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17B board.
n Check Procedures The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the motor
activation.
1. Remove the top cover. If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 6 again to check them.
If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the motor (which may be
{MC:3.1_Covers}
checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. motor is normal.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.

5. Select Grip HP.

7. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

6. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs.

8. Reinstall the top cover.
{MC:3.1_Covers}
l Checking the result of the operation
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-180
 MT-181

11.6 Checking the MC3 Operation l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17B board.
n Check Procedures The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the motor
activation.
1. Remove the top cover. If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 6 again to check them.
If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the motor (which may be
{MC:3.1_Covers}
checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. motor is normal.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select Feed/Load Unit.

5. Select Feed Conveyance (MB1/MB2/MC3).

7. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

8. Reinstall the top cover.

6. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs.
{MC:3.1_Covers}
l Checking the result of the operation
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-181
 MT-182

11.7 Checking the MC4 Operation l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17B board.
n Check Procedures The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the motor
activation.
1. Remove the top cover. If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 6 again to check them.
If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the motor (which may be
{MC:3.1_Covers}
checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. motor is normal.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 2.

5. Select Cleaning Guide HP (MC4).

7. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

6. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs.

8. Reinstall the top cover.
{MC:3.1_Covers}
l Checking the result of the operation
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-182
 MT-183

11.8 Checking the MZ2 Operation l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17A/B board.
n Check Procedures The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the motor
activation.
1. Remove the top cover. If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 6 again to check them.
If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the motor (which may be
{MC:3.1_Covers}
checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. motor is normal.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select Sub Scanning 1.

5. Select Sub-Scanning Grip HP (MZ2).

7. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

8. Reinstall the top cover.

6. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. {MC:3.1_Covers}

l Checking the result of the operation

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-183
 MT-184

11.9 Checking the MZ3 Operation l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17A board.
n Check Procedures The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the motor
activation.
1. Remove the top cover. If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 6 again to check them.
If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the motor (which may be
{MC:3.1_Covers}
checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. motor is normal.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select Sub Scanning 2.

5. Select Dust Removal HP.

7. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

8. Reinstall the top cover.

6. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. {MC:3.1_Covers}

l Checking the result of the operation

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-184
 MT-185

11.10 Checking the MZ4 Operation l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17A board.
n Check Procedures The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the motor
activation.
1. Remove the top cover. If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 6 again to check them.
If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the motor (which may be
{MC:3.1_Covers}
checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. motor is normal.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select Sub Scanning 1.

5. Select Stopper HP.

7. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

6. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs.

8. Reinstall the top cover.
{MC:3.1_Covers}
l Checking the result of the operation
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-185
 MT-186

11.11 Checking the MD1 Operation l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17A board.
n Check Procedures The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the motor
activation.
1. Remove the top cover. If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 6 again to check them.
If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the motor (which may be
{MC:3.1_Covers}
checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. motor is normal.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select Post-Reading Conveyor.

5. Select Grip Release HP (MD1).

7. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

8. Reinstall the top cover.

6. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. {MC:3.1_Covers}

l Checking the result of the operation

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-186
 MT-187

11.12 Checking the MD2 and ME1 Operation l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17A board.
n Check Procedures The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the motor
activation.
1. Remove the top cover. If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 6 again to check them.
If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the motor (which may be
{MC:3.1_Covers}
checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. motor is normal.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select Post-Reading Conveyor.

5. Select Post-Conveyance MD2/ME1.

7. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

8. Reinstall the top cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}
6. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs.
l Checking the result of the operation
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-187
 MT-188

11.13 Checking the ME2 Operation l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17B board.
n Check Procedures The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the motor
activation.
1. Remove the top cover. If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 6 again to check them.
If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the motor (which may be
{MC:3.1_Covers}
checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. motor is normal.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select Erasure Conveyor 1.

5. Select Erasure Side-positioning IP Size Selection, and select Erasure

Side-positioning Movement.

7. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

8. Reinstall the top cover.

6. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. {MC:3.1_Covers}

l Checking the result of the operation

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-188
 MT-189

11.14 Checking the ME3 Operation l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17A board.
n Check Procedures The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the motor
activation.
1. Remove the top cover. If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 6 again to check them.
If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the motor (which may be
{MC:3.1_Covers}
checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. motor is normal.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select Erasure Conveyor 1.

5. Select Erasure Grip HP.

7. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

8. Reinstall the top cover.

6. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. {MC:3.1_Covers}

l Checking the result of the operation

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-189
 MT-190

11.15 Checking the Motor Resistance Values

With reference to the block diagram, measure the motor resistance values based on
the pin numbers.
{MT:17.8_Sensors (SZ1 to SZ5) and FFM Motor (MZ1)}
{MT:17.9_Motors (MA1 to MA4, MD1 to MD2, ME1, ME3, MZ2 to MZ3)}
{MT:17.10_Motors (MB1 to MB3, MC1 to MC4, ME2, MZ4)}

n List of Resistance Values of Motor Windings

Reference resistance value
I/O No. Load name Pin numbers Pin numbers Pin numbers Pin numbers
1 and 2 2 and 3 4 and 5 5 and 6
Suction cup drive motor
MA1
(first shelf)
Suction cup drive motor
MA2
(second shelf)
Suction cup drive motor
MA3
(third shelf)
Suction cup drive motor
MA4
(forth shelf)
MB1 IP transport motor
MB2 IP transport motor
Convergence path
MB3 changeover guide drive
motor 0.8-1.3Ω 0.8-1.3Ω 0.8-1.3Ω 0.8-1.3Ω
MC 1 Side-positioning motor
MC 2 Grip release motor
MC 3 IP transport motor
MD 1 Grip release motor
MD 2 IP transport motor
ME 1 IP transport motor
ME 2 Side-positioning motor
ME 3 Grip release motor
MC 4 Cleaning guide drive motor
MZ4 IP stopper drive motor
MZ2 Grip release motor
0.8-1.3Ω
MZ3 Dust removal motor

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-190
 MT-191

12. Procedures for Checking the n Reference Sections

Actuators I/O NO. Reference section I/O NO. Reference section

SOLA1 SVA1
It can be checked, via the LEDs on the DRV17A/B board, to see that the signal sent
SOLA2 SVA2
when the actuator is driven is received by the DRV17A/B board. {MT:12.1} {MT:12.3}
SOLA3 SVA3
n Check Flow
SOLA4 SVA4
m START SOLF1 {MT:12.5} CLA1
PA1 CLA2
Q1 Operation of the actuator normal? {MT:12.4}
{n Reference Sections} PA2 CLA3
{MT:12.2}
Y PA3 CLA4
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N PA4

Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.11_Actuators (SOLA1 to SOLA4, PA1 to PA4, SVA1 to SVA4,
CLA1 to CLA4)}
{MT:17.12_Actuator (SOLE1)}
N
Restore
Y

Q3 Resistance value of the actuator normal?

{MT:12.6_Checking the Actuator Resistance Values}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

m Replace the actuator.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-191
 MT-192

12.1 Checking the SOLA1, SOLA2, SOLA3, and l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17A board.
SOLA4 Operation The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the solenoid
The methods for checking the operation are common to SOLA1, SOLA2, SOLA3, and activation.
SOLA4. If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 7 again to check them.
If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the solenoid (which may be
1. Remove the top cover. checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
{MC:3.1_Covers} solenoid is normal.
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select IP Removal Unit.

5. Select Solenoid.
8. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

9. Reinstall the top cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}

6. Turn ON or OFF the solenoid to be checked.

7. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs.

l Checking the result of the operation
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-192
 MT-193

12.2 Checking the PA1, PA2, PA3, and PA4 l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17A board.
Operation The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the pump
The methods for checking the operation are common to PA1, PA2, PA3, and PA4. activation.
If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 7 again to check them.
1. Remove the top cover. If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the actuator (which may be
{MC:3.1_Covers} checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
pump is normal.
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select IP Removal Unit.

5. Select the pump to be checked.

8. Turn OFF the pump.

6. Turn ON the pump.

9. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

10. Reinstall the top cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}
7. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs.
l Checking the result of the operation
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-193
 MT-194

12.3 Checking the SVA1, SVA2, SVA3, and SVA4 l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17A board.
Operation The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the valve
The methods for checking the operation are common to SVA1, SVA2, SVA3, and activation.
SVA4. If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 7 again to check them.
If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the actuator (which may be
1. Remove the top cover. checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
{MC:3.1_Covers} valve is normal.
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select IP Removal Unit.

5. Select Valve.
8. Turn OFF the valve.

6. Turn ON the valve to be checked.

9. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

10. Reinstall the top cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}

7. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs.

l Checking the result of the operation
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-194
 MT-195

12.4 Checking the CLA1, CLA2, CLA3, and CLA4 l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17A board.
Operation The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the clutch
The methods for checking the operation are common to CLA1, CLA2, CLA3, and activation.
CLA4. If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 7 again to check them.
If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the actuator (which may be
1. Remove the top cover. checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
{MC:3.1_Covers} clutch is normal.
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select IP Removal Unit.

5. Select Clutch.
8. Turn OFF the Clutch.

6. Turn ON the clutch to be checked.

9. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

10. Reinstall the top cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}

7. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs.

l Checking the result of the operation
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-195
 MT-196

12.5 Checking the SOLF1 Operation l Checking the display of the LEDs
Check the display of the LEDs located on the DRV17B board.
1. Remove the top cover. The LEDs can only be checked corresponding to the timing of the path change
{MC:3.1_Covers} guide (SOLF1) activation.
If they cannot be checked, repeat steps 4 through 7 again to check them.
2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. If the LEDs can be checked during activation of the actuator (which may be
Start the User Utility. checked via the sound generated by it, for example), it may be judged that the
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility} path change guide (SOLF1) is normal.

3. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Select Erasure Conveyor 2.

5. Turn ON the path change guide (SOLF1).

9. Exit the MUTL.

6. Turn OFF the path change guide (SOLF1). {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

10. Reinstall the top cover.

{MC:3.1_Covers}

7. Check the result of the operation via the LEDs.

l Checking the result of the operation
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-196
 MT-197

12.6 Checking the Actuator Resistance Values l Valve

With reference to the block diagram, measure the actuator resistance values based Reference resistance
on the pin numbers. I/O No. Load name value
{MT:17.11_Actuators (SOLA1 to SOLA4, PA1 to PA4, SVA1 to SVA4, CLA1 to Pin numbers 1 and 2
CLA4)}
SVA1 IP leak valve (first shelf)
{MT:17.12_Actuator (SOLE1)}
SVA2 IP leak valve (second shelf)
n List of Resistance Values of Actuators 65 to 95Ω
SVA3 IP leak valve (third shelf)
l Solenoid SVA4 IP leak valve (forth shelf)
Reference resistance value
l Clutch
I/O No. Load name Pin numbers Pin numbers
1 and 3 1 and 4 Reference resistance
I/O No. Load name value
SOLA1 Cassette hold solenoid (first shelf)
Pin numbers 1 and 2
SOLA2 Cassette hold solenoid (second shelf)
CLA1 Cassette ejection clutch (first shelf)
SOLA3 Cassette hold solenoid (third shelf) 13.5 to 16.5Ω 134 to 154Ω
CLA2 Cassette ejection clutch (second shelf)
SOLA4 Cassette hold solenoid (forth shelf) 110 to 150Ω
CLA3 Cassette ejection clutch (third shelf)
SOLF1 Branch path changeover guide drive
CLA4 Cassette ejection clutch (forth shelf)
SOLB1 Reserved

l Pump
Reference resistance
I/O No. Load name value
Pin numbers 1 and 3
PA1 IP suction cup (first shelf)
PA2 IP suction cup (second shelf)
1Ω or less
PA3 IP suction cup (third shelf)
PA4 IP suction cup (forth shelf)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-197
 MT-198

13. Procedures for Checking the Q6 Error recurs?

N
Scanner I/O Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.

m Turn ON the HV.

13.1 Scanner I/O Check Flow
m START Q7 CPU91A and SCN17A/SCT17B board tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18_Board Test in MUTL}
N
Replace the error-causing board.
m Turn OFF the HV.
Y {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:14.5_SCN17A Board Fuses}
{MC:14.6_SCT17B Board Fuses}
Q1 Laser ON operated in MUTL normal?
{MT:13.2_Checking Laser ON in MUTL} Q8 Error recurs?
Y N
Return to the error code analysis flow. Return to the error code analysis flow.
N Y

Q2 PMT/PMR normal? m Replace the scanning optics unit.

{MT:13.4_Checking the PMT/PMR} {MC:10_Scanning Optics Unit}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N

Q3 Check the voltage on CN5 of the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

{MT:8_Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

m Power OFF.

Q4 Check all the fuses on the SCN17A/SCT17B board.

{MT:9_Procedures for Checking the Voltage}

Q5 Cable normal?
{MT:13.3_Checking the Cable}
N
Restore the cable.
Y

Q6

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-198
 MT-199

13.2 Checking Laser ON in MUTL 4. Check to see whether the LEDs on the SCN17A/SCT17B board are
normal.
n Procedures l GOOD indication
1. Remove the cover. u NOTE u
- Upper right-hand side cover The "HVON" LED display varies depending on the state of the high-voltage
{MC:3.1_Covers} switch. Thus, check the state of the high-voltage switch.
2. Start the MUTL. - High-voltage switch ON → LED illuminated
- High-voltage switch OFF → LED not illuminated
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Turn ON the laser. l NO GOOD indication

Check the display on the MUTL.

TURNNING ON THE LASER IS IN PROGRESS..
LDIFINT: 300
LDIFNOW: 132
LDIFNOW/LDIFINT: 44
RESULT-OK
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-199
 MT-200

13.3 Checking the Cable

n Procedures
1. Turn OFF the power of the machine.
2. Referring to the block diagram, check the following points.
{MT:17_Block Diagrams}
- The connector is securely plugged in.
- Check for shorts between each of the pins and GND → 2Ω or greater
- Check for shorts between each of the pins → 2Ω or greater
- Check for continuity of each of the pins → 1Ω or less

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-200
 MT-201

13.4 Checking the PMT/PMR 5. Check to see whether the LEDs on the SCN17A/SCT17B board are
normal.
n Procedures l GOOD indication
u NOTE u
1. Remove the cover.
The "HVON" LED display varies depending on the state of the high-voltage
- Upper right-hand side cover switch. Thus, check the state of the high-voltage switch.
{MC:3.1_Covers} High-voltage switch ON → LED illuminated
u NOTE u High-voltage switch OFF → LED not illuminated
If covers other than the upper right-hand side cover have been removed, reinstall
l NO GOOD indication
them.

2. Turn ON the HV.

3. Start MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

4. Turn ON the laser.

Check the display on the MUTL.

TURNNING ON THE LASER IS IN PROGRESS..
LDIFINT: 300
LDIFNOW: 132
LDIFNOW/LDIFINT: 44
RESULT-OK
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.

6. Turn OFF the HV.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-201
 MT-202

14. Line Error between CL and RU Q6 IP address of the RU correct?

{MT:14.6_Checking the IP Address of the RU}

14.1 Analysis Flow for Line Error between CL Q7 PING from the CL acceptable?
{MT:14.2_Checking Connection from the CL}
and RU N
Q8
Y
m START
END

Q1 PING from the CL acceptable?

{MT:14.2_Checking Connection from the CL}
Q8 Result of loopback test performed normal?
N {MT:14.7_Loopback Test}
Q6
Y N
Restore the network connection.
Y
Q2 Check the NETWORK CONFIGURATION information of the CL.
{MT:14.3_Checking Configuration Information of the CL}
Q9 PING from the CL acceptable?
{MT:14.2_Checking Connection from the CL}
Q3 Check the IP address of the CL.
{MT:14.4_Checking the IP Address of the CL} N
Restore the network connection.
Y
Q4 Check to see whether the IP address of the master CL that is set in the RU is correct.
{MT:14.5_Checking the IP Address of the Master CL} END

Q5 Check to see whether the FTP server setting is correct.

{MT:7_Troubleshooting the Errors that Cause the Inability to Update
the Software Version or Back Up the Machine Shipment Control Data}

END

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-202
 MT-203

14.2 Checking Connection from the CL l GOOD indication

Using the "PING" function of the "RU PC-TOOL", check the connection between the If the following message appears, the result is normal.
RU and CL. | Ping statistics for 172.16.1.110: |
| Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
n Check Procedures l NO GOOD indication
1 Start the "RU PC-TOOL". Other than above is all abnormal.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}

2 From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU to be connected.

3. Click on the [PING] button.

The DOS prompt window opens to display the test result.
4. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window.

REFERENCE
"Lost = (0% loss)" means that there is no problem as a result of executing the
PING command. If other than "(0% loss)", it is a sign that there was some
problem.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-203
 MT-204

14.3 Checking Configuration Information of the 5. Check the setting of "CONNECTING EQUIPMENT".
CL Make sure that the RU that was checked at step 4 is set.
If the setting is improper, modify the setting. If nothing is set, set it anew.
{FCR XG-1/CR CL Service Manual}
n Check Procedures
1. Exit the CL software.
2. Start the IP Service Utility.
3. Click on the [Setup Configuration Item] button.
4. Check the setting of "NETWORK CONFIG".
Make sure that the RU name and IP address are identical to those registered in
"LIST OF EXISTING RU" of the RU PC-TOOL.
If not, modify the setting.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-204
 MT-205

14.4 Checking the IP Address of the CL 6 Click .

→ The “Local Area Connection Properties” window opens.
n Check Procedures 7 Choose and then click .
1 Exit the CL software. → The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.

2 Double-click on the desktop.

→ The “My Computer” window opens.

Take note of the "IP address" and "Subnet mask" displayed.

3 Double-click . u INSTRUCTION u
Take note of the "IP address" displayed.
→ The “Control Panel” window opens.

4 Double-click .

→ The “Network and Dial-up connection” window opens.

5 Double-click .

→ The “Local Area Connection” window opens.

REFERENCE
On Windows 2000, the “Local Area Connection” icon may not appear on the
display if your PC is not connected to other equipment (RU) with a network cable.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-205
 MT-206

14.5 Checking the IP Address of the Master CL 3. Check the IP address displayed.
Make sure that the IP address displayed is identical to the IP address noted at step
n Check Procedures 7 of Section 14.4.
If it is not identical, modify "CL IP ADDRESS", and click on the [SET] button.
1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the list of master
CL's is to be checked, and click on the [EDIT CL NAME] button.

REFERENCE
For "CL NAME", any name (20 bytes: 20 alphanumeric characters, or 10 Kanji
characters) may be entered.
2. Click on the [MODIFY] button.

4. Click on the [SET] button.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-206
 MT-207

14.6 Checking the IP Address of the RU 4. Touch the [OK] button.

n Check Procedures
1. Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.
2. Touch the [RU IP Address] button. {MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

3. Check the IP address of the RU.

Make sure that it is identical to the IP address registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU"
of the RU PC-TOOL.
If it is not identical, modify the IP address of the RU.

REFERENCES
- Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be modified, and
touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits.
- To set the IP address of the RU to "172.16.1.21", enter all the digits in the form
of "172.016.001.021".

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-207
 MT-208

14.7 Loopback Test 3. Connect the jig (898Y0981) to the connector.

With the loopback test, connect a jig to the network cable or connector to physically l Example where the jig is connected to the cable
loop back the signal sent from the RU via the jig, thereby checking the network
connection, from the RU up to the point where the jig is connected.

n Check Procedures
1. Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

2. Touch the [Loop back Test] button.

l Example where the jig is connected to the connector

u NOTE u
If a hub is present between the RU and jig, a loopback test cannot be performed.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-208
 MT-209
4. Touch the [Check] button.
The test result is displayed.

u INSTRUCTION u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, remedy the connection of the network cable.

5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.

{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

6. Turn OFF the power of the RU and back ON.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-209
 MT-210

15. Troubleshooting Procedures for Q5 Quasi-data output from the LOG amp on the PMT17A/PMR17B board normal?
{MU:5.3 [4-2-4]_PMT Virtual Read}

Image Abnormalities N
Q11
Y

15.1 Vertical Streaks Q6 Quasi-data output from the LED lighting on the PMT17A/PMR17B board normal?
{MU:5.3 [4-2-3]_LED Virtual Read}
N
n Peculiar Events Replace the light-collecting unit.
Y {MC:11._Light-Collecting Unit}
- Does this image abnormality occur only with a specific cassette or IP?
- Does this image abnormality occur when another machine is operating? Q7 Error recurs after the light-collecting guide, light-collecting mirror, scanning optics unit, and
- Does this image abnormality occur depending o the processing size? exit glass of scanning optics unit are cleaned?

n Analysis Flow
N
END
m START Y

m Replace the parts in the order named.

m Check the frequency of occurrence of abnormal image. 1. Scanning optics unit
* Subsequent check procedures differ depending on the frequency of occurrence. {MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}
A 2. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
3. PMT17A/PMR17B board, light-collecting mirror
{MC:11._Light-Collecting Unit}
Q1 Any peculiar event found when abnormal image occurs?
Y
Troubleshoot the peculiar event or check the RU machine.
N Q8 Reseat the CPU91A board from the IMG17A/B board and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
Q2 Printer normal?
Y
N
Perform printer troubleshooting.
Y m Replace the IMG17A/B board.
{MC:13.3_IMG17A/B Board}

Q3 Quasi-data output from the IMG17A/B board normal?

{MU:5.3 [4-2-1]_IMG Board Pattern Output}
N
Q8
Y

Q4 Quasi-data output from the SCN17A/17B board normal?

{MU:5.3 [4-2-5]_SCN/SCT Board Virtual Read}
N
Q10
Y

Q5

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-210
 MT-211
Q9 Reseat the SCN17A/SCT17B board and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
Y

m Replace the parts in the order named.

1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
2. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}

Q10 Reseat the connector of the PMT17A/PMR17B board and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

1. PMT17A/PMR17B board
{MC:11.3_PMT17A Board}
{MC:11.4_PMR17B Board}
2. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-211
 MT-212

15.2 Horizontal Streaks 15.2.2 Troubleshooting Image Abnormalities Considered to

be Caused by IP
15.2.1 Analysis Flow for Horizontal Streaks If an image abnormality occurs only with a specific IP or cassette, the image
abnormality is considered to be caused by a defect of the IP.
m START
n Analysis Flow
Q1 Error code logged? m START
{MT:1.4.1_Troubleshooting from Error Log}

Y Q1 Can the IP number or cassette number that causes image abnormality be identified?
Perform analysis procedures based on the error code.
N {n Checking the IP Number or Cassette Number}
N
Return to the analysis flow for horizontal streaks.
Q2 Check the IP or cassette number that caused image abnormality. Y
{MT:15.2.2_Troubleshooting Image Abnormalities Considered to be Caused by IP}
Q2 Read IPs in a cassette with the identified IP number or cassette number, and check if the
image abnormality occurs again.
Q3 Printer normal?
N
N Return to the analysis flow for horizontal streaks.
Perform printer troubleshooting. Y
Y
m Replace a specific IP.
Q4 X-ray not irradiated to the RU during reading?
Check to see, among others, whether:
- The X-ray room door is not opened during exposure n Checking the IP Number or Cassette Number
- The medical equipment that employs X-ray is not used during reading.
Check the IP number or cassette number that causes image abnormality.
Y
Guide the user to move the RU to a place where X-ray is not irradiated.
N

Q5 Check to see whether pale band-like nonuniformity occurs at the leading edge or trailing
edge of the IP.
{MT:15.2.3_Analyzing Pale Nonuniformity at the Leading Edge or Trailing Edge of the IP}

Q6 Check to see whether thin, distinct nonuniformity occurs.

{MT:15.2.4_Analyzing Thin, Distinct Nonuniformity}

m END

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-212
 MT-213
15.2.3 Analyzing Pale Nonuniformity at the Leading Edge or n Checking the IP Size and Nonuniformity Occurrence Location
Trailing Edge of the IP The nonuniformity occurrence location differs depending on the IP size.
If a pale nonuniformity occurs at a fixed location on the leading-edge or trailing-edge
side relative to the IP conveyance direction, the grip mechanism is considered to be IP contact position center during
IP type IP size Event
faulty. gripping
14" x 17"
n Analysis Flow
14" x 14"
m START Reading leading edge 70 mm, trailing
ST 10" x 12"
edge 70 mm: White streak (24 x 30)
Q1 Pale nonuniformity occurs at a position that is considered to be caused by faulty grip 8" x 10"
mechanism? (18 x 24)
{n Checking the IP Size and Nonuniformity Occurrence Location}
Reading leading edge 65 mm, trailing Grip operation
HR-V 24×30
edge 80 mm: White streak
N
Return to the analysis flow for horizontal streaks Reading leading edge 65 mm, trailing
Y HR-V 18×24
edge 55 mm: White streak

Q2 Grip mechanism normal? Reading leading edge 55 mm, trailing

HR-BD 24×30
{n Procedures for Checking the Grip Mechanism} edge 90 mm: White streak
N Reading leading edge 55 mm, trailing
Restore HR-BD 18×24
edge 55 mm: White streak
Y

m Return to the analysis flow for horizontal streaks REFERENCE

The location of the nonuniformity is shown for the original size; thus, convert it, as
needed, based on the reduction ratio of the film, to check its location.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-213
 MT-214
n Procedures for Checking the Grip Mechanism 7. Execute Grip HP.
Check the grip mechanism of the subscanning unit in accordance with the procedures
described below, and remedy a problem, if any.
1. Turn OFF the power of the machine.
2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) located on the SCN17A/SCT17B
Repeat Grip HP several times to check the following points.
board.
l RESULT-OK is displayed
3. Remove the lower right-hand side cover and lower left-hand side
cover. If an error code is displayed in the "OK" portion of RESULT-OK, then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
{MC:3.1_Covers}
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
4. Turn ON the power of the machine.
l The operation is smooth without any offensive noise
5. Start the MUTL.
If the operation of the grip roller is not smooth or any offensive noise is
{MU:5.2.1_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} generated, remedy it.
6. Select Sub Scanning 1. l The grip springs are not attached in a wrong way
The grip springs of appropriate lengths should be used for the right and left sides
of the machine.
If their lengths are inappropriate, replace them with springs of appropriate
lengths.
{MC:12.20_Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)}
{MC:12.21_Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)}
{MC:12.28_Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) and Driven Shaft Grip Roller
(Lower)}

8. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

9. Turn OFF the power of the machine.

10. Reinstall the lower right-hand side cover and lower left-hand side
cover.
{MC:3.1_Covers}

11. Turn ON the high-voltage switch (S1) located on the SCN17A/SCT17B

board.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-214
 MT-215
15.2.4 Analyzing Thin, Distinct Nonuniformity 15.2.5 Procedures for Checking the Grip Roller (Upper)
If a thin, distinct nonuniformity occurs at a fixed location on the trailing-edge side
relative to the IP conveyance direction, the grip mechanism or FFM motor is n Check Procedures
considered to be faulty. With the machine placed in the power-OFF condition, perform the following
procedures.
m START
1. Remove the driving-shaft and driven-shaft grip rollers (upper).
{MC:12.20_Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)}
Q1 Check to see that there is nothing abnormal with the grip roller (upper).
{15.2.5_Procedures for Checking the Grip Roller (Upper)}
{MC:12.21_Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)}

2. Make sure that there is nothing abnormal with the grip roller (upper)
Q2 Check to see that there is nothing abnormal with the grounding of the photomultiplier
removed.
(PMT/PMR). If anything abnormal is found, replace the grip roller (upper).
{15.2.6_Procedures for Checking the Grounding of the PMT/PMR} - There should be no peeled adhesive.
- Grasp the bearings on both ends to rotate the shaft, and make sure that the roller
rotates smoothly.
Q3 Check to see that there is nothing abnormal with the FFM motor.
{15.2.7_Procedures for Checking the FFM Motor} 3. Make sure that there is nothing abnormal with the grip roller (lower).
If anything abnormal is found, replace the grip roller (lower).
m Return to the analysis flow for horizontal streaks. - The antistatic brush should come into contact with the grip roller (lower).
- Light shielding should be provided sufficiently (the covers should be attached
appropriately).
4. Reinstall the driving-shaft and driven-shaft grip rollers (upper).
{MC:12.20_Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)}
{MC:12.21_Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-215
 MT-216
15.2.6 Procedures for Checking the Grounding of the PMT/ 15.2.7 Procedures for Checking the FFM Motor
PMR
n Check Procedures
n Check Procedures Check the grip mechanism of the subscanning unit, and, if anything abnormal is
Disconnect the connectors connected to the PMT board and PMR board. found, remedy it.

1. Disconnect the connectors connected to the PMT board and PMR 1. Turn OFF the power of the machine.
board. 2. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) located on the SCN17A/SCT17B
→ {See relevant sections of the MC volume} board.
2. Check for continuity of the PMT/PMR shield portion and body. 3. Remove the lower right-hand side cover and lower left-hand side
If continuity is found, remedy it. cover.
3. Connect the connectors to the PMT board and PMR board. {MC:3.1_Covers}

l When connecting the connectors to the PMT board 4. Turn ON the power of the machine.

{MC:11.3_PMT17A Board} 5. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
l When connecting the connectors to the PMR board
6. Select Sub Scanning 2.
{MC:11.4_PMR17B Board (CR-IR363)}

7. Set the conveyance direction to CW.

8. Set the conveyance speed to G.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-216
 MT-217
9. Drive the subscanning motor (MZ1).

Repeat steps 7 through 9 to check the following points.

If anything abnormal is found, replace the FFM motor.
l RESULT-OK is displayed
If an error code is displayed in the "OK" portion of RESULT-OK, then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
l The wow/flutter is held below the reference
The wow/flutter is held below 0.6%.
l There is no offensive noise
There is no offensive noise during rotation of the FFM motor.
If any offensive noise is found, remedy it.
10. Stop the subscanning motor (MZ1)

8. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

9. Turn OFF the power of the machine.

10. Reinstall the lower right-hand side cover and lower left-hand side
cover.
{MC:3.1_Covers}

11. Turn ON the high-voltage switch (S1) located on the SCN17A/SCT17B

board.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-217
 MT-218

15.3 Other Abnormal Images Q6 Quasi-data output from the LOG amp on the PMT17A/PMR17B board normal?
{MU:5.3 [4-2-4]_PMT Virtual Read}
N
n Peculiar Events Q10
Y
- Does this image abnormality occur only with a specific cassette or IP?
- Does this image abnormality occur when another machine is operating? Q7 Quasi-data output from the LED lighting on the PMT17A/PMR17B board normal?
- Does this image abnormality occur depending o the processing size? {MU:5.3 [4-2-3]_LED Virtual Read}
N
n Analysis Flow Replace the light-collecting unit.
Y {MC:11._Light-Collecting Unit}
m START
END

m Check the frequency of occurrence of abnormal image.

* Subsequent check procedures differ depending on the frequency of occurrence. Q8 Reseat the CPU91A board from the IMG17A/B board and check if the error occurs again.
A
N
A
Y
Q1 Any peculiar event found when abnormal image occurs?
Y m Replace the CPU91A board.
Troubleshoot the peculiar event or check the RU machine. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
N

Q2 Printer normal? Q9 Reseat the SCN17A/SCT17B board and check if the error occurs again.
N N
Perform printer troubleshooting. A
Y Y
Q3 IP not irradiated twice by X-rays?
m Replace the parts in the order named.
N 1. SCN17A/SCT17B board
Re-expose it.
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}
Y 2. CPU91A board
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
Q4 Quasi-data output from the IMG17A/B board normal?
{MU:5.3 [4-2-1]_IMG Board Pattern Output}
N
Q8
Y

Q5 Quasi-data output from the SCN17A/SCT17B board normal?

{MU:5.3 [4-2-5]_SCN/SCT Board Virtual Read}
N
Q9
Y

Q6

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-218
 MT-219
Q10 Photomultiplier (PMT/PMR) normal?
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}
N
If not, troubleshoot as appropriate.
Y

Q11 Reseat the PMT17A/PMR17B board and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
Y

m Replace the boards in the order named.

1. PMT17A/PMR17B board
{MC:11.3_PMT17A Board}
{MC:11.4_PMR17B Board}
2. SCN17A/SCT17B board
{MC:13.4_Scanner Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-219
 MT-220

16. Removing the IP 3. Rotate the IP jam processing handle of the feed/load conveyor unit
until the leading edge of the IP can be checked.
When an IP jam occurs, check the location where the IP is jammed, and perform
appropriate removal procedures according to the occurrence location.

16.1 Removing the IP from the Feed/Load

Conveyor Unit
The IP that is jammed in the cassette set unit, feed/load conveyor unit, and side-
positioning conveyor unit should be removed from the feed/load conveyor unit.

16.1.1 When the IP is Jammed in the Cassette Set Unit

1. Remove the covers.
- Upper left-hand side cover
- Upper rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Manually convey the IP in the cassette set unit toward the feed/load
conveyor unit.

4. Remove the guide at a position where the leading edge of the IP is

visible.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-220
 MT-221
5. Rotate the IP jam processing handle to remove the IP. 16.1.2 When the IP is Jammed in the Side-Positioning
Conveyor Unit
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Upper left-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
- Upper rear cover
- Lower rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Manually convey the IP in the side-positioning conveyor unit toward

the feed/load conveyor unit.

6. Reinstall the guide in reverse order of step 4.

7. Reinstall the covers.
- Upper left-hand side cover
- Upper rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-221
 MT-222
3. Rotate the IP jam processing handle of the feed/load conveyor unit 5. Rotate the IP jam processing handle to remove the IP.
until the leading edge of the IP can be checked.

4. Remove the guide at a position where the leading edge of the IP is

visible.

6. Reinstall the guide in reverse order of step 4.

7. Reinstall the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Upper left-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
- Upper rear cover
- Lower rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-222
 MT-223

16.2 Removing the IP from the Erasure 3. Open the guide of the IP switchback assembly.
Conveyor Unit u INSTRUCTION u
The IP that is jammed in the subscanning unit, post-reading conveyor unit, and Make sure that the guide of the IP switchback assembly is secured to the
erasure conveyor unit should be removed from the erasure conveyor unit (IP housing by a magnet, before proceeding to the next step.
switchback assembly).

16.2.1 When the IP is Jammed in the Subscanning Unit or

Post-Reading Conveyor Unit
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Upper front light protect plate
- Lower front light protect plate
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Manually convey the IP in the subscanning unit toward the post-

reading conveyor unit.

4. Remove the guide.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-223
 MT-224
5. Manually convey the IP in the post-reading conveyor unit toward the 7. Reinstall the guide in reverse order of step 4.
erasure conveyor unit.
8. Close the guide of the IP switchback assembly.
u NOTE u
Firmly secure the guide of the IP switchback assembly by the retainers.
Otherwise, an IP jam might be caused.

6. Remove the IP from the erasure conveyor unit.

9. Reinstall the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Upper front light protect plate
- Lower front light protect plate
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-224
 MT-225
16.2.2 When the IP is Jammed in the Erasure Conveyor Unit 3. Open the guide of the IP switchback assembly.

1. Remove the covers.

- Lower front cover
- Upper front light protect plate
- Lower front light protect plate
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Rotate the belt of the erasure conveyor unit to convey the IP toward
the IP switchback assembly.

4. Remove the IP from the IP switchback assembly.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-225
 MT-226
5. Close the guide of the IP switchback assembly.
u NOTE u
Firmly secure the guide of the IP switchback assembly by the retainers.
Otherwise, an IP jam might be caused.

6. Reinstall the covers.

- Lower front cover
- Upper front light protect plate
- Lower front light protect plate
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-226
 MT-227

17. Block Diagrams 17.2 BCRA3, BCRA4, BCRC1, LED17A

17.1 BCRA1, BCRA2, LED17A

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-227
 MT-228

17.3 LCD17A, LDD12A, SYN12A, POL17A

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-228
 MT-229

17.4 Sensors (SA1 to SA12)

������ ������ ������
��������
��������
��� ����
� 灰 � 灰
�
������
������� 灰
���
��� � 灰
���
���
������
�������
�
� ���
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ��� � ��������
� ������ 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� カセッテIN検出
�����������
������
� ������� 灰 ��� � 灰 ���
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ���
� 灰 � 灰
��������
�
������
������� 灰
���
��� � 灰
���
���
������
�������
�
� ���
���� ���� � ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ��� � ��������
黒 ��� �������������
� � � � ��� �� ������� 灰 ��� ��
� 灰 ���
カセッテホールド検出 ������
� � � 白��� � ������� �� ��� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ���
������� �
ブレーカ �� ������ 灰 ��� ��
� 灰 ���
�� 灰 �� 灰
�������� �������� ��������������� ��
�������
��� 灰
���
���
�
�� 灰
���
���
������
�������
�
� ���
���� ����� �������� ��� � ��������
� 黒��� �����������
� 吸盤HP検出 ���������
� � 白���
� � 緑／黄のスパイラル �������������� ��
�������
���
�
�
���
��������
緑／黄のスパイラル (左後側フレーム) (1F天井)����������������������������������
�������������� ��������������������������� 吸着検出 ��������������

�� ��
(インレット近傍筐体)
������������������������
������ �
������� �
�
� ���
��� � � ��������
�����������
インチ／メトリック検出 ������
��� �������� ��������
����
灰 ���
� ������ 灰 ���
� ��� � ������
�
� ������� 灰 ���
�
�
�
�
�
灰 ��� �������
�
� ���
�
� ��� 灰 � 灰 ��� ��� � �������� �����������������
カセッテ排出検出 ������

������
������
��������
��������
�������� ��� ����
灰
����� 橙 ��� ��� 橙 ���
��� ����
�
�
�
������ 灰
������� 灰
���
���
�
� 灰
���
���
������
�������
�
� ���
� � ���� � 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ��� � ��������
� ������ 橙 ��� ��� 橙 ��� � � ��� �����������
����� 橙 ��� � ������ 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� カセッテIN検出 ������
� � ������� 灰 ��� � 灰 ���
� ������ 橙 ���
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ���
�
�
������� 灰
�������� 灰
���
���
�
�
灰
灰
���
���
������
�������
�
� ���
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ��� � �������� �������������
�� �������� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ��� カセッテホールド検出 ������
�� ��� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ���
�� ������� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ���
��
��
�������� 灰
��� 灰
���
���
�� 灰
灰
���
��
���
������� �
��������
�
� ����
��� � �������� �����������
吸盤HP検出 ���������

�������� �
�
����
��� ��������
吸着検出 ��������������

������� �
��������
�
� ����
��� � ��������
��������� ��
インチ／メトリック検出 ������
���������� �������� ��������
����
�
�
�
�
������ 灰 ���
������� 灰 ���
�
�
灰 ���
灰 ���
������
�������
�
� ���
�
�
��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ��� � ��������
�����������������
カセッテ排出検出 ������

��� ���
������������
��� ���
����������

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-229
 MT-230

17.5 Sensors (SA13 to SA24)

������ ������ ������
��������
�� ������
��� ����
灰 灰
�
�
������
������� 灰
���
���
�
� 灰
���
���
������
�������
�
�
����
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ��� � ��������
� ������ 灰 ��� � 灰 ���
カセッテIN検出 �����������
� ������� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ������
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ���
灰 灰
�������� �
�
������
������� 灰
���
���
�
� 灰
���
���
������
�������
�
�
����
���� ���� � ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ��� ��������
� �������������
� 黒 ��� � ��� �� ������� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ���
� � カセッテホールド検出 ������
� � � 白��� � ������� �� ��� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ���
�������
ブレーカ �� ������ 灰 ��� �� 灰 ���
灰 灰
�������� �������� ���������������
��
��
�������
��� 灰
���
���
��
�� 灰
���
���
������
�������
�
�
����
���� ����� �������� ��� � ��������
�����������
� � 黒 ��� 吸盤HP検出 ���������
� � 白 ���
� � 緑／黄のスパイラル �������������� ��
�������
���
� ����
� ��������
緑／黄のスパイラル (左後側フレーム) (1F天井)����������������������������������
�������������� ��������������������������� 吸着検出 ��������������

�� ��
(インレット近傍筐体)
������������������������
������
�������
�
�
����
��� � �������� �����������
インチ／メトリック検出 ������

��� �������� �� ������

����
������ 灰 ��� 灰 ���
�
� ������� 灰 ���
�
� 灰 ���
������
�������
�
�
����
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ��� � ��������
カセッテ排出検出 �����������������
������

��������
��������
��� ��������
�������� �����
��� � ������ 灰 � 灰
� ����� 橙 ��� ��� 橙��� �
����
�
� ������� 灰
���
��� � 灰
���
���
������
�������
�
� ����
��� 橙��� ���� � ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ��� � ��������
� ������ 橙 ��� � � �����������
� ������ 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� カセッテIN検出 ������
� ����� 橙 ���
灰
������ 橙 ��� � ������� 灰 ��� � ���
� � 灰 ��� � 灰 ���
���
� ������� 灰 � 灰
� �������� 灰
���
��� � 灰
���
���
������
�������
�
� ����
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ��� � ��������
�������������
�� �������� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ��� カセッテホールド検出 ������
�� ��� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ���
�� ������� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ���
�� �������� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ��� ������� �
�� ��� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ��� �������� � ����
��� � �������� �����������
吸盤HP検出 ���������

��������
���
�
�
����
��������
吸着検出 ��������������

�������
��������
�
� ����
��� � �������� �����������
インチ／メトリック検出 ������
���������� �� ������ ��������
�����
灰 ���
�
�
������ 灰 ���
������� 灰 ���
�
� 灰 ���
������
�������
�
�
����
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ��� � ��������
�����������������
カセッテ排出検出 ������

��� ���
��� ��� ������������
����������

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-230
 MT-231

17.6 Sensors (SC1 to SC4, SG1 to SG2, SD1 to

SD2, SE1 to SE2, SE4 to SE5)
������

��������
���� ����
� � � 黒 ��� � ���
� 白��� � �������
� �
ブレーカ
������� ������
�������� �������� ��������������� �������� ��������
��������
���� ����
���� �����
� � 黒���
�
�
������
�������
灰 ���
灰 ���
�
�
灰
灰
���
���
������
�������
�
�
���
� � 白��� � ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ��� � �������� ����������������
� � 緑／黄のスパイラル �������������� � 灰 ��� � 灰 �������������������
�� ������ ��� 幅寄機構HP検出
� ������� 灰 ��� � 灰 ���
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰
緑／黄のスパイラル
��������������
(左後側フレーム) (1F天井)����������������������������������
���������������������������
� ������ 灰 ��� � 灰
���
���
������
�������
�
�
���
� ������� 灰 ��� � 灰 ���
� ��������
��� ���������������
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ������
�� �� ヒップ解除HP検出
�� ������ 灰 ��� ��
�
灰 ���
(インレット近傍筐体) �� ������� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ���

���
�
������������������������ �� ��� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ��� ������ �
�� ������ 灰 ��� ������� �
�� ������� 灰 ��� ��� � �������� ����������������
�� ��� 灰 ��� 幅寄IP検出 ���������
��
������
�������
�
�
���
��� � �������� ��������������
クリーニングガイドHP ���������

�
�
���
� �������� ����������������
幅寄せ入り口 ���������������
�������� IP検出
����
�
�
������
�������
灰
灰
���
���
�
�
���
� ��� 灰 ��� � �������� ������������
� ���������判別 ��������������������
���� �
���
�
� ����� �
� ������ �
���� �������� ��������
���� ����
�
�
������
�������
灰
灰
���
���
�
�
灰
灰
���
���
������
�������
�
�
���
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ��� � �������� ������������
� ������ 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ヒップ解除HP検出 ���������
� ������� 灰 ��� � 灰 ���
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ���
������
�������
�
�
���
��� � �������� ���������������������
後搬送IP検出 ���������
���� �������� ��������
����
�
�
������
�������
灰
灰
���
���
�
�
灰
灰
���
���
������
�������
�
�
���
��������
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ��� � �����������������������
後搬送待機 �����������������
� ������ 灰 ��� � 灰 ���
IP検出
� ������� 灰 ��� � 灰 ���
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰
� ������ 灰 ��� � 灰
���
���
������
�������
�
�
���
� ������� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ��������
��� � ������������������
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� スイッチバック ���������
�� ������ 灰 ��� �� 灰 ��� IP検出
�
������� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ���

���
�
�� ��� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ��� ������ �
�� ������� �
�� � ��������
��� ������������������������
消去幅寄機構 �������������������
��
HP検出
�� ���
��
�� ������
�������
�
� ���
��� � ��������
����������������������
ヒップ解除HP検出

������������

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-231
 MT-232

17.7 Sensors (SB1 to SB11)

������

������

��������
���� ����
� � � 黒 ��� � ���
� � � 白��� � �������
�������
ブレーカ
�������� �������� ���������������
���� ����� ��������
� � 黒 ���
� � 白 ���
� � 緑／黄のスパイラル �������������� �� ���� ��������
����
��������
灰 灰���
�
�
������
������� 灰
���
���
�
� 灰���
������
�������
�
�
���
緑／黄のスパイラル (左後側フレーム) (1F天井)���������������������������������� � ��� 灰 ��� � 灰��� ��� � �������� �������������������
�������������� ��������������������������� 灰 灰��� ���������������
� ������ ��� � カセッテ口IP検出
�� �� � ������� 灰 ��� � 灰���
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰���
(インレット近傍筐体)
������������������������
� ������ 灰
灰
��� � 灰���
������
�������
�
�
���
� ������� ��� � 灰��� ��� � �������� �������������������
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰��� ���������������
�� ������ 灰 ��� �� 灰��� カセッテ口IP検出
�� ������� 灰 ��� �� 灰���
灰 灰���
��
��
���
������ 灰
���
���
��
�� 灰���
������
�������
�
�
���
�� ������� 灰 ��� �� 灰��� ��� � �������� �������������������
�� ��� 灰 ��� �� 灰��� カセッテ口IP検出 ���������������
�� ������ 灰 ��� �� 灰���
�� ������� 灰 ��� �� 灰���

����
�� ��� 灰 ��� �� 灰���
������
�������
�
� ���
��� � �������� �������������������
����� �
�
���� カセッテ口IP検出 ���������������
� ������ �

������
�������
�
�
���
��� � ��������
���前IP検出 �����������������

������
�������
�
�
���
��� �������� ���������������
�
合流前IP検出 ���������
���� �������� ��������
����
灰 ��� 灰
�
�
������
������� 灰 ���
�
� 灰
���
���
������
�������
�
�
���
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ��� ��� �������� ���������������
灰 � ���������
� ������ 灰 ��� � ��� バス切換HP検出
� ������� 灰 ��� � 灰 ���
� ��� 灰 ��� � 灰 ���
�
�
������
�������
灰 ���
灰 ���
�
�
灰
灰
���
���
������
�������
�
� ���
灰 ��� � �������� ���������������
� ��� 灰 ��� � ���
�� ������� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ��� バス切替棚検出 ������������
�� �������� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ���
灰 ��� 灰
��
��
���
������� 灰 ���
��
�� 灰
���
���
������
�������
�
�
���
�� �������� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ��� ��� � �������� ���������������
�� ��� 灰 ��� �� 灰 ��� バス切替棚検出 ������������
�� ��
�������
�������� �
�
���� ����������������
��� ��������
� ����������
合流バス切替検出 ������

�������
�������� � ����
��� � �������� ���������������
� バス切替棚検出 ������������

������������

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-232
 MT-233

17.8 Sensors (SZ1 to SZ5) and FFM Motor (MZ1)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-233
 MT-234

17.9 Motors (MA1 to MA4, MD1 to MD2, ME1,

ME3, MZ2 to MZ3)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-234
 MT-235

17.10 Motors (MB1 to MB3, MC1 to MC4, ME2,

MZ4)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-235
 MT-236

17.11 Actuators (SOLA1 to SOLA4, PA1 to PA4,

SVA1 to SVA4, CLA1 to CLA4)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-236
 MT-237

17.12 Actuator (SOLE1)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-237
 MT-238

17.13 Erasure Lamps and Fan 1

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-238
 MT-239

17.14 Erasure Lamps and Fan 2

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-239
 MT-240

18. Board Test in MUTL Q2 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
A
Y
18.1 Analysis Flow
m Replace the error-causing board.
m START {MC:13._PC Boards}

m Power OFF.

m Remove the upper right-hand side cover.

Turn OFF the high-voltage switch.

m Power ON.
A

Q1 Board tested normal?

{MT:18.2_Board Test}
N
Q2
Y

m Power OFF.

Turn ON the high-voltage switch.

m Reinstall the upper right-hand side cover.

m Return to the error code analysis flow.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-240
 MT-241

18.2 Board Test

18.2.1 Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

2. In the MUTL, set the number of board tests to be repeated.

18.2.2 Display

l GOOD indication
RESULT - OK

l NO GOOD indication
RESULT : XXXXX
XXXXX denotes error code.

u INSTRUCTION u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, perform the troubleshooting procedures
again based on the error code.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-241
 MT-242

19. Gathering Various Data When 2. Put a new floppy diskette into the FD drive of the CL.

Trouble Occurs u NOTE u

Never write any data into the machine-specific data floppy diskette bundled with
When a trouble occurs, back up the four sets of log data shown below into a floppy the machine.
diskette.
- ERROR LOG 3. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its data backup, and
- TRACE LOG back up the "ERROR LOG", "TRACE LOG", "HISTORY LOG", and
- HISTORY LOG "CONFIGURATION" data.
- CONFIGRATION
1. Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows. When the dialog
opens, type ["C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\
RuPCTool.exe"] and click on the [OK] button.

4. Remove the floppy diskette from the FD drive of the CL.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-242
 MT-243

20. Troubleshooting Failures where

Error Code is Undetectable and
Processing Freezes
If the error code is not displayed and the processing freezes, perform the following
procedures.

20.1 Analysis Flow for Processing Freeze

m START

Q1 Check the voltage on the CPU91A board.

{MT:8.2_Checking the DIP SW Setting on the CPU91A Board}
A

Q2 Check the LEDs on the IMG17A/B board and CPU91A board.

{MT:20.2_Checking the LEDs on the IMG Board and CPU Board}

Q3 Check the DIP SW setting on the CPU91A board.

{MT:20.3_Checking the DIP SW Setting on the CPU91A Board}

Q4 Error recurs?
Y
A
N

END

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-243
 MT-244

20.2 Checking the LEDs on the IMG Board and l GOOD indication
CPU Board If the LEDs flick up and down, or right and left, they are normal.

The LEDs are mounted on the IMG17A/B board and CPU91A board to indicate that
the boards are operating.
If anything abnormal is found with the LED lighting status while the RU is powered
ON, replace the IMG17A/B board or CPU91A board.

n Checking the LED Display

l NO GOOD indication
Other than above is all abnormal.
Replace the board where the LED display is abnormal.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
{MC:13.3_IMG17A/B Board}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-244
 MT-245

20.3 Checking the DIP SW Setting on the 20.3.2 Checking the DIP SW setting for the CR-IR363
CPU91A Board
The DIP switch setting on the CPU91A board differs for the CR-IR362 and CR-IR363.
Make sure that the DIP switch setting is made according to the machine used.

20.3.1 Checking the DIP SW setting for the CR-IR362

u INSTRUCTION u
If the machine is the CR-IR362 and the DIP SW setting differs than illustrated above,
modify the DIP SW setting under the power-OFF condition, and restore the RU
application.
{MT:20.4_Procedures for Restoring the RU Application}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-245
 MT-246

20.4 Procedures for Restoring the RU 4. Turn ON the power of the RU.
The RU boots up to the following state.
Application
- The touch panel does not display anything and remains blank.
u NOTE u - Only the cassette IN and OUT lamps are illuminated.
Once the procedures for restoring the RU application are performed, the machine
shipment control data of the RU is initialized. Check the IP addresses of the RU and 5. Put the RU-Appl CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the CL.
CL beforehand, and writhe them down on your notepad.
6. Perform the following procedures.

1. Turn OFF the power of the RU.

2. Remove the cover.
- Upper right-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

3. Set No. 4 of the DIP SW of the CPU91A board to ON.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-246
 MT-247
7. Make sure that the IP address of the RU selected at step 6 is 12. Turn ON the power of the RU.
displayed, and click on [OK].

8. Once the initialization of the application is completed, press the

[Enter] key.
REFERENCE
The initialization of the application takes about 2 minutes.

REFERENCE
When the RU is powered ON, the following screen appears on the touch panel,
and it boots up to the Maintenance Mode.

9. Turn OFF the power of the RU.

10. Put the DIP SW back to its original setting.
11. Reinstall the cover.
- Upper right-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-247
 MT-248
13. Set the IP address of the RU. 14. Set the IP address of the FTP server.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Enter the IP address of the RU that is set in the CL. Enter the IP address of the CL.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-248
 MT-249
15. Execute "Network Check". 16. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its version update, and
click on [VERSION UP].

17. Click on [OK].

18. Check "RU VERSION", and click on [OK].

u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{Troubleshooting}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-249
 MT-250
19. Click on [OK]. 21. Click on [OK].
CAUTION
While data is being written into the FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the power of
the RU.
If the power of the RU is turned OFF, the program residing in the memory is
corrupted, so that the RU cannot be rebooted.
22. Check the version of the RU software.

20. When writing from the IMG17A/B board to the FLASH ROM is u NOTE u
completed, click on the [Enter] key.
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, return to step 15 and perform version update
REFERENCE
procedures all over again.
Writing to the FLASH ROM will take about four minutes.
23. Turn OFF the power of the RU.
24. Turn ON the power of the RU.
u NOTE u
Unless the power of the RU is turned OFF and back ON, the state only allows
you to perform INSTALL and VERSION UP.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-250
 MT-251
25. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the IP address is to 26. From the "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its data backup, and
be set, and enter "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME" of the CL. back up the "CONFIGURATION" and "HISTORY" data.
u INSTRUCTION u
"IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME" of the CL that were checked before performing
the procedures for restoring the application should be entered.

27. Close the SetUp PC-TOOL.

28. Turn OFF the power of the RU.

29. Turn ON the power of the RU.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-251
 MT-252
30. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.

l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.

{MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-252
 MT-253
BLANK PAGE

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MT-253
 Control Sheet
Issue date Revision Pages affected
number Reason

08.25.2003 01 New release (FM4098) All pages

CR-IR 363 Service Manual

Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of

Parts (MC)

011-202-01 CR-IR 363 Service Manual

08.25.2003 FM4098
 MC-1
1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for INSTRUCTION
The yellow-painted screws require adjustments when components are reinstalled.
Each Unit When reinstalling the components, follow the check/adjustment procedures.

Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment NOTE

- In this volume, descriptions are omitted regarding components that do not require The TP screw used to secure the ground wire is similar in shape to a DT screw.
special attention or adjustment during their removal/reinstallation. For removal
When attaching the screw, check its shape to avoid confusing it with a wrong one.
procedures for such components, refer to the Parts List Volume.
- When performing check/replacement/adjustment procedures on the machine, the
following precautions should be observed
WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, power OFF the machine before performing the
procedures.

WARNING/CAUTION
Observe the warnings and cautions described in the "Safety Precautions."

CAUTIONS
- When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
- Do not remove the cover of the scanning optics unit.
- Never remove the red-painted screws.
INSTRUCTION
Some of the illustrations in this volume contain check/adjustment and half-punch
indicators as needed.
For removal and reinstallation, perform the procedures as instructed by such
indicators.
- Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the
installation location when the part or component
removed is to be reinstalled.
This indicator is placed in the illustration that
depicts the procedures for removing the parts and
components.
When you see this indicator, refer to its relevant
"n Check/ Adjustment Procedures.”
- Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches
when installing the parts or components.
However, it is not indicated for the half-punches for
improving ease of assembly or preventing erroneous
assembly procedures.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-1
 MC-2
2. Table of Contents 5. Cassette Set Unit 5.
5.1
Cassette Set Unit
Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit
MC-24
MC-24
5.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit MC-27
5.3 Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf) MC-29
3. Covers 3. Covers MC-7 5.4 Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and
3.1 Covers MC-7 Third Shelves) MC-30
3.2 Filters MC-8 5.5 Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf) MC-31
3.3 Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf) MC-9 5.6 Arms (White) MC-31
5.7 Shutters MC-32
5.8 LEDs (for the First, Second, and Third
Shelves) MC-33
5.9 LED (for the Fourth Shelf) MC-34
5.10 Antistatic Members MC-34
5.11 Suction Cup Driving Motors (MA1, 2, 3, 4) MC-35
5.12 Barcode Reader Assembly MC-36
5.13 Exposure Markers Receiving Boxes MC-37
5.14 Hold Release Arm MC-37
5.15 Hoses MC-38
5.16 Cassette Ejection Clutches (CLA1, 2, 3, 4) MC-39
5.17 Cassette Ejection Sensors (SA1, 7, 13, 19) MC-40
5.18 Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21) MC-40
5.19 Suction Cup HP Sensors (SA4, 10, 16, 22) MC-41
4. Housings 4. Housing Unit MC-10 5.20 Suction Sensors (SA5, 11, 17, 23) MC-42
4.1 Power Supply Unit MC-10 5.21 Suction Cup Assemblies MC-43
4.2 Fan (Power Supply Unit) MC-12 5.22 Suction Cups MC-44
4.3 Circuit Breaker MC-12 5.23 Roller Assemblies MC-45
4.4 Socket MC-14 5.24 Cassette Ejection Rollers MC-46
4.5 Fans (FANG1 and FANG2) MC-15 5.25 Cassette Set Base Assemblies MC-48
4.6 Fans (FANG3, FANG4, and FANG5) MC-16 5.26 Stoppers MC-50
4.7 Barcode Reader (BCRC1) MC-17 5.27 Inch/Metric Sensors (SA6, 12, 18, 24) MC-50
4.8 Touch Panel Assembly MC-17 5.28 Guide Plates MC-51
4.9 Antistatic Member (Front) MC-21 5.29 Cassette IN Sensors (SA2, 8, 14, 20) MC-52
4.10 Antistatic Members (Rear) MC-21 5.30 Stoppers MC-53
4.11 Side-Positioning Entrance IP Sensor 5.31 Suction Pump Bracket Assemblies MC-54
(SG1) MC-22 5.32 IP Removal Arms MC-56
4.12 "11x14IP" Determination Sensor (SG2) MC-22 5.33 Bearings (IP Removal Link Shafts) MC-58
4.13 Cassette Hold Release Pin MC-23 5.34 Solenoid Assemblies (SOLA1, 2, 3, 4) MC-60
5.35 IP Leak Valves (SVA1, 2, 3, 4) MC-61
5.36 IP Suction Pumps (PA1, 2, 3, 4) MC-62
5.37 Cassette Hold Pins MC-63
5.38 Movable Guide Assemblies MC-63
5.39 Movable Guides MC-64
5.40 Tapes MC-65
5.41 Guides MC-66
5.42 IP Stoppers MC-66

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-2
 MC-3
6. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit 6. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit MC-67 7. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit 7. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit MC-101
6.1 Feed/Load Conveyor Unit MC-67 7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit MC-101
6.2 IP Feed/Load Sensors (SB1, 2, 3, 4) MC-69 7.2 Side-Positioning Mechanism HP Sensor
6.3 Path Changeover Shelf Sensors (SC1) MC-105
(SB7, 8, 9) MC-69 7.3 Spur Gears (Reference Side) MC-105
6.4 Convergence Path Changeover Sensor 7.4 Grip Release HP Sensor (SC2) MC-106
(SB10) MC-70 7.5 Side-Positioning IP Sensor (SC3) MC-107
6.5 Path Changeover HP Sensor (SB11) MC-70 7.6 Cleaning Guide HP Sensor (SC4) MC-107
6.6 IP Jam Handling Assembly MC-71 7.7 Timing Belt MC-108
6.7 Brush Roller Assembly MC-71 7.8 Side-Positioning Motor (MC1) MC-109
6.8 Cam Bracket Assembly 7.9 Grip Release Motor (MC2) MC-110
(Upper Reference Side) MC-73 7.10 IP Transport Motor (MC3) MC-111
6.9 Path Changeover Mechanism MC-75 7.11 Cleaning Guide Driving Motor (MC4) MC-112
6.10 Cam Bracket Assembly 7.12 Latch Drive Unit (Overall) MC-113
(Lower Reference Side) MC-76 7.13 Latch Assembly (Latch Driver) MC-115
6.11 Gears Bracing Bracket 7.14 Latch Assembly (Reference Side) MC-116
(Upper Opposite-Reference Side) MC-77 7.15 Tensioner MC-117
6.12 Gears Bracing Bracket 7.16 Planetary Gear Assembly MC-117
(Lower Opposite-Reference Side) MC-77 7.17 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) MC-118
6.13 Conveyance Mechanism 7.18 Antistatic Members MC-118
(Opposite-Reference Side Gears) MC-78 7.19 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side) MC-119
6.14 Pre-BCR IP Sensor (SB5) MC-79 7.20 Grip Mechanism
6.15 Pre-Convergence IP Sensor (SB6) MC-79 (Opposite Reference Side) MC-120
6.16 IP Transport Motor (MB1) MC-80 7.21 Grip Shaft MC-121
6.17 Convergence Unit IP Transport Motor 7.22 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly MC-121
(MB2) MC-81 7.23 Rubber Roller (A) MC-122
6.18 Convergence Path Changeover Guide 7.24 Rubber Roller (B) MC-123
Driving Motor (MB3) MC-82 7.25 Rubber Roller (C and D) MC-124
6.19 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies 7.26 Rubber Roller (E) MC-126
(for the First, Second, and Third Shelves) MC-83 7.27 Rubber Roller (F) MC-128
6.20 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly 7.28 Guide MC-130
(for the Fourth Shelf) MC-83 7.29 Cleaning Guide Assembly MC-131
6.21 Antistatic Members MC-84 7.30 Cleaning Guide MC-133
6.22 Shock-Absorbing Rollers
(Convergence Unit) MC-84
6.23 Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H)MC-85
6.24 Arm and Bearing (for the First Shelf) MC-86
6.25 Arms and Bearings (for the Second,
Third, and Fourth Shelves) MC-87
6.26 Path Changeover Guides (for the First,
Second, Third, and Fourth Shelves) MC-88
6.27 Guides (for the First, Second, Third,
and Fourth Shelves) MC-89
6.28 Guide (Convergence Unit Lower Side) MC-90
6.29 Rubber Rollers (I, J, K, and L) MC-91
6.30 Rubber Rollers (M and N) MC-92
6.31 Rubber Rollers (O and P) MC-94
6.32 Rubber Rollers (Q and R) MC-95
6.33 Convergence Path Changeover Guide MC-97
6.34 Rubber Rollers (S and T) MC-98
6.35 Guide (Convergence Unit Upper Side) MC-99

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-3
 MC-4
8. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit 8. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit MC-135 9. Erasure Conveyor Unit 9. Erasure Conveyor Unit MC-155
8.1 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit MC-135 9.1 Erasure Conveyor Unit MC-155
8.2 Tensioner Assembly MC-137 9.2 Lamp Assembly MC-158
8.3 Timing Belt MC-137 9.3 Duct MC-160
8.4 Spur Gears (Opposite Reference Side) MC-138 9.4 Duct Assembly MC-161
8.5 Grip Release HP Sensor (SD1) MC-139 9.5 Fan (FANE1) MC-162
8.6 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side) MC-139 9.6 Fan (FANE2) MC-163
8.7 Planetary Gear Assembly MC-140 9.7 Fan (FANE3) MC-164
8.8 Grip Mechanism 9.8 Filter MC-165
(Opposite Reference Side) MC-141 9.9 Lamps MC-166
8.9 Grip Release Motor (MD1) MC-141 9.10 Reflection Plate Assembly MC-168
8.10 Post-Reading Conveyance IP Sensor 9.11 Lamp Temperature Sensor (THE1) MC-169
(SD2) MC-142 9.12 Safety Thermostat Sensor (TSWE1) MC-170
8.11 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly MC-142 9.13 Sockets MC-171
8.12 Spur Gears (Reference Side) MC-143 9.14 INV17A Board MC-172
8.13 IP Transport Motor (MD2) MC-143 9.15 INV17B Board MC-173
8.14 Variable Guide Assembly MC-144 9.16 IP Switchback Assembly MC-174
8.15 Rubber Rollers (A and B) MC-146 9.17 Post-Reading Conveyance Standby IP
8.16 Rubber Rollers (C and D) MC-148 Sensor (SE1) MC-175
8.17 Rubber Rollers (E and F) MC-150 9.18 Switchback Standby IP Sensor (SE2) MC-175
8.18 Rubber Rollers (G and H) MC-151 9.19 Erasure Side-Positioning Standby HP
8.19 Guide (A) MC-152 Sensor (SE4) MC-176
8.20 Guide (B) MC-153 9.20 Brackets MC-177
8.21 Grip Shaft MC-154 9.21 Grip Release HP Sensor (SE5) MC-178
9.22 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly MC-178
9.23 Branch Path Guide Driving Solenoid
(SOLE1) MC-179
9.24 Reflection Plate MC-180
9.25 Timing Belt (A) MC-181
9.26 Timing Belt (B) MC-182
9.27 Timing Belt (C) MC-183
9.28 Conveyance Mechanism
(Opposite Reference Side Gears) MC-184
9.29 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side) MC-185
9.30 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side) MC-186
9.31 Tensioner Assembly MC-187
9.32 Guide (A) MC-187
9.33 Guide (B) MC-188
9.34 Guide (C) MC-189
9.35 Latch Drive Unit MC-190
9.36 Latch Assembly (Reference Side) MC-192
9.37 IP Transport Motor (ME1) MC-192
9.38 Side-Positioning Motor (ME2) MC-193
9.39 Grip Release Motor (ME3) MC-193
9.40 Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, and F) MC-194
9.41 Rubber Rollers (G and H) MC-196
9.42 Rubber Rollers (I and J) MC-197
9.43 Guide (D) MC-199
9.44 Guide (E) MC-201
9.45 Grip Shaft MC-202
9.46 Guide (F) MC-203
9.47 Branch Path Changeover Guide MC-204
011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-4
 MC-5
10. Scanning Optics Unit 10. Scanning Optics Unit MC-207 12. Subscanning Unit 12. Subscanning Unit MC-224
10.1 Scanning Optics Unit MC-207 12.1 Subscanning Unit MC-224
12.2 Transparent Cover MC-228
12.3 Antistatic Member MC-228
12.4 SUS Belt MC-229
12.5 Kapton® Belt MC-230
12.6 Tensioner (Right-Hand Side) MC-231
12.7 Tensioner (Left-Hand Side) MC-231
12.8 Flywheel MC-232
12.9 FFM Motor (MZ1) MC-233
12.10 Cleaning Brush Assembly MC-236
12.11 Driving-Side Grip Release HP Sensor
(SZ2) and Driven-Side Grip Release
HP Sensor (SZ3) MC-237
12.12 IP Stopper HP Sensor (SZ5) MC-238
12.13 Grip Drive Motor (MZ2) MC-239
12.14 Dust Removal Motor (MZ3) MC-240
12.15 IP Stopper Drive Motor (MZ4) MC-242
11. Light-collecting unit 11. Light-Collecting Unit MC-210 12.16 Driving Shaft Grip Release Arm MC-243
11.1 Upper Light-Collecting Guide MC-210 12.17 Driven Shaft Grip Release Arm and
11.2 Lower Light-Collecting Guide MC-215 IP Stopper MC-245
11.3 PMT17A Board MC-220 12.18 Spur Gears MC-247
11.4 PMR17B Board MC-222 12.19 Dust Removal HP Sensor (SZ4) MC-248
12.20 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) MC-249
12.21 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) MC-250
12.22 Antistatic Member MC-251
12.23 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) MC-252
12.24 Light-Collecting Mirror MC-253
12.25 Light-Collecting Shaft MC-254
12.26 Glass Guide MC-255
12.27 Center Guide MC-257
12.28 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) and
Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) MC-258
12.29 Grounding Wires MC-259
12.30 Shock-Absorbing Rubbers MC-260
12.31 Subscanning Unit (Top) MC-261
12.32 Bracket Assembly MC-262
12.33 Lower Light-Collecting Guide Brace
Assembly MC-263

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-5
 MC-6
13. PC Boards 13. PC Boards MC-264 19. Data Backup/Image Checks 19. Data Backup/Image Checks MC-317
13.1 Board Bracket Assembly MC-264 19.1 Backing Up the Scanner Data MC-317
13.2 CPU91A Board MC-266 19.2 Checking the Image MC-318
13.3 IMG17A/B Board MC-268
13.4 Scanner Board MC-276 20. Image/Conveyance Checks 20. Image/Conveyance Checks MC-320
13.4.1 SCT17B Board MC-276 20.1 Check Before Procedures MC-320
13.5 DRV17A Board MC-278 20.2 Image/Conveyance Checks MC-321
13.6 DRV17B Board MC-279
21. List of Jigs and Tools 21. List of Jigs and Tools MC-323
13.7 SNS17B Board MC-281
21.1 Jigs and Tools MC-323
13.8 SNS17A Board MC-282
13.9 Battery MC-284 22. Installing the RU Software 22. Installing the RU Software MC-324

14. Replacing the Fuses and 14. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations MC-286
Fuse Locations 14.1 Fuse of Power Supply Unit MC-287
14.2 DRV17A Board Fuses MC-288
14.3 DRV17B Board Fuses MC-289
14.4 SNS17B Board Fuses MC-290
14.5 SCT17B Board Fuses MC-291
14.6 INV17A Board Fuses MC-292
14.7 INV17B Board Fuses MC-292
15 Updating Software Versions 15. Updating Software Versions MC-293
16. Format Adjustment 16. Format Adjustment MC-299
16.1 Main Scan Format Adjustment MC-299
16.1.1 Main Scan Position (Pixel) Adjustment MC-299
16.1.2 Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment MC-300
16.1.3 Optic Setting MC-302
16.2 IP Leading-Edge Adjustment
(Sub-scanning) MC-303
17. Shading/Sensitivity 17. Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP
Correction for IP Type ST Type ST MC-305
17.1 Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP
Type ST MC-305
17.2 Shading Speed Correction MC-306
17.3 Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST MC-308
18. Shading/Sensitivity 18. Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP
Correction for IP Type HR Type HR MC-310
18.1 Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR MC-310
18.2 Shading Correction for IP Type HR MC-312
18.3 Special Sensitivity Adjustment for
IP Type HR MC-314
18.3.1 When Sensitivity Adjustment is
Performed on the IP Type HR with the
Tungsten X-Ray Tube MC-314
18.3.2 When Sensitivity Adjustment is
Performed on the IP Type HR with the
Molybdenum X-ray Tube MC-315

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-6
 MC-7
3. Covers

3.1 Covers
{SP:INDEX}
n Reinstallation Procedures
n Removal Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
1. Remove the covers.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-7
 MC-8
3.2 Filters
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the filters.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-8
 MC-9
3.3 Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Upper front cover
- Lower front cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Remove the shelf cover (for the fourth shelf).

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
When installing the shelf cover (for the fourth shelf), avoid the cable and connector
beforehand so as not to pinch them.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-9
 MC-10
4. Housing Unit 3. Remove the power supply unit.

4.1 Power Supply Unit

{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Top cover
- Lower front cover
- Upper right-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Disconnect the connectors.

{CHECK 1}

n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
To install the power supply unit,securely attach the ground wire to the PE mark.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-10
 MC-11
n Check/Adjustment Procedure
l CHECK 1
After the power supply unit is replaced, check the voltage.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-11
 MC-12
4.2 Fan (Power Supply Unit) 4.3 Circuit Breaker
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the covers. 1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover - Lower front cover
- Lower left-hand side cover - Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers} {MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Remove the Fan. 2. Remove the bracket.

{CHECK 1}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedure
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the fan is attached in its correct orientation.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-12
 MC-13
3. Remove the FAST-ON terminal. n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u WARNING
The FAST-ON terminal should be detached by pressing the shaded portion in the Before attaching the circuit breaker, place the breaker switch in the OFF
illustration below. position.

u NOTE u
- Plug the FAST-ON terminals all the way in.
- Pay attention to the attachment position of the FAST-ON terminal.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

4. Remove the circuit breaker.
n Check/Adjustment Procedure
l CHECK 1
Attach the circuit breaker with its orientation in mind.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-13
 MC-14
4.4 Socket 3. Remove the FAST-ON terminal.
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u
The FAST-ON terminal should be detached by pressing the shaded portion in the
n Removal Procedures illustration below.

1. Remove the cover.

- Lower rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Remove the bracket.

4. Remove the socket.

n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
- Plug the FAST-ON terminals all the way in.
- Pay attention to the attachment position of the FAST-ON terminal.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-14
 MC-15
4.5 Fans (FANG1 and FANG2) 3. Remove the FANG1 and FANG2.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Top cover
- Upper right-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Disconnect the connectors.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedure
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the FANG1 and FANG2 are attached in their correct orientations.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-15
 MC-16
4.6 Fans (FANG3, FANG4, and FANG5) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Removal Procedures n Check/Adjustment Procedure

l CHECK 1
1. Remove the cover.
- Upper right-hand side cover Make sure that the FANG3, FANG4, and FANG5 are attached in their correct
orientations.
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Remove the fan assembly.

3. Remove the FANG3, FANG4, and FANG5.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-16
 MC-17
4.7 Barcode Reader (BCRC1) 4.8 Touch Panel Assembly
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the cover. 1. Remove the covers.
- Lower rear cover - Upper front cover
{MC:3.1_Covers} - Upper right-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the BCRC1.
2. Move the touch panel assembly away.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-17
 MC-18
3. Disconnect the cables and connectors. n Exploded View
For the exploded view of the touch panel assembly, see the Service Parts List.
{SP:11A_CONTROLLER}

n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the flat cables are attached at their correct positions.

4. Remove the touch panel assembly.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-18
 MC-19
n Check/Adjustment Procedures 2. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
After replacing the touch panel assembly, adjust the touch position of the touch panel. After the main screen appears, sequentially touch the upper left and upper right
corners of the touch panel.
1. Turn ON the power of the RU. REFERENCE
If your touch is accepted by the panel, a “beep” alarm sound is generated.

�� ��
������� �������

���������������������������������
��������������������� ������������

u INSTRUCTION u
If you cannot put the RU into the Maintenance Mode, turn OFF the power of the
RU and then reboot the RU all over again.

3. Touch the [Adjust Touch Position] button.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-19
 MC-20
4. Touch the four [x] positions displayed on the LCD. 7. Touch the [Return] button.

8. Exit the Machine Maintenance.

→ The main screen of the Machine Maintenance comes back in several seconds.
5. Touch the [Touch Position Check] button.

6. Touch any area on the LCD at several positions.

Make sure that the "x" mark appears at the position touched.
u NOTE u
If the "x" mark is misaligned from the touched position, repeat steps 3 through 6
all over again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-20
 MC-21
4.9 Antistatic Member (Front) 4.10 Antistatic Members (Rear)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit. 1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the antistatic member (front). 2. Remove the antistatic members (rear).
{SP:02A_FRAME} {SP:02B_FRAME}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-21
 MC-22
4.11 Side-Positioning Entrance IP Sensor (SG1) 4.12 "11x14IP" Determination Sensor (SG2)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. 1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the SG1. 2. Remove the SG2.

n Reinstallation Procedures n Reinstallation Procedures

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-22
 MC-23
4.13 Cassette Hold Release Pin n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cover.
- Top cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Pull out the cassette set unit.

{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}

3. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.

{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

4. Remove the cassette hold release pin.

u INSTRUCTION u
The replacement procedures should be performed from the rear side.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-23
 MC-24
5. Cassette Set Unit 4. Disconnect the connectors.

5.1 Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit

{SP:INDEX}

CAUTION
When pulling out or reinstalling the cassette set unit, be sure to remove the
touch panel assembly before doing so.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Upper front cover
- Lower front cover
- Upper right-hand side cover
- Upper left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Remove the shelf cover (for the fourth shelf).

{MC:3.3_Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)}

3. Remove the touch panel assembly.

u NOTE u
After removing the touch panel assembly, secure the disconnected cables and
connectors to the housing with tape or the like to prevent them from becoming
entangled.

{MC:4.8_Touch Panel Assembly}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-24
 MC-25
5. Move the cables away. n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
To push the cassette set unit into the housing, get hold of the portions indicated in the
illustration below. If other areas are grasped, portions of the cassette set unit may be
damaged.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

6. Pull out the cassette set unit.

u NOTE u
Get hold of the portions indicated by the "Hold Here" labels to pull out the
cassette set unit.

{n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 6)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-25
 MC-26
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 6)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-26
 MC-27
5.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
Because the cassette set unit is heavy, pay attention to the following points when
removing, installing, and moving it.
- Before proceeding with the procedures, secure sufficient working space around the
machine.
- Get hold of the portions indicated by the "Hold Here" labels.
- While assuming a comfortable posture, lift or hold up the unit.
- Two persons should cooperate with each other to perform the procedures.

n Removal Procedures
CAUTION
Unless the cassette set unit is to be removed, do not take off the brackets.
Otherwise, the cassette set unit would drop from the housing, causing you
physical injury.

1. Pull out the cassette set unit.

{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}

2. Remove the cassette set unit.

u NOTE u
Get hold of the portions indicated by the "Hold Here" labels to pull out the
cassette set unit.

{n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 2)}

n Reinstallation Procedures
CAUTION
After reinstalling the brackets, be sure to paint their screws in red.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-27
 MC-28
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 2)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-28
 MC-29
5.3 Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf) 4. Remove the shutter assembly.
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u
Put the disconnected cable and connector in an unobstructive corner beforehand
n Removal Procedures to prevent them from being entangled.
1. Remove the covers.
- Upper front cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Remove the touch panel assembly.

u NOTE u
After removing the touch panel assembly, secure the disconnected cables and
connectors to the housing with tape or the like to prevent them from becoming
entangled.

{MC:4.8_Touch Panel Assembly}

3. Disconnect the connector.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-29
 MC-30
5.4 Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and 3. Remove the shutter assembly.
Third Shelves) u NOTE u
{SP:INDEX} Put the disconnected cable and connector in an unobstructive corner beforehand
to prevent them from being entangled.
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the shutter assemblies for the second and third
shelves are the same, except removal/reinstallation procedures for their connector.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Upper front cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Disconnect the connector.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-30
 MC-31
5.5 Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf) 5.6 Arms (White)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the covers. 1. Pulling out the cassette set unit.
- Upper front cover {MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}
- Lower front cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the arms (white).
{SP:03C_CASSETTE SET UNIT}
2. Remove the shelf cover (for the fourth shelf).
{MC:3.3_Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)}

3. Remove the shutter assembly (for the fourth shelf).

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-31
 MC-32
5.7 Shutters n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the shutters for the first, second, third, and fourth n Check/Adjustment Procedures
shelves are all identical.
l CHECK 1
Move the shutter to make sure that the sensor and shutter do not interfere with each
n Removal Procedures other.

1. Remove the shutter assembly.

u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the shutter assembly for the shelf where the shutter to be removed is
installed.
{MC:5.3_Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)}
{MC:5.4_Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)}
{MC:5.5_Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)}

2. Remove the shutter.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-32
 MC-33
5.8 LEDs (for the First, Second, and Third 3. Remove the LED.
Shelves)
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the LEDs for the first, second, and third shelves are
all identical.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the shutter assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the shutter assembly for the shelf where the LED to be removed is
installed.
{MC:5.3_Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)}
{MC:5.4_Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)}
{MC:5.5_Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)}

2. Remove the shelf cover.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-33
 MC-34
5.9 LED (for the Fourth Shelf) 5.10 Antistatic Members
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures u NOTE u

The replacement procedures for the antistatic members for the first, second, third, and
1. Remove the shelf cover (for the fourth shelf). fourth shelves are all identical.
{MC:3.3_Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)}

2. Remove the LED (for the fourth shelf). n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the shutter assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the shutter assembly for the shelf where the antistatic members to be
removed are installed.
{MC:5.3_Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)}
{MC:5.4_Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)}
{MC:5.5_Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)}

2. Remove the antistatic members.

{SP:03A_CASSETTE SET UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-34
 MC-35
5.11 Suction Cup Driving Motors (MA1, 2, 3, 4) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4 are all identical. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
This section describes the replacement procedures for the MA1.
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the MA1 is installed in its correct orientation.
n Removal Procedures
1. Pulling out the cassette set unit.
{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}

2. Remove the shutter assembly.

u INSTRUCTION u
To remove the MA2, MA3, or MA4, remove its relevant shelf and the shutter
assembly for the shelf immediately above.
{MC:5.3_Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)}
{MC:5.4_Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)}
{MC:5.5_Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)}

3. Remove the MA1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-35
 MC-36
5.12 Barcode Reader Assembly n Exploded View
{SP:INDEX} For the exploded view of the latch assembly (latch drive unit), see the Service Parts
List.
u NOTE u {SP:03A_CASSETTE SET UNIT}
The replacement procedures for the barcode reader assemblies for the first, second,
third, and fourth shelves are all identical.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Removal Procedures
1. Pulling out the cassette set unit.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}

2. Remove the barcode reader assembly. l CHECK 1

Make sure that the barcode reader assembly does not pinch its surrounding cables.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-36
 MC-37
5.13 Exposure Markers Receiving Boxes 5.14 Hold Release Arm
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u n Removal Procedures
The replacement procedures for the exposure markers receiving boxes for the first,
second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical. 1. Pulling out the cassette set unit.
{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}
n Removal Procedures 2. Remove the hold release arm.

1. Pulling out the cassette set unit.

{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}

2. Remove the barcode reader assembly.

u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the barcode reader assembly for the shelf where the exposure markers
receiving box cover to be removed is installed.

{MC:5.12_Barcode Reader Assembly}

3. Remove the exposure markers receiving box.

{SP:03A_CASSETTE SET UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-37
 MC-38
5.15 Hoses n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the hoses for the first, second, third, and fourth n Check/Adjustment Procedures
shelves are all identical.
l CHECK 1
To attach the hose, push it all the way.
n Removal Procedures
l CHECK 2
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. Make sure that the hose is attached in a proper position as illustrated below.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the hose.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-38
 MC-39
5.16 Cassette Ejection Clutches (CLA1, 2, 3, 4) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the CLA1, CLA2, CLA3, and CLA4 are all identical. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
This section describes the replacement procedures for the CLA1.
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the tab of the bracket engages with the U-shaped notch of the
n Removal Procedures cassette ejection clutch.

1. Pulling out the cassette set unit.

{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}

2. Remove the CLA1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-39
 MC-40
5.17 Cassette Ejection Sensors (SA1, 7, 13, 19) 5.18 Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the SA1, SA7, SA13, and SA19 are all identical. The replacement procedures for the SA3, SA9, SA15, and SA21 are all identical.
This section describes the replacement procedures for the SA1. This section describes the replacement procedures for the SA3.

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the shutter assembly. 1. Pulling out the cassette set unit.
u INSTRUCTION u {MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}

Remove the shutter assembly for the shelf where the cassette ejection sensor to 2. Remove the SA3.
be removed is installed. {SP:03E_CASSETTE SET UNIT}
{MC:5.3_Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)} n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:5.4_Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)}
{MC:5.5_Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)} u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
2. Remove the SA1.
{SP:03A_CASSETTE SET UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-40
 MC-41
5.19 Suction Cup HP Sensors (SA4, 10, 16, 22) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u
u NOTE u Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
The replacement procedures for the SA4, SA10, SA16, and SA22 are all identical.
This section describes the replacement procedures for the SA4.

n Removal Procedures
1. Pulling out the cassette set unit.
{MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit}

2. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.

{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

3. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.

4. Remove the SA4.

{SP:03B_CASSETTE SET UNIT}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-41
 MC-42
5.20 Suction Sensors (SA5, 11, 17, 23) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u
u NOTE u Plug the FAST-ON terminals all the way in.
The replacement procedures for the SA5, SA11, SA17, and SA23 are all identical.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
This section describes the replacement procedures for the SA5.

n Removal Procedures n Check/Adjustment Procedures

1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. l CHECK 1
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} To attach the hose, push it all the way.
2. Remove the SA5.
l CHECK 2
u NOTE u Make sure that the FAST-ON terminals (SA5-1 and SA5-2) are attached in a proper
The FAST-ON terminal should be detached by pressing the shaded portion in the position as illustrated below.
illustration below.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-42
 MC-43
5.21 Suction Cup Assemblies 3. Remove the suction cup assembly.
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u
u NOTE u When installing or removing the suction cup assembly, perform the procedures
while supporting the IP removal arm by hand. If you try to perform the procedures
The replacement procedures for the suction cup assemblies for the first, second, third, without supporting the IP removal arm, the IP removal arm may be bent.
and fourth shelves are all identical.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

2. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
- To attach the hose, push it all the way.
- Make sure that the route of the hose is stress-free and normal.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-43
 MC-44
5.22 Suction Cups n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Removal Procedures
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the suction cup assembly.
l CHECK 1
{MC:5.21_Suction Cup Assemblies}
When attaching the suction cups, make sure that metal powder scraped by the
2. Remove the suction cups. screwdriver or the like is not deposited on them.

l CHECK 2
After attaching the KL clips, move them in orientations as illustrated below.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-44
 MC-45
5.23 Roller Assemblies 3. Remove the roller assemblies.
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the roller assemblies for the first, second, third, and
fourth shelves are all identical.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

2. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-45
 MC-46
5.24 Cassette Ejection Rollers 5. Move the IP removal arms to the positions illustrated below.
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the cassette ejection rollers for the first, second,
third, and fourth shelves are all identical.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the shutter assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the shutter assembly for the shelf where the cassette ejection roller to
be removed is installed.
{MC:5.3_Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)}
{MC:5.4_Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)}
{MC:5.5_Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)}

2. Remove the barcode reader assembly.

u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the barcode reader assembly for the shelf where the cassette ejection
roller to be removed is installed. 6. Disconnect the connectors.

{MC:5.12_Barcode Reader Assembly}

3. Remove the hold release arm.

{MC:5.14_Hold Release Arm}

4. Remove the cassette ejection clutch.

u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the cassette ejection clutch for the shelf where the cassette ejection
roller to be removed is installed.
{MC:5.16_Cassette Ejection Clutches (CLA1, 2, 3, 4)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-46
 MC-47
7. Remove the brackets. 9. Remove the cassette ejection roller (for the first shelf).

8. Remove the planetary gear assembly.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-47
 MC-48
5.25 Cassette Set Base Assemblies 4. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the cassette set base assemblies for the first,
second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the shutter assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the shutter assembly for the shelf where the cassette set base assembly
to be removed is installed.
{MC:5.3_Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf)}
{MC:5.4_Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Third Shelves)}
{MC:5.5_Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)}

2. Remove the barcode reader assembly.

u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the barcode reader assembly for the shelf where the cassette ejection
roller to be removed is installed.
{MC:5.12_Barcode Reader Assembly}

3. Remove the cassette hold sensor.

u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the cassette hold sensor for the shelf where the cassette ejection roller
to be removed is installed.
{MC:5.18_Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-48
 MC-49
5. Remove the cassette set base assembly. n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Because you may get your hand pinched, do not perform the reinstallation procedures
by grasping the lower front portion of the cassette set base assembly.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-49
 MC-50
5.26 Stoppers 5.27 Inch/Metric Sensors (SA6, 12, 18, 24)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the stoppers for the first, second, third, and fourth The replacement procedures for the SA6, SA12, SA18, and SA24 are all identical.
shelves are all identical.

n Removal Procedures
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cassette set base assembly.
1. Remove the cassette set base assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the cassette set base assembly for the shelf where the inch/metric
Remove the cassette set base assembly for the shelf where the stoppers to be sensor to be removed is installed.
removed are installed.
{MC:5.25_Cassette Set Base Assembly}
{MC:5.25_Cassette Set Base Assembly}
2. Remove the inch/metric sensor.
2. Remove the stoppers. {SP:03A_CASSETTE SET UNIT}
{SP:03E_CASSETTE SET UNIT}
n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-50
 MC-51
5.28 Guide Plates n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the guide plates for the first, second, third, and fourth n Check/Adjustment Procedures
shelves are all identical.
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the latches of the guide plates are properly hooked into the bracket.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cassette set base assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the cassette set base assembly for the shelf where the guide plates to
be removed are installed.
{MC:5.25_Cassette Set Base Assembly}

2. Remove the guide plates.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-51
 MC-52
5.29 Cassette IN Sensors (SA2, 8, 14, 20) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the SA2, SA8, SA14, and SA20 are all identical. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
n Removal Procedures Make sure that the torsion coil spring is attached properly.

1. Remove the stoppers.

{MC:5.26_Stoppers}

2. Remove the guide plates.

{MC:5.28_Guide Plates}

3. Remove the actuator (cassette IN detection).

u NOTE u
Be sure to observe the procedures for the removal/reinstallation of the actuator.
Otherwise, the actuator may be damaged.

4. Remove the cassette IN sensor.

{SP:03E_CASSETTE SET UNIT}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-52
 MC-53
5.30 Stoppers n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the stoppers for the first, second, third, and fourth n Check/Adjustment Procedures
shelves are all identical.
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the compression coil spring is attached properly.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cassette set base assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the cassette set base assembly for the shelf where the stopper to be
removed is installed.
{MC:5.25_Cassette Set Base Assembly}

2. Remove the stoppers.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-53
 MC-54
5.31 Suction Pump Bracket Assemblies 3. Disconnect the connector.
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the suction pump bracket assemblies for the first, The FAST-ON terminal should be detached by pressing the shaded portion in the
second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical. illustration below.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the suction cup HP sensor.
{MC:5.19_Suction Cup HP Sensors (SA4, 10, 16, 22)}

2. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-54
 MC-55
4. Remove the suction pump bracket assembly. n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the FAST-ON terminals (SA5-1 and SA5-2) are attached in a proper
position as illustrated below.

l CHECK 2
To attach the hose, push it all the way.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-55
 MC-56
5.32 IP Removal Arms 3. Remove the suction pump bracket assembly.
{SP:INDEX} u INSTRUCTION u
u NOTE u Remove the suction pump bracket assembly for the shelf where the IP removal
arms to be removed is installed.
The replacement procedures for the IP removal arms for the first, second, third, and
fourth shelves are all identical. {MC:5.31_Suction Pump Bracket Assemblies}

n Removal Procedures 4. Remove the bearings.

{CHECK 1}
1. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.

2. Remove the the arms (white).

{MC:5.6_Arms (White)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-56
 MC-57
5. Remove the IP removal arm. n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The right and left slide bearings should be attached in different orientations. Make
sure that they are attached in their correct orientations.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-57
 MC-58
5.33 Bearings (IP Removal Link Shafts) 3. Remove the KL clips.
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the bearings (IP removal link shafts) for the first,
second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical.

n Reinstallation Procedures
1. Remove the arms (white).
{MC:5.6_Arms (White)}

2. Remove the suction pump bracket assembly.

u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the suction pump bracket assembly for the shelf where the bearing to be
removed is installed.

{MC:5.31_Suction Pump Bracket Assemblies}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-58
 MC-59
4. Remove the bearings. n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the bearings are attached in their correct positions.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-59
 MC-60
5.34 Solenoid Assemblies (SOLA1, 2, 3, 4) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the SOLA1, SOLA2, SOLA3, and SOLA4 are all n Check/Adjustment Procedures
identical.
This section describes the replacement procedures for the SOLA1. l CHECK 1
Make sure that the shaft of the solenoid is properly attached to the bracket.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cassette set base assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the cassette set base assembly for the shelf where the solenoid
assembly to be removed is installed.
{MC:5.25_Cassette Set Base Assembly}

2. Remove the SOLA1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-60
 MC-61
5.35 IP Leak Valves (SVA1, 2, 3, 4) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the SVA1, SVA2, SVA3, and SVA4 are all identical. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
This section describes the replacement procedures for the SVA1.
l CHECK 1
When attaching the bracket, make sure that the surrounding cables are not pinched.
n Removal Procedures
l CHECK 2
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. To attach the hose, push it all the way.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the SVA1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-61
 MC-62
5.36 IP Suction Pumps (PA1, 2, 3, 4) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the PA1, PA2, PA3, and PA4 are all identical. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
This section describes the replacement procedures for the PA1.
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the hose is attached in a proper position as illustrated below.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the PA1.

l CHECK 2
To attach the hose, push it all the way.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-62
 MC-63
5.37 Cassette Hold Pins 5.38 Movable Guide Assemblies
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the cassette hold pins for the first, second, third, and The replacement procedures for the movable guide assemblies for the first, second,
fourth shelves are all identical. third, and fourth shelves are all identical.

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the solenoid assembly. 1. Remove the roller assemblies.
{MC:5.34_Solenoid Assemblies (SOL1, 2, 3, 4)} {MC:5.23_Roller Assemblies}

2. Remove the cassette hold pin. 2. Remove the guide plates.

{MC:5.28_Guide Plates}

3. Remove the movable guide assemblies.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-63
 MC-64
5.39 Movable Guides n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the movable guides for the first, second, third, and n Check/Adjustment Procedures
fourth shelves are all identical.
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the compression coil springs are properly attached between the
n Removal Procedures movable guides and bracket.

1. Remove the movable guide assemblies.

{MC:5.38_Movable Guide Assemblies}

2. Remove the movable guides.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-64
 MC-65
5.40 Tapes n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
u NOTE u Attach the tape along the path illustrated below.
The replacement procedures for the tapes for the first, second, third, and fourth
shelves are all identical.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the IP removal arms.
{MC:5.32_IP Removal Arms}

2. Remove the tapes.

n Reinstallation Procedures
u INSTRUCTION u
When the tapes are to be replaced, degrease the surface of the bracket with ethanol
before attaching them.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-65
 MC-66
5.41 Guides 5.42 IP Stoppers
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the guides for the first, second, third, and fourth The replacement procedures for the IP stoppers for the first, second, third, and fourth
shelves are all identical. shelves are all identical.

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. 1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the guides. 2. Remove the IP stopper.

{SP:03C_CASSETTE SET UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-66
 MC-67
6. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit 2. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.

6.1 Feed/Load Conveyor Unit

{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
Because the feed/load conveyor unit is heavy, pay attention to the following points
when removing, installing, and moving it.
- Before proceeding with the procedures,secure sufficient working space around the
machine.
- Get hold of the portions indicated by the "Hold Here" labels.
- While assuming a comfortable posture, lift or hold up the unit.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Upper left-hand side cover
- Upper rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-67
 MC-68
n Reinstallation Procedures 2. Secure the feed/load conveyor unit in place.

1. Mount the feed/load conveyor unit onto the housing.

u NOTE u
Use care so that the side plate bottom portions of the feed/load conveyor unit do
not ride onto the brackets of the housing.

3. Reinstall the covers.

- Upper left-hand side cover
- Upper rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-68
 MC-69
6.2 IP Feed/Load Sensors (SB1, 2, 3, 4) 6.3 Path Changeover Shelf Sensors (SB7, 8, 9)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

u NOTE u u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the SB1, SB2, SB3, and SB4 are all identical. The replacement procedures for the SB7, SB8, and SB9 are all identical.
This section describes the replacement procedures for the SB1. This section describes the replacement procedures for the SB7.

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. 1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the SB1. 2. Remove the SB7.

{SP:04C_FEED/LOAD CONVEYOR UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Attach the sensor with its orientation in mind.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-69
 MC-70
6.4 Convergence Path Changeover Sensor 6.5 Path Changeover HP Sensor (SB11)
(SB10) {SP:INDEX}

{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
n Removal Procedures 1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} 2. Remove the SB11.

2. Remove the SB10. {SP:04C_FEED/LOAD CONVEYOR UNIT}

{SP:04C_FEED/LOAD CONVEYOR UNIT} n Reinstallation Procedures

n Reinstallation Procedures u NOTE u
u NOTE u Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-70
 MC-71
6.6 IP Jam Handling Assembly 6.7 Brush Roller Assembly
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. 1. Remove the cover.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} - Upper rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the IP jam handling assembly.
2. Remove the brush roller assembly.
{CHECK 1}

n Exploded View
For the exploded view of the IP jam handling assembly, see the Service Parts List.
{SP:04A_FEED/LOAD CONVEYOR UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-71
 MC-72
■ Exploded View n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the brush roller assembly and brush rollers are attached in their
correct orientations.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-72
 MC-73
6.8 Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference
Side)
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the cam bracket assembly.

{CHECK1}
{CHECK2}
u NOTE u
The inner member of the half-clutch spur gear may pop out. If the inner member
pops out, push it back where it was. If the inner member is removed, it may
cause trouble or failure.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-73
 MC-74
n Reinstallation Procedures l CHECK 2
Make sure that the cams attached to the cam bracket assembly are all located at their
u NOTE u
correct positions.
Check the positional alignments of the cams before installing the cam bracket
assembly. If it is installed with any one of the teeth of the cams misaligned, the path
P
changeover mechanism will not operate normally.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures

l CHECK 1
Make sure that the half-clutch spur gear is secured by the rods of the bracket.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-74
 MC-75
6.9 Path Changeover Mechanism
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side).
{MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)}

2. Remove the path changeover mechanism.

u NOTE u
The inner member of the half-clutch spur gear may pop out. If the inner member
pops out, push it back where it was. If the inner member is removed, it may
cause trouble or failure.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-75
 MC-76
6.10 Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference
Side)
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the bracket.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
When attaching the half-clutch spur gear retaining bracket, align the positions of
the half-clutch spur gear, bracket holes, and the bracket rods.

3. Remove the cam and half-clutch spur gear.

u NOTE u
The inner member of the half-clutch spur gear may pop out. If the inner member
pops out, push it back where it was. If the inner member is removed, it may
cause trouble or failure.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-76
 MC-77
6.11 Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite- 6.12 Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-
Reference Side) Reference Side)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. 1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side) 2. Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side)

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-77
 MC-78
6.13 Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite- n Check/Adjustment Procedures
Reference Side Gears) Attach the spur gears in accordance with the engravings on the side plate.

{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side).
{MC:6.11_Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side)}

2. Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side).

{MC:6.12_Gears Bracing Bracket (lower Opposite-Reference Side)}

3. Remove the spur gears.

{SP:04B_FEED/LOAD CONVEYOR UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-78
 MC-79
6.14 Pre-BCR IP Sensor (SB5) 6.15 Pre-Convergence IP Sensor (SB6)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the cam bracket assembly (lower reference side). 1. Remove the cam bracket assembly (lower reference side).
{MC:6.10_Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side)} {MC:6.10_Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side)}

2. Remove the SB5. 2. Remove the SB6.

n Reinstallation Procedures n Reinstallation Procedures

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures n Check/Adjustment Procedures

l CHECK 1 l CHECK 1
Attach the SB5 with its orientation in mind. Attach the SB6 with its orientation in mind.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-79
 MC-80
6.16 IP Transport Motor (MB1) 4. Remove the MB1.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side).
{MC:6.11_Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side)}

2. Put the feed/load conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below.

n Reinstallation Procedures
3. Remove the spur gear. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gear is attached at its correct orientation.
{MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)
_n Check/Adjustment Procedures}

l CHECK 2
Make sure that the MB1 is installed in its correct orientation.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-80
 MC-81
6.17 Convergence Unit IP Transport Motor n Reinstallation Procedures
(MB2) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

{SP:INDEX}
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
n Removal Procedures
l CHECK 1
1. Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side). Make sure that the spur gears are attached at their correct orientations.
{MC:6.12_Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-Reference Side)} {MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)
_n Check/Adjustment Procedures}
2. Put the feed/load conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below.
l CHECK 2
Make sure that the MB2 is installed in its correct orientation.

3. Remove the MB2.

������ ��
��� �����������������������
����� ��
����������
��������

������
��
��������
�����

��
���������������������
������������

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-81
 MC-82
6.18 Convergence Path Changeover Guide n Reinstallation Procedures
Driving Motor (MB3) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

{SP:INDEX}
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
n Removal Procedures
l CHECK 1
1. Remove the cam bracket assembly (lower reference side). Make sure that the spur gear is attached at its correct orientation.
{MC:6.10_Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side)} {MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)
_n Check/Adjustment Procedures}
2. Put the feed/load conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below.
l CHECK 2
Make sure that the MB3 is installed in its correct orientation.

3. Remove the MB3.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-82
 MC-83
6.19 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies (for 6.20 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly (for the
the First, Second, and Third Shelves) Fourth Shelf)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u n Removal Procedures
The replacement procedures for the shock-absorbing roller assemblies for the first,
second, and third shelves are all identical. 1. Remove the MB1.
{MC:6.16_IP Transport Motor (MB1)}
n Removal Procedures 2. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

2. Put the feed/load conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below.

3. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-83
 MC-84
6.21 Antistatic Members 6.22 Shock-Absorbing Rollers (Convergence
{SP:INDEX} Unit)
u NOTE u {SP:INDEX}
The replacement procedures for the antistatic members for the first, second, third, and
fourth shelves are all identical. n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.
n Removal Procedures {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

1. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly. 2. Remove the shock-absorbing rollers.

{SP:04D_FEED/LOAD CONVEYOR UNIT}
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly for the shelf where the antistatic
member to be removed is installed.
{MC:6.19_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies (for the First, Second, and
Third Shelves)}
{MC:6.20_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)}

2. Remove the antistatic member.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-84
 MC-85
6.23 Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H) 3. Remove the rubber rollers (A and B).
{SP:INDEX}

u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the rubber rollers A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H are all
identical. This section describes the replacement procedures for the rubber rollers A
and B.

n Locations of Rubber Rollers

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side).
{MC:6.11_Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side)}

2. Put the feed/load conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below. n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
The rubber rollers differ in length and shape depending on where they are attached.
Pay attention to their attachment locations.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gear is attached in its correct orientation.
{MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)
_n Check/Adjustment Procedures}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-85
 MC-86
6.24 Arm and Bearing (for the First Shelf) 4. Remove the arm and bearing.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the SB1.
{MC:6.2_IP Feed/Load Sensors (SB1, 2, 3, 4)}

2. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly (for the first shelf).

{MC:6.19_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies (for the First, Second, and
Third Shelves)}

3. Remove the rubber rollers (A and B).

{MC:6.23_Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H)}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gear is attached in its correct orientation.
{MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)
_n Check/Adjustment Procedures}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-86
 MC-87
6.25 Arms and Bearings (for the Second, Third, 5. Remove the arm and bearing.
and Fourth Shelves)
{SP:INDEX}

u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the arms and bearings for the second, third, and
fourth shelves are all identical.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the IP feed/load sensor.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the IP feed/load sensor for the shelf where the arm and bearing to be
removed are installed.
{MC:6.2_IP Feed/Load Sensors (SB1, 2, 3, 4)}

2. Remove the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side).

{MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)}

3. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.

u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly for the shelf where the arm and
bearing to be removed are installed.
{MC:6.19_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies (for the First, Second, and
Third Shelves)}
{MC:6.20_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)} n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
4. Remove the rubber rollers.
u INSTRUCTION u
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
Remove the rubber rollers for the shelf where the arm and bearing to be removed
are installed. l CHECK 1
{MC:6.23_Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H)} Make sure that the spur gear is attached in its correct orientation.
{MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)
_n Check/Adjustment Procedures}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-87
 MC-88
6.26 Path Changeover Guides (for the First, n Reinstallation Procedures
Second, Third, and Fourth Shelves) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

{SP:INDEX}

u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the path changeover guides for the first, second,
third, and fourth shelves are all identical.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the arm and bearing.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the arm and bearing for the shelf where the path changeover guide to
be removed is installed.
{MC:6.24_Arm and Bearing (for the First Shelf)}
{MC:6.25_Arms and Bearings (for the Second, Third, and Fourth Shelves)}

2. Remove the path changeover guide.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-88
 MC-89
6.27 Guides (for the First, Second, Third, and 2. Remove the guide.
Fourth Shelves)
{SP:INDEX}

u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the guide for the first, second, third, and fourth
shelves are all identical.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the path changeover guide assembly.
u INSTRUCTION u
Remove the path changeover guide for the shelf where the guide to be removed
is installed.
{MC:6.26_Path Changeover Guides (for the First, Second, Third, and Fourth
Shelves)}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-89
 MC-90
6.28 Guide (Convergence Unit Lower Side) 5. Remove the guide (convergence unit lower side).
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side).
{MC:6.12_Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-Reference Side)}

2. Remove the SB6.

{MC:6.15_Pre-Convergence IP Sensor (SB6)}

3. Remove the shock-absorbing rollers (convergence unit).

{MC:6.22_Shock-Absorbing Rollers (Convergence Unit)}

4. Remove the bracket.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-90
 MC-91
6.29 Rubber Rollers (I, J, K, and L) 3. Remove the guide and spur gear.
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}

u NOTE u
The replacement procedures for the rubber rollers I, J, K, and L are all identical.
This section describes the replacement procedures for the rubber rollers I and J.

n Locations of Rubber Rollers

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side).
{MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)}

2. Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side).

{MC:6.11_Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-91
 MC-92
4. Remove the rubber rollers (I and J). 6.30 Rubber Rollers (M and N)
{SP:INDEX}

n Locations of Rubber Rollers

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the IP jam handling assembly.
n Reinstallation Procedures {MC:6.6_IP Jam Handling Assembly}

u NOTE u 2. Remove the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side).

The rubber rollers differ in length and shape depending on where they are attached. {MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)}
Pay attention to their attachment locations.
3. Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {MC:6.11_Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side)}

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that spur gear is attached at its correct orientation.
{MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)
_n Check/Adjustment Procedures}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-92
 MC-93
4. Remove the guide and spur gears. n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
The rubber rollers differ in length and shape depending on where they are attached.
Pay attention to their attachment locations.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.
{MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)
_n Check/Adjustment Procedures}

5. Remove the rubber rollers (M and N).

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-93
 MC-94
6.31 Rubber Rollers (O and P) 5. Remove the guide and spur gears.
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}

n Locations of Rubber Rollers

n Removal Procedures 6. Remove the rubber rollers (O and P).

1. Remove the IP jam handling assembly.

{MC:6.6_IP Jam Handling Assembly}

2. Remove the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side).

{MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)}

3. Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side).

{MC:6.11_Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side)}

3. Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side).

{MC:6.12_Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-Reference Side)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-94
 MC-95
n Reinstallation Procedures 6.32 Rubber Rollers (Q and R)
u NOTE u {SP:INDEX}
The rubber rollers differ in length and shape depending on where they are attached.
Pay attention to their attachment locations.
n Locations of Rubber Rollers

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.
{MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)
_n Check/Adjustment Procedures}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cam bracket assembly (lower reference side).
{MC:6.10_Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side)}

2. Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side).

{MC:6.12_Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-Reference Side)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-95
 MC-96
3. Remove the guides and spur gears. n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
The rubber rollers differ in length and shape depending on where they are attached.
Pay attention to their attachment locations.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.
{MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)
_n Check/Adjustment Procedures}

4. Remove the rubber rollers (Q and R).

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-96
 MC-97
6.33 Convergence Path Changeover Guide 4. Remove the spacer.
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cam bracket assembly (lower reference side).
{MC:6.10_Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side)}

2. Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side).

{MC:6.12_Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-Reference Side)}

3. Remove the guides.

5. Remove the convergence path changeover guide.

{CHECK 2}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-97
 MC-98
n Check/Adjustment Procedures 6.34 Rubber Rollers (S and T)
l CHECK 1 {SP:INDEX}
Make sure that the spacer is attached correctly.
n Locations of Rubber Rollers

n Removal Procedures
l CHECK 2
The convergence path changeover guide should be installed in an orientation 1. Remove the brush roller assembly.
illustrated below. If the convergence path changeover guide is not installed correctly, {MC:6.7_Brush Roller Assembly}
other guides could not be installed.
2. Remove the convergence path changeover guide.
{MC:6.33_Convergence Path Changeover Guide}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-98
 MC-99
3. Remove the rubber rollers (S and T). 6.35 Guide (Convergence Unit Upper Side)
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the SB5.
{MC:6.14_Pre-BCR IP Sensor (SB5)}

2. Remove the rubber rollers (Q and R).

{MC:6.32_Rubber Rollers (Q and R)}

3. Remove the convergence path changeover guide.

{MC:6.33_Convergence Path Changeover Guide}

4. Remove the guide (convergence unit upper side).

n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
The rubber rollers differ in length and shape depending on where they are attached.
Pay attention to their attachment locations.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gear is attached in its correct orientation.
{MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)
_n Check/Adjustment Procedures}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-99
 MC-100
n Reinstallation Procedures 2. Reinstall the convergence path changeover guide.
{MC:6.33_Convergence Path Changeover Guide}
1. Reinstall the guide.
3. Reinstall the rubber rollers (Q and R).
{MC:6.32_Rubber Rollers (Q and R)}

4. Reinstall the SB5.

{MC:6.14_Pre-BCR IP Sensor (SB5)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-100
 MC-101
7. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit 2. Disconnect the connectors and remove the screws.
{n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 2)}

7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit 3. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.

{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Lower right-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
- Lower rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-101
 MC-102
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 2)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-102
 MC-103
n Reinstallation Procedures 2. Secure the side-positioning conveyor unit in place.
{n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 2)}
1. Reinstall the side-positioning conveyor unit.
3. Reinstall the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Lower right-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
- Lower rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-103
 MC-104
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 2)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-104
 MC-105
7.2 Side-Positioning Mechanism HP Sensor 7.3 Spur Gears (Reference Side)
(SC1) {SP:INDEX}

{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
n Removal Procedures 1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
1. Remove the covers. {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
- Lower rear cover 2. Remove the bracket.
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Remove the SC1.

{SP:05E_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-105
 MC-106
3. Move the actuator as appropriate. 7.4 Grip Release HP Sensor (SC2)
u NOTE u {SP:INDEX}
The spur gears should be removed or installed under condition where the
actuator does not interfere with the SC2. Otherwise, the SC2 might be damaged. n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the spur gears.
{MC:7.3_Spur Gears (Reference Side)}

2. Remove the SC2.

4. Remove the spur gears.

n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-106
 MC-107
7.5 Side-Positioning IP Sensor (SC3) 7.6 Cleaning Guide HP Sensor (SC4)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. 1. Remove the covers.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} - Lower front cover
- Lower right-hand side cover
2. Remove the SC3.
{MC:3.1_Covers}
{SP:05B_SIDE-POSITIONING COVEYOR UNIT}
2. Remove the SC4.
n Reinstallation Procedures {SP:05A_SIDE-POSITIONING COVEYOR UNIT}
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-107
 MC-108
7.7 Timing Belt n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
Attach the timing belt along to route indicate below.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the timing belt.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-108
 MC-109
7.8 Side-Positioning Motor (MC1) 3. Remove the MC1.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}

2. Lay down the side-positioning conveyor unit in such an orientation as

illustrated below.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the MC1 is installed in such an orientation as illustrated below.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-109
 MC-110
7.9 Grip Release Motor (MC2) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Removal Procedures n Check/Adjustment Procedures

l CHECK 1
1. Remove the spur gears (reference side).
Make sure that the MC2 is installed in such an orientation as illustrated below.
{MC:7.3_Spur Gears (Reference Side)}

2. Remove the MC1.

{MC:7.8_Side-Positioning Motor (MC1)}

3. Remove the MC2.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-110
 MC-111
7.10 IP Transport Motor (MC3) 4. Remove the MC3.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the timing belt.

{MC:7.7_Timing Belt}

3. Lay down the side-positioning conveyor unit in such an orientation as

illustrated below.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the MC3 is installed in such an orientation as illustrated below.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-111
 MC-112
7.11 Cleaning Guide Driving Motor (MC4) 3. Remove the MC4.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the cleaning guide driving motor assembly.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the MC4 is installed in such an orientation as illustrated below.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-112
 MC-113
7.12 Latch Drive Unit (Overall) 5. Remove the latch drive unit (overall).
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the MC2.
{MC:7.9_Grip Release Motor (MC2)}

2. Remove the MC3.

{MC:7.10_IP Transport Motor (MC3)}

3. Disconnect the connectors and cables.

4. Move the latch assembly to such a position as illustrated below.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-113
 MC-114
n Reinstallation Procedures 3. Move the latch assembly to its home position.

1. Move the latch assembly to such a position as illustrated below.

2. Mount the latch drive unit (overall) onto the side-positioning conveyor
4. Reinstall the latch drive unit (overall).
unit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-114
 MC-115
7.13 Latch Assembly (Latch Driver) n Exploded View
{SP:INDEX} For the exploded view of the latch assembly (latch drive unit), see the Service Parts
List.
n Removal Procedures {SP:05E_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR UNIT}

1. Remove the latch drive unit (overall). n Reinstallation Procedures

{MC:7.12_Latch Drive Unit (Overall)} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

2. Move the latch assembly (latch drive unit) as appropriate.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
REFERENCE
To remove the latch assembly, slide the latch assembly in the direction of the l CHECK 1
arrow as illustrated below to facilitate access to the E-rings that retain the shaft. Make sure that the bearing is placed in the slot of the latch assembly.
E-ring

F
R
O
N
T
Latch drive
unit

E-ring Latch assembly FR9H3740.EPS

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-115
 MC-116
7.14 Latch Assembly (Reference Side) 3. Remove the latch assembly (reference side).
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the spur gears (reference side).
{MC:7.3_Spur Gears (Reference Side)}

2. Move the latch assembly to its home position.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the tension coil spring is attached properly.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-116
 MC-117
7.15 Tensioner 7.16 Planetary Gear Assembly
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the timing belt. 1. Remove the timing belt.
{MC:7.7_Timing Belt} {MC:7.7_Timing Belt}

2. Remove the tensioner. 2. Remove the planetary gear assembly.

{SP:05C_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR UNIT} {SP:05C_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-117
 MC-118
7.17 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) 7.18 Antistatic Members
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the planetary gear assembly. 1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.16_Planetary Gear Assembly} {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the spur gear (opposite reference side). 2. Remove the antistatic members.
{SP:05C_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR UNIT} {SP:05A_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-118
 MC-119
7.19 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} u INSTRUCTION u
The cams differ in shape depending on where they are attached. When attaching the
n Removal Procedures cams, use care not to confuse their attachment locations and orientations.
1. Remove the spur gears. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{MC:7.3_Spur Gears (Reference Side)}

2. Remove the grip arms. n Check/Adjustment Procedures

l CHECK 1
Make sure that the cam is attached properly.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-119
 MC-120
7.20 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} u INSTRUCTION u
The cams differ in shape depending on where they are attached. When attaching the
n Removal Procedures cams, use care not to confuse their attachment locations and orientations.
1. Remove the tensioner. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{MC:7.15_Tensioner}

2. Remove the planetary gear assembly. n Check/Adjustment Procedures

{MC:7.16_Planetary Gear Assembly}
l CHECK 1
3. Remove the grip arms. Make sure that the cam is attached properly.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-120
 MC-121
7.21 Grip Shaft 7.22 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side). 1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.19_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)} {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side). 2. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
{MC:7.20_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}

3. Remove the grip shaft.

{SP:05B_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-121
 MC-122
7.23 Rubber Roller (A) 3. Remove the rubber roller (A).
{SP:INDEX}

n Rubber Roller Locations

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the spur gear (opposite reference side).
{MC:7.17_Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)}

2. Remove the guide.

u NOTE u
The guide removed should not be placed with its IP contacting face down.
Otherwise, the contacting face might be scratched or soiled.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The tension coil springs differ in length depending on where they are attached. Make
sure that the tension coil springs are attached in their correct locations.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-122
 MC-123
7.24 Rubber Roller (B) 2. Remove the rubber roller (B).
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u
The guide removed should not be placed with its IP contacting face down.
n Rubber Roller Locations Otherwise, the contacting face might be scratched or soiled.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the rubber roller (A).
{MC:7.23_Rubber Roller (A)}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-123
 MC-124
7.25 Rubber Roller (C and D) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Rubber Roller Locations n Check/Adjustment Procedures

l CHECK 1
The tension coil springs differ in length depending on where they are attached. Make
sure that the tension coil springs are attached in their correct locations.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).
{MC:7.19_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}

2. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).

{MC:7.20_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}

3. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.

{MC:7.22_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly}

4. Remove the rubber rollers (C and D).

{n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-124
 MC-125
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)
{CHECK 1}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-125
 MC-126
7.26 Rubber Roller (E) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Rubber Roller Locations n Check/Adjustment Procedures

l CHECK 1
The tension coil springs differ in length depending on where they are attached. Make
sure that the tension coil springs are attached in their correct locations.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the SC3.
{MC:7.5_Side-Positioning IP Sensor (SC3)}

2. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.

{MC:7.22_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly}

3. Remove the rubber roller (E).

{n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 3)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-126
 MC-127
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 3)
{CHECK 1}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-127
 MC-128
7.27 Rubber Roller (F) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Rubber Roller Locations n Check/Adjustment Procedures

l CHECK 1
The tension coil springs differ in length depending on where they are attached. Make
sure that the tension coil springs are attached in their correct locations.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the latch drive unit (overall).
{MC:7.12_Latch Drive Unit (Overall)}

2. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).

{MC:7.19_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}

3. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).

{MC:7.20_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}

4. Remove the rubber roller (F).

{n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-128
 MC-129
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)
{CHECK 1}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-129
 MC-130
7.28 Guide 3. Remove the guides.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the rubber roller (C and D).
{MC:7.25_Rubber Roller (C and D)}

2. Remove the rubber roller (E).

{MC:7.26_Rubber Roller (E)}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-130
 MC-131
7.29 Cleaning Guide Assembly 4. Remove the cleaning guide assembly.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the guide.

u NOTE u
The guide removed should not be placed with its IP contacting face down.
Otherwise, the contacting face might be scratched or soiled.

3. Lay down the side-positioning conveyor unit in such an orientation as

illustrated below.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-131
 MC-132
n Reinstallation Procedures 2. Secure the cleaning guide assembly and guide in place.

1. Mount the cleaning guide assembly onto the side-positioning

conveyor unit.

3. Connect the connector.

4. Reinstall the side-positioning conveyor unit.

{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-132
 MC-133
7.30 Cleaning Guide 3. Remove the cleaning guide.
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}
{CHECK 2}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the MC4.
{MC:7.11_Cleaning Guide Driving Motor (MC4)}

2. Remove the cleaning guide assembly.

{MC:7.29_Cleaning Guide Assembly}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-133
 MC-134
n Reinstallation Procedures l CHECK 2
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. Make sure that the tension coil springs are attached properly.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the cleaning guide is installed in its correct orientation.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-134
 MC-135
8. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit 3. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.

8.1 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit

{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the lower light-collecting guide.
{MC:11.2_Lower Light-Collecting Guide}

2. Disconnect the connectors and remove the screws.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-135
 MC-136
n Reinstallation Procedures 2. Secure the post-reading conveyor unit in place.

1. Reinstall the post-reading conveyor unit.

3. Reinstall the lower light-collecting guide.

{MC:11.2_Lower Light-Collecting Guide}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-136
 MC-137
8.2 Tensioner Assembly 8.3 Timing Belt
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. 1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the tensioner assembly. 2. Remove the timing belt.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
n Reinstallation Procedures l CHECK 1
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. Mount the timing belt along the route illustrated below.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-137
 MC-138
8.4 Spur Gears (Opposite Reference Side) 3. Remove the spur gears (opposite reference side).
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the bracket.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Before attaching the spur gears, make sure that the positions of the actuator and
sensor are such that they do not interfere with each other.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-138
 MC-139
8.5 Grip Release HP Sensor (SD1) 8.6 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the spur gears (opposite reference side). 1. Remove the spur gears (opposite reference side).
{MC:8.4_Spur Gears (Opposite Reference Side)} {MC:8.4_Spur Gears (Opposite Reference Side)}

2. Remove the SD1. 2. Remove the grip arm (reference side).

■ Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
n Reinstallation Procedures
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that cam and spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-139
 MC-140
8.7 Planetary Gear Assembly 3. Remove the planetary gear assembly.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the timing belt.
{MC:8.3_Timing Belt}

2. Remove the bracket.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The planetary gear assembly should be attached with its orientation in mind.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-140
 MC-141
8.8 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side) 8.9 Grip Release Motor (MD1)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the planetary gear assembly. 1. Remove the spur gears (opposite reference side).
{MC:8.7_Planetary Gear Assembly} {MC:8.4_Spur Gears (Opposite Reference Side)}

2. Remove the grip arm (opposite reference side). 2. Remove the MD1.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the cam and spur gears are attached at their correct orientations.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-141
 MC-142
8.10 Post-Reading Conveyance IP Sensor (SD2) 8.11 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. 1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the SD2. 2. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
n Exploded View
l CHECK 1 For the exploded view of the shock-absorbing roller assembly, see the Service Parts
The SD2 should be attached with its orientation in mind. List.
{SP:06C_POST-READING CONVEYOR UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-142
 MC-143
8.12 Spur Gears (Reference Side) 8.13 IP Transport Motor (MD2)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. 1. Remove the planetary gear assembly.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} {MC:8.7_Planetary Gear Assembly}

2. Put the post-reading conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below. 2. Remove the spur gears (reference side).
{MC:8.12_Spur Gears (Reference Side)}

3. Remove the MD2.

3. Remove the spur gears (reference side).

n Reinstallation Procedures
n Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-143
 MC-144
8.14 Variable Guide Assembly n Exploded View
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the variable guide assembly.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-144
 MC-145
n Reinstallation Procedures
1. Reinstall the variable guide assembly.

2. Reinstall the post-reading conveyor unit.

{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-145
 MC-146
8.15 Rubber Rollers (A and B) n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
n Locations of Rubber Rollers The rubber rollers (A) and (B) differ in length. Pay attention to their attachment
locations.

l CHECK 2
The tension coil springs differ in length depending on whether they are attached.
Make sure that the tension coil springs are attached at their correct positions.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).
{MC:8.6_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}

2. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).

{MC:8.8_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}

3. Remove the planetary gear assembly.

{MC:8.7_Planetary Gear Assembly}

4. Remove the rubber rollers (A and B).

{n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-146
 MC-147
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)
{CHECK 1}
{CHECK 2}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-147
 MC-148
8.16 Rubber Rollers (C and D) n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
n Locations of Rubber Rollers The rubber rollers (C) and (D) differ in length. Pay attention to their attachment
locations.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the variable guide assembly.
{MC:8.14_Variable Guide Assembly}

2. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).

{MC:8.6_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}

3. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).

{MC:8.8_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}

4. Remove the rubber rollers (C and D).

{n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-148
 MC-149
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4)
{CHECK 1}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-149
 MC-150
8.17 Rubber Rollers (E and F) 4. Remove the rubber rollers (E and F).
{SP:INDEX}

n Locations of Rubber Rollers

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the spur gears.

{MC:8.12_Spur Gears (Reference Side)}

3. Put the post-reading conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The rubber rollers (E) and (F) differ in shape depending on where they are attached.
Pay attention to the rubber roller attachment locations.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-150
 MC-151
8.18 Rubber Rollers (G and H) 4. Remove the rubber rollers (G and H).
{SP:INDEX}

n Locations of Rubber Rollers

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the spur gears.

{MC:8.12_Spur Gears (Reference Side)}

3. Put the post-reading conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The rubber rollers (G) and (H) differ in shape depending on where they are attached.
Pay attention to the rubber roller attachment locations.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-151
 MC-152
8.19 Guide (A) 4. Remove the guide (A).
{SP:INDEX}

n Locations of Guides

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the SD2.
{MC:8.10_Post-Reading Conveyance IP Sensor (SD2)}

2. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.

{MC:8.11_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly}

3. Remove the rubber rollers (A) and (C).

{MC:8.15_Rubber Rollers (A and B)}
{MC:8.16_Rubber Rollers (C and D)}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-152
 MC-153
8.20 Guide (B)
{SP:INDEX}

n Locations of Guides

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the rubber rollers (E) and (G).
{MC:8.17_Rubber Rollers (E and F)}
{MC:8.18_Rubber Rollers (G and H)}

2. Remove the guide (B).

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-153
 MC-154
8.21 Grip Shaft n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Removal Procedures
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).
l CHECK 1
{MC:8.6_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}
Make sure that the cam and spur gears are attached at their correct orientations.
2. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).
{MC:8.8_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}

3. Remove the grip shaft.

l CHECK 2
Make sure that the cam and spur gears are attached at their correct orientations.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-154
 MC-155
9. Erasure Conveyor Unit 4. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
u NOTE u
When removing the erasure conveyor unit, take hold of the designated portions
9.1 Erasure Conveyor Unit to perform the procedures. If you grasp the rollers, guides, or other portions,
{SP:INDEX} they may be deformed.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Upper front light protect plate
- Middle right-hand side cover
- Upper left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Remove the lamp assembly.

{MC:9.2_Lamp Assembly}

3. Open the guide.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-155
 MC-156
n Reinstallation Procedures 2. Reinstall the erasure conveyor.

1. Open the guide. u NOTE u

When installing the erasure conveyor unit, take hold of the designated portions to
perform the procedures. If you grasp the rollers, guides, or other portions, they
may be deformed.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-156
 MC-157
3. Close the guide.

4. Reinstall the lamp assembly.

{MC:9.2_Lamp Assembly}

5. Reinstall the covers.

- Lower front cover
- Upper front light protect plate
- Middle right-hand side plate
- Upper left-hand side plate
{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-157
 MC-158
9.2 Lamp Assembly 2. Remove the lamp assembly.
{SP:INDEX} u NOTES u
CAUTION - When handling the lamp assembly, wear gloves so that the filter located on the
bottom face of the lamp assembly is not soiled.
Do not touch the surface (filter face)of the lamp assembly immediately after the - Do not grasp the filter face when holding the lamp assembly. Otherwise, the
operation is stopped. Since it remains at high temperatures, you may suffer shock absorbing member might be peeled off.
burns. - Place the lamp assembly with the filter face up. If the lamp is placed with the
filter face down, the filter may be damaged.
u INSTRUCTION u
When handling the lamp assembly, take hold of the portions illustrated below.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Middle left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-158
 MC-159
n Reinstallation Procedures 2. Reinstall the covers.
1. Reinstall the lamp assembly. - Lower front cover
- Middle left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-159
 MC-160
9.3 Duct
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the lamp assembly.
{MC:9.2_Lamp Assembly}

2. Remove the duct.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-160
 MC-161
9.4 Duct Assembly 3. Remove the duct assembly.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the duct.
{MC:9.3_Duct}

2. Disconnect the connector.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-161
 MC-162
9.5 Fan (FANE1) 3. Remove the FANE1.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the duct.
{MC:9.3_Duct}

2. Disconnect the connector.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the FANE1 is attached in its correct orientation.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-162
 MC-163
9.6 Fan (FANE2) 3. Remove the FANE2.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the dust assembly.
{MC:9.4_Duct Assembly}

2. Disconnect the connector.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the FANE2 is attached in its correct orientation.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-163
 MC-164
9.7 Fan (FANE3) 3. Remove the FANE3.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the duct.
{MC:9.3_Duct}

2. Disconnect the connector.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the FANE3 is attached in its correct orientation.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-164
 MC-165
9.8 Filter n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} 1. Reinstall the filter.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the lamp assembly.
{MC:9.2_Lamp Assembly}

2. Remove the filter.

2. Reinstall the lamp assembly.

{MC:9.2_Lamp Assembly}

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the filter is attached in its correct orientation.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-165
 MC-166
9.9 Lamps
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the filter.
{MC:9.8_Filter}

2. Remove the lamps.

u NOTES u
- Remove the lamps in such order as illustrated below.

- While avoiding the tab of the lamp assembly, detach the lamp aslant.
Otherwise, the lamp may be scratched or damaged.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-166
 MC-167
n Reinstallation Procedures
1. Reinstall the lamps.
u NOTES u
- Install the lamps in such order as illustrated below.

- While avoiding the tab of the lamp assembly, attach the lamp aslant.
Otherwise, the lamp may be scratched or damaged.

2. Reinstall the filter.

{MC:9.8_Filter}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-167
 MC-168
9.10 Reflection Plate Assembly 4. Disconnect the connectors.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the lamps.
{MC:9.9_Lamps}

2. Remove the duct assembly.

{MC:9.4_Duct Assembly}

3. Release the clamps.

5. Mount the duct.

u NOTE u
Before mounting the duct, put aside the cables. Otherwise, the cables might be
pinched by the duct.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-168
 MC-169
6. Put the lamp assembly upside down, and remove the reflection plate 9.11 Lamp Temperature Sensor (THE1)
assembly.
{SP:INDEX}
u INSTRUCTION u
The reflection plate assembly removed should be placed on a clean cloth or the n Removal Procedures
like. Otherwise, the reflection plate assembly might be soiled.
�

1. Remove the reflection plate assembly.

{MC:9.10_Reflection Plate Assembly}

2. Remove the THE1.

n Reinstallation Procedures n Reinstallation Procedures

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-169
 MC-170
9.12 Safety Thermostat Sensor (TSWE1) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u

n Removal Procedures To attach the FAST-ON terminal, plug it all the way in.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

1. Remove the reflection plate assembly.
{MC:9.10_Reflection Plate Assembly}

2. Remove the TSWE1.

u NOTE u
To detach the FAST-ON terminal, press the shaded portion in the illustration below
to take it off.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-170
 MC-171
9.13 Sockets n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Removal Procedures
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the reflection plate assembly.
l CHECK 1
{MC:9.10_Reflection Plate Assembly}
Make sure that the sockets are attached according to the engravings on the bracket.
2. Remove the sockets.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-171
 MC-172
9.14 INV17A Board 3. Remove the INV17A board.
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u
CAUTION When removing the board, tilt it aslant to take it off. If it is not tilted, the retention
clips may be damaged.
When servicing the printed circuit board, be sure to wear an antistatic
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity
built on your body may cause damage to electronic components on the printed
circuit board.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the duct.
{MC:9.3_Duct}

2. Disconnect the connectors.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-172
 MC-173
9.15 INV17B Board 3. Remove the INV17B board.
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u
CAUTION When removing the board, tilt it aslant to take it off. If it is not tilted, the retention
clips may be damaged.
When servicing the printed circuit board, be sure to wear an antistatic
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity
built on your body may cause damage to electronic components on the printed
circuit board.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the duct.
{MC:9.3_Duct}

2. Disconnect the connectors.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-173
 MC-174
9.16 IP Switchback Assembly 3. Remove the IP switchback assembly.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}

2. Close the guide.

n Exploded View
For the exploded view of the IP switchback assembly, see the Service Parts List.
{SP:07G_ERASURE CONVEYOR UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-174
 MC-175
9.17 Post-Reading Conveyance Standby IP 9.18 Switchback Standby IP Sensor (SE2)
Sensor (SE1) {SP:INDEX}

{SP:INDEX} n Removal Procedures

n Removal Procedures 1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit. {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}

{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} 2. Remove the SE2.

2. Remove the SE1.

n Reinstallation Procedures
n Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
l CHECK 1 Attach the SE2 with its orientation in mind.
Attach the SE1 with its orientation in mind.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-175
 MC-176
9.19 Erasure Side-Positioning Standby HP n Reinstallation Procedures
Sensor (SE4) u NOTE u
{SP:INDEX} Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}

2. Move the latch assembly to the position illustrated below.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Before attaching the sensors, make sure that the actuator and sensor are in such a
position that they do not interfere with each other.

3. Remove the SE4.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-176
 MC-177
9.20 Brackets n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Removal Procedures
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
l CHECK 1
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
Before attaching the brackets, make sure that the actuator and sensor are in such a
2. Remove the brackets. position that they do not interfere with each other.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-177
 MC-178
9.21 Grip Release HP Sensor (SE5) 9.22 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the brackets. 1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.20_Brackets} {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the SE5. 2. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.

{SP:07A_ERASURE CONVEYOR UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-178
 MC-179
9.23 Branch Path Guide Driving Solenoid 4. Remove the SOLE1.
(SOLE1)
{SP:INDEX}
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}

2. Disconnect the connectors.

3. Remove the bracket.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the shaft of the solenoid is attached properly to the bracket.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-179
 MC-180
9.24 Reflection Plate n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
n Removal Procedures When attaching the reflection plate guide, make sure that there is no gap between the
reflection plate guide and the guide.
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the reflection plate.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-180
 MC-181
9.25 Timing Belt (A) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Locations of Timing Belts

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The timing belt wheels should be attached in accordance with the procedures. If
undue force is applied to them, they may be damaged.

l CHECK 2
Make sure that the housing and bearing are attached at their correct positions.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the timing belt (A).

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-181
 MC-182
9.26 Timing Belt (B) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Locations of Timing Belts

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The timing belt should be attached along the route illustrated below.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the timing belt (B).

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-182
 MC-183
9.27 Timing Belt (C) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Locations of Timing Belts

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The timing belt wheels should be attached in accordance with the procedures. If
undue force is applied to them, they may be damaged.

l CHECK 2
Make sure that the housing and bearing are attached at their correct positions.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the timing belt (C).

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-183
 MC-184
9.28 Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite
Reference Side Gears)
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the timing belt (B).
{MC:9.26_Timing Belt (B)}

2. Remove the spur gears.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-184
 MC-185
9.29 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side) 4. Remove the grip arm.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the brackets.
{MC:9.20_Brackets}

2. Remove the timing belt (A).

{MC:9.25_Timing Belt (A)}

3. Remove the spur gears.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.

l CHECK 2
Make sure that the cam and spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-185
 MC-186
9.30 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side) n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
n Removal Procedures Make sure that the cam and spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.

1. Remove the timing belt (C).

{MC:9.27_Timing Belt (C)}

2. Remove the conveyance mechanism (opposite reference side gears).

{MC:9.28_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite Regerence Side Gears)}

3. Remove the grip arm.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-186
 MC-187
9.31 Tensioner Assembly 9.32 Guide (A)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Locations of Guides

1. Remove the timing belt (B).
{MC:9.26_Timing Belt (B)}

2. Remove the tensioner assembly.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Upper front light protect plate
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Remove the guide (A).

{SP:07A_ERASURE CONVEYOR UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u n Reinstallation Procedures
The tensioner assembly is positioned by the tension coil spring. Attach the tension For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
coil spring before securing the tensioner assembly in place.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-187
 MC-188
9.33 Guide (B) 5. Remove the guide (B).
{SP:INDEX}

n Locations of Guides

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the tensioner assembly.

{MC:9.31_Tensioner Assembly}

3. Remove the guide (A).

{MC:9.32_Guide (A)}

4. Put the erasure conveyor unit in such an orientation as illustrated

below.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-188
 MC-189
9.34 Guide (C) 2. Remove the guide (C).
{SP:INDEX}

n Locations of Guides

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
{MC:9.22_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-189
 MC-190
9.35 Latch Drive Unit 4. Remove the latch drive unit.
{SP:INDEX} u INSTRUCTION u
When removing the latch drive unit, lift up the reference side and then the
n Removal Procedures opposite reference side. Otherwise, the latch drive unit could not be removed.
1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).
{MC:9.29_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}

2. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).

{MC:9.30_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}

3. Move the latch assembly to the position illustrated below.

n Exploded View
For the exploded view of the latch drive unit, see the Service Parts List.
{SP:07C_ERASURE CONVEYOR UNIT}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-190
 MC-191
n Reinstallation Procedures 3. Move the latch assembly to its home position.

1. Move the latch drive unit to the position illustrated below.

2. Reinstall the latch drive unit (overall). 4. Secure the latch assembly in place.

u INSTRUCTION u
When installing the latch drive unit, attach the opposite reference side and then
the reference side. Otherwise, the latch drive unit might be damaged.

5. Reinstall the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).

{MC:9.30_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}

6. Reinstall the grip mechanism (reference side).

{MC:9.29_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-191
 MC-192
9.36 Latch Assembly (Reference Side) 9.37 IP Transport Motor (ME1)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the grip assembly (reference side). 1. Remove the conveyance mechanism (opposite reference side gears).
{MC:9.29_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)} {MC:9.28_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite Regerence Side Gears)}

2. Remove the latch assembly.

2. Remove the ME1 assembly.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

3. Remove the ME1.

{SP:07A_ERASURE CONVEYOR UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-192
 MC-193
9.38 Side-Positioning Motor (ME2) 9.39 Grip Release Motor (ME3)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the latch drive unit. 1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side)
{MC:9.35_Latch Drive Unit} {MC:9.29_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}

2. Remove the ME2 assembly. 2. Remove the ME2.

{MC:9.38_Side-Positioning Motor (ME2)}

3. Remove the ME3.

3. Remove the ME2.

{SP:07C_ERASURE CONVEYOR UNIT} n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-193
 MC-194
9.40 Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, and F) n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
n Locations of Rubber Rollers The tension coil springs differ in length depending on where they are attached. Make
sure that the tension coil springs are attached at their correct positions.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).
{MC:9.29_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}

2. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).

l CHECK 2
{MC:9.30_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}
The rubber rollers (D, E, and F) differ in shape depending on where they are attached.
3. Remove the latch drive unit. Make sure that the rubber rollers (D, E, and F) are attached at their correct positions.
{MC:9.35_Latch Drive Unit}

4. Remove the rubber rollers (A, B, C, D, E, and F).

{n Detailed Illustration (Step 4)}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-194
 MC-195
n Detailed Illustration (Step 4)
{CHECK 1}
{CHECK 2}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-195
 MC-196
9.41 Rubber Rollers (G and H) 3. Remove the rubber rollers (G and H).
{SP:INDEX}

n Locations of Rubber Rollers

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the SE2.
{MC:9.18_Switchback Standby IP Sensor (SE2)}

2. Remove the timing belt (B).

{MC:9.26_Timing Belt (B)}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The tension coil springs differ in length depending on where they are attached. Make
sure that the tension coil springs are attached in their correct locations.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-196
 MC-197
9.42 Rubber Rollers (I and J) 3. Remove the rubber rollers (I and J).
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}

n Locations of Rubber Rollers

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the SOLE1.
{MC:9.23_Branch Path Guide Driving Solenoid (SOLE1)}

2. Remove the timing belt (B).

{MC:9.26_Timing Belt (B)}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-197
 MC-198
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK1
Align the hole of the side plate and the housing together before attaching the rubber
roller.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-198
 MC-199
9.43 Guide (D) 4. Remove the guide (D).
{SP:INDEX}

n Locations of Guides

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).
{MC:9.30_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}

2. Remove the ME3.

{MC:9.39_Grip Release Motor (ME3)}

3. Remove the latch assembly (reference side).

{MC:9.36_Latch Assembly (Reference Side)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-199
 MC-200
n Reinstallation Procedures l CHECK 1
Make sure that the tip of the guide is located above the half-punch.
1. Reinstall the guide (D).

2. Reinstall the latch assembly (reference side).

{MC:9.36_Latch Assembly (Reference Side)}

3. Reinstall the ME3.

{MC:9.39_Grip Release Motor (ME3)}

4. Reinstall the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).

{MC:9.30_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-200
 MC-201
9.44 Guide (E)
{SP:INDEX}

n Locations of Guides

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).
{MC:9.29_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)}

2. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).

{MC:9.30_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}

3. Remove the ME3.

{MC:9.39_Grip Release Motor (ME3)}

4. Remove the guide (E).

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-201
 MC-202
9.45 Grip Shaft n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Removal Procedures n Check/Adjustment Procedures

1. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side). l CHECK 1

{MC:9.29_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)} Make sure that the cam and spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.

2. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).

{MC:9.30_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)}

3. Remove the grip shaft.

l CHECK 2
Make sure that the cam and spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-202
 MC-203
9.46 Guide (F) 3. Remove the guide (F).
{SP:INDEX}

n Locations of Guides

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the ME3.
{MC:9.39_Grip Release Motor (ME3)}

2. Remove the rubber rollers (A and B).

{MC:9.40_Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, and F)}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-203
 MC-204
9.47 Branch Path Changeover Guide 5. Remove the guide.
{SP:INDEX}

n Locations of Guides

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the SE2.
{MC:9.18_Switchback Standby IP Sensor (SE2)}

2. Remove the SOLE1.

{MC:9.23_Branch Path Guide Driving Solenoid (SOLE1)}

3. Remove the tensioner assembly.

{MC:9.31_Tensioner Assembly}

4. Remove the guide (B).

{MC:9.33_Guide (B)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-204
 MC-205
6. Remove the shaft. 8. Remove the branch path changeover guide.

7. Remove the shaft.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-205
 MC-206
n Reinstallation Procedures
REFERENCE
With reference to the illustration below, install the branch path changeover guide and
bearings.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-206
 MC-207
10. Scanning Optics Unit 2. Remove the scanning optics unit.

10.1 Scanning Optics Unit

{SP:INDEX}

WARNING
The scanning optics unit should not be removed or installed by other than a
service engineer who has been trained to do so.

CAUTION
When servicing the scanning optics unit, be sure to wear an anti-static wrist-
band to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built
on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.

INSTRUCTION
Do not remove the top cover of the scanning optics unit.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cover.
- Lower right-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-207
 MC-208
n Reinstallation Procedures n Check/Adjustment Procedures
INSTRUCTION INSTRUCTION
When installing the scanning optics unit, press the positioning brackets of the scan- When the scanning optics unit is replaced with a new one, it is necessary to install the
ning optics unit against the frame of the subscanning unit to secure it in place. machine-specific data bundled therewith.
Take the following steps to install the machine-specific data.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
1. Set a machine-specific data floppy diskette into the FD drive.
2. Open the RU PC-TOOL window and select the relevant RU from [LIST
OF EXISTING RU].

3. Install the machine-specific data for the scanning optics unit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-208
 MC-209
4. Turn ON the power of the RU.

5. Check the following points.

l The RU normally enters the READY state.

l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.

{MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-209
 MC-210
11. Light-Collecting Unit

11.1 Upper Light-Collecting Guide

{SP:INDEX}

CAUTION
Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you
are wearing gloves.

INSTRUCTION
When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}

2. Disconnect the connectors.

u NOTES u
- To disconnect the CN2, use its special jig. Otherwise, the connector located
on the board might be damaged.
- When disconnecting the connector by use of the special jig, use a screwdriver’
s shaft or the like as a pivot and detach it at right angles relative to the board.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-210
 MC-211
3. Remove the screws. 4. Remove the upper light-collecting guide.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-211
 MC-212
n Reinstallation Procedures 2. Secure the upper light-collecting guide in place.

1. Reinstall the upper light-collecting guide.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-212
 MC-213
3. Connect the connectors. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
NOTE INSTRUCTION
The CN2 should be attached at right angles relative to the board. If it is attached When the upper light-collecting guide is replaced with a new one, it is
aslant, the connector located on the board might be damaged. necessary to install the machine-specific data bundled therewith.
Take the following steps to install the machine-specific data.

1. Set a machine-specific data floppy diskette into the FD drive.

2. Open the RU PC-TOOL window and select the relevant RU from [LIST
OF EXISTING RU].
� �
���������������

���������������
���������������
�������

����������
�������������������

�� �������������������
�������� ������� ���������� ������� �������
������� �������
��� ����������� �������� ����
���������������

������������

3. Install the machine-specific data.

� �
���������������

���������������
���������������
������� �������������������

����������
�������
�������������������������
������� �������

�������
���������������

��
�������� ��
�������

4.
����������������������������
Reinstall the post-reading conveyor unit. ����������������������������������������������
�����������������������������������
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} �����������������������������������������
�����������

��
������ ��
�������

����������������������������
���������

��
��
������� ������������

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-213
 MC-214
4. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.

l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.

{MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-214
 MC-215
11.2 Lower Light-Collecting Guide 2. Disconnect the connectors.
{SP:INDEX} u NOTES u
- To disconnect the CN2, use its special jig. Otherwise, the connector located
CAUTION on the board might be damaged.
Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you - When disconnecting the connector by use of the special jig, use a screwdriver’
are wearing gloves. s shaft or the like as a pivot and detach it at right angles relative to the board.

INSTRUCTION
When servicing the light-collecting unit,wear gloves.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Lower front light protect plate
- Lower right-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Remove the retaining member.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-215
 MC-216
3. Remove the screws. 4. Remove the lower light-collecting guide.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-216
 MC-217
n Reinstallation Procedures 2. Secure the lower light-collecting guide in place.

1. Reinstall the lower light-collecting guide.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-217
 MC-218
3. Connect the connectors. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
NOTE INSTRUCTION
The CN2 should be attached at right angles relative to the board. If it is attached When the lower light-collecting guide is replaced with a new one, it is necessary to
aslant, the connector located on the board might be damaged. install the machine-specific data bundled therewith.
Take the following steps to install the machine-specific data.

1. Set a machine-specific data floppy diskette into the FD drive.

2. Open the RU PC-TOOL window and select the relevant RU from [LIST
OF EXISTING RU].
� �
���������������

���������������
���������������
�������

����������
�������������������

�� �������������������
�������� ������� ���������� ������� �������
������� �������
��� ����������� �������� ����
�� ���������������

��������� ������������
���������
����� 3. Install the machine-specific data.
� �
���������������

���������������
���������������
�������������������

��
�������

����������
�������
��������� �� �������������������������
��������� ���������� ������� �������

�������� �������
����� �������� ���������������

��
������������ �������� ��
�������
4. Reinstall the covers.
- Lower front cover ����������������������������

- Lower front light protect plate ����������������������������������������������

�����������������������������������
- Lower right-hand side cover �����������������������������������������
�����������
- Lower left-hand side cover
��
{MC:3.1_Covers} ������ ��
�������

����������������������������
���������

��
��
������� ������������

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-218
 MC-219
4. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.

l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.

{MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-219
 MC-220
11.3 PMT17A Board 2. Remove the PMT17A board together with the shield member.
{SP:INDEX} u NOTES u
- To disconnect the CN2, use its special jig. Otherwise, the connector located
CAUTION on the board might be damaged.
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static - When disconnecting the connector by use of the special jig, use a screwdriver’
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity s shaft or the like as a pivot and detach it at right angles relative to the board.
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Lower right-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-220
 MC-221
3. Remove the PMT17A board. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Turn ON the power of the RU.

2. Check the following points.

l The RU normally enters the READY state.

n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
To attach the PMT17A board together with the shield member, mount it so that the
socket of the PMT17A board and the connecting portion of the light-collecting guide
assembly are parallel to each other.
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.
{MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-221
 MC-222
11.4 PMR17B Board 2. Remove the PMR17B board together with the shield member.
{SP:INDEX} u NOTES u
- To disconnect the CN2, use its special jig. Otherwise, the connector located
CAUTION on the board might be damaged.
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static - When disconnecting the connector by use of the special jig, use a screwdriver’
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity s shaft or the like as a pivot and detach it at right angles relative to the board.
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Lower front light protect plate
{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-222
 MC-223
3. Remove the PMR17B board. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Turn ON the power of the RU.

2. Check the following points.

l The RU normally enters the READY state.

n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
To attach the PMR17B board together with the shield member, mount it so that the
socket of the PMR17B board and the connecting portion of the light-collecting guide
assembly are parallel to each other.
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.
{MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-223
 MC-224
12. Subscanning Unit 4. Disconnect the connectors.

12.1 Subscanning Unit

{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
Because the subscanning unit is heavy, pay attention to the following points when
removing, installing, and moving it.
- Before proceeding with the procedures, secure sufficient working space around the
machine.
- While assuming a comfortable posture, lift or hold up the unit.
- Two persons should cooperate with each other to perform the procedures.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the upper light-collecting guide.

{MC:11.1_Upper Light-Collecting Guide}

3. Remove the scanning optics unit.

{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-224
 MC-225
5. Pull out the subscanning unit. 6. Remove the subscanning unit.
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not pull out the subscanning unit too much. The subscanning unit might When putting down the subscanning unit in another place, use care not to get
topple down and be damaged. your feet pinched by the side plate.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-225
 MC-226
n Reinstallation Procedures 2. Secure the subscanning unit in place.

1. Reinstall the subscanning unit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-226
 MC-227
3. Connect the connectors. 4. Reinstall the scanning optics unit.
{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}

5. Reinstall the upper light-collecting guide.

{MC:11.1_Upper Light-Collecting Guide}

6. Reinstall the side-positioning conveyor unit.

{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-227
 MC-228
12.2 Transparent Cover 12.3 Antistatic Member
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the cover. 1. Remove the transparent cover.
- Lower right-hand side cover {MC:12.2_Transparent Cover}
{MC:3.1_Covers}
2. Remove the antistatic member.
2. Remove the transparent cover. {SP:10G_SUBSCANNING UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-228
 MC-229
12.4 SUS Belt n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
n Removal Procedures Manually rotate the driving shaft grip roller (lower) and driven shaft grip roller (lower)
to ensure that the SUS belt does not come off.
1. Remove the transparent cover. l CHECK 2
{MC:12.2_Transparent Cover} Before attaching the SUS belt, clean the driving shaft grip roller (lower) and driven
2. Remove the SUS belt. shaft grip roller (lower) by use of ethanol.

n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Use care not to confuse the front and back of the SUS belt when attaching it.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-229
 MC-230
12.5 Kapton® Belt n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} u NOTES u

n Removal Procedures - Use care not to damage the Kapton® belt.

- Clean the Kapton® belt with a moistened cloth before attaching it.
1. Remove the cover.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Remove the Kapton® belt. n Check/Adjustment Procedures

u NOTE u l CHECK 1
After removing the tension coil spring, support the tensioner by hand. Otherwise, - Make sure that the Kapton® belt is mounted with its date indicating side up, so that
the tensioner might incline by its own weight, thereby damaging the Kapton® belt. the arrow mark faces the side plate.

- Manually rotate the flywheel to verify that the Kapton® belt does not come off.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-230
 MC-231
12.6 Tensioner (Right-Hand Side) 12.7 Tensioner (Left-Hand Side)
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

u NOTE u u NOTE u
When removing the tensioner, be sure to remove the SUS belt as well. If you try to When removing the tensioner, be sure to remove the Kapton® belt as well. If you
remove the tensioner with the SUS belt attached, the SUS belt may be damaged. try to remove the tensioner with the Kapton® attached, the Kapton® belt may be
damaged.
1. Remove the SUS belt.
{MC:12.4_SUS Belt} 1. Remove the Kapton® belt.
{MC:12.5_Kapton® Belt}
2. Remove the tensioner.
{SP:10A_SUBSCANNING UNIT} 2. Remove the tensioner.
{SP:10B_SUBSCANNING UNIT}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-231
 MC-232
12.8 Flywheel n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} u NOTES u

n Removal Procedures - Use care not to damage the surface in contact with the Kapton R belt.
- Before reinstalling the flywheel, clean the Kapton® belt contacting surface with
1. Remove the Kapton® belt. ethanol.
{MC:12.5_Kapton® Belt}

2. Remove the flywheel.

u NOTE u
Insert an Allen wrench into the hole of the driving shaft to secure the shaft in
place, and then remove the nut.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-232
 MC-233
12.9 FFM Motor (MZ1) 3. Remove the FFM motor.
{CHECK}
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
- When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
- When removing or installing the MZ1, do not use any magnet screwdriver.
- Do not touch the magnet portion of the MZ1.

n Reinstallation Procedures
n Removal Procedures u INSTRUCTION u
1. Remove the Kapton® belt. When installing the motor (MZ1), loosely tighten the five screws and then securely
tighten them in order illustrated below.
{MC:12.5_Kapton® Belt}

2. Check the DIP switch setting.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-233
 MC-234
n Check/Adjustment Procedures l Preparation for output image (exposure)
If the MZ1 is replaced, perform the following check procedures.
- DIP switch setting
1. Perform primary erasure on the IP to be used for subscan length
check.
- Preparation for output image (exposure)
{Instruction}
- Subscan length check
u NOTES u
If subscan length adjustments are needed, make subscan length adjustments as - The IP type to be used should be the VI type.
appropriate with reference to the DIP Switch Setting List (Table 1).
- Make sure that no important image data has been exposed on the IP to be
used.
l DIP switch setting
2. Place a steel rule and expose it at 1 mR.
1. Check the DIP switch setting before replacement, and make the same
setting.

REFERENCE
If the IP cannot be exposed at 1 mR, it should be exposed at 1 mR, with
reference to the following exposure conditions.
Note, however, that those conditions are for standard IP setup reference.
Distance: 1.8m
Voltage: 80kV
Amperage: 50mA
Time: 0.013 sec

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-234
 MC-235
l Subscan length check l Subscan length adjustment
1. Output the image exposed at 1 mR. 1. With reference to the DIP Switch Setting List (Table 1), change the DIP
CL exposure menu selection screen: [TEST] [Image Format] switch setting.
{Instruction} REFERENCE

2. Calculate the length (theoretical value) of the steel rule on the film. Changing the “speed fine-adjustment setup factor” in the positive (+) direction will
cause the F value to decrease, while changing it in the negative (-) direction will
cause the F value to increase.

3. Calculate the allowable value of the subscan length.

4. Measure the length of the steel rule (actual measurement) of the

calipers on the output film, and verify that it is within the allowable
value calculated.
149.6 mm ≤ Actual measurement ≤ 151.4 mm
u NOTE u
If the subscan length is beyond the allowable value, make subscan length
adjustments (i.e., change the DIP switch setting), as appropriate.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-235
 MC-236
DIP Switch Setting List (Table 1) 12.10 Cleaning Brush Assembly
Switch Speed fine-adjustment
setup factor (%) {SP:INDEX}
S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON -1.6 n Removal Procedures
OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON -1.5
ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON -1.4 1. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON -1.3 {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON -1.2
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON -1.1
2. Remove the cleaning brush assembly.
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON -1.0
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON -0.9
ON ON ON ON ON OFF -0.8
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF -0.7
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF -0.6
OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF -0.5
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF -0.4
OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF -0.3
ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF -0.2
OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF -0.1
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 0
OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF +0.1
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF +0.2
OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF +0.3
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF +0.4
OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF +0.5
ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF +0.6
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF +0.7
ON ON ON ON OFF OFF +0.8
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF +0.9 n Exploded View
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF +1.0 For the exploded view of the cleaning brush assembly, see the Service Parts List.
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF +1.1 {SP:10B_SUBSCANNING UNIT}
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF +1.2
OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF +1.3
ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF +1.4 n Reinstallation Procedures
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF +1.5 For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF +1.6

2. Check the subscan length.

{l Subscan length check}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-236
 MC-237
12.11 Driving-Side Grip Release HP 3. Remove the SZ2 and SZ3.
Sensor (SZ2) and Driven-Side Grip
Release HP Sensor (SZ3)
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cover.
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Disconnect the connectors.

n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-237
 MC-238
12.12 IP Stopper HP Sensor (SZ5) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} u NOTE u

n Removal Procedures Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.

1. Remove the cover.

- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Remove the shock-absorbing rubbers.

{MC:12.30_Shock-Absorbing Rubbers}

3. Remove the SZ5.

u NOTE u For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
When removing or installing the SZ5, make sure that the actuator is in such a
position that it does not interfere with the SZ5. Otherwise, the SZ5 might be
damaged.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-238
 MC-239
12.13 Grip Drive Motor (MZ2) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Removal Procedures n Check/Adjustment Procedures

1. Remove the scanning optics unit. l CHECK 1

{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit} The threaded holes for mounting the MZ2 assembly are adjacent to the threaded
holes for mounting the sensor bracket.
2. Remove the SZ2 and SZ3. With reference to the illustration below, install the grip drive motor assembly as
{MC:12.11_Driving-Side Grip Release HP Sensor (SZ2) and Driven-Side Grip appropriate.
Release HP Sensor (SZ3)}

3. Remove the grip drive motor assembly.

{CHECK 2}
u NOTE u
The upper light-collecting guide is located below the MZ2 assembly. Use care
not to drop the MZ2 assembly.

4. Remove the MZ2.

{SP:09X_SUBSCANNING UNIT}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-239
 MC-240
l CHECK 2 12.14 Dust Removal Motor (MZ3)
Make sure that the bearings of the driven shaft and driving shaft grip release arms are
in contact with the outer periphery of the cam. {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the flywheel.
{MC:12.8_Flywheel}

2. Remove the MZ3 assembly.

{CHECK 1}

3. Remove the MZ3.

{SP:10F_SUBSCANNING UNIT}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-240
 MC-241
n Reinstallation Procedures n Check/Adjustment Procedures
u INSTRUCTION u l CHECK 1
Align the positions of the slit (large), slit (small), and the D-cut flat surface of the light-
collecting shaft as appropriate. 1. Check the mounting orientations for the D-cut flat surface of the light-
collecting shaft, gear (large), and gear (small).
2. Check to see whether the engagement between the spur gear (large)
and the worm gear of the MZ3 has some backlash.
GOOD: There should be some backlash.
NO GOOD: There is no backlash (the gear (large) and the worm gear of the
MZ3 move).

1. Apply Molykote lubricant to the worm gear.

u NOTE u
When mounting the MZ3, apply a grain size of Molykote to the worm gear.
Otherwise, an error might occur.

u INSTRUCTION u
When mounting the MZ3, use Molykote as indicated below.
- Made by Dow Corning
- Type
JPN/USA: Molykote (EM30L GREASE)
Europe: Molykote (PG30L_GREASE)
u INSTRUCTION u
If the engagement between the gears is "NO GOOD," loosen the screws that
retain the MZ3 assembly, and adjust the engagement as appropriate.

2. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-241
 MC-242
12.15 IP Stopper Drive Motor (MZ4) 5. Remove the MZ4.
{SP:10C_SUBSCANNING UNIT}
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
n Reinstallation Procedures
1. Remove the cleaning brush assembly. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{MC:12.10_Cleaning Brush Assembly}

2. Remove the SZ5. n Check/Adjustment Procedures

{MC:12.12_IP Stopper HP Sensor (SZ5)}
l CHECK 1
3. Disconnect the connector and remove the screws.
Make sure that the bearing of the MZ4 assembly is fitted into the slot of the stopper.

4. Remove the MZ4 assembly. l CHECK 2

Make sure that the bracket of the MZ4 assembly is hooked into the side plate of the
subscanning unit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-242
 MC-243
12.16 Driving Shaft Grip Release Arm 3. Remove the driving shaft grip release arm.
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the flywheel.

{MC:12.8_Flywheel}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-243
 MC-244
n Exploded View n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the bearing of the driving shaft grip release arm is in contact with the
outer periphery of the cam.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

l CHECK 2
Make sure that there is no gap between the bracket and fork.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-244
 MC-245
12.17 Driven Shaft Grip Release Arm and IP 3. Remove the driven shaft grip release arm.
Stopper {CHECK 1}

{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the transparent cover.
2. Remove the MZ4.
{MC:12.15_IP Stopper Drive Motor (MZ4)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-245
 MC-246
n Exploded View n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that the bearing of the driven shaft grip release arm is in contact with the
outer periphery of the cam.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

l CHECK 2
Make sure that there is no gap between the bracket and fork.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-246
 MC-247
12.18 Spur Gears n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1
n Removal Procedures Refer to the illustration below when attaching the spur gears.

1. Remove the MZ3.

{MC:12.14_Dust Removal Motor (MZ3)}

2. Remove the spur gears.

l CHECK 2
Installation should be done in the positions illustrated below.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-247
 MC-248
12.19 Dust Removal HP Sensor (SZ4)
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the spur gears.
{MC:12.18_Spur Gears}

2. Remove the SZ4.

n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u
Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.

For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-248
 MC-249
12.20 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Removal Procedures n Check/Adjustment Procedures

1. Remove the transparent cover. l CHECK 1
{MC:12.2_Transparent Cover} Refer to the illustration below when attaching the driven shaft grip roller (upper).
2. Remove the cleaning brush assembly.
{MC:12.10_Cleaning Brush Assembly}

3. Remove the shock-absorbing rubbers.

{MC:12.30_Shock-Absorbing Rubbers}

4. Remove the driven shaft grip roller (upper).

l CHECK 2
Make sure that that the hook is securely fitted into the slots of the side plate.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-249
 MC-250
12.21 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Removal Procedures n Check/Adjustment Procedures

1. Remove the upper light-collecting guide. l CHECK 1
{MC:11.1_Upper Light-Collecting Guide} Refer to the illustration below when attaching the driving shaft grip roller (upper).
2. Remove the transparent cover.
{MC:12.2_Transparent Cover}

3. Remove the MZ2.

{MC:12.13_Grip Drive Motor (MZ2)}

4. Remove the driving shaft grip roller (upper).

l CHECK 2
To attach the hook, securely fit it into the slots of the side plate.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-250
 MC-251
12.22 Antistatic Member
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the flywheel.
{MC:12.8_Flywheel}

2. Remove the driven shaft grip roller (upper).

{MC:12.20_Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)}

3. Remove the antistatic member.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-251
 MC-252
12.23 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Removal Procedures n CHECK

1. Remove the antistatic member. l CHECK 1

{MC:12.22_Antistatic Member} Make sure that the cable is attached along the bracket, side by side.

2. Remove the SZ1.

u NOTES u
- Use care so that the flat cable is not damaged by the side plate, and so forth.
- Exercise care not to crease the flat cable.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-252
 MC-253
12.24 Light-Collecting Mirror 3. Remove the light-collecting mirror.
{SP:INDEX} REFERENCE

u INSTRUCTION u When removing the light-collecting mirror, rotate the light-collecting shaft until the
light-collecting mirror retaining screws are easily accessible.
When handling the light-collecting mirror, pay attention to the following points.
- Wear gloves.
However, never touch the reflection surface of the light-collecting mirror even when
you are wearing the gloves.
- Wear a mask so that saliva does not come into contact with the light collecting
mirror.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the spur gears.
{MC:12.18_Spur Gears}

2. Remove the SZ1.

{MC:12.23_IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1)}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-253
 MC-254
12.25 Light-Collecting Shaft n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Removal Procedures
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
1. Remove the light-collecting mirror.
l CHECK 1
{MC:12.24_Light-Collecting Mirror}
Make sure that the guide is attached in the orientation as illustrated below.
2. Remove the light-collecting shaft.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-254
 MC-255
12.26 Glass Guide 3. Remove the glass guide.
{SP:INDEX} u INSTRUCTION u
u INSTRUCTIONS u When removing the screws from the bracket, access them along the route
illustrated below.
- If the glass guide is soiled, clean it by use of ethanol.
- Wear gloves when handling the glass guide.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the scanning optics unit.
{MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit}

2. Remove the light-collecting mirror.

{MC:12.24_Light-Collecting Mirror}

- The glass guide retaining bracket is secured by special screws. To attach or

remove them, use the special tool designed for them.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-255
 MC-256
{CHECK 1} n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
When attaching the glass guide, do so in such an orientation as illustrated below.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-256
 MC-257
12.27 Center Guide n Removal Procedures
{SP:INDEX} 1. Remove the light-collecting shaft.
CAUTION {MC:12.25_Light-Collecting Shaft}
Never remove or loosen the base mounting screws that retain the center guide 2. Remove the glass guide.
in place. If they were removed or loosened, image nonuniformity and IP jam {MC:12.26_Glass Guide}
would occur, so that it becomes necessary to replace the unit.
3. Remove the center guide.
u INSTRUCTION u
The center guide is secured by its special screws. For its installation/removal,
use the special tool designed for those screws.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-257
 MC-258
12.28 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) and n Reinstallation Procedures
Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
n Check/Adjustment Procedures
When handling the driving shaft grip roller (lower) and driven shaft grip roller (lower), l CHECK 1
use care not to scratch or shock them.
Make sure that BR3x6 screws and M4 washers are used to secure the leaf spring.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the SUS belt.
{MC:12.4_SUS Belt}

2. Remove the center guide.

{MC:12.27_Center Guide}

3. Remove the driving shaft grip roller (lower) and driven shaft grip roller
(lower).
u NOTE u
To secure the leaf spring, use BR screws and M4 washers. If TP screws were
used, the upper light-collecting guide might be damaged.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-258
 MC-259
12.29 Grounding Wires 4. Remove the grounding wires.
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Lower front light protect plate
- Lower right-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
- Lower rear cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.

{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}

3. Remove the retaining member.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-259
 MC-260
12.30 Shock-Absorbing Rubbers 4. Remove the shock-absorbing rubbers.
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
When replacing the shock-absorbing rubbers, replace all the two rubbers.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Lower right-hand side cover
- Lower left-hand side cover n Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:3.1_Covers} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
2. Remove the transparent cover.
{MC:12.2_Transparent Cover}

3. Remove the shock-absorbing rubber assembly.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-260
 MC-261
12.31 Subscanning Unit (Top) 3. Remove the subscanning unit (top).
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the shock-absorbing rubbers.
{MC:12.30_Shock-Absorbing Rubbers}

2. Remove the subscanning unit.

{MC:12.1_Subscanning Unit}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-261
 MC-262
12.32 Bracket Assembly
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the subscanning unit (top).
{MC:12.31_Subscanning Unit (Top)}

2. Remove the bracket assembly.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-262
 MC-263
12.33 Lower Light-Collecting Guide Brace 3. Remove the lower light-collecting guide brace assembly.
Assembly
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.
{MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}

2. Remove the transparent cover.

{MC:12.2_Transparent Cover}

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-263
 MC-264
13. PC Boards 2. Disconnect the connectors.
{CHECK 1}
{CHECK 2}
13.1 Board Bracket Assembly u INSTRUCTION u
{SP:INDEX} Remove the flat cable as instructed in the illustration below.
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.

■ Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cover.
- Upper right-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-264
 MC-265
3. Remove the board bracket assembly. n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
The CN6 cable should be located below the CN3 cable.

l CHECK 2
Make sure that the cables are snuggly attached.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. l CHECK 3
Make sure that CN2 on the IMG17A/B board and CN15 on the scanner board are
snuggly connected together.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-265
 MC-266
13.2 CPU91A Board n Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} 1. Make DIP SW1 setting as appropriate.

CAUTIONS u INSTRUCTION u
- When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static This setting should be the same as that on the CPU91A board removed.
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. {n DIP SW1 Setting on the CPU91A Board}
- Before removing the CPU91A board, remove the board bracket assembly as
a whole. If the CPU91A board is removed with the board bracket assembly 2. Reinstall the CPU91A board.
attached to the machine, the board may be damaged.
u INSTRUCTION u
Make sure that CN1 on the CPU91A board and CN1 on the IMG17A/B board are
n Removal Procedures snuggly connected together.

1. Remove the board bracket assembly.

{MC:13.1_Board Bracket Assembly}

2. Remove the CPU91A board.

3. Reinstall the board bracket assembly.

{MC:13.1_Board Bracket Assembly}

3. Check the DIP SW1 setting.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-266
 MC-267
4. Turn ON the power of the RU. n DIP SW1 Setting on the CPU91A Board
u NOTES u
- DIP SW1 settings, other than No. 7, should be used in the OFF position.
- The setting for No. 7 of DIP SW differs depending on the device type installed. If
incorrect setting is made, the RU will not operate normally.
- For Nos. 5 and 6 of DIP SW1, be sure to put them back in the OFF position once
troubleshooting is completed.

l Positions of DIP SW1

5. Check the following points.

l The RU normally enters the READY state.

l Meanings of settings
No Item Routine state Meaning
1 For design purposes OFF

2 For design purposes OFF

3 Reserved OFF

4 Reserved OFF

5 For troubleshooting OFF <Enable/disable memory test during bootup>

purposes OFF: Memory test is not performed during bootup.
ON: Memory test is performed during bootup.
6 For troubleshooting OFF <Switching during bootup>
purposes OFF: IPL + APL boot
ON: Boot up with IPL alone, with the IP address of
the RU fixed at 172.16.1.10.
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity. SW for selecting the Differs with the OFF: CR-IR362 is selected.
7
device type device type ON: CR-IR363 is selected.
{MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks}
8 For design purposes OFF
l There is no error occurrence.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-267
 MC-268
13.3 IMG17A/B Board 3. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
After the main screen appears, sequentially touch the upper left and upper right
{SP:INDEX}
corners of the touch panel.
CAUTIONS REFERENCE
- When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static If your touch is accepted by the panel, a "beep" alarm sound is generated.
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
- Before removing the IMG17A/B board, remove the board bracket assembly as �� ��
a whole. If the IMG17A/B board is removed with the board bracket assembly ������� �������
attached to the machine, the board may be damaged.

u NOTES u
- Back up the RU data before replacing the IMG17A/B board.
- The IMG17A/B board that is shipped as a service part is initially set up for use in
Japan. Be sure to complete all of the following procedures.

1. Turn ON the power of the CL.

2. Turn ON the power of the RU. ���������������������������������
��������������������� ������������

u INSTRUCTION u
If you cannot put the RU into the Maintenance Mode, turn OFF the power of the
RU and then reboot the RU all over again.

4. Press the [Windows] key to open the Start menu of Windows.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-268
 MC-269
5. Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows. When the dialog 7. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its data backup, and
opens, type ["C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\ back up the "CONFIGRATION" and "SCN ALL DATA" data.
RuPCTool.exe"] and click on the [OK] button.

8. Turn OFF the power of the RU.

9. Remove the floppy diskette from the FD drive of the CL.

6. Put a new floppy diskette into the FD drive of the CL.

u NOTE u
Never write any data into the machine-specific data floppy diskette bundled with
the machine.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-269
 MC-270
10. Remove the CPU91A board. 13. Turn ON the power of the RU.
{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
14. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
11. Remove the IMG17A/B board, and install a new IMG17A/B board.
After the main screen appears, sequentially touch the upper left and upper right
corners of the touch panel.
u NOTE u
Because the IP address of the FTP server has not been set yet, it takes about
p
three minutes until the main screen appears.

REFERENCE
If your touch is accepted by the panel, a "beep" alarm sound is generated.

�� ��
������� �������

12. Reinstall the CPU91A board.

{MC:13.2_CPU91A Board}
���������������������������������
��������������������� ������������

u NOTE u
If you cannot put the RU into the Maintenance Mode, turn OFF the power of the
RU and then reboot the RU all over again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-270
 MC-271
15. Set the IP address of the RU. 16. Set the IP address of the FTP server.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Enter the IP address of the RU that is set in the CL. Enter the IP address of the CL.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-271
 MC-272
17. Execute "Network Check". 20. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its version update, and
click on [VERSION UP].

21. Click on [OK].

��
�������

FR9H3D45.EPS

22. Check "RU VERSION", and click on [OK].

����������
�� ����
�������� ����

��
�������

u NOTE u ������������

In the case of "NO GOOD" indication

{Troubleshooting}

18. Turn OFF the power of the RU.

19. Turn ON the power of the RU.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-272
 MC-273
23. Click on [OK]. 25. Click on [OK].
CAUTION ��
�������
While data is being written into the FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the power of
the RU.
If the power of the RU is turned OFF, the program residing in the memory is
corrupted, so that the RU cannot be rebooted. ������������

26. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the list of master
�� CL's is to be changed, and click on the [EDIT CL NAME] button.
�������

������������

24. When writing from the IMG17A/B board to the FLASH ROM is 27. Click on the [MODIFY] button.
completed, click on the [Enter] key. ��
REFERENCE �������
Writing to the FLASH ROM will take about four minutes.

��
�������
������������

��
�������
����������� ������������

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-273
 MC-274
28. Enter "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME", and click on the [SET] button. 30. Put the floppy diskette created at step 7 into the FD drive of the CL.
u INSTRUCTION u
31. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its data restore, and
"IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME" should be set to the same as before board restore the "CONFIGURATION" and "SCN ALL DATA" data.
replacement.

REFERENCE
For "CL NAME", any name (20 bytes: 20 alphanumeric characters, or 10 Kanji
characters) may be entered.

��
�������
�������������
��� ��� ��� ���

��
�������
�������
���������
��
�������

������������

29. Click on the [SET] button.

��
�������

��
�������

������������

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-274
 MC-275
32. Clear the backup memory. 35. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.

33. Turn OFF the power of the RU. l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.
34. Turn ON the power of the RU. {MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-275
 MC-276
13.4 Scanner Board 2. Disconnect the connectors.
u NOTES u
13.4.1 SCT17B Board - To disconnect the CN4 and CN11, use its special jig. Otherwise, the connector
{SP:INDEX} located on the board might be damaged.
- When disconnecting the connector by use of the special jig, use a screwdriver’
CAUTION s shaft or the like as a pivot and detach it at right angles relative to the board.
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the board bracket assembly.
{MC:13.1_Board Bracket Assembly}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-276
 MC-277
3. Remove the SCT17B board. n Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps, and check the following points.
To remove the SCT17B board, tilt it out. Otherwise, the retention clips might be
damaged.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.

l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.

{MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-277
 MC-278
13.5 DRV17A Board 3. Remove the DRV17A Board.
{SP:INDEX}

CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cover.
- Top cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Disconnect the connectors.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-278
 MC-279
n Reinstallation Procedures 13.6 DRV17B Board
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps, and check the following points. {SP:INDEX}

l The RU normally enters the READY state. CAUTION

When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cover.
- Top cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Disconnect the connectors.

l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.

{MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-279
 MC-280
3. Remove the DRV17B Board. n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps, and check the following points.

l The RU normally enters the READY state.

l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.

{MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-280
 MC-281
13.7 SNS17B Board 3. Remove the SNS17B Board.
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}

CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the cover.
- Top cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Disconnect the connectors.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-281
 MC-282
n Reinstallation Procedures 13.8 SNS17A Board
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps, and check the following points. {SP:INDEX}

l The RU normally enters the READY state. CAUTION

When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the SNS17B Board.
{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board}

2. Disconnect the connectors.

l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.

{MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks}
● There is no error occurrence.

n Check/Adjustment Procedures
l CHECK 1
Make sure that CN1 on the SNS17B board and CN2 on the SNS17A board are
snuggly connected together.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-282
 MC-283
3. Remove the SNS17A Board. n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps, and check the following points.

l The RU normally enters the READY state.

l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.

{MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-283
 MC-284
13.9 Battery n Check/Adjustment Procedures
{SP:INDEX} 1. Press the [Windows] key to open the Start menu of Windows.
CAUTION
�����
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
������������

may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. 2. Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows. When the dialog
opens, type ["C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\
RuPCTool.exe"] and click on the [OK] button.
n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the IMG Board.
{MC: 13.3_IMG17A/B board}

2. Remove the battery.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-284
 MC-285
3. Clear the backup memory. 6. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.

4. Turn OFF the power of the RU.

l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.
5. Turn ON the power of the RU.
{MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-285
 MC-286
14. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse n Fuse Replacement Procedures

Locations CAUTIONS
- When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
n Fuse Classification may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
- When replacing the fuse, check the rated amperage of the fuse to be replaced, and
l How to understand fuse notations replace it with a fuse of the same rated amperage.
An example of classification symbols and rated amperage is shown below. At that time, check the rated amperage (A) silk-screened on the board as well.
- To remove the fuse, pull it straight up and off.
- When attaching the fuse, exercise care not to bend the pins of the fuse.

1. Pull out the fuse, and replace it with a new one.

l How to identify rated amperage

Fuse notation Rated amperage
LM 03(D) 0.3A
05(D) 0.5A
10(D) 1A
13(D) 1.3A
16(D) 1.6A
20(D) 2A
32(D) 3.2A
40(D) 4A
50(D) 5A

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-286
 MC-287
14.1 Fuse of Power Supply Unit
{SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures
1. Remove the covers.
- Lower front cover
- Lower left-hand side cover
{MC:3.1_Covers}

2. Remove the fuse.

{n Fuse Replacement Procedures}

n Fuse Location

n Fuse Information
Board Type Rated voltage Rated Fuse number
indications (V) amperage (A)
DC48V,
LM 48 1.6 A011
1A

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-287
 MC-288
14.2 DRV17A Board Fuses n Fuse Information
{SP:INDEX} Board Type Rated voltage Rated Fuse number*
indications (V) amperage (A)
n Removal Procedures F1 LM 48 3.2 B011

1. Remove the DRV17A board. F2 LM 48 3.2 B021

{MC:13.5_DRV17A Board} F3 LM 48 3.2 B031

2. Replace the fuses. F4 LM 48 3.2 B041

{n Fuse Replacement Procedures} F5 LM 48 3.2 B051
F6 LM 48 3.2 B061
n Fuse Location
F7 LM 48 3.2 B071
F8 LM 48 3.2 B081
F9 LM 48 3.2 B091
F10 LM 48 4.0 B101
F11 LM 48 4.0 B111
F12 LM 48 3.2 B121
F13 LM 48 3.2 B131
F14 LM 48 3.2 B141
F15 LM 48 2.0 B151
F18 LM 48 2.0 D011
F19 LM 48 3.2 D021

* Fuse number: Number indicated in the fuse block diagram.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-288
 MC-289
14.3 DRV17B Board Fuses n Fuse Information
{SP:INDEX} Board Type Rated voltage Rated Fuse number*
indications (V) amperage (A)
n Removal Procedures F1 LM 48 3.2 B161

1. Remove the DRV17B board. F2 LM 48 3.2 B171

{MC:13.6_DRV17B Board} F3 LM 48 3.2 B181

2. Replace the fuses. F4 LM 48 3.2 B191

{n Fuse Replacement Procedures} F5 LM 48 3.2 B201
F6 LM 48 3.2 B211
n Fuse Location
F7 LM 48 3.2 B221
F8 LM 48 3.2 B241
F9 LM 48 3.2 B231
F10 LM 48 3.2 B251
F11 LM 48 3.2 B261
F12 LM 48 2.0 B281

* Fuse number: Number indicated in the fuse block diagram.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-289
 MC-290
14.4 SNS17B Board Fuses n Fuse Information
{SP:INDEX} Board Type Rated voltage Rated Fuse number*
indications (V) amperage (A)
n Removal Procedures F1 LM 48 1.6 A021

1. Remove the SNS17B board. F2 LM 48 1.6 A031

{MC:13.7_SNS17B Board} F3 LM 48 3.2 A041

2. Replace the fuses. F4 LM 48 1.6 A051

{n Fuse Replacement Procedures}
* Fuse number: Number indicated in the fuse block diagram.
n Fuse Location
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-290
 MC-291
14.5 SCT17B Board Fuses n Fuse Information
{SP:INDEX} Board Type Rated voltage Rated Fuse number*
indications (V) amperage (A)
n Removal Procedures F1 LM 48 1.6 H041

1. Remove the SCT17B board. F2 LM 48 1.6 H011

{MC:13.4.1_SCT17B Board} F3 LM 48 1.6 G011

2. Replace the fuses. F4 LM 48 1.6 G021

{n Fuse Replacement Procedures} F5 LM 48 1.6 A061
F6 LM 48 1.6 J011
n Fuse Location
F7 LM 48 1.6 G051
F8 LM 48 3.2 G031

* Fuse number: Number indicated in the fuse block diagram.

n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-291
 MC-292
14.6 INV17A Board Fuses 14.7 INV17B Board Fuses
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}

n Removal Procedures n Removal Procedures

1. Remove the INV17A board. 1. Remove the SNS17B board.
{MC:9.14_INV17A Board} {MC:9.15_INV17A Board}

2. Replace the fuses. 2. Replace the fuses.

{n Fuse Replacement Procedures} {n Fuse Replacement Procedures}

n Fuse Location n Fuse Location

n Fuse Information n Fuse Information

Board Type Rated voltage Rated Fuse number* Board Type Rated voltage Rated Fuse number*
indications (V) amperage (A) indications (V) amperage (A)
F1 LM 48 0.5 - F1 LM 48 0.5 -
F2 LM 48 0.5 - F2 LM 48 1 -
F3 LM 48 0.5 -
* Fuse number: Number indicated in the fuse block diagram.
F4 LM 48 1 -

* Fuse number: Number indicated in the fuse block diagram. n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
n Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-292
 MC-293
15 Updating Software Versions 3. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
After the main screen appears, sequentially touch the upper left and upper right
corners of the touch panel.
1. Turn ON the power of the CL.
REFERENCE
2. Turn ON the power of the RU. If your touch is accepted by the panel, a “beep” alarm sound is generated.

�� ��
������� �������

���������������������������������
��������������������� ������������

u INSTRUCTION u
If you cannot put the RU into the Maintenance Mode, turn OFF the power of the
RU and then reboot the RU all over again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-293
 MC-294
REFERENCE 8. When Uninstall is completed, click on [Finish].
For steps 4 through 8, perform "Uninstall Setup PC-TOOL."

4. Put the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the CL.

5. Click on [UNINSTALL].

REFERENCE
For steps 9 through 15, perform "Install Setup PC-TOOL."

9. Click on [INSTALL].

6. Click on [NEXT].

10. Click on [NEXT].

7. Click on [Remove].

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-294
 MC-295
11. Click on [Install]. 14. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its version update, and
click on [FTP].

12. When Install is completed, click on [Finish].

13. Click on [START].

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-295
 MC-296
15. Check the IP address, and click on [OK]. REFERENCE
For steps 16 through 25, perform "Update RU Software Version."

16. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its version update, and
click on [VERSION UP].

17. Click on [OK].

u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{Troubleshooting}

18. Check "RU VERSION", and click on [OK].

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-296
 MC-297
19. Click on [OK]. 21. Click on [OK].
CAUTION
While data is being written into the FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the power of
the RU.
If the power of the RU is turned OFF, the program residing in the memory is
corrupted, so that the RU cannot be rebooted.
22. Check the version of the RU software, and close Setup PC-TOOL.

20. When writing from the IMG17A/B board to the FLASH ROM is
completed, click on the [Enter] key.
REFERENCE
Writing into the FLASH ROM will take about four minutes.

u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, return to step 1 and perform install procedures
all over again.

23. Turn OFF the power of the RU.

24. Turn ON the power of the RU.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-297
 MC-298
25. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.

l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.

{MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-298
 MC-299
16. Format Adjustment 4. Enter the reading start position (e.g., "10") calculated at step 3.
u NOTES u
- After entering the reading start position, do not turn OFF the power of the RU.
16.1 Main Scan Format Adjustment If the RU is powered OFF, the reading start position data will not be retained.
- "Input range" only accepts values ranging from -999 to 999.
u INSTRUCTION u
Of the IPs used by the user, the largest sized IP should be utilized for adjustment. REFERENCE
The white blank portion of the output image expands when a negative quantity (-)
16.1.1 Main Scan Position (Pixel) Adjustment value is entered, while it narrows when a positive quantity (+) value is entered.

1. Expose IPs of 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm) size
with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR.
u INSTRUCTION u
At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment.

2. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format", and "SINGLE", read one of the
IPs provided at step 1, and generate an image output.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}

3. Measure a misalignment of the reading start position.

Measure the size of the white blank portion, and calculate an adjustment value in
accordance with the formula shown below.

--- Example ---

If the positional misalignment is 1 mm when an IP of 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm) size
is outputted to a 14" x17" (35cm x 43cm) film:
(1/1 x 10) = 10 (PIXEL)
Thus, "Input range" is +10.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-299
 MC-300
5. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format", and "SINGLE", read one of the 16.1.2 Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment
IPs provided at step 1, and generate an image output.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image} 1. Place a 175mm-length steel rule on an IP of 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm)
or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm) size, and expose it with the tungsten X-ray
tube at about 1 mR.
6. Make sure that "RESULT-OK" appears on screen.
u INSTRUCTION u
At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment.

2. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format", and "SINGLE", read one of the
IPs provided at step 1, and generate an image output.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}

7. Verify that there is no white blank portion and the resulting image is
not cut off. 3. Measure a misalignment of the reading width.
Measure the actual size of the 175mm-length steel rule and the size of the white
u NOTE u blank portion, and calculate an adjustment value in accordance with the formula
If anything abnormal is found with the image: shown below.
{Troubleshooting}

8. Back up the data so adjusted into a floppy diskette.

{MC:19.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}

--- Example ---

If the measured value of the reading width is 170 mm when an IP of 14"x14"
(35cm x 35cm) size is outputted to a 14" x17" (35cm x 43cm) film:
(175 - (170/1)/175x100 = 2.8(%)
Thus, "Input range" is +2.8.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-300
 MC-301
4. Enter the main scan length (e.g., "2.8") calculated at step 3. 5. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format", and "SINGLE", read one of the
IPs provided at step 1, and generate an image output.
u NOTES u
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}
- After entering the main scan length, do not turn OFF the power of the RU. If
the RU is powered OFF, the main scan length data will not be retained.
- "Input range" only accepts values ranging from -5 to 5. 6. Make sure that "RESULT-OK" appears on screen.

REFERENCE
The white blank portion of the output image expands when a negative quantity (-)
value is entered, while it narrows when a positive quantity (+) value is entered.

7. Measure the actual size of the 175mm-length steel rule and the size of
the white blank portion, and verify that there is no misalignment.
8. Back up the data so adjusted into a floppy diskette.
{MC:19.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-301
 MC-302
16.1.3 Optic Setting 3. Place a 175mm-length steel rule on an IP of 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm)
or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm) size, and expose it with the tungsten X-ray
u NOTE u tube at about 1 mR.
Only when the machine-specific data bundled with the machine is not available and
you want to reset the machine to its factory default state, the following procedures 4. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format", and "SINGLE", read one of the
should be performed. IPs provided at step 3, and generate an image output.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}
1. Check the value written on the top of the scanning optics unit, and
write it down on your notepad. 5. Make sure that "RESULT-OK" appears on screen.

6. Verify that there is no white blank portion and the resulting image is
not cut off.
2. Type in the value noted at step 1. u INSTRUCTION u
If there is any white blank portion on the image or if the image is cut off, perform
the procedures described in "16.1.1 Main Scan Position (Pixel) Adjustment."
{MC:16.1.1_Main Scan Position (Pixel) Adjustment}

7. Measure the actual size of the 175mm-length steel rule and white
blank portion, and make sure that there is no misalignment.
u INSTRUCTION u
If there is any image misalignment, perform the procedures described in "16.1.2
Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment."
{MC:16.1.2_Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-302
 MC-303
16.2 IP Leading-Edge Adjustment (Sub-scanning) 4. Enter the IP leading-edge position (e.g., "20") calculated at step 3.

REFERENCES u NOTES u

- IP leading-edge adjustment is only effective for an IP of HR type. - After entering the IP leading edge position, do not turn OFF the power of the
- IP leading-edge adjustment may be made for each of the IP sizes. RU. If the RU is powered OFF, the IP leading edge position data will not be
retained.
- "Input range" only accepts values ranging from 0 to 50.
1. Expose IPs of a size (18" x 24" HR/HR-BD or 24" x 30" HR/HR-BD) to
be adjusted, with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 15 mR.
u NOTE u
At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment.

2. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format -1", and "SINGLE", read one of
the IPs provided at step 1, and generate an image output.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}

3. Measure the leading edge of the IP.

Measure the length of the white blank portion, and calculate an adjustment value in
accordance with the formula shown below.
REFERENCE
The white blank portion of the output image expands when a negative quantity (-)
value is entered, while it narrows when a positive quantity (+) value is entered.

--- Example ---

If you want to narrow the IP leading-edge position by 1 mm when an IP of 18" x
24" HR size is outputted to a film:
30 (displayed value) - (1/0.1) = 20
Thus, "Input range" is 20.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-303
 MC-304
5. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format -1", and "SINGLE", read one of
the IPs provided at step 1, and generate an image output.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}

6. Make sure that "RESULT-OK" appears on screen.

7. Verify that the white blank portion reaches the value so adjusted.
8. Back up the data so adjusted into a floppy diskette.
{MC:19.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-304
 MC-305
17. Shading/Sensitivity Correction for 3. Make preparations for correction.

IP Type ST u INSTRUCTION u
Enter the value (x.xx) of the X-ray dose measured at step 1 into the field of
u INSTRUCTION u shading/sensitivity correction.
The adjustment procedures differ depending on the IP type used. Check the
procedures as appropriate. REFERENCE
{MU:5.3 [5-6]_Correction} If the measure value of the X-ray dose is 0.92 mR: The value to be entered is
"0.92".
u NOTES u If the measured value of the X-ray dose is 1.11 mR: The value to be entered is
- Shading/sensitivity correction is possible only when the IP type is ST and the IP size "1.11".
is 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm).
- Before shading/sensitivity correction, format adjustment should have been done. If
there is any white blank portion on the exposed image, error is likely to occur.
- Of the IPs used by the user, the largest sized IP should be utilized for adjustment. If
IPs of small sizes are employed, unusual nonuniformity is likely to occur.

REFERENCE
Exposure reference conditions
Distance Voltage Amperage Time
Tungsten X-ray tube 1.8m 80Kv 50mA 0.013 sec
Molybdenum X-ray
0.55m 20Kv 100mA 0.053 sec
tube

17.1 Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type

ST
u NOTES u
- Unless the IP is read within 10 to 11 minutes after X-ray exposure, appropriate
correction for sensitivity could not be achieved.
- Be sure to use the tungsten X-ray tube. The molybdenum X-ray tube will not result
in normal correction, because it suffers from tube-to-tube variability.

u INSTRUCTIONS u
- The calibrated X-ray dosimeter should be used to measure the X-ray dose.
- The correction procedures, from exposure to reading, should be done within 10 to
11 minutes.

1. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose, and write it down
on your notepad.
2. Expose an IP of 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm)
size with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-305
 MC-306
4. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format", and "SINGLE", read the IP 17.2 Shading Speed Correction
provided at step 1 within 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure, and
generate an image output. u NOTE u
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image} Be sure to use the tungsten X-ray tube. The molybdenum X-ray tube will not result in
normal correction, because it suffers from tube-to-tube variability.
5. Make sure that "RESULT-OK" appears on screen.

1. Expose IPs of 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm) size
with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR.
u INSTRUCTION u
At least four IPs should be exposed.

6. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose, and write it down 2. Set the GR (GR speed).
on your notepad.
7. Expose an IP of 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm)
size with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR.
8. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format", and "SINGLE", read the IP
provided at step 6 within 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure, and
generate an image output.
Verify the S value and check for unusual nonuniformity.
REFERENCE
For 0.1 mR: The S value is 2000.
For 1 mR: The S value is 200.
For 10 mR: The S value is 20.

{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}

9. Execute "Shading Speed Correction".

{MC:17.2_Shading Speed Correction}

10. Back up the data so adjusted into a floppy diskette.

{MC:19.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-306
 MC-307
3. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format", and "SINGLE", read the IP 6. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format", and "SINGLE", read the IP
provided at step 1, and generate an image output. provided at step 1, and generate an image output.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image} Make sure that there is no unusual nonuniformity.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}
4. Make sure that "RESULT-OK" appears on screen.
7. Make sure that "RESULT-OK" appears on screen.

5. Set the FR (FR speed).

8. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format", and "SINGLE", read the IP
provided at step 1, and generate an image output.
Make sure that there is no unusual nonuniformity.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}

9. Back up the data so adjusted into a floppy diskette.

{MC:19.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-307
 MC-308
17.3 Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST 3. Make preparations for correction.

u NOTE u u INSTRUCTION u

Unless the IP is read within 10 to 11 minutes after X-ray exposure, appropriate Enter the value (x.xx) of the X-ray dose measured at step 1 into the field of
correction for sensitivity could not be achieved. sensitivity adjustment.

REFERENCE
u INSTRUCTIONS u
If the measure value of the X-ray dose is 0.92 mR: The value to be entered is
- The calibrated X-ray dosimeter should be used to measure the X-ray dose.
"0.92".
- The correction procedures, from exposure to reading, should be done within 10 to
If the measured value of the X-ray dose is 1.11 mR: The value to be entered is
11 minutes.
"1.11".

1. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose, and write it down
on your notepad.
2. Expose an IP of 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm)
size with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR.

4. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format", and "SINGLE", read the IP

provided at step 2 within 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure, and
generate an image output.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-308
 MC-309
5. Make sure that "RESULT-OK" appears on screen.

6. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose, and write it down
on your notepad.

7. Expose an IP of 14" x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm)

size with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR.

8. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format", and "SINGLE", read the IP

provided at step 7 within 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure, and
generate an image output.
Verify the S value and check for unusual nonuniformity.
REFERENCE
For 0.1 mR: The S value is 2000.
For 1 mR: The S value is 200.
For 10 mR: The S value is 20.

{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}

9. Make sure that "RESULT-OK" appears on screen.

10. Back up the data so adjusted into a floppy diskette.

{MC:19.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-309
 MC-310
18. Shading/Sensitivity Correction for 3. Make preparations for correction.

IP Type HR u INSTRUCTION u
Enter the value (x.xx) of the X-ray dose measured at step 1 into the field of
sensitivity adjustment.
u INSTRUCTION u
The adjustment procedures differ depending on the IP type used. Check the REFERENCE
procedures as appropriate.
If the measure value of the X-ray dose is 18.1 mR: The value to be entered is
{MU:5.3 [5-6]_Correction} "18.1".
If the measured value of the X-ray dose is 20 mR: The value to be entered is
u NOTES u "20".
- Shading/sensitivity correction is possible only when the IP type is 18" x 24" HR/HR-
BD or 24" x 30" HR/HR-BD
- The type of the X-ray tube and X-ray dose differ depending on the item to be
corrected.
Shading correction: The X-ray tube is tungsten and the X-ray dose is 15 mR.
Sensitivity correction: The X-ray tube is molybdenum and the X-ray dose is 20 mR.
- Of the IPs used by the user, the largest sized IP should be utilized for adjustment. If
IPs of small sizes are employed, unusual nonuniformity is likely to occur.

18.1 Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR

u NOTE u
Unless the IP is read within 10 to 11 minutes after X-ray exposure, appropriate
correction for sensitivity could not be achieved.

u INSTRUCTIONS u
- The calibrated X-ray dosimeter should be used to measure the X-ray dose.
- The correction procedures, from exposure to reading, should be done within 10 to
11 minutes.

REFERENCE
Exposure reference conditions
Distance Voltage Amperage Time
Molybdenum X-ray tube 0.55m 20Kv 100mA 0.053 sec

1. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose, and write it down
on your notepad.
2. Expose an IP of 18" x 24" HR-BD (double side) or 24" x 30" HR-BD
(double side) size with the molybdenum X-ray tube at about 20 mR.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-310
 MC-311
4. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format -1", and "SINGLE", read the IP
provided at step 2 within 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure, and
generate an image output.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}

5. Make sure that "RESULT-OK" appears on screen.

6. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose, and write it down
on your notepad.
7. Expose an IP of 18" x 24" HR-BD or 24" x 30" HR-BD size with the
molybdenum X-ray tube at about 20 mR.
8. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format -1", and "SINGLE", read the IP
provided at step 6 within 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure, and
generate an image output.
Verify the S value and check for unusual nonuniformity.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}
REFERENCE
For 2 mR: The S value is 1200.
For 20 mR: The S value is 120.
For 200 mR: The S value is 12.

9. Back up the data so adjusted into a floppy diskette.

{MC:19.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-311
 MC-312
18.2 Shading Correction for IP Type HR 2. Set the HR (HR speed).

u NOTE u
Be sure to use the tungsten X-ray tube. The molybdenum X-ray tube will not result in
normal correction, because it suffers from tube-to-tube variability.

REFERENCE
Exposure reference conditions
Distance Voltage Amperage Time
Tungsten X-ray tube 1.8m 80Kv 50mA 0.013 sec

1. Expose an IP of 18" x 24" HR-BD or 24" x 30" HR-BD size with the
tungsten X-ray tube at about 15 mR.
(At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment.)

3. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format -1", and "SINGLE", read the IP
provided at step 1, and generate an image output.
Make sure that there is no unusual nonuniformity.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-312
 MC-313
4. Make sure that "RESULT-OK" appears on screen.

5. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format -1", and "SINGLE", read the IP
provided at step 1, and generate an image output.
Make sure that there is no unusual nonuniformity.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}

6. Back up the data so adjusted into a floppy diskette.

{MC:19.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-313
 MC-314
18.3 Special Sensitivity Adjustment for IP Type 3. Make preparations for correction.
HR u INSTRUCTION u
Only when the following conditions are met, special sensitivity adjustment can be Enter the value (x.xx) of the X-ray dose measured at step 1 into the field of
achieved. sensitivity adjustment.
- When the IP type HR-BD (double side) is exposed with the tungsten X-ray tube
- When the IP type HR (single side) is exposed with the molybdenum X-ray tube REFERENCE
If the measure value of the X-ray dose is 3.4 mR: The value to be entered is
u NOTE u "3.4".
Unless the IP is read within 10 to 11 minutes after X-ray exposure, appropriate If the measured value of the X-ray dose is 3 mR: The value to be entered is "3".
correction for sensitivity could not be achieved.

u INSTRUCTIONS u
- The calibrated X-ray dosimeter should be used to measure the X-ray dose.
- The correction procedures, from exposure to reading, should be done within 10 to
11 minutes.

REFERENCES
- Observe the following when selecting the type of X-ray tube.
When the molybdenum X-ray tube is used: AUTO SELECT
When the tungsten X-ray tube is used: TUNGSTEN FIX

- S value corresponding to the X-ray dose

For the tungsten X-ray tube
When the X-ray dose is 0.36 mR: The S value is 1200.
When the X-ray dose is 3.6 mR: The S value is 120.
When the X-ray dose is 36 mR: The S value is 12.
For the molybdenum X-ray tube
When the X-ray dose is 2 mR: The S value is 1200.
When the X-ray dose is 20 mR: The S value is 120.
When the X-ray dose is 200 mR: The S value is 12.

18.3.1 When Sensitivity Adjustment is Performed on the IP

Type HR with the Tungsten X-Ray Tube
1. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose and write it down
on your notepad.
2. Expose an IP of 18" x 24" HR-BD (double side) or 24" x 30" HR-BD
(double side) size with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 3.6 mR.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-314
 MC-315
4. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format -1", and "SINGLE", read the IP 18.3.2 When Sensitivity Adjustment is Performed on the IP
provided at step 2 within 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure, and Type HR with the Molybdenum X-ray Tube
generate an image output.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image} 1. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose and write it down
on your notepad.
5. Make sure that "RESULT-OK" appears on screen.
2. Expose an IP of 18" x 24" HR (single side) or 24" x 30" HR (single side)
size with the molybdenum X-ray tube at about 20 mR.

6. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose, and write it down
on your notepad.

7. Expose an IP of 18" x 24" HR-BD or 24" x 30" HR-BD size with the
tungsten X-ray tube at about 3.6 mR.

8. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format -1", and "SINGLE", read the IP
provided at step 7 within 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure, and
generate an image output.
Make sure that there is nothing abnormal with the S value and that there is no
unusual nonuniformity.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}

9. Back up the data so adjusted into a floppy diskette.

{MC:19.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-315
 MC-316
3. Make preparations for correction. 4. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format -1", and "SINGLE", read the IP
provided at step 2 within 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure, and
u INSTRUCTION u
generate an image output.
Enter the value (x.xx) of the X-ray dose measured at step 1 into the field of {MC:19.2_Checking the Image}
sensitivity adjustment.
5. Make sure that "RESULT-OK" appears on screen.
REFERENCE
If the measure value of the X-ray dose is 18.1 mR: The value to be entered is
"18.1".
If the measured value of the X-ray dose is 20 mR: The value to be entered is
"20".

6. Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose, and write it down
on your notepad.

7. Expose an IP of 18" x 24" HR or 24" x 30" HR size with the

molybdenum X-ray tube at about 20 mR.

8. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format -1", and "SINGLE", read the IP
provided at step 7 within 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure, and
generate an image output.
Make sure that there is nothing abnormal with the S value and that there is no
unusual nonuniformity.
{MC:19.2_Checking the Image}

9. Back up the data so adjusted into a floppy diskette.

{MC:19.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-316
 MC-317
19. Data Backup/Image Checks 2. Put a new floppy diskette into the FD drive of the CL.
u NOTE u
Never write any data into the machine-specific data FD bundled with the
19.1 Backing Up the Scanner Data machine.

1. Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows. When the dialog
opens, type ["C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\ 3. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its data backup, and
RuPCTool.exe"] and click on the [OK] button. back up the "CONFIGURATION" and "SCN ALL DATA" data.

4. Remove the floppy diskette from the FD drive of the CL.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-317
 MC-318
19.2 Checking the Image u INSTRUCTION u
For IP type HR-BD, when the image menu is to be registered, the HQ flag should
1. On the examination reception screen of the CL, click on the [Add be set in "Detailed Exposure Menu Parameters Setting".
Exposure Menu] button.

2. Select [IMAGE-FORMAT] from the [TEST] menu, and click on the [OK]
button.

3. Click on [Start Study].

4. Click on [SINGLE].

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-318
 MC-319
5. Click on [IP#].

6. Enter the barcode of the cassette to be used.

7. Press the [ENTER] key.

→ The examination reservation is completed, and the following screen appears.

8. Insert the cassette with the barcode entered.

→ The IP reading starts, and the image is displayed on the CL.

9. Check the image displayed.

u NOTE u
If there is any unusual nonuniformity on the image displayed:
{Troubleshooting}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-319
 MC-320
20. Image/Conveyance Checks 3. Perform IP exposures.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
The following checks are made in this section.
- Conveyance checks - Expose two IPs of maximum sizes for each of the IP types (ST/HR type and
- Image checks HR-BD type) used at the institution, with the following doses.
- With the X-ray tube, the first IP should be exposed in a normal orientation, and
the second in a 180-degree upside-down orientation.
20.1 Check Before Procedures - When the "HR" IP is used in conjunction with the molybdenum X-ray tube, the
IP should be exposed under conditions of "l "For "HR-BD" IP."
u NOTES u
- For the IP used for image/conveyance checks, an IP of the maximum size used in l For "ST/HR" IP
the hospital should be employed.
- Make sure that the IP to be used does not contain any important image data - X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube
exposed. - Exposure X-ray dose: 1 mR
- Maximum size: IP of 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14"x17" (35cm x 43cm)
size
1. Check to ensure that the "READY" screen appears. - Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m
Voltage 80 kV
Amperage 50 mA
Time 0.013 sec
l For "HR-BD" IP
- X-ray tube: Molybdenum X-ray tube
- Exposure X-ray dose: 20 mR
- Maximum size: IP of 18"x24" HR-BD or 24"x30" HR-BD size
- Reference conditions: Distance 0.55 m
Voltage 25 kV
Amperage 100 mA
Time 0.053 sec

2. Perform "secondary erasure" on the spontaneous radiation and image

accumulated on the IP to be used.
{Instruction Manual}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-320
 MC-321
20.2 Image/Conveyance Checks 2 Verify that there is no "unusual nonuniformity" found on the output
film or on the image displayed on the image monitor.
u NOTE u
u CHECK u
Because the "MENU" and so forth differ depending on the IP type, image checks
should be performed with the "MENU" specified below. There should be no uneven density difference in the main scan direction.

If there is any uneven density difference, compare the films outputted from the
1. Using "TEST", "Image Format", and "SINGLE", record the IP exposed two IPs of the same size, and determine whether such nonuniformity is caused
at "20.1 Check Before Procedures", and generate an image output. by the machine or X-ray tube.
u INSTRUCTION u l If there is uneven density difference in the same direction on two films
For IP type HR-BD, when the image menu is to be registered, the HQ flag should
be set in "Detailed Exposure Menu Parameters Setting".

→ The machine may be the cause of such nonuniformity.

{Troubleshooting}

l If positions of uneven density difference are different

→ The X-ray tube may be the cause of such nonuniformity.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-321
 MC-322
3 Check the image format.
Make sure that the white blank portion is 2 mm or less, as actually measured on
the IP, from the outermost edge of the image frame of the film outputted.
u CHECK u
The white blank portion should be 2 mm or less.
If anything abnormal is found:
��
{Troubleshooting}

u NOTE u
The distance measured on the film may differ from the actual size on the IP,
depending on the reading size and film size. The actual size on the IP should be
calculated using the distance measured on the film and the reduction factor for
the film. Compute the actual size on the IP according to the following equation.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-322
 MC-323
21. List of Jigs and Tools

21.1 Jigs and Tools

Name Code No. Manufacturer Model No.
Loop cable

898Y0981 Fuji Photo Film

Clip clamping tool

890N0007 Kyoto Tool (KTC) AP-26

Special bit

Y22S0114 Chapman CMB54

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-323
 MC-324
22. Installing the RU Software
When the HDD of the CL is replaced or initialized, it is necessary to install the RU
software.
The procedures for installing the RU software are described below.
u NOTE u
If the procedures described in "8. Installation Procedures" of the Installation volume
have merely been performed, the touch panel calibration data does not exist. Thus,
error code "13032" is logged whenever the machine is booted.
Accordingly, be sure to perform the procedures described in this section.

1. Install the RU software.

{IN:8._Installing the RU Software}

2. Adjust the touch positions of the touch panel.

{MC:4.8_Touch Panel Assembly_n Check/Adjustment Procedures}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-324
 MC-325
BLANK PAGE

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MC-325
 Control Sheet
Issue date Revision Pages affected
number Reason

08.25.2003 01 New release (FM4098) All pages

CR-IR 363 Service Manual

Maintenance Utility (MU)

011-202-01 CR-IR 363 Service Manual

08.25.2003 FM4098
 MU-1
1. Overview of RU Service Utility
The RU Service Utility consists of User Utility, Machine Maintenance, RU PC-TOOL,
and MUTL.
User Utility provides a maintenance tool used by the end user as well, while Machine
Maintenance, RU PC-TOOL, and MUTL offer maintenance tools used exclusively by
service engineers.
User Utility and Machine Maintenance are operated on the LCD panel of the RU
machine, while RU PC-TOOL and MUTL are operated on the CL.

1.1 Tree of RU Service Utility

The architecture of the RU Service Utility is shown in the tree diagram below.

n Tree Diagram
RU Service Utility
{MU:2._User Utility}

{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}

{MU:4._Functions of RU PC-TOOL}

{MU:5._MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions}

u INSTRUCTION u
The menus of the MUTL for "For Design" should never be used for routine servicing
procedures. In the Maintenance Utility volume, their functions and procedures are not
described.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-1
 MU-2
2. User Utility n Overview of Functions
The overview of the User Utility functions is presented below.
The User Utility provides a maintenance tool used by both the end user and service
engineer. This chapter describes functions and operating procedures for "Master CL l Master CL Setting
Setting", which is important for servicing procedures. {MU:2.3_Master CL Setting}

2.1 Overview of User Utility l Scanner Cleaning

The architecture of the User Utility is shown in the tree diagram below. The light-collecting mirror is rotated to clean the light-collecting face of the light-
collecting guide and perform its home-positioning.
n Tree Diagram l Alarm Sound
Used to set how to stop the alarm sound and the volume of the sound.
User Utility l Key Touch Sound
{MU:2.3_Master CL Setting} Used to set whether to enable or disable the sound when the LCD panel is touched.
Also used to set the volume of the key touch sound.
Scanner Cleaning*
Alarm Sound*
l Backlight OFF Timer
Used to set the time until the backlight is automatically turned OFF when the LCD
Key Touch Sound* panel is idle.
See the Instruction Manual.
Backlight OFF Timer* l Sleep Timer
Sleep Timer* Used to set the time until the RU automatically enters the sleep mode when the RU is
idle.
Equipment Information*
l Equipment Information
For more detail on those marked by *, see the Instruction Manual. "Equipment description", "No. of IP reading processing", "No. of IP conveyance",
"Total time of laser ON", and "Total time of erasure lamp ON", and "Date of
installation" are displayed.
For "Date of installation", the date in the HISTORY LOG file is displayed; thus, if the
information is updated by EDIT HISTORY, the resulting updated date is "Date of
installation".

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-2
 MU-3
2.2 Starting and Exiting the User Utility 2.3 Master CL Setting
The procedures for starting and exiting the User Utility are described below. During installation or from the master CL's that have been registered by RU PC-
TOOL, set the CL to be used as a master CL.
2.2.1 Starting the User Utility
n Function
CAUTION Register IP addresses and CL names for CL's used as a master CL. Up to eight CL's
When starting the User Utility, make sure that all the processing, such as may be registered. Of them, one CL may be set a default master CL
reading, has been completed and the machine is in READY state.
CAUTION
Even when the master CL is changed, the IP address of the FTP server that is
1. Touch the [Utility] button.
set in the RU remains unchanged. Information to be stored in the FTP server,
such as error logs, is written into the FTP server of the IP address that is set in
the RU.

n Procedures: Example where the master CL is set to "Fujifilm

2.2.2 Exiting the User Utility Internal Medicine"

1. Touch the [Return] button. 1. Start the User Utility.

{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Touch the "Set up the Master CL" on the [1/2] tag.

3. Touch the icon of the CL to be set as the master CL, and touch the
[OK] button twice.

REFERENCE
Upon touching the [OK] button twice, the setting of the master CL becomes
effective.

4. Exit the User Utility.

{MU:2.2.2_Exiting the User Utility}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-3
 MU-4
3. Machine Maintenance 3.1 Tree of Machine Maintenance
It offers a maintenance tool used exclusively by the service engineer. n Tree Diagram of Machine Maintenance
Setting of RU's IP address and checking of network connection from the RU side,
among others, are operated on the LCD panel of the RU. Machine Maintenance
Setup items of the Machine Maintenance cannot be set from the CL. {MU:3.3.1_RU IP Address}

n Screen of Machine Maintenance {MU:3.3.2_FTP Server}

{MU:3.3.3_Default Gateway}

{MU:3.3.4_SubnetMask}

{MU:3.3.5_Secure Host}

{MU:3.3.6_Secure Net}

{MU:3.3.7_Network Check}

{MU:3.3.8_Loop back Test}

{MU:3.3.9_Adjust Touch Point}

REFERENCE {MU:3.3.10_Touch Point Check}

The Machine Maintenance consists of two screens. To toggle between them, touch {MU:3.3.11_HV ON/OFF}
or .

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-4
 MU-5
3.2 Starting and Exiting the Machine 2. When the MODEL name appears, sequentially touch the upper left and
upper right corners of the LCD panel.
Maintenance
There are two types of methods for the Machine Maintenance: during initialization and
in READY state.
REFERENCE
The RU will not start (become READY) unless the CL is connected to it. However,
even when the CL is not connected, the Machine Maintenance may be started to set
the IP address of the RU, among others.

3.2.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance during

Initialization
1. Power ON the RU.

u INSTRUCTION u
If the Machine Maintenance does not start, turn OFF the power of the RU and then
repeat steps 1 and 2 all over again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-5
 MU-6
3.2.2 Starting the Machine Maintenance in READY State 3.2.3 Exiting the Machine Maintenance
1. Sequentially touch the upper left and upper right corners of the LCD 1. Touch the [Return] button.
panel within three (3) seconds after touching the Utility button.

2. Check the following points.

l The RU normally enters the READY state.

u INSTRUCTION u
If the Machine Maintenance will not start, touch the [Return] button to exit the
User Utility, and repeat the above step all over again.

l The results of image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity.

{MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-6
 MU-7
3.2.4 Starting the Machine Maintenance when Error
Occurred
1. Sequentially touch the upper left and upper right corners of the LCD
panel where "System Down" is displayed.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-7
 MU-8
3.3 Details of Machine Maintenance 3. Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be
modified, and touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits.
The Machine Maintenance offers a maintenance tool used by the service engineer for
servicing.
Its items are operated on the LCD panel of the RU.

3.3.1 RU IP Address
Used to set the IP address of the RU.

n Function
Set the IP address of the RU into the flash memory on the IMG17A/B board of the RU.
REFERENCES
REFERENCES
- Upon touching the [OK] button, the setting that has been made becomes effective.
- By factory default for the IMG17A/B board, the IP address of the RU is set to - To modify the setup value, delete digits from the right-most digit, one by one,
"172.016.001.010". and enter new digits.
- To set the IP address of the RU to "172.16.1.11", enter all the digits in the form
of "172.016.001.011".
n Procedures: Example where the IP address of the RU is set to
"172.016.001.011" 4. Touch the [OK] button.
1. Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

2. Touch the [RU IP Address] button.

5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-8
 MU-9
3.3.2 FTP Server 3. Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be
Used to set the IP address of the FTP server. modified, and touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits.

n Function
Set the IP address of the FTP server that contains HISTORY.LOG, ERROR.LOG,
and configuration information, among others, into the flash memory on the IMG17A/B
board of the RU.
REFERENCES
- Upon touching the [OK] button, the setting that has been made becomes effective.
- By factory default for the IMG17A/B board, the IP address of the FTP server is set to
"172.016.001.020".
REFERENCES
n Procedures: Example where the IP address of the FTP server is - The Machine Maintenance is not capable of changing inputtable items. To
set to "172.016.001.021" modify a value, use the [BS] key to delete digits from the right-most digit and
then enter a new value.
1. Start the Machine Maintenance. - To enter the IP address, enter all the digits in the form of "172.016.001.021",
for example, instead of "172.16.1.21".
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

2. Touch the [FTP Server] button. 4. Touch the [OK] button.

5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.

{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-9
 MU-10
3.3.3 Default Gateway 3. Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be
Used to set the IP address of the gateway when network connection is established via modified, and touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits.
the gateway.

n Function
When network connection is established via a gateway, the IP address of that
gateway is set into the flash memory on the IMG17A/B board of the RU.
REFERENCES
- Upon touching the [OK] button, the setting that has been made becomes effective.
- By factory default for the IMG17A/B board, the IP address of the gateway is set to
"000.000.000.000".
- If the gateway is not used, its IP address should be set to "000.000.000.000". REFERENCES
- The Machine Maintenance is not capable of changing inputtable items. To
n Procedures: Example where the IP address of the gateway is set modify a value, use the [BS] key to delete digits from the right-most digit and
to "172.016.001.021" then enter a new value.
- To enter the IP address, enter all the digits in the form of "172.016.250.001",
1. Start the Machine Maintenance. for example, instead of "172.16.250.1".
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
4. Touch the [OK] button.
2. Touch the [Default Gateway] button.

5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.

{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-10
 MU-11
3.3.4 Subnet Mask 3. Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be
Used to set the mask address of the subnet. modified, and touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits.

n Function
Set the mask address of the subnet into the flash memory on the IMG17A/B board of
the RU.
REFERENCES
- Upon touching the [OK] button, the setting that has been made becomes effective.
- By factory default for the IMG17A/B board, the subnet mask address is set to
"255.255.000.000".
- If the subnet mask is not used, its address should be set to "255.255.000.000".
REFERENCES
n Procedures: Example where the subnet mask address is set to - The Machine Maintenance is not capable of changing inputtable items. To
"172.128.000.000" modify a value, use the [BS] key to delete digits from the right-most digit and
then enter a new value.
1. Start the Machine Maintenance. - To enter the IP address, enter all the digits in the form of "172.128.000.000",
for example, instead of "172.128.0.0".
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

2. Touch the [Subnet Mask] button. 4. Touch the [OK] button.

5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.

{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-11
 MU-12
3.3.5 Secure Host 4. Touch the [OK] button.
Used to set the IP address when you want to restrict the IP address that can be
connected to the RU via telnet.
If it is set to 0.0.0.0, connection can be established regardless of the IP address.

n Function
By restricting the IP address, connection can be established with the RU via telnet 5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.
only from a specific PC; thus, a certain level of security can be achieved. {MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
By default, it is set to 0.0.0.0.

n Procedures: Example where the address of Secure Host is set to

"172.16.1.100"
1. Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

2. Touch the [Secure Host] button.

3. Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be

modified, and touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits.

REFERENCES
- The Machine Maintenance is not capable of changing inputtable items. To
modify a value, use the [BS] key to delete digits from the right-most digit and
then enter a new value.
- To enter the IP address, enter all the digits in the form of "172.128.000.000",
for example, instead of "172.128.0.0".

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-12
 MU-13
3.3.6 Secure Net 4. Touch the [OK] button.
Used to set the network address when you want to restrict the network address that
can be connected to the RU via telnet.
If it is set to 0.0.0.0, connection can be established from any network.

n Function
By restricting the network address, connection cannot be established with the RU via 5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.
telnet beyond the scope of the network address; thus, a certain level of security can {MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
be achieved.
If it is set to "172.16.0.0", connection can be established with the RU via telnet from IP
addresses 172.16.0.0 through 172.16.255.254.

n Procedures: Example where the address of Secure Host is set to

"172.16.000.000"
1. Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

2. Touch the [Secure Net] button.

3. Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be

modified, and touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits.

REFERENCES
- The Machine Maintenance is not capable of changing inputtable items. To
modify a value, use the [BS] key to delete digits from the right-most digit and
then enter a new value.
- To enter the IP address, enter all the digits in the form of "172.16.000.000", for
example, instead of "172.16.0.0".

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-13
 MU-14
3.3.7 Network Check
Used to check, from the RU, the network connection with the FTP server and
gateway.

n Function
Issue PING command from the RU to the PC that is used as the FTP server and to
the gateway to check the network connection.

n Procedures: Example where the settings are such that the FTP
server is connected and the gateway is not used
1. Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

2. Touch the [Network Check] button.

3. Touch the [Check] button.

u INSTRUCTION u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, remedy the error with reference to the
Troubleshooting Volume.
{Troubleshooting}

4. Exit the Machine Maintenance.

{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-14
 MU-15
3.3.8 Loop back Test 4. Touch the [Check] button.
Used to check the network connection, in a hardware manner, by use of the loopback The test result is displayed.
cable (jig: 898Y0981).

n Function
Check the status of network connection, up to the hub, in a hardware manner.

n Procedures u INSTRUCTION u
1. Start the Machine Maintenance. In the case of "Error " indication, remedy the error with reference to the
Troubleshooting Volume.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
{Troubleshooting}
2. Touch the [Loop back Test] button.
5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}
u INSTRUCTION u
When this function has been used, be sure to reset the machine.

3. Connect the jig (898Y0981) to the connector.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-15
 MU-16
3.3.9 Adjust Touch Point
Used to adjust the touch position of the touch panel.

n Function
Adjust the touch position of the touch panel.

n Procedures: Example where the touch position of the touch

panel is adjusted
1. Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

2. Touch the [Adjust Touch Point] button.

3. Touch the [Adjust] button.

4. Touch the four [x] positions displayed on the LCD.

→ The main screen of the Machine Maintenance comes back in several seconds.
5. Execute "Touch Point Check".
{MU:3.3.10_Touch Point Check}

6. Exit the Machine Maintenance.

{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-16
 MU-17
3.3.10 Touch Point Check
Used to check the touch position of the touch panel.

n Function
Check the touch position of the touch panel.

n Procedures: Example where the touch position of the touch

panel is checked
1. Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

2. Touch the [Touch Point Check] button.

3. Touch some of the [x] positions displayed on the LCD.

Make sure that "x" marks appear at the positions touched.

If the "x" mark is misaligned from the touched position, execute "Adjust Touch Point"
again.
{MU:3.3.9_Adjust Touch Point}

4. Touch the [Return] button.

5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.

{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-17
 MU-18
3.3.11 HV ON/OFF

n Function
Turn ON or OFF the HV switch (software switch).
REFERENCE
If the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B is set to OFF, the HV switch
(software switch) cannot be set to ON (although its button is selectable).

n Procedures: Example where the HV switch (software switch) is

turned OFF
1. Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

2. Touch the [HV ON/OFF] button.

3. Touch the [OFF] button.

4. Touch the [OK] button.

5. Exit the Machine Maintenance.

{MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-18
 MU-19
4. Functions of RU PC-TOOL 4.1 Tree of RU PC-TOOL
RU PC-TOOL offers a maintenance tool designed exclusively for the service engineer. RU PC-TOOL
Operations, such as installing the RU software and checking connection from the CL
EACH RU SETTING
to RU, are performed on the CL connected to the RU via the network.
CONNECTION TEST
n Main Screen of RU PC-TOOL
{MU:4.3.1_RU NAME/RU IP
ADDR}
{MU:4.3.9_INSTALL}
{MU:4.3.2_LIST OF EXISTING
RU}
{MU:4.3.10_VERSION UP}
{MU:4.3.3_NEW}
{MU:4.3.11_EDIT HISTORY}
{MU:4.3.4_DELETE }
{MU:4.3.12_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
{MU:4.3.5_MUTL}
{MU:4.3.13_EDIT CL NAME}
{MU:4.3.6_PING}
{MU:4.3.14_BACKUP}
{MU:4.3.7_MON}
{MU:4.3.15_RESTORE}
{MU:4.3.8_FTP}
{MU:4.3.16_I/O TRACE EXPERT}

{MU:4.3.17_ERROR DB}

ALL RUs SETTING

{MU:4.3.18_UNINSTALL:ALL RUs}

{MU:4.3.19_VERSION UP:ALL RUs}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-19
 MU-20
4.2 Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL 4.2.2 Exiting RU PC-TOOL
1. Click on located in the upper right corner of the Main Screen of RU
4.2.1 Starting RU PC-TOOL PC-TOOL.
1. Power ON the RU and CL.
2. Press the [Windows] key to open the Start menu of Windows.

3. Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows. 2. Power OFF the RU.
When the dialog opens, type ["C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\
RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe"] and click on the [OK] button.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-20
 MU-21
4.3 Details of RU PC-TOOL 4.3.2 LIST OF EXISTING RU

4.3.1 RU NAME/RU IP ADDR

n Function
Display the list of RU's that have their folders in the FTP server.
n Function Note that if nothing is displayed in the "RU TYPE" field, it means that its
corresponding RU has not been installed normally.
Display the RU name for the RU selected in "LIST OF EXISTING RU" and the IP
address of the RU. u INSTRUCTION u
To register a RU in "LIST OF EXISTING RU", enter the RU name and IP address of For the RU where nothing is displayed in its "RU TYPE", uninstall it and then install it
the RU. all over again.

n Procedures: Example where settings are made to set the RU

name as "ru7" and IP address as "172.16.1.11"
1. Click on the [NEW] button.

REFERENCE
"VERSION" may appear in red.
This indicates that the RU software has not been version updated.
Perform a version update as needed.
2. Enter the RU name and IP address of the RU.

REFERENCE

Pressing the Tab key causes the input cursor to move to the next item.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-21
 MU-22
4.3.3 NEW 4.3.5 MUTL
Used to start MUTL of the RU.
n Function
Cancel the selected state of "LIST OF EXISTING RU" and clear the values for "RU n Function
NAME" and "RU IP ADDR" to enable them to be registered anew. Start MUTL for the RU selected in "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
MUTL offers functions for diagnosing and adjusting the RU, such as adjustments of
4.3.4 DELETE the reading start position and reading width, as well as board and mechanical checks.

n Function n Procedures: Example where MUTL is started on the RU with

For the RU selected in "LIST OF EXISTING RU", delete its folder in the FTP server,
"ru7" and "172.16.1.11"
and delete it from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU.

2. Click on the [MUTL] button.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-22
 MU-23
4.3.6 PING 3. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window.
Used to execute the "PING" command from the CL to the RU to check whether the
network is connected.

n Function
Execute PING to the device having the IP address displayed in "RU IP ADDR".
REFERENCES
- If a network device of the IP address specified is found over the network to which
the CL is connected, the result of execution is OK.
- Machine Maintenance provides the capability of executing PING from the RU to the
FTP server and gateway. REFERENCE
"Lost = (0% loss)" means that there is no problem as a result of executing the
n Procedures: Example where PING is executed to the RU with PING command. If other than "(0% loss)", it is a sign that there was some
problem.
"ru7" and "172.16.1.110"
1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU. l [GOOD indication]
If the following message appears, the result is normal.
| Ping statistics for 172.16.1.110: |
| Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |

l [NO GOOD indication]

Other than above (the IP address is the IP address of the RU selected).

2. Click on the [PING] button. u NOTE u

In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{Troubleshooting}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-23
 MU-24
4.3.7 MON l I/O name
Used to display the status when the sensor of the RU changes its status. The I/O name is displayed.
Symbol Name
n Function SA1, 7, 13, 19 Cassette ejection sensor
Display the status when the I/O of the RU changes its status. SA2, 8, 14, 20 Cassette IN sensor
In addition to "OPEN" and "CLOSE", the barcode, if read, is also displayed. SA3, 9, 15, 21 Cassette hold sensor
The status changes for the sensors, switches, and BCRs are displayed, although ON SA4, 10, 16, 22 Suction cup HP sensor
or OFF is not displayed for the motors. SA5, 11, 17, 23 Suction sensor
SA6, 12, 18, 24 Inch/metric sensor
SB1, 2, 3, 4 IP feed/load sensor (cassette side)
SB5 Pre-BCR IP sensor
SB6 Pre-convergence IP sensor
SB7 Path changeover HP sensor
SB8, SB9, SB10 Path changeover shelf sensor
SB11 Convergence path changeover sensor
SC1 Side-positioning mechanism HP sensor
SC2 Grip release HP sensor
SC3 Side-positioning IP sensor
SC4 Cleaning guide HP sensor
SZ1 IP leading-edge sensor
SZ2 Driving-side grip release HP sensor
SZ3 Driven-side grip release HP sensor
SZ4 Dust-removal HP sensor
SZ5 IP stopper HP sensor
SD1 Grip release HP sensor
SD2 Post-reading conveyance IP sensor
SE1 Post-reading conveyance standby IP sensor
SE2 Switchback standby IP sensor
SE4 Erasure side-positioning mechanism HP sensor
SE5 Grip release HP sensor
SG1 Side-positioning entrance IP sensor
SG2 14"x14" IP size sensor
LDSN1, LDSN2, LDSN3,
Unlit sensor
LDSN4, LDSN5
24TSW Safety thermostat (lamp)
FOPN1 INV fuse 1
FOPN2 INV fuse 2
BCR0 Conveyance path barcode
BCRA1, 2, 3, 4 Barcode reader
BCR1, BCR2, BCR3, BCR4 Barcode per shelf

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-24
 MU-25
l Status n Procedures
Either of OPEN, CLOSE, ON, or OFF is displayed.
1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU.
l Other information
Barcode information is displayed when the barcode is read.

l Status changed time

The time when the I/O status has changed is displayed.

n Operation of Monitor Window

The text displayed on the Monitor window is selectable by dragging the mouse. 2. Click on the [MON] button.
The text selected may be copied, cut, pasted, or deleted.
If the display is too crowded to see well, you may delete unnecessary portions of text.

3. Click on the [START] button.

→ When the RU is operated under this condition, display items are added whenever
I/O has changed.
REFERENCE
When the power of the RU is turned OFF, the monitor function is disabled.
However, the items displayed within the Monitor window are left unchanged.
To enable the monitor function, close the Monitor window and open it again, and
click on the [START] button.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-25
 MU-26
4.3.8 FTP
Used to access the FTP server from the CL and RU, respectively, to verify that the
FTP server is operating.

n Function
On the CL, execute the command to access the FTP server to check whether the
service of the FTP server is running.
Additionally, execute the RU software in a remote fashion to access the FTP server
from the RU and check whether the service of the FTP server is running.

n Procedures: Example where the FTP is checked for the RU with

"ru10" and "172.16.1.10"
1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU to check the FTP server,
and click on the [FTP] button.

l [GOOD indication]
The screen display where the FTP server is accessed on the CL is presented
below.

The screen display where the FTP server is accessed from the RU is presented
below.

l [NO GOOD indication]

Other than above.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-26
 MU-27
4.3.9 INSTALL u NOTES u
Used to install the RU software to the RU selected from "LIST OF EXISTING RU" or - During install, do not perform any operation, other than install, with the RU. If any
to the RU with "RU NAME" and "RU IP ADDR" entered. other operation is performed during install, the contents of the flash ROM will be
Also used to create, in the FTP server, a folder for the RU to be installed. corrupted, so that the RU will no longer boot up.
- When install is performed for the RU where its board(s) has been replaced, check to
n Function see whether the settings on the CPU board are correct. When install is performed,
RU PC-TOOL reads the DIP SW settings on the CPU board to determine the device
l Recognize the device type to be installed type of the RU. If the settings are incorrect, improper software will be installed,
resulting in failure to boot.
In order to enable selection of software corresponding to the device type during
install, the RU with the IP address of "RU IP ADDR" is accessed, before starting the
install procedure, to recognize the device type of the RU. n Procedures
RU PC-TOOL reads the DIP SW setting on the CPU board of the RU accessed to
identify its device type. For more detail on the procedures, see the Installation volume.
{IN:8_Installing RU Software}
l Select the software version
After recognizing the device type to be installed, a list of installable ones of the
software packages contained in the CD-ROM is displayed.

l Select software display language

The language displayed on the LCD panel of the RU may be set to either "JAPAN" or
"ENGLISH".

l Select "BRAND TYPE"

Because "BRAND TYPE" of the machine differs depending upon its destination,
"BRAND TYPE" to be displayed on the LCD panel of the RU is selected by choosing
the destination during install.

l Set configuration information

Some of the RU configuration information is set, such as "HOST IP ADDRESS" and
identification code (one alphabetic character, from A through Z, is displayed on output
film).

l Register the master CL

The CL (master CL) that controls the RU is written into the flash ROM on the IMG
board of the RU.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-27
 MU-28
4.3.10 VERSION UP u NOTES u
Used to execute RU software version updates to the RU selected in "LIST OF - During version update, do not perform any operation, other than version update,
EXISTING RU". with the RU. If any other operation is performed during version update, the contents
of the flash ROM will be corrupted, so that the RU will no longer boot up.
n Function - When version update is performed for the RU where its board(s) has been replaced,
check to see whether the settings on the CPU board are correct. When version
l Recognize the device type to be version updated update is performed, RU PC-TOOL reads the DIP SW settings on the CPU board to
In order to enable selection of software corresponding to the device type during determine the device type of the RU. If the settings are incorrect, improper software
version update, the RU with the IP address of "RU IP ADDR" is accessed, before will be version updated, resulting in failure to boot.
starting the version update procedure, to recognize the device type of the RU.
RU PC-TOOL reads the DIP SW setting on the CPU board of the RU accessed to REFERENCE
identify its device type. "VERSION" may appear in red.
l Select the software version This indicates that the RU software has not been version updated.
Perform a version update as needed.
After recognizing the device type to be version updated, a list of version-updatable
ones of the software packages contained in the CD-ROM is displayed.

n Procedures
For more detail on the procedures, see the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
Parts volume.
{MC:15._Updating Software Versions}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-28
 MU-29
4.3.11 EDIT HISTORY n Detail on TOTAL PROCESSING COUNTER
Used to view the HISTORY information of the RU and clear its value.
Information, such as the number of IPs processed by the RU and lighting time of the
erasure lamp, is displayed.
When units are replaced, their information may be reset.

n Function
The following three types of information are displayed, and they may be edited.

l PROCESSING COUNTER
The number of IPs processed by the RU, according to the IP size.
Image reading, secondary erasure, and primary erasure are all subject to counting.

l LASER
Lighting time and lighting count for the laser of the scanner unit.
Image reading, secondary erasure, and primary erasure, as well as lighting activated
in MUTL, are subject to counting.

l ERASURE LAMP
Lighting time and lighting count for the erasure lamp.
Image reading, secondary erasure, and primary erasure, as well as lighting activated
in MUTL, are subject to counting.
Lighting time and lighting count for preheating are also subject to counting.
u NOTES u
- Information marked by * in the illustration is reflected in the Equipment Information
that can be checked via the User Utility of the RU.
- When the data is updated by EDIT HISTORY and then the "SET" or "RESET" button
is clicked, it is reflected in the Equipment Information of the RU.
The LCD panel display is updated at the time when the User Utility screen is l “RESET”
switched to another or when the RU power is turned OFF and back ON.
Each item in "PROCESSING COUNTER" is cleared.

l “SINCE”
When the "RESET" button is clicked, the system date is entered.
A specific date may be entered manually.

l “TOTAL PROCESSING COUNTER”

The number of image reading, secondary erasure, and primary erasure executed
is counted according to the IP size, and the resulting total is displayed in "ALL IP
SIZES".

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-29
 MU-30
n Detail on LASER n Detail on ERASURE LAMP

l “RESET”
Each item in "LASER" is cleared.

l “SINCE”
When the "RESET" button is clicked, the system date is entered.
A specific date may be entered manually.
l “RESET”
l “TOTAL TIME FOR THE LASER ON”
Each item in "ERASURE LAMP" is cleared.
Lighting time for the erasure lamp.
l “SINCE”
l “TOTAL COUNT FOR THE LASER ON”
When the "RESET" button is clicked, the system date is entered.
Lighting count for the erasure lamp. A specific date may be entered manually.

l “TOTAL TIME FOR THE ERASURE LAMP LIGHTING”

Lighting time for the erasure lamp.

l “TOTAL COUNT FOR THE ERASURE LAMP LIGHTING”

Lighting count for the erasure lamp.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-30
 MU-31
4.3.12 EDIT CONFIGURATION n Function
Used to edit the configuration information for the RU.
However, the configuration information (such as IP address of the RU) that is set in l Identification code of the RU
Machine Maintenance cannot be set with EDIT CONFIGURATION. When multiple units of the RU are used, an identification code (one alphanumeric
Some of the RU configuration information is written into the FTP server, as well as into digit) is set to allow the user to confirm, on the film, the RU that has performed image
the flash ROM of the RU. reading.

n EDIT CONFIGURATION Screen l Erasure mode

An erasure mode that is selectable by the erasure mode SW of the RU is set.
u NOTE u
Example) When “ERASE1, ERASE2” is set:
While the flash ROM of the RU is being updated, the panel of the RU lights up.
By selecting the erasure mode SW, either secondary erasure or primary
During that time, do not power OFF the RU.
erasure may be selected.
If it is powered OFF, the contents of the flash ROM will be corrupted, so that the RU
will no longer boot up. l Erasure mode unsetting time
Set the time, in seconds, from when the erasure mode setting is changed to when it
reverts back to the "reading" mode.
When "0" is set, it remains changed.

l Alarm setting for cassette setting

A setting is made to determine whether or not to sound an alarm when a cassette is
set under condition where the CL screen does not allow cassette processing.
- “ON” (default): An alarm is sounded.
- “OFF”: An alarm is not sounded.

l Alarm setting for overexposed IP

- LOG&MESSAGE: Written into the log file with an error message displayed.
- LOG ONLY: Only written into the log file.
- NONE: Nothing is done.

l Barcode reader setting (CR-IR362 only)

It is set to determine whether the both-side cassette identification barcode reader is
used or not.
- "YES": The barcode reader is used.
- "NO" (default): The barcode reader is not used.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-31
 MU-32
4.3.13 EDIT CL NAME 3. Enter "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME", and click on the [SET] button.
Used to edit the list of master CL's displayed on the "Master CL Setting" screen of
User Utility.

n Function
Edit the list of master CL's for the RU. Up to eight master CL's may be registered;
when several are registered, the default master CL may be set.
By use of User Utility of the RU, the master CL may be selected from the CL's
registered.
The setting that has been made becomes effective after the RU is rebooted.

n Procedures: Example where the IP address and CL name that u INSTRUCTION u

have been set by default are changed. Enter IP ADDRESS of the CL to be connected with the RU.

1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the list of master REFERENCE
CL's is to be changed, and click on the [EDIT CL NAME] button.
For "CL NAME", any name (20 bytes: 20 alphanumeric characters, or 10 Kanji
characters) may be entered.

4. Click on the [SET] button.

2. Click on the [MODIFY] button.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-32
 MU-33
n Procedures: Example where the master CL is added 4. Click on the button.

1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the list of master

CL's is to be changed, and click on the [EDIT CL NAME] button.

5. Click on the left icon for the CL to be set as the default master CL.
2. Click on the [NEW] button.
6. Click on the [SET] button.

3. Enter "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME", and click on the [SET] button.

u INSTRUCTION u
Enter IP ADDRESS of the CL to be connected with the RU.

REFERENCE
For "CL NAME", any name (20 bytes: 20 alphanumeric characters, or 10 Kanji
characters) may be entered.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-33
 MU-34
4.3.14 BACKUP n Procedures for BACKUP
This function copies the configuration information and error log data from the RU to An example is presented below where ERROR LOG of ru7 is backed up.
the FTP server, and from the FTP server to a floppy diskette (FD).
CAUTION
n Backup Items
Never use the machine-specific data floppy diskette for backup. If that floppy
l “ERROR LOG” diskette is used, the factory default machine-specific data is lost.
Log data is backed up.
u NOTE u
l “CONFIGURATION”
When “SCN ALL DATA”, “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA”, or “SCN OPTICAL
Configuration data is backed up. DATA” is backed up, the flash ROM of the RU is accessed, so that the RU should not
be powered OFF during that time.
l “TRACE LOG”
Trace log data (design analysis information) is backed up.
1. From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU to be backed up.
l “HISTORY LOG”
History data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time) is backed up.

l “SCN ALL DATA”

All scanner data is backed up.

l “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA”

Of the scanner data, light-collecting data is backed up. 2. Click on the [FTP] button.
l “SCN OPTICAL DATA”
Of the scanner data, optical data is backed up.

On the DOS prompt window displayed, check “RU NAME”,

“HISTORY.LOG”, and“RESULT: OK”.
{MU:4.3.8_FTP}

3. From the BACKUP pull-down menu, select an item to be backed up.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-34
 MU-35
4. Click on the [EXECUTE] button. 4.3.15 RESTORE
→ A dialog box appears to prompt you to insert a formatted floppy diskette. This function installs the configuration information and machine-specific data from
the floppy diskette (FD) into the RU-specific data area of the FTP server and copies it
from the FTP server to the flash ROM of the RU.
REFERENCE
The contents copied into the flash ROM become effective when the RU is reset.

n Restore Items
5. Put a formatted floppy diskette into the CL, and click on the [OK]
button.
l “CONFIGURATION”
Configuration data is restored.

l “HISTORY LOG”
History data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time) is restored.
→ The backup starts, and when it is completed, the following dialog box appears.
l “SCN ALL DATA”
6. Click on the [OK] button, and take out the floppy diskette.
All scanner data is restored.

l “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA”

Of the scanner data, light-collecting data is restored.

l “SCN OPTICAL DATA”

n Errors That May Occur during BACKUP and Their Probable
Of the scanner data, optical data is restored.
Causes
l RU is not connected
If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established
with
the RU, the following error message appears.
In that case, check the network connection, and then power ON the RU.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-35
 MU-36
n Procedures for RESTORE n Errors That May Occur during RESTORE and Their Probable
Causes
u NOTE u
When “SCN ALL DATA”, “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA”, or “SCN OPTICAL l RU is not connected
DATA” is restored, the flash ROM of the RU is accessed, so that the RU should not be If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established
powered OFF during that time. with the RU, the following error message appears.
If power is turned OFF, the contents of the flash ROM of the RU will be corrupted, so In that case, check the network connection, and then power ON the RU.
that the RU will no longer boot up.

1. From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU to be restored.

2. From the RESTORE pull-down menu, select an item to be restored.

3. Click on the [EXECUTE] button.

→ A dialog box appears to prompt you to insert the floppy diskette that contains the
data to be resorted.
4. Put into the CL the floppy diskette used for backup, and click on the
[OK] button.
→ The restore starts, and when it is completed, the following dialog box appears.
5. Click on the [OK] button, and take out the floppy diskette.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-36
 MU-37
4.3.16 I/O TRACE EXPERT l 4 I/O name display text box
This function displays the I/O trace data in the form of phase chart or timing chart. The I/O name is displayed.
Note, however, that only I/O trace data may be displayed but communication-related
trace data cannot be displayed. l 5 Chart display area
The timing chart is displayed. With the scroll bar available, the display range may be
n Timing Chart Screen moved by manipulating the scroll bar.

l 6 "Measure Point (Unit: msec)" area

By placing the mouse pointer in the chart area and pressing the left or right button of
the mouse, the following values are displayed in the A, B, and A-B fields.
- A: Time elapsed from power ON to the position pointed by the left mouse button.
- B: Time elapsed from power ON to the position pointed by the right mouse button.
- A-B: Time difference between positions A and B.
When the "CLEAR" button is clicked, the values in the A, B, and A-B fields are
cleared.

l 1 "FILE OPEN" button

The file that has been set in the "Pass" text box is displayed on the Timing Chart
screen.

l 2 "Pass" text box

The path of IOT.LOG to be displayed as the timing chart is entered.

l 3 "Scale" button
The display scale for the time base (horizontal axis) is changed.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-37
 MU-38
4.3.17 ERROR DB l 1 “SELECT” button
Used to check the error names and occurrence conditions by referring to the error log A error log file to be viewed is selected.
data of the RU. Memos may be appended to error messages, or detailed information
or analysis flows may be viewed. l 2 “FATAL button
Of the error log files, only FATAL errors are displayed.
n ERROR-DB Window
l 3 “WARNING” button
Of the error log files, only WARNING errors are displayed.

l 4 “BOTH” button
Both “FATAL and “WARNING” errors windows are displayed.

l 5 “CLEAR”
The error log of the FTP server is cleared.

l 6 “UPDATE”
The latest error log data is copied from the CPU17A board of the RU to the FTP
server of the CL.

l 7 Error message list box

The contents of the error log file selected are displayed.

l 8 “Error Code” text box

The error code selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed.

l 9 “Error Name” text box

The error name selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed.

u NOTE u
To view the most up-to-the-minute error log, it is necessary to click on the “UPDATE”
button and close the window once, and then open it again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-38
 MU-39
l 10 “Meaning” text box n Procedures: Example where the latest error log is displayed
The occurrence condition of the error message selected (highlighted) in the error
message list box is displayed. 1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU.

l 11 “Details Info.” Button

The detail information selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed.

l 12 “Analysis Flow” button

The analysis flow for the error message selected (highlighted) in the error message
list box is displayed.

l 13 “Memo.” text box 2. Click on the [ERROR DB] button.

A memo may be attached to the error message (highlighted) in the error message list
box.
Up to seven memos may be entered.

l 14 “Author” text box

The name of the person (author) who entered text in the “Memo.” text box is entered.

l 15 “SAVE” button 3. Click on the [UPDATE] button.

The contents of “Memo.” and “Author” are saved. To delete them, erase them by use
of the Delete key and press the “SAVE” button again.

4. Click on the button.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-39
 MU-40
5. Click on the [ERROR DB] button.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-40
 MU-41
4.3.18 UNINSTALL: ALL RUs 1. From “LIST OF EXISTING RU” of the RU PC-MUTL, select a desired
For the RU's registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select the device type of the RU.
RU's to perform collective uninstall, and delete the folders of the uninstalled RU's from
the FTP server.
When the folder is completely deleted, the uninstalled RU disappears from the "LIST
OF EXISTING RU" list box.
u NOTES u
- If the same device type exists, the software and configuration file for the RU of the
same type are deleted from the FTP server upon executing UNINSTALL. 2. Click on the [PING] button. Referring to the DOS prompt window
- Be sure to perform INSTALL after UNINSTALL is executed. displayed, verify that the result is 100% successful.
3. For the RU of the device type to be uninstalled, repeat steps 1 and 2.
n Uninstalling the RU software
When the RU software is uninstalled, the contents in the “C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\
4. Back up the following files for the RU to be uninstalled.
FCR” directory on the CL are deleted. - CONFIGURATION
- HISTORY LOG
- SCN ALL DATA
CAUTIONS
{MU:4.3.14_BACKUP}
- Before executing UNINSTALL, be sure to take note of the IP addresses (user
settings) of the RU, CL, and FTP server. 5. Click on the [UNINSTALL] button.
Once UNINSTALL is executed, all the user settings are lost.
- For the RU connected to the CL, back up the following files. Those files must
be restored after installation.
- CONFIGURATION
- HISTORY LOG
- SCN ALL DATA
For multiple RUs, it is necessary to identify which file belongs to which RU.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-41
 MU-42
6. Select the device type to be uninstalled, and click on the [OK] button.

→ Uninstall is performed.
8. Click on the [OK] button.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-42
 MU-43
4.3.19 VERSION UP: ALL RUs n Procedures for VERSION UP: ALL RUs
For the RU's registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select the device type of the REFERENCE
RU's to perform collective version update.
When version update is to be performed for several RU's, version update is performed
u NOTES u for one RU after another in order the connected RU's are registered in "LIST OF
- Do not power OFF the CL/RU while version update is being performed. If the power EXISTING RU".
is turned OFF while version updating, the machine will no longer boot up.
- When version update is to be performed for several RU's, version update of the
RU software is sequentially performed for the RU's connected. It takes about four
1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU" of RU PC-TOOL, select a RU.
minutes for one RU to be updated.
Do not power OFF the CL and RU until install has been completed for all the RU's.
After install has been completed, be sure to check the software version of the RU's
and verify that their version update has been done.
Example: When two RU's, ru2 and ru1, are registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU" in
order named, version update is performed for ru2 and ru1 in this order.
2. Click on the [PING] button.

→ Referring to the DOS prompt window displayed, verify that the result is 100%
successful.
3. For all the RU's connected to the CL, repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Click on the [VERSION UP] button.

→ A dialog box appears to prompt you to insert the CD-ROM.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-43
 MU-44
5. Put the Ver.up CD-ROM into the CL, and click on the [OK] button. 7. Click on the [OK] button.

→ A dialog box appears to confirm the type of the RU to be uninstalled and its → The version update of the RU software starts.
software version.
During that time, all the panel indicators on the first RU are lit, with an audible alarm
6. Select "RU TYPE" and "RU VERSION", and click on the [OK] button. generated.
After about four minutes have passed, the version update is completed for the first
RU, and then the version update for the next RU starts.
When the version update for all the RU's connected to the CL is completed, the
following dialog box appears.
8. Click on the [OK] button.

→ The PC-MUTL window appears back on screen.

→ A window appears to confirm the execution of version update.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-44
 MU-45
4.4 Configuration 4.4.2 CDPath
The RU software should normally be installed from its Install CD.
4.4.1 FTP SERV If a folder that completely copies the Install CD data resides in the hard disk, you may
install the RU software from that hard disk without using the Install CD by specifying
The FTP servers of multiple RU's may be administered collectively. its complete path of that folder.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- To copy the Install CD data, its entire data should be completely copied to a single
folder. If it is partially copied, install cannot be executed.
- "CDPath" setting should be made only when necessary. If "CDPath" is set, install
from the Install CD cannot be executed.

n Procedures for Setting "CDPath"

1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}

2. From the RU PC-TOOL menus, select [Configuration] - [CDPath].

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-45
 MU-46
3. Enter the complete path of the folder where the Install CD data has 6. Click on the [OK] button.
been completely copied. The complete path is displayed in the text box.

Once the complete path has been entered in the text box, proceed to step 7.
To enter the complete path in a GUI manner just like the Explorer, proceed to the 7. Click on the [SET] button.
next step.

4. Click on the [...] button.

5. Click on the folder where the Install CD data has been completely
copied, and leave that folder open.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-46
 MU-47
n Procedures for Canceling "CDPath"
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}

2. From the RU PC-TOOL menus, select [Configuration] - [CDPath].

3. Click on the [CLEAR] button.

The complete path in the text both is cleared.
4. Click on the [SET] button.
The "CDPath" setting is canceled.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-47
 MU-48
5. MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions
The MUTL, which offers a utility used by service engineers, is operated from the RU A1
PC-TOOL on the CL.
Conventional CI (Character Interface) has been changed to GUI (Graphical User {MU:5.3 [3]_Software Check}
Interface), thereby providing substantially improved usability.
CAUTION {MU:5.3 [3-1]_Backup Memory Clear (CPU Board)}
After the MUTL is used, be sure to turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU at {MU:5.3 [3-2]_Ver. Display (FLASH)}
the end. {MU:5.3 [3-3]_Ver. Display (FTP SERV)}
{MU:5.3 [3-4]_MAC Address Display}

5.1 Tree of MUTL {MU:5.3 [3-5]_VERSION UP}

MUTL {MU:5.3 [3-5-1]_Main CPU IPL Ver. Up}

{MU:5.3 [3-5-2]_Sub CPU IPL Ver. Up}
{MU:5.3 [1]_Conveyance Check} {MU:5.3 [3-5-3]_Sub CPU APPL Ver. Up}

{MU:5.3 [1-1]_Conveyance Setting}

{MU:5.3 [1-2]_Processing Mode Setting} {MU:5.3 [4]_Virtual Image Check}
{MU:5.3 [1-3]_Number of Conveyance Setting}
{MU:5.3 [4-1]_CORRECTION ST/HR}
{MU:5.3 [4-2]_Virtual Image Test}
{MU:5.3 [2]_Board Check}
{MU:5.3 [4-2-1]_IMG Board Pattern Output}
{MU:5.3 [2-1]_All Board} {MU:5.3 [4-2-2]_IMG Board Frame Memory Re-Output}
{MU:5.3 [2-2]_CPU Board} {MU:5.3 [4-2-3]_LED Virtual Read}
{MU:5.3 [2-3]_IMG Board} {MU:5.3 [4-2-4]_PMT Virtual Read}
{MU:5.3 [2-4]_SCN/SCT Board} {MU:5.3 [4-2-5]_SCN/SCT Board Virtual Read}
{MU:5.3 [2-5]_SNS/DRV Board}
{MU:5.3 [2-6]_INV Board}
{MU:5.3 [2-7]_CPU Board Setting Display}
A2
{MU:5.3 [2-8]_IP Sensor Check}

A1

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-48
 MU-49

A2 A4
{MU:5.3 [6]_Mechanical 1 Check}
{MU:5.3 [5]_Scanner Check}
{MU:5.3 [6-1]_IP Removal Unit}
{MU:5.3 [5-1]_Diagnostic}
{MU:5.3 [5-2]_Polygon Motor} {MU:5.3 [6-1-1]_Suction Cup Arm HP}
{MU:5.3 [5-3]_Laser} {MU:5.3[6-1-2]_IP Removal (F/L)}
{MU:5.3 [5-4]_HV Diagnostic} {MU:5.3 [6-1-3]_IP Removal Step Operation}
{MU:5.3 [5-5]_Format Adjustment} {MU:5.3 [6-1-4]_Clutch}
{MU:5.3 [6-1-5]_Pump}
{MU:5.3 [5-5-1]_Manual Adjustment (FREQ)} {MU:5.3 [6-1-6]_Valve}
{MU:5.3 5-5-2]_Manual Adjustment (Pixel)}
{MU:5.3 [6-1-7]_Solenoid}
{MU:5.3 [5-5-3]_Default Setting (FREQ)}
{MU:5.3 [6-1-8]_Electrical}
{MU:5.3 [5-5-4]_Default Setting (Pixel)}
{MU:5.3 [5-5-5]_Optic Setting (FREQ)}
{MU:5.3 [5-5-6]_Optic Setting (Pixel)} {MU:5.3 [6-2]_Feed/Load Unit}
{MU:5.3 [5-5-7]_IP Leading-Edge Adjustment (Sub-scanning)}
{MU:5.3 [6-2-1]_Feed Path Change Guide HP (MB3)}
{MU:5.3 [5-6]_Correction} {MU:5.3 [6-2-2]_Feed Path Change Guide}
{MU:5.3 [6-2-3]_Feed Path Change Diagnostic}
{MU:5.3 [5-6-1]_Shading/Sensitivity Correction}
{MU:5.3 [6-2-4]_Feed Conveyance (MB1/MB2/MC3)}
{MU:5.3 [5-6-2]_Shading Speed Correction}
{MU:5.3 [6-2-5]_Post-Erasure Conveyance (ME1/MB1/MB2)}
{MU:5.3 [5-6-3]_Sensitivity Correction}
{MU:5.3 [6-2-6]_Join Path Change Guide}
{MU:5.3 [5-6-4]_Special Sensitivity Adjustment}
{MU:5.3[5-6-5]_Sensitivity S-Value Correction} {MU:5.3 [6-3]_Side-Positioning Conveyor 1}
{MU:5.3 [5-6-6]_Trouble shooting}
{MU:5.3 [6-3-1]_Side-Positioning HP (MC1)}
{MU:5.3 [5-6-7]_HV ON/OFF}
{MU:5.3 [6-3-2]_Side-Positioning Step (MC1/MC2)}
A4
{MU:5.3 [6-3-3]_Side-Positioning Grip Movement (MC2)}
{MU:5.3 [6-3-4]_Side-Positioning Grip HP (MC2)}
{MU:5.3 [6-3-5]_Side-Positioning Grip Diagnostic (MC2)}
A5 B2 {MU:5.3 [6-3-6]_Side-Positioning (MC1/MC2)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-49
 MU-50

A5 B2 A6

{MU:5.3 [6-4]_Side-Positioning Conveyor 2}

{MU:5.3 [7]_Mechanical 2 Check}
{MU:5.3 [6-4-1]_Cleaning Guide HP (MC4)}
{MU:5.3 [7-1]_Post-Reading Conveyor}
{MU:5.3 [6-4-2]_Cleaning Guide Position Movement (MC4)}
{MU:5.3 [6-4-3]_Cleaning Guide Diagnostic} {MU:5.3 [7-1-1]_Grip Release HP (MD1)}
{MU:5.3 [6-4-4]_Side-Positioning (BCRC1)} {MU:5.3 [7-1-2]_Grip Position Movement (MD2)}
{MU:5.3 [7-1-3]_Post-Conveyance Grip Diagnostic}
{MU:5.3 [7-1-4]_Post-Conveyance (MD2/ME1)}
{MU:5.3 [6-5]_Sub Scanning 1}

{MU:5.3 [6-5-1]_Sub-Scanning Grip HP (MZ2)}

{MU:5. [7-2]_Erasure Conveyor 1}
{MU:5.3 [6-5-2]_Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic Step Operation (MZ2)}
{MU:5.3 [6-5-3]_Stopper HP} {MU:5.3 [7-2-3]_Erasure Side-positioning HP (ME2)}
{MU:5.3 [6-5-4]_Stopper Movement} {MU:5.3 [7-2-4]_Erasure Side-positioning (ME2/ME3)}
{MU:5.3 [6-5-5]_Stopper Diagnostic} {MU:5.3 [7-2-5]_Erasure Side-positioning Step (ME2/ME3)}
{MU:5.3 [6-5-6]_Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic (MZ2)} {MU:5.3 [7-2-6]_Erasure Grip HP (ME3)}

{MU:5.3[6-6]_Sub Scanning 2} {MU:5.3 [7-2-7]_Erasure Grip Diagnostic (ME3)}

{MU:5.3 [7-2-8]_Erasure Grip Movement (ME3)}
{MU:5.3 [6-6-1]_Dust Removal HP}
{MU:5.3 [6-6-2]_Dust Removal Operation}
{MU:5.3 [6-6-3]_Dust Removal Step Operation}
B3
{MU:5.3 [6-6-4]_Conveyance Motor Direction Selection}
{MU:5.3 [6-6-5]_Conveyance Motor Speed Selection}
{MU:5.3 [6-6-6]_Conveyance Motor Stop/Drive}

{MU:5.3 [6-7]_All Sensor LED ON}

A6

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-50
 MU-51

B3

{MU:5.3 [7-3]_Erasure Conveyor 2}

{MU:5.3 [7-3-1]_Path Change Guide (SOLF1)}

{MU:5.3 [7-3-2]_FANE2 (INV)}
{MU:5.3 [7-3-3]_FANE3(LAMP)}
{MU:5.3 [7-3-4]_Erasure Conveyor (ME1)}
{MU:5.3 [7-3-5]_LAMP (LAMP1 to LAMP5)}
{MU:5.3 [7-3-6]_Erasure Unit Thermal Sensor Display}

{MU:5.3 [7-4]_Control Unit}

{MU:5.3 [7-4-1]_FAN (G1 to G5)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-51
 MU-52
5.2 Starting and Exiting the MUTL 5.2.2 Exiting the MUTL
u NOTE u
5.2.1 Starting the MUTL Before exiting the MUTL, check to ensure that the operation that was performed in
MUTL has been completed.
CAUTION If the operation that was performed in MUTL is under way, the operation running on
Do not start multiple MUTL's for a single RU. the RU remains intact even when the MUTL is exited.
If multiple MUTL's are started, the RU software becomes out of control.
1. Click on in the upper right corner of the MUTL window.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}

2. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where "MUTL" is to be

started.

3. Click on the [MUTL] button.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-52
 MU-53
5.3 Details of MUTL [1-2] Processing Mode Setting

CAUTION l 1-ERASE: Primary Erasure

The processing mode "READ" is not functional with software version 1.1. It is IP reading is performed to detect the dose of the IP, and IP erasure is performed
according to the detected dose.
to be implemented with version 1.2 or later.
Because IP reading is intended to detect the dose, image output is not generated.

l 2-ERASE: Secondary Erasure

[1] Conveyance Check
Conveyance is performed on the same conveyance path as for IP reading, but image
reading is not done.
[1-1] Conveyance Setting This menu should be used when you only want to make mechanical checks on the IP
conveyance.
l AUTO MODE
The conveyance is repeated with the processing mode and number of IP conveyance
that have been set.
It is used for checking the conveyance.

l ROUTINE
The conveyance is performed with the processing mode that has been set.
When the number of IP conveyance is set to greater than 1, the conveyance is
performed again as the cassette is set again once the IP returns to the cassette.
It should be noted that when the mode is changed to "ROUTINE" while the
conveyance is repeated in "AUTO MODE", "AUTO MODE" may be canceled.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-53
 MU-54
[1-3] Number of Conveyance Setting 4. Insert the cassette with the barcode entered.
The number of conveyance may be set in a range from 1 to 99999. Erasure conveyance starts, and the result is displayed on the MUTL.
To halt the conveyance while the IP is conveyed with the number of conveyance set to
greater than 1, set "0 (zero)" to the number of conveyance. l GOOD indication
When the number of conveyance is set, "number set" and "number conveyed" are
displayed on the LCD panel of the RU.

n Procedures for Performing Auto Conveyance: Example where

conveyance is performed three times with 1-ERASE
1. Start the MUTL. l NO GOOD indication
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} A five-digit error code is displayed.
2. Click the Conveyance Check.

u NOTE u
3. Perform Conveyance Setting. In the case of "NO GOOD" indication:
{Troubleshooting}

CAUTION
Once Conveyance Check is completed, be sure to set "Conveyance Setting"
back to "ROUTINE" again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-54
 MU-55
n Procedures for Halting in the Middle of Conveyance [2] Board Check

1. Set to half the conveyance. u NOTE u

Once the board check is initiated, the ongoing process cannot be interrupted. Even
when the MUTL is exited, the board check running on the RU remains intact.
To interrupt the board check, turn OFF the power of the RU.

n Function
Perform self-diagnostics on each board, and display the result of the diagnostics.
2. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL} n Procedures: Example where the IMG board and SNS board are
checked twice
n Procedures for Exiting Conveyance Check CAUTION
1. Select [ROUTINE] for Conveyance Setting. After the board check is performed, be sure to turn OFF and back ON the power
of the RU.
Because the board check involves the initialization sequence for each of the
boards, the machine is not in the initialized condition, as a whole, after the
board check is done.

2. Exit the MUTL. 1. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL} {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

2. Set the number of checks.

The IMG board and SNS/DRV board are checked in sequence.

When the checks are completed, the number of checks that has been set
disappears, with the following displayed.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-55
 MU-56
l GOOD indication [2-1] All Board
The entire diagnostics for the electrical subsystems are repeated for the number
specified.
The boards to be diagnosed are as follows.
- CPU board
- IMG board
- SCN/SCT board
l NO GOOD indication - SNS/DRV board
A five-digit error code is displayed.
[2-2] CPU Board
The following diagnostics are repeated for the number specified.
- SDRAM read/write test
- CheckSum (FLASH-ROM/IPL) checksum comparison
- CheckSum (FLASH-ROM/APL) checksum comparison
u NOTE u - CheckSum (FLASH-ROM/APL) read/write test
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication: - Interrupt diagnostics
{Troubleshooting}
- Register read/write test

[2-3] IMG Board

3. Exit the MUTL.
The following diagnostics are repeated for the number specified.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL} - Battery, backup, and memory read/write test
- FIFO read/write test

[2-4] SCN/SCT Board

The following diagnostics are repeated for the number specified.
- Communication with H8

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-56
 MU-57
[2-5] SNS/DRV Board [2-7] CPU Board Setting Display
The following diagnostics are repeated for the number specified. When the [Board Check] button is clicked, the RU is accessed to display the setup
- Sensor change associated with turn-ON/OFF of the solenoid condition of the CPU board.
- Communication between pulse motor and FPMC The display content and setup meaning are presented below.
- LED register read/write test
- Communication with BCR

[2-6] INV Board

The following diagnostics are repeated for the number specified.
- The erasure lamp lit/unlit condition is diagnosed by turning ON the erasure
lamp. The erasure lamp is turned OFF after the diagnostics are completed.

REFERENCE
The MUTL display will not be reflected immediately after the CPU board setting is
changed.
To display the up-to-the-minute condition, click on another button, such as [Software
Check], and then click on the [Board Check] again.

[2-8] IP Sensor Check

//Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
later.//

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-57
 MU-58
[3] Software Check [3-2] Ver. Display (FLASH)
//Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
[3-1] Backup Memory Clear (CPU Board) later.//

n Function [3-3] Ver. Display (FTP SERV)

Clear the backup memory of the RU. //Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
later.//
n Procedures
[3-4] MAC Address Display
1. Start the MUTL. //Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} later.//

2. Execute Backup Memory Clear. [3-5] VERSION UP

//Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
later.//

[3-5-1] Main CPU IPL Ver. Up

//Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
3. Click on the [OK] button. later.//
If "RESULT-OK" does not appear on the MUTL, with an error code displayed,
troubleshoot as appropriate. [3-5-2] Sub CPU IPL Ver. Up
4. Exit the MUTL. //Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL} later.//

[3-5-3] Sub CPU APPL Ver. Up

//Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
later.//

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-58
 MU-59
[4] Virtual Image Check [4-2] Virtual Image Test
Image reading is performed virtually, thereby enabling a cause of image abnormality
to be located. n Function
Generate and output test images with each of the components comprising the
[4-1] CORRECTION ST/HR scanner unit, by, for example, generating and outputting image data with the boards,
or turning ON the LED of the PMT board and inputting the resulting light; accordingly,
n Function a location that caused a functional failure can be identified.
By clicking the [CORRECTION ST/HR] button, the recording image for the virtual
image test can be switched to the front side (FRONT), rear side (REAR), or both sides [4-2-1] IMG Board Pattern Output
(BOTH).
Note that this setting is effective in the following three items of the virtual image test. n Function
- LED Virtual Read Generate image data with the IMG board, and output the image.
- PMT Virtual Read
- SCN/SCT Board Virtual Read n Procedures: Example of IMG Board Pattern Output
n Procedures: Example where the front side (FRONT) is selected 1. On the examination reception screen of the CL, click on the [Add
Exposure Menu] button.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

2. Set the recording side to the front side (FRONT).

2. Select [Sensitivity] from the [TEST] menu, and click on the [OK]
button.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-59
 MU-60
3. Click on [Start Examination]. 6. Press the [ENTER] key.
The examination reservation is completed, and the following screen appears.

4. Click on [IP#].
7. Select Virtual Image Test.

5. Type in "1". 8. Click on the [IMG Board Pattern Output] button.

REFERENCE

u INSTRUCTION u The image is outputted about one minute after the [IMG Board Pattern Output]
button is clicked.
Be sure to enter "1" in the [IP#] field.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-60
 MU-61
9. Insert a cassette.
The IP reading starts, and the image is displayed on the CL, while "RESULT-OK" is
displayed on the MUTL. If an error code is displayed, instead of "RESULT-OK", then
refer to the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.

10. Turn OFF the power of the RU and back ON.

11. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-61
 MU-62
[4-2-2] IMG Board Frame Memory Re-Output 4. Click on [Start Examination].

n Function
Forcefully output the image data in the frame memory of the IMG board.
u NOTE u
The image data may be outputted by use of the "IMG Board Frame Memory Re-
Output" menu when the following conditions are met.
- The IP has been pre-read. 5. Click on [IP#].
- The barcode of the IP that has been pre-read is inputted.
- The same menu as for the IP that has been pre-read is selected.
- The RU is not rebooted after the IP has been pre-read.

n Procedures: Example of IMG Board Frame Memory Re-Output

1. Read the IP.
u INSTRUCTION u
6. Type in the barcode of the cassette that has been read immediately
before.
Take note of the barcode of the IP that has been read.

2. On the examination reception screen of the CL, click on the [Add

Exposure Menu] button.

u INSTRUCTION u
Be sure to enter the barcode of the cassette that has been read immediately
before.
Entering any other value results in no operation.
3. Select the same menu as used at step 1 for IP reading, and click on
the [OK] button.
7. Press the [ENTER] key.
The examination reservation is completed, and the following screen appears.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-62
 MU-63
8. Select Virtual Image Test.

9. Click on the [IMG Board Frame Memory Re-Output] button.

10. Turn OFF the power of the RU and back ON.

11. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-63
 MU-64
[4-2-3] LED Virtual Read 3. Click on [Start Examination].

n Function
Cause the blue LED of the PMT board and the LED of the PMT board to illuminate,
and input the resulting light from the light-collecting guide to generate image output.
If there is no problem with the output image, it can be decided that the failure of the
scanning optics unit is responsible for the image abnormality.

n Procedures: Example of LED Virtual Read 4. Click on [IP#].

1. On the examination reception screen of the CL, click on the [Add
Exposure Menu] button.

5. Type in the barcode of the cassette to be used.

2. Select [Sensitivity] from the [TEST] menu, and click on the [OK]
button.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-64
 MU-65
6. Press the [ENTER] key. 10. Turn OFF the power of the RU and back ON.
The examination reservation is completed, and the following screen appears.
11. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

7. Select Virtual Image Test.

u INSTRUCTION u
For the CR-IR363, set the recording side as needed.

8. Click on the [LED Virtual Read] button and move [ ] to "ON (0.1mR)".

9. Insert the cassette with the barcode entered.

The IP reading starts, and the image is displayed on the CL.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-65
 MU-66
[4-2-4] PMT Virtual Read 3. Click on [Start Examination].

n Function
Generate and output image data with the LOG AMP of the PMT board.
If there is any problem with "LED Virtual Read" but there is no problem with "SCN/
SCT Board Virtual Read", the result of "PMT Virtual Read" permits a decision to be
made whether the failure of the scanning optics unit is responsible for the image
abnormality.

n Procedures: Example of PMT Virtual Read

4. Click on [IP#].

1. On the examination reception screen of the CL, click on the [Add

Exposure Menu] button.

5. Type in the barcode of the cassette to be used.

2. Select [Sensitivity] from the [TEST] menu, and click on the [OK]
button.

6. Press the [ENTER] key.

The examination reservation is completed, and the following screen appears.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-66
 MU-67
7. Select Virtual Image Test.

u INSTRUCTION u
For the CR-IR363, set the recording side as needed.

8. Click on the [PMT Virtual Read] button and move [ ] to "ON".

9. Insert the cassette with the barcode entered.

The IP reading starts, and the image is displayed on the CL.

10. Turn OFF the power of the RU and back ON.

11. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-67
 MU-68
[4-2-5] SCN/SCT Board Virtual Read 4. Click on [IP#].

n Function
Generate image data with the SCN/SCT board, and send the resulting image data to
the CPU board.
If there is any problem with the output image, it can be decided that the image
processing function of the CPU board is faulty.

n Procedures: Example of SCN/SCT Board Virtual Read 5. Type in the barcode of the cassette to be used.

1. On the examination reception screen of the CL, click on the [Add

Exposure Menu] button.

6. Press the [ENTER] key.

The examination reservation is completed, and the following screen appears.

2. Select [Sensitivity] from the [TEST] menu, and click on the [OK]
button.

7. Select Virtual Image Test.

3. Click on [Start Examination].

u INSTRUCTION u
For the CR-IR363, set the recording side as needed.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-68
 MU-69
8. Click on the [SCN/SCT Board Virtual Read] button, and move [ ] to [4-2-6] Virtual Image Check Cancel
"ON". Used to cancel the virtual image test mode.

9. Insert the cassette with the barcode entered.

The IP reading starts, and the image is displayed on the CL.

10. Turn OFF the power of the RU and back ON.

11. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-69
 MU-70
[5] Scanner Check [5-2] Polygon Motor

[5-1] Diagnostic n Function

Turn ON or OFF the polygon.
n Function When it is turned ON, it is checked to see whether the polygon is operating normally a
Perform scanner self-diagnostics on the scanner unit. predetermined time after the polygon is activated.

l Details of CR-IR362 Diagnostics n Procedures: Example where the polygon is turned ON for the
{MD:4.1.5_Error Detection/Processing Subsystem}
single side

n Procedures 1. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
1. Start the MUTL.
2. Turn ON the polygon.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

2. Execute scanner self-diagnostics.

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "THE POLYGON IS TURNED

ON.", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to 3. Turn OFF the polygon.
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
REFERENCE
This process takes about one minute, from start to finish.

3. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-70
 MU-71
[5-3] Laser 3. Turn OFF the laser.

n Function
Turn ON or OFF the laser.
When the laser is turned ON, the polygon is turned ON, and the polygon and laser are
diagnosed.
Either of the following values is displayed on the MUTL. 4. Exit the MUTL.
- LDIFINT: Factory-default LD current value {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
- LDIFNOW: Current value at present
- LDIFNOW/LDIFINT: Value to indicate how much the current has dropped, from the
factory default until at present.

n Procedures: Example where the laser is turned ON for the single

side
CAUTION
While the laser is being turned ON, do not turn OFF the polygon.
If the polygon is turned OFF, the laser is irradiated to a single spot, possibly
result in a machine failure or fire.

1. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

2. Turn ON the laser.

Check the display on the MUTL.

TURNNING ON THE LASER IS IN PROGRESS..
LDIFINT : 300
LDIFNOW : 132
LDIFNOW/LDIFINT : 44
THE LASER IS TURNED ON.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "THE LASER IS TURNED
ON.", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-71
 MU-72
[5-4] HV Diagnostic [5-5] Format Adjustment
When the image is outputted under condition where the machine shipment control
n Function data is installed, a while blank portion may appear on the film or there may be some
When the HV voltage is inputted over a range from 250 to 999, the command value non-outputted portion (image loss). In that case, format adjustment is used for fine
outputted from the SCN/SCT board is detected to check that the difference from the adjustment.
input value is held within +/- 10%. Format adjustment is also used when it is necessary to make adjustments between
Checks can be performed on the front side and back side, respectively. units, as in cases where the subscanning unit and side-positioning conveyor unit are
replaced at the same time.
n Procedures: Example where HV voltage is checked on the front
u NOTES u
and back sides.
- Before making format adjustment, be sure to turn ON the HV switch. With the HV
1. Start the MUTL. switch in the OFF position, format adjustment cannot be done.
- When the setting is changed, the result associated with that change is immediately
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
reflected.
2. Select HV Diagnostic. - The result associated with the change becomes ineffective when the machine is
rebooted. Thus, in order to make the setup value effective after reboot or save the
setup value, back up the configuration data.
{MU:4.3.14_BACK UP}

REFERENCE
3. Type in the respective HV values for the front and back sides. When both Manual Adjustment (FREQ) and Manual Adjustment (Pixel) are to be
made, Manual Adjustment (FREQ) should be performed first. If Manual Adjustment
(Pixel) is done first, it may be necessary to perform Manual Adjustment (Pixel) once
again, as a result of Manual Adjustment (FREQ).

REFERENCE
Even though different values are entered for the front and back sides, diagnostics
can be done.

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to

the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-72
 MU-73
[5-5-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ) [5-5-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel)
Make fine adjustment when the output image is offset in the horizontal direction (main
n Function scan direction) (i.e., a white blank portion appears horizontally, or a portion of the
Make fine adjustment when the output image is enlarged or reduced in the horizontal image is not outputted).
direction (main scan direction). Its adjustable range is from -999 to 999 pixels. When a negative-quantity (-) value
Its adjustable range is from -5% to +5%. When a negative-quantity (-) value is is entered, the white blank portion is expanded, while the white blank portion is
entered, the image is enlarged, while it is reduced when a positive-quantity (+) value narrowed when a positive-quantity (+) value is entered.
is entered. The calculation formula for the adjustment value is as follows.
The calculation formula for the adjustment value is as follows.

n Procedures
{MC:16._Format Adjustment}

[5-5-3] Default Setting (FREQ)

Set the value of the main scan length (FREQ) to its default value.

[5-5-4] Default Setting (Pixel)

Set the value of the main scan position (Pixel) to its default value.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-73
 MU-74
[5-5-5] Optic Setting (FREQ) [5-6] Correction
Input the adjustment value for the main scan length (FREQ) that is written on the top Correction items differ depending on the IP type used. Perform relevant correction items
label of the scanning optics unit when it is replaced. in accordance with the table presented below.
When the adjustment value is entered, the machine shipment control data is
overwritten. Correction
Machine IP type used
item

[5-5-6] Optic Setting (Pixel) ST HR-BD

CR-IR 363
ST HR-BD HR
Input the adjustment value for the main scan position (Pixel) that is written on the top
label of the scanning optics unit when it is replaced. ST HR
CR-IR 362
ST

[5-5-7] IP Leading-Edge Adjustment (Sub-scanning) Correction Correction X-ray Dose Tube Center S
Description Remarks
Make fine adjustment when the output image is offset in the vertical direction item procedure tube (mR) voltage value
(subscanning direction) (i.e., a white black portion appears above, or a portion of the Shading/ Perform shading correction
image is not outputted). sensitivity for IP type ST. Correction
W 1 80 200 ST/HR
correction for is performed with HR
Its adjustable range is from -50 to 50. When a negative-quality (-) value is entered,
IP type ST included.
the white blank portion is expanded, while the white blank portion is narrowed when a
Because subscanning
positive-quantity (+) value is entered. Shading motor speed varies with the
speed IP reading mode, shading W 1 80 - -
correction correction is performed for
each of the speeds.
Only sensitivity correction
for IP type ST and IP type
Sensitivity HR is performed. For IP
correction for type HR, it is automatically W 1 80 200 ST/HR
IP type ST corrected as sensitivity
correction is performed for
IP type ST.
Sensitivity Only sensitivity correction
n Procedures - - correction for for IP type HR-BD is Mo 20 25 120 HR-BD
IP type HR performed.
{MC:16.2_IP Leading-Edge Adjustment (Sub-scanning)} Shading Only shading correction for
- correction for IP type HR and HR-BD is W 15 80 - -
IP type HR performed.
It is performed only when
sensitivity adjustment is HR,
- W 3.6 20
Special to be made for IP type HR HR-BD
sensitivity with the molybdenum X-ray
120
correction for tube or when sensitivity
IP type HR adjustment is to be made
- for IP type HR-BD with the Mo 20 25 HR
tungsten X-ray tube.
: Item to be used when correction is performed in a W: Tungsten X-ray tube
standalone fashion. Mo: Molybdenum X-ray tube

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-74
 MU-75
[5-6-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction [5-6-2] Shading Speed Correction

n Function n Function
Only for IP type ST, shading/sensitivity correction is performed at normal speed (SR). As the subscanning motor speed differs depending on the reading mode, shading
With correction for IP type HR, correction is done automatically when IP type ST is correction can be performed for each of the speeds.
corrected. The following four types of speeds can be adjusted.
u NOTE u For IP type ST → SR, FR, GR
For IP type HR or HR-BD → HR
Correction can be performed with IPs irradiated by the tungsten X-ray tube. If
irradiated by the molybdenum X-ray tube, correction will not end normally because it u NOTES u
suffers from tube-to-tube variability. - Unless shading correction is performed for each of the subscanning motor speeds,
unusual nonuniformity will occur when the IP is read at the speed at which shading
u INSTRUCTION u correction is not performed.
- Correction should be performed with the IP irradiated by the tungsten X-ray tube.
Reading should be done within 10 to 11 minutes after the X-ray irradiation.
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
Film outputs and screen displays differ at the time of correction.
The indications for the S value are as follows according to the irradiation output.
For 0.1 mR: The S value is 2000.
For 1 mR: The S value is 200.
1For 10 mR: The S value is 20.

n Procedures
{MC:17.1_Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST}

n Procedures
{MC:17.2_Shading Speed Correction}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-75
 MU-76
[5-6-3] Sensitivity Correction [5-6-4] Special Sensitivity Adjustment

n Function n Function
Only sensitivity correction for IP type ST and IP type HR-BD can be performed. For IP Only when the following conditions are met, special sensitivity adjustment can be
type HR, it is automatically corrected as sensitivity correction is performed for IP type achieved.
ST. When the IP type HR-BD (double side) is exposed with the tungsten X-ray tube
u NOTE u When the IP type HR (single side) is exposed with the molybdenum X-ray tube

For IP type ST, correction can be performed only with the IP irradiated by the tungsten u NOTE u
X-ray tube. If sensitivity adjustment is to be made for the IP of IP type HR with the tungsten X-ray
tube, it is necessary to manually set the X-ray tube to tungsten.
u INSTRUCTION u
REFERENCE
The X-ray dose required during exposure differs depending on the X-ray tube.
Expose the IP according to the following conditions. AUTO SELECT: The IP of IP type HR and IP type HR-BD is automatically
Tungsten X-ray tube: About 1 mR recognized as one irradiated by the molybdenum X-ray tube.
Molybdenum X-ray tube: About 20 mR TUNGSTEN FIX: Correction is performed with the preset X-ray tube, without
recognizing the IP type.
REFERENCES
- The indications for the S value are as follows according to the irradiation output with n Procedures
the tungsten X-ray tube.
For 0.1 mR: The S value is 2000. {MC:18.3_Special Sensitivity Adjustment for IP Type HR}
For 1 mR: The S value is 200.
For 10 mR: The S value is 20.
- For IP type HR-BD, correction can be performed only with the IP irradiated by the
molybdenum X-ray tube.
The indications for the S value are as follows according to the irradiation output with
the molybdenum X-ray tube.
For 2 mR: The S value is 1200.
For 20 mR: The S value is 120.
For 200 mR: The S value is 12.

n Procedures
The procedures for sensitivity correction differ depending on the IP type.
- For IP type ST
{MC:17.3_Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST}
- For IP type HR
{MC:18.1_Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-76
 MU-77
[5-6-5] Sensitivity S-Value Correction 4. Back up the data so adjusted into a floppy diskette.
{MC:19.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data}
n Function
Correct the S value indicated on the film.
5. Exit the MUTL.
For example, if the S value is indicated as 195 on the film when the IP exposed at 1 {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
mR is read, then correction is performed to indicate the S value as 200.

n Procedures: Example where the indication of 195 is corrected to

200
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

2. Select Sensitivity S-Value Correction.

3. Enter the existing S-value and expected S-value.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-77
 MU-78
[5-6-6] Trouble Shooting [5-6-7] HV ON/OFF
For troubleshooting, set to determine whether to generate image output by use of the Turn ON or OFF the HV switch (software switch).
shading correction data or without use of the shading correction data. The setting changed becomes effective immediately; however, the result updated does
- ON: Generate image output by using the shading correction data. not appear immediately on the LCD panel of the RU.
- OFF: Generate image output without using the shading correction data. When the mode of the RU is changed (from the Maintenance Mode to Routine Mode, for
example), the result is displayed on the LCD panel.
CAUTION
Normally, be sure to set it to "ON".
If "OFF" setting is used, the resulting image suffers unusual nonuniformity.

REFERENCE
The "OFF" setting is canceled when the power of the RU is turned OFF and back ON,
or when IP reading operation is performed once or more.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-78
 MU-79
[6] Mechanical 1 Check 4. Select Suction Cup Arm HP.

CAUTION
When the function of Mechanical Check is to be used, be sure to perform the
procedures as in the example.

[6-1] IP Removal Unit 5. Perform suction cup arm HP for the third shelf.

[6-1-1] Suction Cup Arm HP

n Function
Drive the suction drive motor (MA1, MA2, MA3, MA4) for each shelf of the IP removal If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
unit to move the IP suction cup arm to its home position, and perform its operation the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
check.
- When MA1 is operated: Shelf 1
6. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
- When MA2 is operated: Shelf 2
- When MA3 is operated: Shelf 3
- When MA4 is operated: Shelf 4

n Procedures: Example where MA3 (Shelf 3) is operated

1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select IP Removal Unit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-79
 MU-80
[6-1-2] IP Removal (F/L) 5. Select IP Removal (F/L) for the third shelf.

n Function
Drive the suction drive motor (MA1, MA2, MA3, MA4) for each shelf of the IP removal
unit to lead/load the IP, and perform its operation check.
- When MA1 is operated: Shelf 1
- When MA2 is operated: Shelf 2 6. Set the cassette in the third shelf.
- When MA3 is operated: Shelf 3 IP removal (F/L) for the third shelf is initiated.
- When MA4 is operated: Shelf 4
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
n Procedures: Example where the IP is fed/loaded for MA3 (Shelf
3) 7. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility.
8. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select IP Removal Unit.

4. Select IP Removal (F/L).

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-80
 MU-81
[6-1-3] IP Removal Step Operation
//Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
later.//

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-81
 MU-82
[6-1-4] Clutch 5. Turn ON or OFF the clutch.

n Function
Drive the clutch (CLA1, CLA2, CLA3, CLA4) for each shelf of the IP removal unit, or
release its drive, to perform its operation check.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
n Procedures: Example where the third clutch is operated the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.

1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode. 6. Exit the MUTL.

Start the User Utility. {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}
7. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select IP Removal Unit.

4. Select Clutch.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-82
 MU-83
[6-1-5] Pump 5. Turn ON the pump.

n Function
Drive the pump (PA1, PA2, PA3, PA4) for each shelf of the IP removal unit, or release
its drive, to perform its operation check.

n Procedures: Example where the third pump is operated If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode. 6. Turn OFF the pump.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select IP Removal Unit. 7. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

8. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.

4. Select Pump.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-83
 MU-84
[6-1-6] Valve 5. Turn ON the valve.

n Function
Drive the valve (SVA1, SVA2, SVA3, SVA4) for each shelf of the IP removal unit, or
release its drive, to perform its operation check.

n Procedures: Example where the third valve is operated If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode. 6. Turn OFF the valve.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select IP Removal Unit. 7. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

8. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.

4. Select Valve.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-84
 MU-85
[6-1-7] Solenoid 5. Turn ON or OFF the solenoid.

n Function
Drive the solenoid (SOLA1, SOLA2, SOLA3, SOLA4) for each shelf of the IP removal
unit, or release its drive, to perform its operation check.
When the solenoid is turned ON, the hold is released, and the cassette hold sensor If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
(SA3, SA9, SA15, SA21) changes its status from CLOSE to OPEN. the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
n Procedures: Example where the third solenoid is operated 6. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility.
7. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL. [6-1-8] Electrical

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} //Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
later.//
3. Select IP Removal Unit.

4. Select Solenoid.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-85
 MU-86
[6-2] Feed/Load Unit 4. Select Feed Path Change Guide HP (MB3).

[6-2-1] Feed Path Change Guide HP (MB3)

n Function
Drive the join path change guide drive motor (MB3) to move the join path change If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
guide to its home position, and perform its operation check. the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
n Procedures: Example where the feed path change guide is 5. Exit the MUTL.
moved to its home position {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode. 6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Feed/Load Unit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-86
 MU-87
[6-2-2] Feed Path Change Guide 4. Open the feed path change guide for the third shelf.

n Function
Drive the join path change guide drive motor (MB3) to open the join path change
guide for each shelf, and perform its operation check.
Steps at the specified locations are as follows.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
l Feed Path Change Guide Movement (shelf 1) the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
Position where the guide for the first shelf is opened (HP position) 5. Exit the MUTL.
l Feed Path Change Guide Movement (shelf 2) {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
Position where the guide for the second shelf is opened 6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
l Feed Path Change Guide Movement (shelf 3)
Position where the guide for the third shelf is opened
l Feed Path Change Guide Movement (shelf 4)
Position where the guide for the fourth shelf is opened

n Procedures: Example where the third feed path is opened

1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Feed/Load Unit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-87
 MU-88
[6-2-3] Feed Path Change Diagnostic 4. Select Feed Path Change Diagnostic.

n Function
Drive the join path change guide drive motor (MB3) to perform its operation check.
The operation is the same as for the feed path change guide HP (MB3).

n Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode. 5. Exit the MUTL.
Start the User Utility. {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Feed/Load Unit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-88
 MU-89
[6-2-4] Feed Conveyance (MB1/MB2/MC3) 4. Select Feed Conveyance (MB1/MB2/MC3).

n Function
Drive the IP conveyance motor (MB1/MB2/MC3) to operate in the same direction
(reading direction) as the feed conveyance and check the feed conveyance.

n Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
5. Exit the MUTL.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Feed/Load Unit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-89
 MU-90
[6-2-5] Post-Erasure Conveyance (ME1/MB1/MB2) 4. Select Post-Erasure Conveyance (ME1/MB1/MB2).

n Function
Drive the IP conveyance motor (ME1/MB1/MB2) to operate in the erasure conveyance
direction (IP eject direction) and check the erasure conveyor unit.

n Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
5. Exit the MUTL.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Feed/Load Unit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-90
 MU-91
[6-2-6] Join Path Change Guide 4. Select Join Path Change Guide HP (MB3).

n Function
Drive the join path change guide drive motor (MB3) to perform home positioning, path
change operation, and join path change diagnostics.
l Join Path Change Guide HP (MB3) If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
The join path change guide is moved to its home position. the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.

l Join Path Change Guide Movement 5. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
The join path is changed to the "Side Positioning" or "Erasure" position.
l Join Path Change Diagnostic
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.

The join path change guide is driven to perform its operation check.

n Procedures: Example where the join path change guide is

moved to its home position
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Feed/Load Unit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-91
 MU-92
[6-3] Side-Positioning Conveyor 1 4. Select Side-Positioning HP (MC1).

[6-3-1] Side-Positioning HP (MC1)

n Function
Drive the side-positioning motor (MC1) to move the side-positioning unit to its home If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
position, and perform its operation check. the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
n Procedures 5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility. 6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-92
 MU-93
[6-3-2] Side-Positioning Step (MC1/MC2) 4. Select Side-Positioning Grip Movement (MC2).
//Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
later.//

[6-3-3] Side-Positioning Grip Movement (MC2)

n Function If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
Drive the grip release motor (MC2) so that the grip mechanism can be placed in its
gripped condition or grip released condition. 5. Select Grip Position Movement (MC2).
- Grip: Grip
- Grip release: UN Grip

n Procedures
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode. If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
Start the User Utility. the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility} 6. Exit the MUTL.
2. Start the MUTL. {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} 7. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
3. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-93
 MU-94
[6-3-4] Side-Positioning Grip HP (MC2) 4. Select Side-Positioning Grip HP (MC2).

n Function
Drive the grip release motor (MC2) to move the grip mechanism to its home position,
and perform its operation check.
In the home position, it is in the grip released condition.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
n Procedures the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
5. Exit the MUTL.
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility} 6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-94
 MU-95
[6-3-5] Side-Positioning Grip Diagnostic (MC2) 4. Select Side-Positioning Grip Diagnostic (MC2).

n Function
Drive the grip release motor (MC2) to activate the grip mechanism, and perform its
operation check.

n Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
5. Exit the MUTL.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.

u INSTRUCTION u
Select the following IP sizes as needed.
1417, 1414, 1012, 0810, 1824, 2430, 2430HR

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-95
 MU-96
[6-3-6] Side-Positioning (MC1/MC2) 4. Select Side-Positioning Operation (MC1/MC2).

n Function
Drive the side-positioning motor (MC1) and grip release motor (MC2) to perform side-
positioning operation.

n Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode. 5. Exit the MUTL.
Start the User Utility. {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.

u INSTRUCTION u
Select the following IP sizes as needed.
1417, 1414, 1012, 0810, 1824, 2430, 2430HR

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-96
 MU-97
[6-4] Side-Positioning Conveyor 2 4. Select Cleaning Guide HP (MC4).

[6-4-1] Cleaning Guide HP (MC4)

n Function
Drive the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) to move the cleaning guide to its home
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
position. the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
In the home position, the cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4) is CLOSE.
5. Exit the MUTL.
n Procedures {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode. 6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 2.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-97
 MU-98
[6-4-2] Cleaning Guide Position Movement (MC4) 4. Select Cleaning Guide Position Movement (MC2).

n Function
Drive the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) so that the cleaning guide can be placed
in its gripped condition or grip released condition.
- Grip: Grip
- Grip release: UN Grip If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.

n Procedures 5. Select Cleaning Guide Position Movement (MC2).

1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.

Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL. If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.

3. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 2. 5. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-98
 MU-99
[6-4-3] Cleaning Guide Diagnostic 4. Select Cleaning Guide Diagnostic.

n Function
Drive the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) to move the cleaning guide to its home
position, and perform its operation check.
In the home position, the cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4) is CLOSE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
n Procedures the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.

1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.

5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility} 6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
[6-4-4] Side-Positioning (BCRC1)
3. Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 2.
//Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
later.//

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-99
 MU-100
[6-5] Sub Scanning 1 4. Select Sub-Scanning Grip HP (MZ2).

[6-5-1] Sub-Scanning Grip HP (MZ2)

n Function
Drive the grip drive motor (MZ2) to move the grip mechanism to its home position,
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
and perform its operation check. the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
In the home position, the driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) and driven-side
grip release HP sensor (SZ3) are both CLOSE. 5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
n Procedures
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Sub Scanning 1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-100
 MU-101
[6-5-2] Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic Step Operation (MZ2) 4. Select Stopper HP.
//Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
later.//

[6-5-3] Stopper HP

n Function If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
Drive the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) to move the IP stopper to its home position,
and perform its operation check. 5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
n Procedures
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Sub Scanning 1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-101
 MU-102
[6-5-4] Stopper Movement 4. Select Stopper Movement.

n Function
Drive the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) to activate the IP stopper, and move it to its
"RETREATED" or "PROTRUDED" position.

n Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility. 5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility} {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

2. Start the MUTL. 6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Sub Scanning 1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-102
 MU-103
[6-5-5] Stopper Diagnostic 4. Select Stopper Diagnostic.

n Function
Drive the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) to perform home-positioning for the IP stopper
twice, and perform its operation check.

n Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility. 5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility} {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
2. Start the MUTL. 6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Sub Scanning 1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-103
 MU-104
[6-5-6] Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic (MZ2) 4. Select Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic.

n Function
Drive the grip drive motor (MZ2) to activate the grip mechanism, and perform its
operation check.

n Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility. 5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
2. Start the MUTL.
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Sub Scanning 1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-104
 MU-105
[6-6] Sub Scanning 2 4. Select Dust Removal HP.

[6-6-1] Dust Removal HP

n Function
Drive the dust removal motor (MZ3) to move the dust removal mechanism to its home
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
position. the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
In the home position, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ2) is CLOSE.

n Procedures 5. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility. 6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Sub Scanning 2.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-105
 MU-106
[6-6-2] Dust Removal Operation [6-6-3] Dust Removal Step Operation
//Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
n Function later.//
Drive the dust removal motor (MZ3) to perform dust removal operation.
[6-6-4] Conveyance Motor Direction Selection
n Procedures
n Function
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Set the drive direction for the subscanning motor (MZ1), as follows.
Start the User Utility. - CW: Conveyance direction during reading (side-positioning → subscanning →
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility} post-conveyance)
- CCW: Conveyance direction that is opposite during reading (post-conveyance →
2. Start the MUTL.
subscanning → side-positioning)
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Sub Scanning 2. [6-6-5] Conveyance Motor Speed Selection

n Function
Set the drive speed for the subscanning motor (MZ1), as follows.

Indication Reading mode IP type Subscanning motor speed

4. Select Dust Removal Operation. HI For IP ejection ST/HR/HR-BD High speed
FR FR mode ST one side
SR SR mode ST one side
GR GR mode ST one side

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to HR HR mode HR one side
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate. BD HR-BD mode HR-BD both side Low speed
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-106
 MU-107
[6-6-6] Conveyance Motor Stop/Drive 5. Set the conveyance speed to SR.

n Function
Drive or stop the subscanning motor (MZ1).
CAUTION
When executing "Conveyance Motor Direction Selection" or "Conveyance 6. Drive the subscanning motor (MZ1).
Motor Speed Selection", be sure to stop the subscanning motor (MZ1).
If such setting is done with the subscanning motor (MZ1) in its driven condition,
correct operation will not result.

n Procedures: Example where conveyance is performed in CW

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
direction at speed of SR. the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.

1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode. 7. Stop the subscanning motor (MZ1).
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
3. Select Sub Scanning 2. the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
8. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

9. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.

4. Set the conveyance direction to CW.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-107
 MU-108
[6-7] All Sensor LED ON

n Function
Turn ON all the sensor LEDs to enable the LED display on the SNS17B board.
It is used to check the sensor via the LED display on the SNS17B board.
When the power of the RU is turned OFF, this setting is canceled.
CAUTION
Unless the sensor is checked via the LED display on the SNS17B board, the
setting should be canceled by turning OFF the power of the RU.
If all the sensors are turned ON, image abnormality occurs due to the influence
of the sensor LEDs.

n Procedures
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select All Sensor LED ON.

4. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

5. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-108
 MU-109
[7] Mechanical 2 Check 4. Select Grip Release HP (MD1).

[7-1] Post-Reading Conveyor

[7-1-1] Grip Release HP (MD1)

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
n Function the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
Drive the grip release motor (MD1) to move the grip mechanism to its home position,
and perform its operation check. 5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
n Procedures
6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
1. Put the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Post-Reading Conveyor.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-109
 MU-110
[7-1-2] Grip Position Movement (MD2) 5. Select Grip Position Movement (MD2).

n Function
Drive the grip release motor (MD1) so that the grip mechanism can be placed in its
gripped condition or grip released condition.
- Grip: Grip
- Grip release: UN Grip If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
n Procedures 6. Exit the MUTL.
1. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

Start the User Utility. 7. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Post-Reading Conveyor.

4. Select Grip Position Movement (MD2).

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to

the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-110
 MU-111
[7-1-3] Post-Conveyance Grip Diagnostic

n Function
Drive the grip release motor (MD1) to perform grip mechanism home positioning, grip
releasing, and gripping.

n Procedures
1. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Post-Reading Conveyor.

4. Select Post-Conveyance Grip Diagnostic.

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to

the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-111
 MU-112
[7-1-4] Post-Conveyance (MD2/ME1)

n Function
Drive the IP conveyance motor (MD2 and ME1) in the conveyance direction during
reading.

n Procedures
1. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Post-Reading Conveyor.

4. Select Post-Conveyance (MD2/ME1).

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to

the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.

5. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-112
 MU-113
[7-2] Erasure Conveyor 1 4. Select Erasure Side-positioning HP (ME2).

[7-2-3] Erasure Side-positioning HP (ME2)

n Function
Drive the side-positioning motor (ME2) to move the erasure unit side-positioning
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
mechanism to its home position. the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
During that time, the grip release motor (ME3) is driven to perform grip releasing as
during routine operation.
5. Exit the MUTL.
n Procedures {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
1. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. 6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Erasure Conveyor 1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-113
 MU-114
[7-2-4] Erasure Side-positioning (ME2/ME3) 4. Select the IP size "1824", and select Erasure Sid-positioning (ME2/
ME3).
n Function
Drive the side-positioning motor (ME2) to perform side-positioning operation
corresponding to the IP size.
As during routine operation, the grip release motor (ME3) is driven to perform grip
releasing, and perform side-positioning operation twice.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
n Procedures: Example where 18" x 24" size side-positioning the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
operation is performed 5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
1. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility. 6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Erasure Conveyor 1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-114
 MU-115
[7-2-5] Erasure Side-positioning Step (ME2/ME3) 4. Execute Erasure Grip HP (ME3).
//Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
later.//

[7-2-6] Erasure Grip HP (ME3)

n Function If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
Drive the grip release motor (ME3) to move the erasure grip mechanism to its home
position, and perform its operation check. 5. Exit the MUTL.
In the home position, it is in the grip released condition. {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

n Procedures 6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.

1. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.

Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Erasure Conveyor 1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-115
 MU-116
[7-2-7] Erasure Grip Diagnostic (ME3) 4. Execute Erasure Grip Diagnostic (ME3).

n Function
Drive the grip release motor (ME3) to perform home positioning, grip releasing, and
gripping operation.

n Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
1. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility. 5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
2. Start the MUTL. 6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Erasure Conveyor 1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-116
 MU-117
[7-2-8] Erasure Grip Movement (ME3) 4. Select Erasure Grip Movement (ME3).

n Function
Drive the grip release motor (ME3) so that the grip mechanism can be placed in its
gripped condition or grip released condition.
- Grip: Grip
- Grip release: UN Grip If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
n Procedures
1. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility} 6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Erasure Conveyor 1.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-117
 MU-118
[7-3] Erasure Conveyor 2 5. Turn OFF the path change guide (SOLF1).

[7-3-1] Path Change Guide (SOLF1)

n Function
Turn ON the branch path changeover guide drive solenoid (SOLF1) to move the If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
branch path changeover guide to the switchback side. the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
n Procedures 6. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
1. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility. 7. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Erasure Conveyor 2.

4. Turn ON the path change guide (SOLF1).

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to

the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-118
 MU-119
[7-3-2] FANE2 (INV) 5. Turn OFF the inverter cooling fan (FANE3).
//Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
later.//

[7-3-3] FANE3 (LAMP)

n Function If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
Stop or drive the inverter cooling fan (FANE3).

n Procedures 6. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
1. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
Start the User Utility. 7. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Erasure Conveyor 2.

4. Drive the inverter cooling fan (FANE3).

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to

the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-119
 MU-120
[7-3-4] Erasure Conveyor (ME1) [7-3-5] LAMP (LAMP1-5)
//Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
n Function later.//
Drive the IP conveyance motor (ME1) to rotate the erasure conveyor unit in the eject
direction. [7-3-6] Erasure Unit Thermal Sensor Display
//Not functional with software version 1.1. It is to be implemented with version 1.2 or
n Procedures later.//

1. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.

Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Erasure Conveyor 2.

4. Drive the IP conveyance motor (ME1).

5. Exit the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}

6. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-120
 MU-121
[7-4] Control Unit 5. Stop the control unit fans, FAN (G1 to G5).

[7-4-1] FAN (G1 to G5)

n Function
Stop or drive the control unit fans, FAN (G1 to G5). If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to
the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
n Procedures
6. Exit the MUTL.
1. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL}
Start the User Utility.
{MU:2.2.1_Starting the User Utility}
7. Turn OFF and back ON the power of the RU.

2. Start the MUTL.

{MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL}

3. Select Control Unit.

4. Drive the control unit fans, FAN (G1 to G5).

If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to

the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual MU-121
 �������������
���������� ��������������� ������ ��������������
07.22.2003 00 New relese All pages

08.25.2003 01 Corrections (FM4098) All pages

CR-IR363 Service Manual

Service Parts List (SP)

011-202-01 CR-IR 363 Service Manual

08.25.2003 FM4098
 SP-1
How to Use Service Character Significance
Consumable parts or parts
○ For software
The alphabet denotes a difference in the
As regards the parts whose information is
set forth in the "Check, Replacement, and

Parts List A that will be replaced at short

intervals.
specifications. Parts differing in the suffix
are not compatible with each other.
Adjustment" volume (MC), the associated
information about screws, E-rings, and
Parts that may become faulty Although the version is indicated by a the like is not presented within parts
■ RANK B accidentally and have a number, it is omitted. illustrations.To confirm the information
relatively high failure rate. about screws, E-rings, and the like, refer to
Parts that have a sufficiently long ■ PART NAME the "Check, Replacement, and Adjustment"
● Handling RANK characters (parts that C MTBF, but are expected to have
are handled in a special manner during PART NAME represents a general name of a volume (MC).
a relatively high failure rate.
parts operation, such as replacement) part.
Parts that have a sufficiently ■ Quantities of recommended spare
D long MTBF, but are expected to
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty ■ QTY. parts
Must be become faulty.
R Repairable Parts that are necessary for fault ○ QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used It is recommended as a rough guide
returned.
analysis, or parts that may be in each unit. to hold in stock a certain quantity of
Must be
returned. E needed in case of unexpected parts according to the rank (A, B, C, D,
Q Not repairable ○ A parts with -S assigned to the end of
(We use for accidents such as man-induced E) assigned to the parts,as follows. For
damage. the quantity represents a small part that is
analysis.) periodically replaced parts,hold them in
shipped in packs of 50. (Even if such a part is
Must be stock separately.Adjust the stock quantity
<The RANK guide> ordered in quantity of 1, a pack containing
returned. of service parts depending on the number
The Fault RANK characters, Handling RANK 50 pieces of that part is supplied.)
(Consumable of working units (N).
T Not repairable characters, and Export regulation-applicable
part. Not Quantity used in a single system : Q
character are assigned in that order. ■ REMARKS
applicable for
free of change.) Thus, at leaset one character or up to The REMARKS column indicates a unique ○N=1
without Must Not be three characters are assigned in the RANK name of a part of its relevant information of Rank A ＝ １ ＋ Ｑ × 0.3
Not repairable column. Rank C ＝ １ ＋ Ｑ × 0.05
R, Q, T returned. note.
Rank D ＝ １ ＋ Ｑ × 0.02
■ REF.NO. ■ SERIAL NUMBER
● Export regulation-applicable ○ 2 ≦ N ≦ 10
REF. NO. is a parts number indicated in the The units may contain different parts
character(Parts without the following Rank A ＝ ２ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.3
Service Parts Exploded Views. For parts depending on their shipment control
character are not controlled by Export Rank C ＝ ２ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.05
having different functions, they are clearly number. SERIAL NUMBER indicates the
regulation.) Rank D ＝ １ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.02
distinguished in the REMARKS and SERIAL shipment control number to which the
Character Significance NUMBER columns. ○ 11 ≦ N ≦ 300
relevant parts are applicable. If the SERIAL
Parts applicable to export Rank A ＝ ３ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.3
＋ NUMBER column is blank, the parts are
regulations. ■ PART NUMBER applicable to all the relevant units. The Rank C ＝ ３ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.05
PART NUMBER is a code number that is shipment control number is represented Rank D ＝ ２ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.02
● Fault RANK characters (which provide unique to each parts. An alphabetic letter at by lower five disits of eight-disit number
reference for determining the recom- the right-most position of the code number indicated on the ratings name plate.
■ Precautions to be Observed When
mended stock quantity) has the following meaning. Returning Parts in Need of Repair
All parts are assigned either A through E. ■ REFER TO When returning a component in need of
○ For hardware
The "REFER TO" column shows the reference repair, pack it in the same manner as for the
The alphabet denotes the version number
sections concerning the registered parts supplied substitute, using the substitute
of a part. If parts have different version
whose removal/installation procedures are packing materials.
numbers, they are upward-compatible.
set forth in the "Check, Replacement, and The use of different packing materials or
Adjustment" volume (MC). packing methods may incur damage to
packed component during transit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-1
 SP-2
INDEX INDEX 10 INDEX 11 INDEX 12
● 副走査部 ● 制御部 ●ケーブル
SUB SCANNNG UNIT CONTROLLER CABLE
INDEX 01 INDEX 02 INDEX 03
● カバー ● フレーム ● カセッテセット部
COVER FRAME CASETTE SET UNIT

INDEX 13 INDEX 14 INDEX 15

● 回路図 ● 部品番号検索表 ● ネジ・座金類の表示
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM PARTS NOS. SEARCH 記号一覧表
INDEX 04 INDEX 05 INDEX 06 TABLE TABLE OF SCREWS /
● フィードロード搬送部 ● 幅寄搬送部 ● 後搬送部 WASHERS INDICATION
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR SIDE-POSITIONING AFTER SCANNING SYMBOLS
CONVEYOR CONVEYOR

INDEX 16
● 消耗品一覧
LIST OF QUICK WEARING
INDEX 07 INDEX 08 INDEX 09 PARTS
● 消去搬送部 ● 光学部 ● 集光部
ERASURE CONVEYOR SCANNING OPTICS UNIT LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-2
 SP-3

01A 01A
カバー 1 カバー 1
COVER 1 COVER 1

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 343N0048 フック Hook 2
E 2 350Y1670 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
E 3.1 350Y1699 カバー Cover 1 Except for USA {MC:3.1}
E 3.2 350Y1700 カバー Cover 1 For USA {MC:3.1}
E 4 350N2707C カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
D 5 376N0238 エアフィルタ Air Filter 4 {MC:3.2}
D 6 345N1683 ルーバ Louver 4 {MC:3.2}
E 7 350N1675 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
E 8 350Y1676 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
D 9 113Y1702B ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 LED4 {MC:5.9}
E 10 356N9255B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.9}
E 11 357N1468D 台 Base 1 {MC:3.3}
A 12 603Y0064A フィルタ Filter 1 NO4 {MC:5.9}
E 13 356N9256B ブラケット Bracket 2
D 14 394S0036 永久磁石 Magnet 7
D 15 317N1065C キャップ Cap 4
D 16 332N0625 キャップ Cap 3
E 17 345Y0296 遮板 Light Protect Plate 1 {MC:3.1}
E 18 345Y0299 遮板 Light Protect Plate 1 {MC:3.1}
E 19 350N2059A カバー Cover 10
E 20 356N9257C ブラケット Bracket 2
E 21 356Y0299 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:3.1}
D 22 382N1636A テープ Tape 7
E 23 356N9462A ブラケット Bracket 1
E 24 405N3068A 銘板 Label 1
E 25 405N3060A 銘板 Label 1

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-3
 SP-4

01B 01B
カバー 2 カバー 2
COVER 2 COVER 2

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 350Y1680 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
E 2 350Y1682 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
E 3 350N2059A カバー Cover 21
E 4 350Y1681 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
E 5 350N2763B カバー Cover 1
E 6 350N2738C カバー Cover 1
E 7 405N2505 銘板 Label 1
E 8 350N2731A カバー Cover 1
D 9 376N0238 エアフィルタ Air Filter 4 {MC:3.2}
D 10 376N0234 メカニカルフィルタ Mechanical Filter 1 {MC:3.2}
D 11 345N1683 ルーバ Louver 4 {MC:3.2}
E 12 350Y1677 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
E 13 350Y1678 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}
E 14 350Y1679 カバー Cover 1 {MC:3.1}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-4
 SP-5

02A 02A
フレーム 1 フレーム 1
FRAME 1 FRAME 1

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 367S1104 キャスタ Caster 4 −
D 2 367S2059 脚 Adjuster Assembly 4 −
E 3 356N9404C ブラケット Bracket 1 −
E 4 356N9252B ブラケット Bracket 2 −
D 5 382N1591A テープ Tape 2 −
D 6 382N1590A テープ Tape 2 −
D 7 363Y0478A ガイド板 Guide plate 2 −
D 8 387N0131B 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 2 −
D 9 387N0130D 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 2 −
E 10 350N2782B カバー Cover 1 −
D 11 382N1623 テープ Tape 2 −
D 12 382N1621 テープ Tape 6 −
D 13 382N1624 テープ Tape 2 −
D 14 382N1622 テープ Tape 2 −
E 15 356N9202A ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:5.2}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-5
 SP-6

02B 02B
フレーム 2 フレーム 2
FRAME 2 FRAME 2

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
Compression Coil
D 1 388N1211A 圧縮コイルバネ 1 L ≒ 25mm {MC:4.13}
Spring
E 2 319N4037A 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:4.13}
D 3 363Y0477 ガイド板 Guide plate 2 −
E 4 356N9294B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.12}
E 5 364S0005 ガード Guard 1 {MC:4.2}
D 6 113Y1466 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 SG1 {MC:4.11}
E 7 356N9295B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.11}
D 8 113Y1466 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 SG2 {MC:4.12}
D 9 387N0131B 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 4 −
D 10 387N0130D 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 4 −
CR 11 125N0124D 電源 (PSU17A) Power Supply (PSU17A) 1 {MC:4.1}
D 12 128N0067 ブレーカ Breaker 1 {MC:4.3}
C 13 352N0605A パネル Panel 1 {MC:4.3}
C 14 352N0602A パネル Panel 1 −
C 15 352N0610A パネル Panel 1 −
D 16 119S0008 電動ファン Fan 1 {MC:4.2}
D 17 120S3415 ソケット Socket 1 {MC:4.4}
AT 18 137S1276 ヒューズ FUSE 1 48V/1.6A {MC:14.1}
E 19 319N3999B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:4.13}
C 20 352N0606C パネル Panel 1 {MC:4.4}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-6
 SP-7

02C 02C
フレーム 3 フレーム 3
FRAME 3 FRAME 3

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 375N0099 シール Seal 46 −
E 2 347N1841A スペーサ Spacer 2 −
E 3 356N9222B ブラケット Bracket 1 −
E 4 356N9187A ブラケット Bracket 1 −
E 5 350N2725D カバー Cover 1 −

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-7
 SP-8

03A 03A
カセッテセット部 1 カセッテセット部 1
CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 CASSETTE SET UNIT 1

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 4 SA6, 12, 18, 24 {MC:5.27}
D 2 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 4 SA1, 7, 13, 19 {MC:5.17}
E 3 341N1104 アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.14}
E 4 345N1668D 遮板 Light Protect Plate 3 {MC:5.7}
E 5 345N1669C 遮板 Light Protect Plate 1 {MC:5.5}
E 6 350N2706B カバー Cover 4 {MC:5.13}
E 7 356N9445 ブラケット Bracket 4 −
E 8 356N9233 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.14}
E 9 356N9388A ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.12}
E 10 356N9408 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.12}
D 11 363N2499 ガイド Guide 2 {MC:5.14}
D 12 387N0130D 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 8 {MC:5.10}
D 13 388N2447B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 33mm {MC:5.14}
D 14 388N3081B ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 4 {MC:5.7}
D 15 398N0067B シャッタ Shutter 4 {MC:5.7}
E 16 405N0186 銘板 Label 3 {MC:5.1}
D 17 852Y0075 読取り部 Bar Code Reader 4 BCRA1, 2, 3, 4 {MC:5.12}
D 18 113Y1702B ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 3 LED1, 2, 3 {MC:5.8}
E 19 350N2785C カバー Cover 3 {MC:5.8}
E 20 356N9161D ブラケット Bracket 3 {MC:5.8}
E 21 356N9255B ブラケット Bracket 3 {MC:5.8}
E 22 356N9368B ブラケット Bracket 3 {MC:5.8}
E 23 357N1466A 台 Base 3 {MC:5.8}
E 24 357N1467A 台 Base 3 {MC:5.8}
E 25 357N1479A 台 Base 3 {MC:5.8}
E 26 357N1480B 台 Base 3 {MC:5.8}
A 27 603Y0061A フィルタ Filter 1 NO1 {MC:5.8}
A 28 603Y0062A フィルタ Filter 1 NO2 {MC:5.8}
A 29 603Y0063B フィルタ Filter 1 NO3 {MC:5.8}
E 30 405N3060A 銘板 Label 3 −

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-8
 SP-9

03B 03B
カセッテセット部 2 カセッテセット部 2
CASSETTE SET UNIT 2 CASSETTE SET UNIT 2

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 128S0392 スイッチ Switch 4 SA5, 11, 17, 23 {MC:5.20}
A 2 133Y1031A 電動ポンプ Pump 4 PA1, 2, 3, 4 {MC:5.36}
D 3 134Y0056B 電磁バルブ Solenoid Valve 4 SVA1, 2, 3, 4 {MC:5.35}
D 4 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 4 SA4, 10, 16, 22 {MC:5.19}
E 5 346N1260E 補助板 Plate Support 4 {MC:5.31}
E 6 356N8168A ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.35}
E 7 356N9149C ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.20}
E 8 356N9150A ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.15}
D 9 370N0395B ホース Hose 4 {MC:5.15}
D 10 372S0049 管継手 Joint 4 {MC:5.15}
D 11 372S0050 管継手 Joint 4 {MC:5.15}
D 12 372S0053 管継手 Joint 4 {MC:5.15}
D 13 316S2080 止め具 Clamp 4 {MC:5.35}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-9
 SP-10

03C 03C
カセッテセット部 3 カセッテセット部 3
CASSETTE SET UNIT 3 CASSETTE SET UNIT 3

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 315G311017 止め輪 Snap Ring 8 {MC:5.22}
E 2 316S0146 止め具 Clamp 4 {MC:5.21}
E 3 319N3918 軸 Shaft 4 {MC:5.33}
D 4 322N0037D すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 8 {MC:5.32}
D 5 322SF149 軸受 Bearing 8 {MC:5.33}
D 6 322SF178 軸受 Bearing 16 {MC:5.32}
D 7 327N1103610D 平歯車 Spur Gear 8 {MC:5.33}
E 8 341N0937B アーム Arm 8 {MC:5.6}
E 9 341N1060L アーム Arm 4 {MC:5.32}
E 10 356N9464 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.22}
E 11 356N9151E ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.22}
D 12 370N0255B ホース Hose 4 {MC:5.22}
D 13 372S0049 管継手 Joint 8 {MC:5.22}
D 14 372S0050 管継手 Joint 8 {MC:5.22}
A 15 375S0040 パッキン Packing 8 {MC:5.22}
A 16 392N0009A 吸着盤 Suction Cup 8 {MC:5.22}
E 17 356N9477B ガイド Bracket 4 {MC:5.41}
D 18 384N0081A テープ Tape 4 {MC:5.40}
D 19 384N0082 テープ Tape 4 {MC:5.40}
D 20 384N0083 テープ Tape 4 {MC:5.40}
E 21 356Y0303B ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.41}
E 22 356Y0302B ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.41}
E 23 341N1117 アーム Arm 4 {MC:5.42}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-10
 SP-11

03D 03D
カセッテセット部 4 カセッテセット部 4
CASSETTE SET UNIT 4 CASSETTE SET UNIT 4

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 106Y0005B 電磁クラッチ Electromagnetic Clutch 4 CLA1, 2, 3, 4 {MC:5.16}
D 2 118SX167 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 4 MA1, 2, 3, 4 {MC:5.11}
D 3 322N0038A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 8 {MC:5.24}
D 4 322SY065 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 {MC:5.24}
D 5 327N0144A 平歯車 Spur Gear 4 {MC:5.24}
D 6 327N0173A 平歯車 Spur Gear 4 {MC:5.24}
D 7 327N0193A 平歯車 Spur Gear 4 {MC:5.24}
D 8 327N0194 平歯車 Spur Gear 4 {MC:5.24}
D 9 327N1101904 平歯車 Spur Gear 4 {MC:5.24}
D 10 327N1103802 平歯車 Spur Gear 4 {MC:5.24}
D 11 334N0063A ローラ Roller 4 {MC:5.24}
E 12 356N6831C ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.24}
E 13 356N9142B ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.24}
E 14 356N9248 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.24}
D 15 388N2485A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 8 L ≒ 106mm {MC:5.24}
D 16 360N0360A ハウジング Housing 8 {MC:5.24}
D 17 360N0363 ハウジング Housing 8 {MC:5.24}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-11
 SP-12

03E 03E
カセッテセット部 5 カセッテセット部 5
CASSETTE SET UNIT 5 CASSETTE SET UNIT 5

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 319N3962 軸 Shaft 4 {MC:5.39}
D 2 322SY066 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 24 {MC:5.39}
D 3 332N0521B ストッパ Stopper 8 {MC:5.39}
D 4 332N0522E ストッパ Stopper 4 {MC:5.26}
D 5 332N0523E ストッパ Stopper 4 {MC:5.26}
D 6 332N0613A ストッパ Stopper 4 {MC:5.39}
E 7 346N1259C 補助板 Plate Support 4 {MC:5.25}
E 8 356N9143B ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.39}
E 9 356N9144 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.39}
E 10 356N9145A ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.39}
E 11 356N9146 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.39}
E 12 356N9147B ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.39}
D 13 363N2076C ガイド Guide 8 {MC:5.39}
D 14 363N2477 ガイド Guide 4 {MC:5.39}
D 15 363N2478B ガイド板 Guide plate 4 {MC:5.28}
D 16 363N2479 ガイド板 Guide plate 4 {MC:5.28}
Compression Coil
D 17 388N1124 圧縮コイルバネ 12 L ≒ 64mm {MC:5.39}
Spring
D 18 107Y0183 ソレノイド Solenoid 4 SOLA1, 2, 3, 4 {MC:5.34}
D 19 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 4 SA2, 8, 14, 20 {MC:5.29}
D 20 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 4 SA3, 9, 15, 21 {MC:5.18}
E 21 319Y1161A 軸 Shaft 4 {MC:5.37}
E 22 319N3602B 軸 Shaft 4 {MC:5.30}
D 23 322SY066 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 8 {MC:5.37}
D 24 322SY066 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 8 {MC:5.30}
D 25 334N3604 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 24 {MC:5.23}
E 26 341N1103A アーム Arm 4 {MC:5.37}
E 27 356N6825D ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.30}
E 28 356N6826B ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.30}
E 29 356N6829C ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.37}
E 30 356N9471 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.34}
E 31 356N9387 ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:5.18}
D 32 363N1788A ガイド Guide 4 {MC:5.30}
D 33 363N2065D ガイド板 Guide plate 12 {MC:5.23}
E 34 366N0059A アクチュエータ Actuator 4 {MC:5.29}
Compression Coil
D 35 388N1158A 圧縮コイルバネ 4 {MC:5.30}
Spring
D 36 388N2449 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 4 L ≒ 34mm {MC:5.37}
D 37 388N3098 ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 4 {MC:5.29}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-12
 SP-13

04A 04A
フィードロード搬送部 1 フィードロード搬送部 1
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 1 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 1

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 356N8928B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.12}
E 2 356N8929B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.11}
D 3 327N1123601B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:6.6}
E 4 339N0022A ハンドル Handle 1 {MC:6.6}
E 5 356N8931A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.6}
D 6 322SY232 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:6.6}
E 7 319N3662A 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:6.6}
D 8 327N1122416B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.6}
Compression Coil
D 9 388N1213A 圧縮コイルバネ 1 L ≒ 20mm {MC:6.6}
Spring
E 10 356N8930A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.6}
E 11 356N9134 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.28}
E 12 309S0008 スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:6.6}
Compression Coil
D 13 388N1215 圧縮コイルバネ 2 L ≒ 13mm {MC:6.6}
Spring
D 14 322SY060 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:6.6}
D 15 327N1123203 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.12}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-13
 SP-14

04B 04B
フィードロード搬送部 2 フィードロード搬送部 2
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 2 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 2

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N1123601B 平歯車 Spur Gear 5 {MC:6.13}
D 2 327S1122403A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.13}
D 3 327N1127201A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:6.13}
D 4 327N0188A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:6.13}
D 5 118SX167 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MB1 {MC:6.16}
D 6 327N1121610A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.16}
D 7 118SX167 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MB2 {MC:6.17}
D 8 327N1121610A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.17}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-14
 SP-15

04C 04C
フィードロード搬送部 3 フィードロード搬送部 3
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 3 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 3

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 356N9133A ブラケット Bracket 3
E 2 356N9135 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 3 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 3 SB7, 8, 9 {MC:6.3}
E 4 356N9188 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.10}
E 5 356N9138A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.10}
D 6 329N0156B カム Cam 3 {MC:6.9}
D 7 327N0188A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.18}
D 8 327Y0176A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.9}
E 9 356N9186A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.1}
D 10 113Y1466 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 4 SB1, 2, 3, 4 {MC:6.2}
E 11 346N1251A 補助板 Plate Support 1 {MC:6.9}
D 12 328N0045A 爪 Claw 3 {MC:6.9}
D 13 327N0190B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:6.9}
D 14 118SX167 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MB3 {MC:6.18}
D 15 327N1121610A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.18}
D 16 329N0165A カム Cam 1 {MC:6.10}
D 17 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SB10 {MC:6.4}
D 18 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SB11 {MC:6.5}
D 19 113Y1466 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 SB5 {MC:6.14}
D 20 113Y1466 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 SB6 {MC:6.15}
D 21 327Y0176A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.10}
D 22 328N0045A 爪 Claw 1 {MC:6.10}
E 23 356N9133A ブラケット Bracket 1

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-15
 SP-16

04D 04D
フィードロード搬送部 4 フィードロード搬送部 4
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 4 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 4

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 12 {MC:6.23}
D 2 388N2517 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 8 L ≒ 90mm {MC:6.23}
D 3 321N0002 ころがり軸受アセンブリ Ball Bearing Assembly 16 {MC:6.23}
D 4 334N3580B 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 18 {MC:6.19}
E 5 356N9136B ブラケット Bracket 3 {MC:6.19}
D 6 388N5269 板バネ Leaf Spring 3 {MC:6.22}
D 7 334Y3214A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 4 {MC:6.23}
D 8 334N3577A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 4 {MC:6.23}
D 9 334Y2244A 樹脂ローラアセンブリ Resin Roller Assembly 3 {MC:6.22}
D 10 387N0168 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 3 {MC:6.19}
D 11 334N3580B 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 6 {MC:6.20}
E 12 356N9136B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.20}
D 13 387N0168 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 {MC:6.20}
D 14 334N3580B 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 3 {MC:6.22}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-16
 SP-17

04E 04E
フィードロード搬送部 5 フィードロード搬送部 5
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 5 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 5

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N2518 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 3 L ≒ 42mm {MC:6.25}
E 2 341N1049 アーム Arm 3 {MC:6.25}
D 3 322N0032 軸受 Bearing 3 {MC:6.25}
D 4 322N2001A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 3 {MC:6.25}
E 5 363N2467C ガイド Guide 4 {MC:6.27}
D 6 363Y0433 ガイド Guide 3 {MC:6.26}
D 7 363N2227B ガイド Guide 1 {MC:6.28}
D 8 363Y0470 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:6.26}
D 9 388N2518 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 42mm {MC:6.24}
E 10 341N1049 アーム Arm 1 {MC:6.24}
D 11 322N0032 軸受 Bearing 1 {MC:6.24}
D 12 322N2001A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:6.24}
D 13 334N2387A 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 1 {MC:6.24}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-17
 SP-18

04F 04F
フィードロード搬送部 6 フィードロード搬送部 6
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 6 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 6

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 363Y0450 ガイド Guide 4
D 2 334N3577A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2 {MC:6.29}
D 3 334N3578A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2 {MC:6.29}
D 4 321N0002 ころがり軸受アセンブリ Ball Bearing Assembly 8 {MC:6.29}
D 5 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 6 {MC:6.29}
D 6 388N2517 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 4 L ≒ 90mm {MC:6.29}
D 7 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:6.30}
D 8 388N2517 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 90mm {MC:6.30}
D 9 321N0002 ころがり軸受アセンブリ Ball Bearing Assembly 4 {MC:6.30}
D 10 334N3578A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.30}
D 11 334N3577A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.30}
D 12 334N3577A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.31}
D 13 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:6.31}
D 14 388N2517 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 90mm {MC:6.31}
D 15 321N0002 ころがり軸受アセンブリ Ball Bearing Assembly 4 {MC:6.31}
D 16 334N3578A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.31}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-18
 SP-19

04G 04G
フィードロード搬送部 7 フィードロード搬送部 7
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 7 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 7

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:6.32}
D 2 388N2517 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 90mm {MC:6.32}
D 3 321N0002 ころがり軸受アセンブリ Ball Bearing Assembly 4 {MC:6.32}
D 4 322SF229 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:6.7}
E 5 362N0720A 受 Box 2 {MC:6.7}
D 6 334N5015B ブラシローラ Brush Roller 2 {MC:6.7}
E 7 356N9137 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 8 334N3577A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.32}
D 9 334N3578A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.32}
D 10 363Y0456 ガイド Guide 1
D 11 363Y0449 ガイド Guide 1
D 12 322SP203 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:6.7}
D 13 332N0620 ストッパ Stopper 1 {MC:6.7}
D 14 327N0208 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.7}
ブラシローラ
D 15 334Y5007 Brush Roller Assembly 1 {MC:6.7}
アセンブリ
D 16 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:6.34}
D 17 388N2517 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 90mm {MC:6.34}
D 18 321N0002 ころがり軸受アセンブリ Ball Bearing Assembly 4 {MC:6.34}
D 19 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:6.7}
D 20 334N3577A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.34}
D 21 334N3578A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:6.34}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-19
 SP-20

04H 04H
フィードロード搬送部 8 フィードロード搬送部 8
FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 8 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 8

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N2520 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 80mm {MC:6.33}
E 2 341N1050B アーム Arm 1 {MC:6.33}
D 3 322N2002 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:6.33}
D 4 363Y0455B ガイド Guide 1 {MC:6.35}
D 5 322SY054 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:6.33}
D 6 363Y0471 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:6.33}
E 7 405N0186 銘板 Label 2
E 8 356N9184B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 9 356N9185B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 10 356N9190 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 11 334N2387A 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 1 {MC:6.33}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-20
 SP-21

05A 05A
幅寄搬送部 1 幅寄搬送部 1
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1 SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 334Y2244A 樹脂ローラアセンブリ Resin Roller Assembly 9 {MC:7.22}
E 2 356N8932B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.22}
E 3 356N9166C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.22}
E 4 356N9230A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.22}
D 5 334N3580B 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 9 {MC:7.22}
D 6 388N5269 板バネ Leaf Spring 9 {MC:7.22}
D 7 118SX171 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MC4 {MC:7.11}
D 8 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC4 {MC:7.6}
E 9 319N3963 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:7.29}
D 10 322FC308E すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:7.29}
D 11 329N0162A カム Cam 2 {MC:7.30}
E 12 356N9155A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.29}
E 13 356N9158D ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.11}
E 14 356N9159B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.6}
D 15 363Y0460 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.30}
D 16 388N2523 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 22mm {MC:7.30}
D 17 363N2558 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.22}
E 18 356N9422 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 19 387N0137C 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
D 20 387N0119C 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
D 21 334F2932A 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 4 {MC:7.29}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-21
 SP-22

05B 05B
幅寄搬送部 2 幅寄搬送部 2
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2 SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 113Y1466 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 SC3 {MC:7.5}
D 2 118SX167 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MC2 {MC:7.9}
D 3 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC2 {MC:7.4}
E 4 319N3940 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:7.21}
D 5 322SP214 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:7.19}
D 6 327N0143C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.3}
D 7 327N0189A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.9}
D 8 327N0194 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.3}
D 9 327N1103802 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.3}
D 10 329N0145A カム Cam 1 {MC:7.19}
D 11 329N0148B カム Cam 1 {MC:7.19}
D 12 329N0149A カム Cam 1 {MC:7.19}
D 13 329N0157 カム Cam 1 {MC:7.19}
E 14 342N0110A レバー Lever 1 {MC:7.19}
E 15 342N0111A レバー Lever 1 {MC:7.19}
E 16 347N1625A スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.19}
E 17 347N1848 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.19}
E 18 356N9157A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.3}
E 19 356N9167A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.14}
D 20 328Y0007 爪 Claw 2 {MC:7.14}
D 21 388N2448A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 36mm {MC:7.14}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-22
 SP-23

05C 05C
幅寄搬送部 3 幅寄搬送部 3
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3 SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 118SX167 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MC3 {MC:7.10}
E 2 347N1848 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.20}
D 3 388N2474A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 60mm {MC:7.7}
D 4 322SP203 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.15}
D 5 322SP203 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.7}
D 6 322SP214 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:7.20}
D 7 322SY059 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:7.16}
D 8 322SY063 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:7.15}
D 9 322SY122 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:7.16}
D 10 323S3069 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 {MC:7.7}
D 11 324N1026A 平ベルト車 Flat Belt Wheel 1 {MC:7.15}
D 12 324N1032A 平ベルト車 Flat Belt Wheel 1 {MC:7.7}
D 13 324N3164A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 2 {MC:7.7}
D 14 324N3165A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 1 {MC:7.10}
D 15 327N0198 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.16}
D 16 327N0199 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.16}
D 17 327N1123601B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.16}
D 18 327N1124802 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.17}
D 19 329N0145A カム Cam 1 {MC:7.20}
D 20 329N0148B カム Cam 1 {MC:7.20}
D 21 329N0149A カム Cam 1 {MC:7.20}
D 22 329N0157 カム Cam 1 {MC:7.20}
E 23 341N0944C アーム Arm 1 {MC:7.15}
E 24 342N0109 レバー Lever 1 {MC:7.16}
E 25 342N0111A レバー Lever 1 {MC:7.20}
E 26 342N0129A レバー Lever 1 {MC:7.20}
E 27 347N1625A スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.20}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-23
 SP-24

05D 05D
幅寄搬送部 4 幅寄搬送部 4
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4 SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N2458A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 62mm {MC:7.23}
D 2 388N2524A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 80mm {MC:7.23}
D 3 388N2546 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 138mm {MC:7.25}
D 4 322SF230 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:7.25}
D 5 322SF230 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.26}
D 6 322SF230 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.27}
D 7 322SP205 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 6 {MC:7.25}
D 8 322SP205 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:7.26}
D 9 322SP205 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.27}
D 10 322SP206 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.25}
D 11 322SP206 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.27}
D 12 334N3581B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2 {MC:7.25}
D 13 334N3582B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:7.26}
D 14 334N3582B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:7.27}
E 15 347N1624A スペーサ Spacer 4 {MC:7.25}
E 16 347N1624A スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:7.26}
E 17 347N1624A スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:7.27}
E 18 347N1846 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.27}
D 19 360N0476 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:7.25}
D 20 360N0476 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:7.27}
D 21 360N0479 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:7.25}
D 22 360N0479 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:7.26}
D 23 363Y0488 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.28}
D 24 388N2536A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 117mm {MC:7.26}
D 25 388N2537A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 159mm {MC:7.25}
D 26 388N2537A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 159mm {MC:7.26}
D 27 321N0002 ころがり軸受アセンブリ Ball Bearing Assembly 4 {MC:7.23}
D 28 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:7.23}
D 29 334N3577A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:7.23}
D 30 334N3578A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:7.24}
D 31 363Y0453 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.24}
D 32 363Y0462 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.23}
E 33 405N0186 銘板 Label 1

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-24
 SP-25

05E 05E
幅寄搬送部 5 幅寄搬送部 5
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5 SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 118SX164 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MC1 {MC:7.8}
D 2 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC1 {MC:7.2}
E 3 319N3623B 軸 Shaft 2 {MC:7.13}
E 4 319N3939 軸 Shaft 2 {MC:7.13}
D 5 322N0050 軸受 Bearing 1 {MC:7.13}
D 6 322N0051 軸受 Bearing 1 {MC:7.13}
D 7 322N0052 軸受 Bearing 2 {MC:7.13}
D 8 322SY063 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 {MC:7.13}
D 9 322SY093 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 {MC:7.13}
D 10 322SY232 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:7.13}
D 11 327N0139B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.12}
D 12 327N0140A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.12}
D 13 327N0173A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.8}
D 14 328N0050A 爪 Claw 1 {MC:7.13}
D 15 328N0051A 爪 Claw 1 {MC:7.13}
D 16 334N0041A ローラ Roller 2 {MC:7.13}
E 17 341N1065B アーム Arm 1 {MC:7.12}
E 18 353N0082A シャーシ Chassis 1 {MC:7.12}
E 19 356N8926B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.13}
E 20 356N9164A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.2}
D 21 363N2073B ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.13}
D 22 363N2115 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.13}
Compression Coil
D 23 388N1223 圧縮コイルバネ 2 L ≒ 64mm {MC:7.13}
Spring
D 24 388N2447B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 33mm {MC:7.13}
E 25 356N9156C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.7}
E 26 356N9191 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.7}
D 27 363Y0461 ガイド Guide 1
E 28 405N0186 銘板 Label 2
D 29 852Y0074 読取り部 Bar Code Reader 1 BCRC1 {MC:4.7}
E 30 315S0013 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:7.13}
D 31 347N0706 スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:7.13}
E 32 328N0053A 爪 Craw 2 {MC:7.13}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-25
 SP-26

06A 06A
後搬送部 1 後搬送部 1
AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 1 AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 1

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 118SX063 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MD2 {MC:8.13}
D 2 327N1121610A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.13}
D 3 327N1127201A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.12}
D 4 327N0197 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.12}
D 5 327N1123601B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:8.7}
E 6 356N9118 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:8.12}
D 7 327N0199 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.7}
D 8 327N0198 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.7}
D 9 324N3164A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 2 {MC:8.3}
D 10 324N1026A 平ベルト車 Flat Belt Wheel 1 {MC:8.3}
D 11 322SP203 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:8.3}
D 12 324N3098A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 1 {MC:8.3}
D 13 322SY063 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:8.2}
E 14 341N1061 アーム Arm 1 {MC:8.2}
D 15 388N2525 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 40mm {MC:8.2}
E 16 356N9162 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:8.7}
E 17 342N0109 レバー Lever 1 {MC:8.7}
D 18 322SY059 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:8.7}
D 19 322SY122 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:8.7}
D 20 323S3271 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 {MC:8.3}
D 21 324N1032A 平ベルト車 Flat Belt Wheel 1 {MC:8.3}
D 22 327N1123601B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.12}
D 23 322SP203 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:8.2}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-26
 SP-27

06B 06B
後搬送部 2 後搬送部 2
AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 2 AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 2

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 319N3969 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:8.21}
D 2 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SD1 {MC:8.5}
D 3 327N0143C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.4}
D 4 327N0195A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.21}
D 5 356N9165 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:8.21}
D 6 322SP214 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:8.21}
D 7 327S1103002A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.4}
D 8 329N0158A カム Cam 1 {MC:8.21}
D 9 327N0196B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.21}
D 10 327N0189A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.9}
D 11 118SX167 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MD1 {MC:8.9}
E 12 356N9117B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:8.4}
E 13 347N1834 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:8.6}
E 14 342N0130 レバー Lever 1 {MC:8.6}
D 15 329N0148B カム Cam 2 {MC:8.6}
D 16 113Y1466 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 SD2 {MC:8.10}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-27
 SP-28

06C 06C
後搬送部 3 後搬送部 3
AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 3 AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 3

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N0195A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.21}
D 2 356N9165 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:8.21}
D 3 322SP214 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:8.21}
D 4 329N0158A カム Cam 1 {MC:8.21}
D 5 327N0196B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:8.21}
E 6 347N1834 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:8.8}
E 7 356N9111 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:8.11}
D 8 388N5269 板バネ Leaf Spring 3 {MC:8.11}
D 9 334N3580B 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 3 {MC:8.11}
E 10 342N0131 レバー Lever 1 {MC:8.8}
D 11 329N0149A カム Cam 2 {MC:8.8}
D 12 334Y2244A 樹脂ローラアセンブリ Resin Roller Assembly 3 {MC:8.11}
D 13 363N2535B ガイド板 Guide Plate 1 {MC:8.17}
D 14 363Y0494 ガイド板 Guide Plate 1 {MC:8.14}
E 15 319N4059A 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:8.14}
D 16 322SY298 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:8.14}
E 17 341N1116A アーム Arm 2 {MC:8.14}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-28
 SP-29

06D 06D
後搬送部 4 後搬送部 4
AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 4 AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 4

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N2472B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 3 L ≒ 162mm {MC:8.15}
D 2 322SP205 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 6 {MC:8.15}
E 3 347N1624A スペーサ Spacer 4 {MC:8.15}
D 4 322SF230 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:8.15}
D 5 360N0476 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:8.15}
D 6 360N0479 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:8.15}
D 7 322SP206 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:8.15}
E 8 347N1846 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:8.15}
D 9 388N2473B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 117mm {MC:8.15}
D 10 334N3581B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:8.15}
D 11 334N3582B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:8.15}
D 12 363Y0489 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:8.19}
D 13 334N3581B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:8.16}
D 14 334N3582B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:8.16}
D 15 388N2472B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 4 L ≒ 162mm {MC:8.16}
D 16 322SP205 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 6 {MC:8.16}
E 17 347N1624A スペーサ Spacer 4 {MC:8.16}
D 18 322SF230 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:8.16}
D 19 360N0476 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:8.16}
D 20 360N0479 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:8.16}
D 21 322SP206 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:8.16}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-29
 SP-30

06E 06E
後搬送部 5 後搬送部 5
AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 5 AFTER SCANNING CONVEYOR 5

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:8.17}
D 2 388N2524A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 80mm {MC:8.17}
D 3 321N0002 ころがり軸受アセンブリ Ball Bearing Assembly 4 {MC:8.17}
D 4 363N2483E ガイド Guide 1 {MC:8.20}
D 5 334N3578A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:8.17}
D 6 334N3577A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:8.17}
D 7 388N2458A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 62mm {MC:8.17}
E 8 405N0186 銘板 Label 3
D 9 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:8.18}
D 10 388N2524A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 80mm {MC:8.18}
D 11 321N0002 ころがり軸受アセンブリ Ball Bearing Assembly 4 {MC:8.18}
D 12 334N3578A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:8.18}
D 13 334N3577A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:8.18}
D 14 388N2458A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 62mm {MC:8.18}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-30
 SP-31

07A 07A
消去搬送部 1 消去搬送部 1
ERASURE CONVEYOR 1 ERASURE CONVEYOR 1

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 118SX063 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 ME1 {MC:9.37}
D 2 322SP203 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 6 {MC:9.31}
D 3 322SY059 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:9.30}
D 4 324N3098A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 2 {MC:9.31}
D 5 324N3164A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 2 {MC:9.27}
D 6 327N0198 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.28}
D 7 327N0199 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.28}
D 8 327N1121610A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.37}
D 9 327N1123601B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.28}
E 10 356N9281 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.37}
E 11 356N9292A ブラケット Bracket 1
E 12 356N9346 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.30}
D 13 363N2476 ガイド Guide 4 {MC:9.24}
D 14 407Y0027 反射板ガイド Reflective Plate 1 {MC:9.24}
D 15 323S3097 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 {MC:9.27}
D 16 323S3223 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 {MC:9.26}
D 17 322SY122 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:9.28}
D 18 388N2545 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 61mm {MC:9.26}
D 19 363Y0468A ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.33}
D 20 363Y0467A ガイド Guide 1
E 21 356N9235D ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.22}
D 22 388N5269 板バネ Leaf Spring 3 {MC:9.22}
D 23 334N3580B 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 3 {MC:9.22}
D 24 334Y2244A 樹脂ローラアセンブリ Resin Roller Assembly 3 {MC:9.22}
D 25 363Y0480 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.34}
E 26 356N9348 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.31}
D 27 324N1026A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 1 {MC:9.31}
D 28 324N3164A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 1 {MC:9.28}
D 29 324N3164A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 1 {MC:9.26}
D 30 324N3164A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 1 {MC:9.41}
E 31 356N9260B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 32 356N9442 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 33 382N1634 テープ Tape 1

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-31
 SP-32

07B 07B
消去搬送部 2 消去搬送部 2
ERASURE CONVEYOR 2 ERASURE CONVEYOR 2

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SE5 {MC:9.21}
D 2 324N3164A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 2 {MC:9.25}
D 3 327N0143C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.29}
D 4 327N0194 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:9.29}
E 5 356N9291B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.20}
D 6 322N2003A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:9.30}
E 7 347N1834 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:9.30}
E 8 319N3969 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:9.45}
D 9 322N2003A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:9.29}
D 10 322SP214 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:9.45}
D 11 327N0195A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:9.45}
D 12 327N0196B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:9.45}
D 13 329N0159A カム Cam 3 {MC:9.29}
D 14 329N0160B カム Cam 2 {MC:9.30}
D 15 329N0161B カム Cam 2 {MC:9.45}
D 16 329N0170 カム Cam 1 {MC:9.30}
E 17 342Y0023A レバー Lever 1 {MC:9.29}
E 18 342Y0024A レバー Lever 1 {MC:9.30}
E 19 347N1834 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:9.29}
E 20 356N9165 ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:9.45}
E 21 350N2835A カバー Cover 1 {MC:9.20}
D 22 323S3097 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 {MC:9.25}
D 23 322SY065 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:9.1}
D 24 327N1103802 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.29}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-32
 SP-33

07C 07C
消去搬送部 3 消去搬送部 3
ERASURE CONVEYOR 3 ERASURE CONVEYOR 3

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 118SX167 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 ME3 {MC:9.39}
D 2 118SX167 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 ME2 {MC:9.38}
D 3 327N0173A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.38}
D 4 327N0189A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.39}
E 5 356N9261B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.38}
D 6 363Y0482A ガイド Guide 2 {MC:9.36}
D 7 388N2448A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 36mm {MC:9.36}
D 8 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SE4 {MC:9.19}
E 9 319N3623B 軸 Shaft 2 {MC:9.35}
E 10 319N3939 軸 Shaft 2 {MC:9.35}
D 11 322N0050 軸受 Bearing 1 {MC:9.35}
D 12 322N0051 軸受 Bearing 1 {MC:9.35}
D 13 322N0052 軸受 Bearing 2 {MC:9.35}
D 14 322SY063 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 {MC:9.35}
D 15 322SY093 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 {MC:9.35}
D 16 322SY232 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:9.35}
D 17 327N0140A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:9.35}
D 18 327N0194 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:9.35}
D 19 328N0041C 爪 Claw 1 {MC:9.35}
D 20 328N0052 爪 Claw 1 {MC:9.35}
D 21 334N0041A ローラ Roller 2 {MC:9.35}
E 22 341Y0324A アーム Arm 1 {MC:9.35}
E 23 353N0090A シャーシ Chassis 1 {MC:9.35}
E 24 356N8926B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.35}
D 25 363N2073B ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.35}
D 26 363N2115 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.35}
Compression Coil
D 27 388N1223 圧縮コイルバネ 2 L ≒ 57mm {MC:9.35}
Spring
D 28 388N2447B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 32mm {MC:9.35}
D 29 315S0013 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:9.35}
D 30 384N0077 こすり部材 Tape 1 {MC:9.35}
D 31 384N0076A こすり部材 Tape 1 {MC:9.35}
D 32 346N1146A スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:9.35}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-33
 SP-34

07D 07D
消去搬送部 4 消去搬送部 4
ERASURE CONVEYOR 4 ERASURE CONVEYOR 4

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 346N1210 補助板 Plate Support 1
D 2 322SF229 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 12 {MC:9.40}
D 3 388N2549 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 71mm {MC:9.41}
D 4 322SP205 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 24 {MC:9.40}
D 5 334N3589A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:9.40}
D 6 334N3591B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 3 {MC:9.40}
D 7 334N3597A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:9.40}
D 8 334N3608A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:9.40}
E 9 347N1624A スペーサ Spacer 14 {MC:9.40}
E 10 347N1846 スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:9.27}
D 11 360N0484A ハウジング Housing 6 {MC:9.40}
D 12 360N0485A ハウジング Housing 6 {MC:9.40}
D 13 363Y0466C ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.46}
D 14 363Y0483C ガイド板 Guide Plate 1 {MC:9.43}
D 15 363Y0484A ガイド板 Guide Plate 1 {MC:9.44}
D 16 388N2531A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 4 L ≒ 78mm {MC:9.40}
D 17 388N2532A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 4 L ≒ 50mm {MC:9.40}
D 18 388N2524A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 80mm {MC:9.41}
D 19 321N0002 ころがり軸受アセンブリ Ball Bearing Assembly 4 {MC:9.41}
D 20 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:9.41}
D 21 334N3577A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:9.41}
D 22 334N3606 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:9.41}
D 23 388N2551 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 66mm {MC:9.40}
D 24 388N2552 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 62mm {MC:9.40}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-34
 SP-35

07E 07E
消去搬送部 5 消去搬送部 5
ERASURE CONVEYOR 5 ERASURE CONVEYOR 5

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 107Y0169A ソレノイド Solenoid 1 SOLE1 {MC:9.23}
D 2 113Y1466 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 SE1 {MC:9.17}
D 3 113Y1466 ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 SE2 {MC:9.18}
E 4 356N9204B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.23}
E 5 356N9205B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.23}
D 6 388N2540 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 32mm {MC:9.23}
E 7 319N4023 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:9.47}
E 8 319N4024 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:9.47}
E 9 319N4025 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:9.47}
D 10 322N2003A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:9.47}
D 11 322N2006B すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:9.47}
D 12 322N2007 軸受 Bearing 2 {MC:9.47}
D 13 322SY054 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:9.47}
E 14 341N1090A アーム Arm 1 {MC:9.47}
E 15 341N1091 アーム Arm 1 {MC:9.47}
D 16 363N2539 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.47}
D 17 388N2540 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 32mm {MC:9.47}
D 18 386N1170 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 {MC:9.47}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-35
 SP-36

07F 07F
消去搬送部 6 消去搬送部 6
ERASURE CONVEYOR 6 ERASURE CONVEYOR 6

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N2458A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 80mm {MC:9.42}
D 2 321N0002 ころがり軸受アセンブリ Ball Bearing Assembly 4 {MC:9.42}
D 3 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 3 {MC:9.42}
D 4 334N3595A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:9.42}
D 5 334N3596A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:9.42}
D 6 388N2524A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 62mm {MC:9.42}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-36
 SP-37

07G 07G
消去搬送部 7 消去搬送部 7
ERASURE CONVEYOR 7 ERASURE CONVEYOR 7

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 308S0012 特殊ネジ Screw 2 {MC:9.16}
D 2 316S3012 キャッチ Catch 1 {MC:9.16}
D 3 334Y2244A 樹脂ローラアセンブリ Resin Roller Assembly 3 {MC:9.16}
D 4 340D816796 ノブ Knob 1 {MC:9.16}
E 5 347N1730 スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:9.16}
E 6 356N9293B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.16}
D 7 363N2493A ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.16}
D 8 363Y0434A ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.16}
D 9 363Y0457 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:9.16}
D 10 388N5269 板バネ Leaf Spring 3 {MC:9.16}
D 11 334N3580B 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 3 {MC:9.16}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-37
 SP-38

07H 07H
消去搬送部 8 消去搬送部 8
ERASURE CONVEYOR 8 ERASURE CONVEYOR 8

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 119S0006 電動ファン Fan 1 FANE2 {MC:9.6}
D 2 119S0008 電動ファン Fan 1 FANE1 {MC:9.5}
E 3 356N9112B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.2}
E 4 356N9172 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.5}
E 5 356N9173C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.14}
E 6 356N9174A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.15}
E 7 356N9244C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.2}
E 8 356N9245B ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:9.4}
E 9 364N0103B ガード Guard 1 {MC:9.6}
E 10 369N0263C ダクト Duct 1 {MC:9.2}
E 11 369N0266B ダクト Duct 1 {MC:9.3}
E 12 369N0267A ダクト Duct 1 {MC:9.4}
E 13 316S0261 止め具 Clamp 3 {MC:9.14}
C 14 109N0021C 蛍光灯安定器 Lamp Stabilizer 1 INV17B {MC:9.15}
C 15 109N0020C 蛍光灯安定器 Lamp Stabilizer 1 INV17A {MC:9.14}
E 16 356N9250C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.7}
D 17 119S0006 電動ファン Fan 1 FANE3 {MC:9.7}
E 18 316S0261 止め具 Clamp 2 {MC:9.15}
48V/1.0A For
AT 19 137S1178 ヒューズ FUSE 1 {MC:14.7}
INV17A
48V/0.5A For
AT 20 137S1175 ヒューズ FUSE 3 {MC:14.7}
INV17A
48V/1.0A For
AT 21 137S1178 ヒューズ FUSE 1 {MC:14.8}
INV17B
48V/0.5A For
AT 22 137S1175 ヒューズ FUSE 1 {MC:14.8}
INV17B

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-38
 SP-39

07 I 07 I
消去搬送部 9 消去搬送部 9
ERASURE CONVEYOR 9 ERASURE CONVEYOR 9

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 115S0153 感熱スイッチ Thermo Switch 1 TSWE1 {MC:9.12}
D 2 115Y0035B サーミスタ Thermo Switch 1 THE1 {MC:9.11}
C 3 123N0007B 蛍光灯 Lamp 5 {MC:9.9}
E 4 356N9113A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.8}
E 5 356N9246 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.12}
D 6 407Y0028A 反射板 Reflective Plate 1 {MC:9.8}
D 7 407Y0029 反射板 Reflective Plate 1 {MC:9.8}
D 8 407Y0030 反射板 Reflective Plate 1 {MC:9.10}
A 9 603Y0066 フィルタ Filter 1 {MC:9.8}
E 10 120Y0091A ソケット Socket 1 {MC:9.13}
E 11 356N9247 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:9.13}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-39
 SP-40

08A 08A
光学部 光学部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT SCANNING OPTICS UNIT

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
DR 1 839Y0058B 光学部 Scanning Optics Unit 1 {MC:10.2}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-40
 SP-41

09A 09A
集光部 1 集光部 1
LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT 1 LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT 1

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 113Y1694B PMT17A PMT17A 1 {MC:11.3}
D 2 345N1664B シールド材 Shielding Tape 1 {MC:11.3}
D 3 606Y0077 集光ガイド Light-collecting Guide 1 {MC:11.1}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-41
 SP-42

09B 09B
集光部 2 集光部 2
LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT 2 LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT 2

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 113Y1695B PMR17B PMR17B 1 {MC:11.4}
D 2 345N1664B シールド材 Shielding Tape 1 {MC:11.4}
D 3 606Y0079 集光ガイド Light-collecting Guide 1 {MC:11.2}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-42
 SP-43

10A 10A
副走査部 1 副走査部 1
SUB SCANNING UNIT 1 SUB SCANNING UNIT 1

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 319N3967 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:12.33}
E 2 319N3972 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:12.33}
D 3 322SF149 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.6}
D 4 322SY055 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.6}
D 5 322SY055 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.33}
D 6 322SY116 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.33}
E 7 323N1221A ベルト Belt 1 {MC:12.4}
D 8 334F2932A 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 2 {MC:12.33}
D 9 337N0043 ホイール Flywheel 1 {MC:12.6}
E 10 341N1062A アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.6}
E 11 341N1063A アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.33}
E 12 342D738596 レバー Lever 1 {MC:12.33}
E 13 347N0636 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:12.6}
E 14 350N2721A カバー Cover 1 {MC:12.2}
E 15 356N9199A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.33}
Compression Coil
D 16 388N1073 圧縮コイルバネ 1 L ≒ 10mm {MC:12.6}
Spring
D 17 388N2227A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 42mm {MC:12.4}
D 18 318S3060 グロメット Grommet 1
E 19 319N3966A 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:12.6}
E 20 356N9193B ブラケット Bracket 1

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-43
 SP-44

10B 10B
副走査部 2 副走査部 2
SUB SCANNING UNIT 2 SUB SCANNING UNIT 2

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 118YX251 FFM モータ FFM Motor 1 MZ1 {MC:12.9}
D 2 305N0070 ナット Nut 1 {MC:12.8}
D 3 322SY055 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.7}
D 4 322SF149 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.7}
E 5 323N0041 ベルト Belt 1 {MC:12.5}
D 6 337N0044 ホイール Flywheel 1 {MC:12.7}
D 7 337N0059C ホイール Flywheel 1 {MC:12.8}
E 8 341N1056B アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.7}
E 9 350N2533B カバー Cover 1 {MC:12.9}
Compression Coil
D 10 388N1073 圧縮コイルバネ 1 L ≒ 8mm {MC:12.7}
Spring
D 11 388N2434A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 76mm {MC:12.5}
D 12 387N0120C 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 {MC:12.10}
D 13 387N0138C 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
E 14 356N6813C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.10}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-44
 SP-45

10C 10C
副走査部 3 副走査部 3
SUB SCANNING UNIT 3 SUB SCANNING UNIT 3

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 319N3600B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:12.16}
D 2 322SF154 軸受 Bearing 1 {MC:12.16}
D 3 322SF149 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.16}
E 4 341N0934C アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.16}
E 5 341N0941B アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.16}
E 6 344N0002B フォーク Fork 2 {MC:12.16}
E 7 347N1700B スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:12.16}
E 8 356N6836B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.16}
D 9 388N2477 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 22mm {MC:12.16}
E 10 356N9194 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 11 118SX161 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MZ4 {MC:12.15}
D 12 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 {MC:12.12}
E 13 316N0465A アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.17}
E 14 319N3600B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:12.17}
D 15 322SF154 軸受 Bearing 1 {MC:12.17}
D 16 322SF210 軸受 Bearing 1 {MC:12.15}
E 17 322SF149 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:12.17}
E 18 341N0935D アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.17}
E 19 341N0942B アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.17}
E 20 344N0002B フォーク Fork 2 {MC:12.17}
E 21 347N1844A スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:12.17}
E 22 347N1845A スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:12.17}
E 23 356N9099A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.15}
E 24 356N9183C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.12}
D 25 388N2477 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 22mm {MC:12.17}
E 26 341N1057C アーム Arm 1 {MC:12.15}
D 27 322SY060 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:12.17}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-45
 SP-46

10D 10D
副走査部 4 副走査部 4
SUB SCANNING UNIT 4 SUB SCANNING UNIT 4

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 118YX216B モータ Motor 1 MZ2 {MC:12.13}
D 2 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 2 SZ2,SZ3 {MC:12.11}
E 3 319N3616B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:12.13}
D 4 322SF149 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:12.11}
D 5 329N0166 カム Cam 1 {MC:12.13}
E 6 356N6819C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.11}
E 7 356N6820E ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.13}
D 8 338N0520A リングカラー Ring Collar 1 {MC:12.13}
E 9 350N2534 カバー Cover 1 {MC:12.13}
＊参考：（3B）はゆるみ止め接着剤を使用する箇所である。

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-46
 SP-47

10E 10E
副走査部 5 副走査部 5
SUB SCANNING UNIT 5 SUB SCANNING UNIT 5

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 356Y0300A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.23}
D 2 334Y3211A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:12.20}
D 3 334Y3211A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:12.21}
D 4 343N0055A フック Hook 1 {MC:12.20}
D 5 343N0055A フック Hook 1 {MC:12.21}
D 6 343N0056A フック Hook 1 {MC:12.20}
D 7 343N0056A フック Hook 1 {MC:12.21}
D 8 388N2526 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 54mm {MC:12.21}
D 9 388N2527 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 40mm {MC:12.21}
D 10 388N2526 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 54mm {MC:12.20}
D 11 388N2527 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 40mm {MC:12.20}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-47
 SP-48

10F 10F
副走査部 6 副走査部 6
SUB SCANNING UNIT 6 SUB SCANNING UNIT 6

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 319N3619 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:12.18}
E 2 356N9182A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.23}
D 3 387N0170 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 {MC:12.22}
D 4 118SX217 モータ Motor 1 MZ3 {MC:12.14}
D 5 146S0029 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SZ4 {MC:12.19}
D 6 113Y1696C ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 SZ1 {MC:12.23}
E 7 319N3957A 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:12.25}
D 8 322SF155 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:12.25}
D 9 322SF155 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:12.25}
D 10 327N0135E 歯車 Gear 1 {MC:12.18}
D 11 327N0136B 歯車 Gear 1 {MC:12.18}
E 12 327S4051R01 ウオーム Worm Gear 1 {MC:12.14}
E 13 356N6871B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.25}
E 14 356N9237 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.14}
D 15 360N0362D ハウジング Housing 1 {MC:12.19}
D 16 363N2060C ガイド Guide 1 {MC:12.25}
D 17 388N2435 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 41mm {MC:12.22}
D 18 602Y0132 ミラーアセンブリ Mirror Assembly 1 {MC:12.24}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-48
 SP-49

10G 10G
副走査部 7 副走査部 7
SUB SCANNING UNIT 7 SUB SCANNING UNIT 7

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 387N0138C 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
E 2 401N0848B 押え板 Counter Plate 1 {MC:12.28}
D 3 334Y3212 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:12.28}
D 4 334Y3213 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:12.28}
E 5 356N9198A ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:12.26}
D 6 363N2156A ガイド板 Guide plate 1 {MC:12.26}
D 7 363Y0463A ガイド板 Guide plate 1 {MC:12.27}
D 8 308S0320 特殊ネジ Screw 10 {MC:12.26}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-49
 SP-50

10H 10H
副走査部 8 副走査部 8
SUB SCANNING UNIT 8 SUB SCANNING UNIT 8

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
Vibration Proof Rubber
E 1 386Y0048 防振ゴムアセンブリ 1 {MC:12.32}
Assembly
E 2 356N9239B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 3 356N9240B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 4 356N9415B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 5 356N9414B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 6 357N1460E 台 Base 1
E 7 347N1851 スペーサ Spacer 5
E 8 356N9484 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.30}
E 9 356N9485 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:12.30}
E 10 386N1202 防振ゴム Vibration Proof Rubber 2 {MC:12.30}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-50
 SP-51

11A 11A
制御部 制御部
CONTROLLER CONTROLLER

RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
CR 1 849Y0097B LCD17A LCD17A 1 {MC:4.8}
E 2 356N9578 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.8}
E 3 356N9579 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.8}
E 4 356N9580 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.8}
D 5 119S0006 電動ファン Fan 2 FANG1, 2 {MC:4.5}
E 6 316S0261 止め具 Clamp 2
E 7 356N9224C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:13.7}
E 8 356N9225B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 9 356N9226C ブラケット Bracket 1
E 10 356N9227C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.6}
E 11 364N0103B ガード Guard 2 {MC:4.5}
CR 12 113Y1677H CPU91A CPU91A 1 {MC:13.2}
CR 13 113Y1681G IMG17B IMG17B 1 {MC:13.3}
CR 14 113Y1700B DRV17A DRV17A 1 {MC:13.5}
CR 15 113Y1701B DRV17B DRV17B 1 {MC:13.6}
CR 16 113Y1699B SNS17B SNS17B 1 {MC:13.7}
CR 17 113Y1693C SCT17B SCT17B 1 {MC:13.4}
CR 18 113Y1698C SNS17A SNS17A 1 {MC:13.8}
D 19 119S0006 電動ファン Fan 3 FANG3, 4, 5 {MC:4.6}
E 20 316S0261 止め具 Clamp 2
E 21 316S0261 止め具 Clamp 2
E 22 316S0261 止め具 Clamp 2
48V/4.0A For
AT 23 137S1279 ヒューズ FUSE 2 {MC:14.2}
DRV17A
48V/3.2A For
AT 24 137S1278 ヒューズ FUSE 13 {MC:14.2}
DRV17A
48V/2.0A For
AT 25 137S1277 ヒューズ FUSE 2 {MC:14.2}
DRV17A
48V/3.2A For
AT 26 137S1278 ヒューズ FUSE 11 {MC:14.3}
DRV17B
48V/2.0A For
AT 27 137S1277 ヒューズ FUSE 1 {MC:14.3}
DRV17B
48V/3.2A For
AT 28 137S1278 ヒューズ FUSE 1 {MC:14.4}
SNS17B
48V/1.6A For
AT 29 137S1276 ヒューズ FUSE 3 {MC:14.4}
SNS17B
48V/3.2A For
AT 30 137S1278 ヒューズ FUSE 1 {MC:14.5}
SCT17B
48V/1.6A For
AT 31 137S1276 ヒューズ FUSE 7 {MC:14.5}
SCT17B
E 32 139N0068 絶縁材 Insulator 1
E 33 363N2538 ガイドレール Guide Rail 2
E 34 314S0078 蝶番 Hinge 1 {MC:4.8}
E 35 356N9325D ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.8}
A 36 125S0287 電池 Battery 1 {MC:13.9}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-51
 SP-52

12 12
ケーブル ケーブル
CABLE CABLE
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS CONNECTION DIAGRAM RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS CONNECTION DIAGRAM
E 1 120Y0091 ケーブル Cable 5 6/19 E 50 136Y8778 ケーブル Cable 1 2/19
E 2 136N0371 ケーブル Cable 1 USA 2/19 E 51 136Y8779 ケーブル Cable 1 2/19
E 3 136N0376 ケーブル Cable 1 UK 2/19 E 52 136Y8780 ケーブル Cable 1 2/19
E 4 136N0377 ケーブル Cable 1 Europe 2/19 E 53 136Y8781 ケーブル Cable 1 2/19
E 5 136N0411 ケーブル Cable 1 4/19 E 54 136Y8782 ケーブル Cable 2 2/19,6/19
E 6 136N0412 ケーブル Cable 1 3/19 E 55 136Y8783 ケーブル Cable 2 2/19,12/19
E 7 136N0416 ケーブル Cable 1 Japan 2/19 E 56 136Y8784 ケーブル Cable 1 5/19
E 8 136N0417 ケーブル Cable 1 Japan 2/19 E 57 136Y8785 ケーブル Cable 1 5/19
E 9 136N0418 ケーブル Cable 1 China 2/19 E 58 136Y8786 ケーブル Cable 1 5/19
E 10 136N0420 ケーブル Cable 2 4/19 E 59 136Y8787 ケーブル Cable 1 5/19
E 11 136Y8545A ケーブル Cable 1 2/19 E 60 136Y8788 ケーブル Cable 2 3/19,5/19
E 12 136Y8737 ケーブル Cable 1 7/19 E 61 136Y8789 ケーブル Cable 4 3/19,5/19,7/19
E 13 136Y8738 ケーブル Cable 1 7/19 E 62 136Y8790 ケーブル Cable 2 7/19
E 14 136Y8739 ケーブル Cable 1 7/19 E 63 136Y8791 ケーブル Cable 2 8/19
E 15 136Y8740 ケーブル Cable 1 7/19 E 64 136Y8792 ケーブル Cable 4 8/19,11/19
E 16 136Y8741 ケーブル Cable 1 8/19 E 65 136Y8793 ケーブル Cable 2 9/19
E 17 136Y8742 ケーブル Cable 1 8/19 E 66 136Y8794 ケーブル Cable 6 10/19,12/19,18/19
E 18 136Y8743 ケーブル Cable 1 8/19 E 67 136Y8796 ケーブル Cable 8 13/19,14/19
E 19 136Y8744 ケーブル Cable 1 8/19 E 68 136Y8797 ケーブル Cable 10 15/19,16/19,17/19
E 20 136Y8745 ケーブル Cable 1 8/19 2/19,3/19,4/19,5/19,17/19,
E 69 136Y8798 ケーブル Cable 11
E 21 136Y8746 ケーブル Cable 1 13/19 19/19
E 22 136Y8747 ケーブル Cable 1 13/19 E 70 136Y8799 ケーブル Cable 6 18/19,19/19
E 23 136Y8748 ケーブル Cable 1 13/19
E 24 136Y8749 ケーブル Cable 1 13/19
E 25 136Y8750 ケーブル Cable 1 14/19
E 26 136Y8751 ケーブル Cable 1 14/19
E 27 136Y8752 ケーブル Cable 1 14/19
E 28 136Y8753 ケーブル Cable 1 14/19
E 29 136Y8754 ケーブル Cable 1 9/19
E 30 136Y8755 ケーブル Cable 1 9/19
E 31 136Y8756 ケーブル Cable 1 15/19
E 32 136Y8757 ケーブル Cable 1 10/19
E 33 136Y8758 ケーブル Cable 1 15/19
E 34 136Y8759 ケーブル Cable 1 10/19
E 35 136Y8760 ケーブル Cable 1 16/19
E 36 136Y8761 ケーブル Cable 1 11/19
E 37 136Y8762 ケーブル Cable 1 16/19
E 38 136Y8763 ケーブル Cable 1 16/19
E 39 136Y8764 ケーブル Cable 1 16/19
E 40 136Y8765 ケーブル Cable 1 11/19
E 41 136Y8766 ケーブル Cable 1 6/19
E 42 136Y8767 ケーブル Cable 1 6/19
E 43 136Y8768 ケーブル Cable 1 6/19
E 44 136Y8769 ケーブル Cable 1 12/19
E 45 136Y8770 ケーブル Cable 1 17/19
E 46 136Y8771 ケーブル Cable 7 18/19
E 47 136Y8775 ケーブル Cable 1 2/19
E 48 136Y8776 ケーブル Cable 1 2/19
E 49 136Y8777 ケーブル Cable 1 2/19

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-52
 SP-53

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-53
 SP-54

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-54
 SP-55

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-55
 SP-56

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-56
 SP-57

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-57
 SP-58

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-58
 SP-59

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-59
 SP-60

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-60
 SP-61

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-61
 SP-62

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-62
 SP-63

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-63
 SP-64

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-64
 SP-65

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-65
 SP-66

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-66
 SP-67

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-67
 SP-68

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-68
 SP-69

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-69
 SP-70

13 13
回路図 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-70
 SP-71

14 14
部品番号検索表 部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
106Y0005B 03D-1 118YX251 10B-1 136Y8754 12B-29 137S1178 07H-19 316S0261 11A-21 322FC308E 05A-10
107Y0169A 07E-1 119S0006 07H-1 136Y8755 12B-30 137S1178 07H-21 316S0261 11A-22 322N0032 04E-3
107Y0183 03E-18 119S0006 07H-17 136Y8756 12B-31 137S1276 02B-18 316S2080 03B-13 322N0032 04E-11
109N0020C 07H-15 119S0006 11A-5 136Y8757 12B-32 137S1276 11A-29 316S3012 07G-2 322N0037D 03C-4
109N0021C 07H-14 119S0006 11A-19 136Y8758 12B-33 137S1276 11A-31 317N1065C 01A-15 322N0038A 03D-3
113Y1466 02B-6 119S0008 02B-16 136Y8759 12B-34 137S1277 11A-25 318S3060 10A-18 322N0050 05E-5
113Y1466 02B-8 119S0008 07H-2 136Y8760 12B-35 137S1277 11A-27 319N3600B 10C-1 322N0050 07C-11
113Y1466 04C-10 120S3415 02B-17 136Y8761 12B-36 137S1278 11A-24 319N3600B 10C-14 322N0051 05E-6
113Y1466 04C-19 120Y0091 12B-1 136Y8762 12B-37 137S1278 11A-26 319N3602B 03E-22 322N0051 07C-12
113Y1466 04C-20 120Y0091A 07I-10 136Y8763 12B-38 137S1278 11A-28 319N3616B 10D-3 322N0052 05E-7
113Y1466 05B-1 123N0007B 07I-3 136Y8764 12B-39 137S1278 11A-30 319N3619 10F-1 322N0052 07C-13
113Y1466 06B-16 125N0124D 02B-11 136Y8765 12B-40 137S1279 11A-23 319N3623B 05E-3 322N2001A 04E-4
113Y1466 07E-2 125S0287 11A-36 136Y8766 12B-41 139N0068 11A-32 319N3623B 07C-9 322N2001A 04E-12
113Y1466 07E-3 128N0067 02B-12 136Y8767 12B-42 146S0029 03A-1 319N3662A 04A-7 322N2002 04H-3
113Y1677H 11A-12 128S0392 03B-1 136Y8768 12B-43 146S0029 03A-2 319N3918 03C-3 322N2003A 07B-6
113Y1681G 11A-13 133Y1031A 03B-2 136Y8769 12B-44 146S0029 03B-4 319N3939 05E-4 322N2003A 07B-9
113Y1693C 11A-17 134Y0056B 03B-3 136Y8770 12B-45 146S0029 03E-19 319N3939 07C-10 322N2003A 07E-10
113Y1694B 09A-1 136N0371 12B-2 136Y8771 12B-46 146S0029 03E-20 319N3940 05B-4 322N2006B 07E-11
113Y1695B 09B-1 136N0376 12B-3 136Y8775 12B-47 146S0029 04C-3 319N3957A 10F-7 322N2007 07E-12
113Y1696C 10F-6 136N0377 12B-4 136Y8776 12B-48 146S0029 04C-17 319N3962 03E-1 322SF149 03C-5
113Y1698C 11A-18 136N0411 12B-5 136Y8777 12B-49 146S0029 04C-18 319N3963 05A-9 322SF149 10A-3
113Y1699B 11A-16 136N0412 12B-6 136Y8778 12B-50 146S0029 05A-8 319N3966A 10A-19 322SF149 10B-4
113Y1700B 11A-14 136N0416 12B-7 136Y8779 12B-51 146S0029 05B-3 319N3967 10A-1 322SF149 10C-3
113Y1701B 11A-15 136N0417 12B-8 136Y8780 12B-52 146S0029 05E-2 319N3969 06B-1 322SF149 10C-17
113Y1702B 01A-9 136N0418 12B-9 136Y8781 12B-53 146S0029 06B-2 319N3969 07B-8 322SF149 10D-4
113Y1702B 03A-18 136N0420 12B-10 136Y8782 12B-54 146S0029 07B-1 319N3972 10A-2 322SF154 10C-2
115S0153 07I-1 136Y8545A 12B-11 136Y8783 12B-55 146S0029 07C-8 319N3999B 02B-19 322SF154 10C-15
115Y0035B 07I-2 136Y8737 12B-12 136Y8784 12B-56 146S0029 10C-12 319N4023 07E-7 322SF155 10F-8
118SX063 06A-1 136Y8738 12B-13 136Y8785 12B-57 146S0029 10D-2 319N4024 07E-8 322SF155 10F-9
118SX063 07A-1 136Y8739 12B-14 136Y8786 12B-58 146S0029 10F-5 319N4025 07E-9 322SF178 03C-6
118SX161 10C-11 136Y8740 12B-15 136Y8787 12B-59 305N0070 10B-2 319N4037A 02B-2 322SF210 10C-16
118SX164 05E-1 136Y8741 12B-16 136Y8788 12B-60 308S0012 07G-1 319N4059A 06C-15 322SF229 04G-4
118SX167 03D-2 136Y8742 12B-17 136Y8789 12B-61 308S0320 10G-8 319Y1161A 03E-21 322SF229 07D-2
118SX167 04B-5 136Y8743 12B-18 136Y8790 12B-62 309S0008 04A-12 321N0002 04D-3 322SF230 05D-4
118SX167 04B-7 136Y8744 12B-19 136Y8791 12B-63 314S0078 11A-35 321N0002 04F-4 322SF230 05D-5
118SX167 04C-14 136Y8745 12B-20 136Y8792 12B-64 315G311017 03C-1 321N0002 04F-9 322SF230 05D-6
118SX167 05B-2 136Y8746 12B-21 136Y8793 12B-65 315S0013 05E-30 321N0002 04F-15 322SF230 06D-4
118SX167 05C-1 136Y8747 12B-22 136Y8794 12B-66 315S0013 07C-29 321N0002 04G-3 322SF230 06D-18
118SX167 06B-11 136Y8748 12B-23 136Y8796 12B-67 316N0465A 10C-13 321N0002 04G-18 322SP203 04G-12
118SX167 07C-1 136Y8749 12B-24 136Y8797 12B-68 316S0146 03C-2 321N0002 05D-27 322SP203 05C-4
118SX167 07C-2 136Y8750 12B-25 136Y8798 12B-69 316S0261 07H-13 321N0002 06E-3 322SP203 05C-5
118SX171 05A-7 136Y8751 12B-26 136Y8799 12B-70 316S0261 07H-18 321N0002 06E-11 322SP203 06A-11
118SX217 10F-4 136Y8752 12B-27 137S1175 07H-20 316S0261 11A-6 321N0002 07D-19 322SP203 06A-23
118YX216B 10D-1 136Y8753 12B-28 137S1175 07H-22 316S0261 11A-20 321N0002 07F-2 322SP203 07A-2

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-71
 SP-72

14 14
部品番号検索表 部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
322SP205 05D-7 323N0041 10B-5 327N0194 07C-18 327N1123601B 07A-9 334F2932A 10A-8 334N3606 07D-22
322SP205 05D-8 323N1221A 10A-7 327N0195A 06B-4 327N1124802 05C-18 334N0041A 05E-16 334N3608A 07D-8
322SP205 05D-9 323S3069 05C-10 327N0195A 06C-1 327N1127201A 04B-3 334N0041A 07C-21 334N5015B 04G-6
322SP205 06D-2 323S3097 07A-15 327N0195A 07B-11 327N1127201A 06A-3 334N0063A 03D-11 334Y2244A 04D-9
322SP205 06D-16 323S3097 07B-22 327N0196B 06B-9 327S1103002A 06B-7 334N2387A 04E-13 334Y2244A 05A-1
322SP205 07D-4 323S3223 07A-16 327N0196B 06C-5 327S1122403A 04B-2 334N2387A 04H-11 334Y2244A 06C-12
322SP206 05D-10 323S3271 06A-20 327N0196B 07B-12 327S4051R01 10F-12 334N3577A 04D-8 334Y2244A 07A-24
322SP206 05D-11 324N1026A 05C-11 327N0197 06A-4 327Y0176A 04C-8 334N3577A 04F-2 334Y2244A 07G-3
322SP206 06D-7 324N1026A 06A-10 327N0198 05C-15 327Y0176A 04C-21 334N3577A 04F-11 334Y3211A 10E-2
322SP206 06D-21 324N1026A 07A-27 327N0198 06A-8 328N0041C 07C-19 334N3577A 04F-12 334Y3211A 10E-3
322SP214 05B-5 324N1032A 05C-12 327N0198 07A-6 328N0045A 04C-12 334N3577A 04G-8 334Y3212 10G-3
322SP214 05C-6 324N1032A 06A-21 327N0199 05C-16 328N0045A 04C-22 334N3577A 04G-20 334Y3213 10G-4
322SP214 06B-6 324N3098A 06A-12 327N0199 06A-7 328N0050A 05E-14 334N3577A 05D-29 334Y3214A 04D-7
322SP214 06C-3 324N3098A 07A-4 327N0199 07A-7 328N0051A 05E-15 334N3577A 06E-6 334Y5007 04G-15
322SP214 07B-10 324N3164A 05C-13 327N0208 04G-14 328N0052 07C-20 334N3577A 06E-13 337N0043 10A-9
322SY054 04H-5 324N3164A 06A-9 327N1101904 03D-9 328N0053A 05E-32 334N3577A 07D-21 337N0044 10B-6
322SY054 07E-13 324N3164A 07A-5 327N1103610D 03C-7 328Y0007 05B-20 334N3578A 04F-3 337N0059C 10B-7
322SY055 10A-4 324N3164A 07A-28 327N1103802 03D-10 329N0145A 05B-10 334N3578A 04F-10 338N0520A 10D-8
322SY055 10A-5 324N3164A 07A-29 327N1103802 05B-9 329N0145A 05C-19 334N3578A 04F-16 339N0022A 04A-4
322SY055 10B-3 324N3164A 07A-30 327N1103802 07B-24 329N0148B 05B-11 334N3578A 04G-9 340D816796 07G-4
322SY059 05C-7 324N3164A 07B-2 327N1121608A 04D-1 329N0148B 05C-20 334N3578A 04G-21 341N0934C 10C-4
322SY059 06A-18 324N3165A 05C-14 327N1121608A 04F-5 329N0148B 06B-15 334N3578A 05D-30 341N0935D 10C-18
322SY059 07A-3 327N0135E 10F-10 327N1121608A 04F-7 329N0149A 05B-12 334N3578A 06E-5 341N0937B 03C-8
322SY060 04A-14 327N0136B 10F-11 327N1121608A 04F-13 329N0149A 05C-21 334N3578A 06E-12 341N0941B 10C-5
322SY060 10C-27 327N0139B 05E-11 327N1121608A 04G-1 329N0149A 06C-11 334N3580B 04D-4 341N0942B 10C-19
322SY063 05C-8 327N0140A 05E-12 327N1121608A 04G-16 329N0156B 04C-6 334N3580B 04D-11 341N0944C 05C-23
322SY063 05E-8 327N0140A 07C-17 327N1121608A 04G-19 329N0157 05B-13 334N3580B 04D-14 341N1049 04E-2
322SY063 06A-13 327N0143C 05B-6 327N1121608A 05D-28 329N0157 05C-22 334N3580B 05A-5 341N1049 04E-10
322SY063 07C-14 327N0143C 06B-3 327N1121608A 06E-1 329N0158A 06B-8 334N3580B 06C-9 341N1050B 04H-2
322SY065 03D-4 327N0143C 07B-3 327N1121608A 06E-9 329N0158A 06C-4 334N3580B 07A-23 341N1056B 10B-8
322SY065 07B-23 327N0144A 03D-5 327N1121608A 07D-20 329N0159A 07B-13 334N3580B 07G-11 341N1057C 10C-26
322SY066 03E-2 327N0173A 03D-6 327N1121608A 07F-3 329N0160B 07B-14 334N3581B 05D-12 341N1060L 03C-9
322SY066 03E-23 327N0173A 05E-13 327N1121610A 04B-6 329N0161B 07B-15 334N3581B 06D-10 341N1061 06A-14
322SY066 03E-24 327N0173A 07C-3 327N1121610A 04B-8 329N0162A 05A-11 334N3581B 06D-13 341N1062A 10A-10
322SY093 05E-9 327N0188A 04B-4 327N1121610A 04C-15 329N0165A 04C-16 334N3582B 05D-13 341N1063A 10A-11
322SY093 07C-15 327N0188A 04C-7 327N1121610A 06A-2 329N0166 10D-5 334N3582B 05D-14 341N1065B 05E-17
322SY116 10A-6 327N0189A 05B-7 327N1121610A 07A-8 329N0170 07B-16 334N3582B 06D-11 341N1090A 07E-14
322SY122 05C-9 327N0189A 06B-10 327N1122416B 04A-8 332N0521B 03E-3 334N3582B 06D-14 341N1091 07E-15
322SY122 06A-19 327N0189A 07C-4 327N1123203 04A-15 332N0522E 03E-4 334N3589A 07D-5 341N1103A 03E-26
322SY122 07A-17 327N0190B 04C-13 327N1123601B 04A-3 332N0523E 03E-5 334N3591B 07D-6 341N1104 03A-3
322SY232 04A-6 327N0193A 03D-7 327N1123601B 04B-1 332N0613A 03E-6 334N3595A 07F-4 341N1116A 06C-17
322SY232 05E-10 327N0194 03D-8 327N1123601B 05C-17 332N0620 04G-13 334N3596A 07F-5 341N1117 03C-23
322SY232 07C-16 327N0194 05B-8 327N1123601B 06A-5 332N0625 01A-16 334N3597A 07D-7 341Y0324A 07C-22
322SY298 06C-16 327N0194 07B-4 327N1123601B 06A-22 334F2932A 05A-21 334N3604 03E-25 342D738596 10A-12

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-72
 SP-73

14 14
部品番号検索表 部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
342N0109 05C-24 347N1834 07B-7 356N6820E 10D-7 356N9162 06A-16 356N9255B 01A-10 360N0360A 03D-16
342N0109 06A-17 347N1834 07B-19 356N6825D 03E-27 356N9164A 05E-20 356N9255B 03A-21 360N0362D 10F-15
342N0110A 05B-14 347N1841A 02C-2 356N6826B 03E-28 356N9165 06B-5 356N9256B 01A-13 360N0363 03D-17
342N0111A 05B-15 347N1844A 10C-21 356N6829C 03E-29 356N9165 06C-2 356N9257C 01A-20 360N0476 05D-19
342N0111A 05C-25 347N1845A 10C-22 356N6831C 03D-12 356N9165 07B-20 356N9260B 07A-31 360N0476 05D-20
342N0129A 05C-26 347N1846 05D-18 356N6836B 10C-8 356N9166C 05A-3 356N9261B 07C-5 360N0476 06D-5
342N0130 06B-14 347N1846 06D-8 356N6871B 10F-13 356N9167A 05B-19 356N9281 07A-10 360N0476 06D-19
342N0131 06C-10 347N1846 07D-10 356N8168A 03B-6 356N9172 07H-4 356N9291B 07B-5 360N0479 05D-21
342Y0023A 07B-17 347N1848 05B-17 356N8926B 05E-19 356N9173C 07H-5 356N9292A 07A-11 360N0479 05D-22
342Y0024A 07B-18 347N1848 05C-2 356N8926B 07C-24 356N9174A 07H-6 356N9293B 07G-6 360N0479 06D-6
343N0048 01A-1 347N1851 10H-7 356N8928B 04A-1 356N9182A 10F-2 356N9294B 02B-4 360N0479 06D-20
343N0055A 10E-4 350N1675 01A-7 356N8929B 04A-2 356N9183C 10C-24 356N9295B 02B-7 360N0484A 07D-11
343N0055A 10E-5 350N2059A 01A-19 356N8930A 04A-10 356N9184B 04H-8 356N9325D 11A-34 360N0485A 07D-12
343N0056A 10E-6 350N2059A 01B-3 356N8931A 04A-5 356N9185B 04H-9 356N9346 07A-12 362N0720A 04G-5
343N0056A 10E-7 350N2533B 10B-9 356N8932B 05A-2 356N9186A 04C-9 356N9348 07A-26 363N1788A 03E-32
344N0002B 10C-6 350N2534 10D-9 356N9099A 10C-23 356N9187A 02C-4 356N9368B 03A-22 363N2060C 10F-16
344N0002B 10C-20 350N2706B 03A-6 356N9111 06C-7 356N9188 04C-4 356N9387 03E-31 363N2065D 03E-33
345N1664B 09A-2 350N2707C 01A-4 356N9112B 07H-3 356N9190 04H-10 356N9388A 03A-9 363N2073B 05E-21
345N1664B 09B-2 350N2721A 10A-14 356N9113A 07I-4 356N9191 05E-26 356N9404C 02A-3 363N2073B 07C-25
345N1668D 03A-4 350N2725D 02C-5 356N9117B 06B-12 356N9193B 10A-20 356N9408 03A-10 363N2076C 03E-13
345N1669C 03A-5 350N2731A 01B-8 356N9118 06A-6 356N9194 10C-10 356N9414B 10H-5 363N2115 05E-22
345N1683 01A-6 350N2738C 01B-6 356N9133A 04C-1 356N9198A 10G-5 356N9415B 10H-4 363N2115 07C-26
345N1683 01B-11 350N2763B 01B-5 356N9133A 04C-23 356N9199A 10A-15 356N9422 05A-18 363N2156A 10G-6
345Y0296 01A-17 350N2782B 02A-10 356N9134 04A-11 356N9202A 02A-15 356N9442 07A-32 363N2227B 04E-7
345Y0299 01A-18 350N2785C 03A-19 356N9135 04C-2 356N9204B 07E-4 356N9445 03A-7 363N2467C 04E-5
346N1146A 07C-32 350N2835A 07B-21 356N9136B 04D-5 356N9205B 07E-5 356N9462A 01A-23 363N2476 07A-13
346N1210 07D-1 350Y1670 01A-2 356N9136B 04D-12 356N9222B 02C-3 356N9464 03C-10 363N2477 03E-14
346N1251A 04C-11 350Y1676 01A-8 356N9137 04G-7 356N9224C 11A-7 356N9471 03E-30 363N2478B 03E-15
346N1259C 03E-7 350Y1677 01B-12 356N9138A 04C-5 356N9225B 11A-8 356N9477B 03C-17 363N2479 03E-16
346N1260E 03B-5 350Y1678 01B-13 356N9142B 03D-13 356N9226C 11A-9 356N9484 10H-8 363N2483E 06E-4
347N0636 10A-13 350Y1679 01B-14 356N9143B 03E-8 356N9227C 11A-10 356N9485 10H-9 363N2493A 07G-7
347N0706 05E-31 350Y1680 01B-1 356N9144 03E-9 356N9230A 05A-4 356N9578 11A-2 363N2499 03A-11
347N1624A 05D-15 350Y1681 01B-4 356N9145A 03E-10 356N9233 03A-8 356N9579 11A-3 363N2535B 06C-13
347N1624A 05D-16 350Y1682 01B-2 356N9146 03E-11 356N9235D 07A-21 356N9580 11A-4 363N2538 11A-33
347N1624A 05D-17 350Y1699 01A-3.1 356N9147B 03E-12 356N9237 10F-14 356Y0299 01A-21 363N2539 07E-16
347N1624A 06D-3 350Y1700 01A-3.2 356N9149C 03B-7 356N9239B 10H-2 356Y0300A 10E-1 363N2558 05A-17
347N1624A 06D-17 352N0602A 02B-14 356N9150A 03B-8 356N9240B 10H-3 356Y0302B 03C-22 363Y0433 04E-6
347N1624A 07D-9 352N0605A 02B-13 356N9151E 03C-11 356N9244C 07H-7 356Y0303B 03C-21 363Y0434A 07G-8
347N1625A 05B-16 352N0606C 02B-20 356N9155A 05A-12 356N9245B 07H-8 357N1460E 10H-6 363Y0449 04G-11
347N1625A 05C-27 352N0610A 02B-15 356N9156C 05E-25 356N9246 07I-5 357N1466A 03A-23 363Y0450 04F-1
347N1700B 10C-7 353N0082A 05E-18 356N9157A 05B-18 356N9247 07I-11 357N1467A 03A-24 363Y0453 05D-31
347N1730 07G-5 353N0090A 07C-23 356N9158D 05A-13 356N9248 03D-14 357N1468D 01A-11 363Y0455B 04H-4
347N1834 06B-13 356N6813C 10B-14 356N9159B 05A-14 356N9250C 07H-16 357N1479A 03A-25 363Y0456 04G-10
347N1834 06C-6 356N6819C 10D-6 356N9161D 03A-20 356N9252B 02A-4 357N1480B 03A-26 363Y0457 07G-9

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-73
 SP-74

14 14
部品番号検索表 部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番 部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
363Y0460 05A-15 382N1624 02A-13 388N2458A 06E-14 388N5269 05A-6
363Y0461 05E-27 382N1634 07A-33 388N2458A 07F-1 388N5269 06C-8
363Y0462 05D-32 382N1636A 01A-22 388N2472B 06D-1 388N5269 07A-22
363Y0463A 10G-7 384N0076A 07C-31 388N2472B 06D-15 388N5269 07G-10
363Y0466C 07D-13 384N0077 07C-30 388N2473B 06D-9 392N0009A 03C-16
363Y0467A 07A-20 384N0081A 03C-18 388N2474A 05C-3 394S0036 01A-14
363Y0468A 07A-19 384N0082 03C-19 388N2477 10C-9 398N0067B 03A-15
363Y0470 04E-8 384N0083 03C-20 388N2477 10C-25 401N0848B 10G-2
363Y0471 04H-6 386N1170 07E-18 388N2485A 03D-15 405N0186 03A-16
363Y0477 02B-3 386N1202 10H-10 388N2517 04D-2 405N0186 04H-7
363Y0478A 02A-7 386Y0048 10H-1 388N2517 04F-6 405N0186 05D-33
363Y0480 07A-25 387N0119C 05A-20 388N2517 04F-8 405N0186 05E-28
363Y0482A 07C-6 387N0120C 10B-12 388N2517 04F-14 405N0186 06E-8
363Y0483C 07D-14 387N0130D 02A-9 388N2517 04G-2 405N2505 01B-7
363Y0484A 07D-15 387N0130D 02B-10 388N2517 04G-17 405N3060A 01A-25
363Y0488 05D-23 387N0130D 03A-12 388N2518 04E-1 405N3060A 03A-30
363Y0489 06D-12 387N0131B 02A-8 388N2518 04E-9 405N3068A 01A-24
363Y0494 06C-14 387N0131B 02B-9 388N2520 04H-1 407Y0027 07A-14
364N0103B 07H-9 387N0137C 05A-19 388N2523 05A-16 407Y0028A 07I-6
364N0103B 11A-11 387N0138C 10B-13 388N2524A 05D-2 407Y0029 07I-7
364S0005 02B-5 387N0138C 10G-1 388N2524A 06E-2 407Y0030 07I-8
366N0059A 03E-34 387N0168 04D-10 388N2524A 06E-10 602Y0132 10F-18
367S1104 02A-1 387N0168 04D-13 388N2524A 07D-18 603Y0061A 03A-27
367S2059 02A-2 387N0170 10F-3 388N2524A 07F-6 603Y0062A 03A-28
369N0263C 07H-10 388N1073 10A-16 388N2525 06A-15 603Y0063B 03A-29
369N0266B 07H-11 388N1073 10B-10 388N2526 10E-8 603Y0064A 01A-12
369N0267A 07H-12 388N1124 03E-17 388N2526 10E-10 603Y0066 07I-9
370N0255B 03C-12 388N1158A 03E-35 388N2527 10E-9 606Y0077 09A-3
370N0395B 03B-9 388N1211A 02B-1 388N2527 10E-11 606Y0079 09B-3
372S0049 03B-10 388N1213A 04A-9 388N2531A 07D-16 839Y0058B 08-1
372S0049 03C-13 388N1215 04A-13 388N2532A 07D-17 849Y0097B 11A-1
372S0050 03B-11 388N1223 05E-23 388N2536A 05D-24 852Y0074 05E-29
372S0050 03C-14 388N1223 07C-27 388N2537A 05D-25 852Y0075 03A-17
372S0053 03B-12 388N2227A 10A-17 388N2537A 05D-26
375N0099 02C-1 388N2434A 10B-11 388N2540 07E-6
375S0040 03C-15 388N2435 10F-17 388N2540 07E-17
376N0234 01B-10 388N2447B 03A-13 388N2545 07A-18
376N0238 01A-5 388N2447B 05E-24 388N2546 05D-3
376N0238 01B-9 388N2447B 07C-28 388N2549 07D-3
382N1590A 02A-6 388N2448A 05B-21 388N2551 07D-23
382N1591A 02A-5 388N2448A 07C-7 388N2552 07D-24
382N1621 02A-12 388N2449 03E-36 388N3081B 03A-14
382N1622 02A-14 388N2458A 05D-1 388N3098 03E-37
382N1623 02A-11 388N2458A 06E-7 388N5269 04D-6

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-74
 SP-75

15 16
ネジ・座金類の表示記号一覧表 消耗品一覧表
TABLE OF SCREWS / WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS
Table of Screws/Washers Indication Symbols List Of Quick Wearing Parts
Symbol in the
Indication No. Part name Shape
No. Part name dissassembly Size Shape
Symbols chart (example)

Cross-recessed flat-head 1 Fixing plug �� �� ��

1 S S3 × 10 M3 × 10 �� ��
screw
Cross-recessed truss- M4 × 8
2 T **T4 × 8 ��������������� ���������������� 2 Binding band
head screw M4 × 10 � � ����������� ������������ ����������
Cross-recessed pan-head �� ��
3 A M2.6 × 16 M2.6 × 16 3 N.K. clamp
screw with spring washer �� ��
Cross-recessed pan-head M3 × 6 �������������������� �������������������
������������� ������������������������
4 screw with spring and B M3 × 6 M3 × 30 � � 4 Edging
plain washers M3 × 35
Cross-recessed M3 × 10 �� �� ������ �����������
5 Edge saddle
hexagonheaded screw M3 × 12 ������������
5 BR M4 × 8
with spring and plain M4 × 8 �������������������� ��������������������
washers M4 × 12 ����������������������������� �
��
6 Hexagon-headed bolt Q Q3 × 20 M3 × 20
�� ��
Hexagon-Headed bolt
7 with spring and plain BQ BQ4 × 10 M4 × 10
washer ������������������� ���������������
���������������������������� ��
M3 × 6 ��
8 Deltight screw* DT **DT4 × 8
M4 × 8 �� ���
Nominal
9 Plax**1) Ps Ps3 × 6
diameter 3 × 6 ���� ������������������������
�� ��
M3 × 5
Hexagon-headed
10 WP WP4 × 6 M4 × 6
setscrew (double-point) ��� ���
M4 × 8
M3 × 6
11 TPscrew TP TP3 × 6 �������� �����������
M4 × 8 �� ��
M16
12 Hexagon nut Na Na20 ��� ���
M20
13 Plain washer W W4 M4
������������ �������������
14 Spring washer SW SW3 M3 � ��
Nominal
��� ���
diameter 4
15 E ring E E6
Nominal
diameter 6 ������ ���������
� �� ������������
M4
16 K-CL ring KL KL-4
M6
*： Self-tapping screw with a noncircular end
**： Stainless-made
囲み：Painted black

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual SP-75
 Control Sheet
Issue date Revision Pages affected
number Reason
08.25.2003 01 New release (FM4098) All pages

CR-IR 363 Service Manual

Preventive Maintenance (PM)

011-202-01 CR-IR 363 Service Manual

08.25.2003 FM4098
 PM-1
1. Preventive Maintenance Program 1.2 Notations of Intervals
In this volume, either of the following symbols is indicated for each maintenance
program.
1.1 How To Use the Preventive Maintenance Before initiating any maintenance operation, you should become familiar with the
following symbols.
Volume
: Indicates a program that must be performed at 1Y (1 year) intervals
- Perform the relevant procedures in accordance with the interval notations ( or when the count processed has reached about 60,000.
).
: Indicates a program that must be performed at 2Y (2 year) intervals
- "Preventive Maintenance Program List" is comprised of programs classified or when the count processed has reached about 120,000.
by intervals of one year (1Y), two years (2Y), and three years (3Y). Since the
maintenance programs differ depending upon the respective intervals, they should : Indicates a program that must be performed at 3Y (3 year) intervals
or when the count processed has reached about 180,000.
be performed according to the Program List.
- When performing any preventive maintenance program, proceed to the next : Indicates a program that must be performed at 6Y (6 year) intervals
program in accordance with the "Reference section" described for each or when the count processed has reached about 360,000.
maintenance program.
u INSTRUCTION u
- Example -
After performing the procedures described in "6. Turning OFF the High-Voltage A "program that must be performed at 6Y (6 year) intervals or when the count
Switch," the maintenance programs to be done next differ depending upon the processed has reached about 360,000" should be performed in accordance with the
respective intervals, as follows: following procedures.
1 year intervals: {PM:8.4.1} {PM:Appendix 1._Preventive Maintenance for 6 Year Intervals}

2 year intervals: {PM:7.1}

3 year intervals: {PM:8.4.1}

REFERENCE

{PM:6._Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-1
 PM-2
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List
The interval requirements that presume the standard count processed (200 films per
day) are listed below.

l Maintenance programs for 1 year intervals (when the count

processed has reached about 60,000) ( )
Periodic
Reference Time
Maintenance program replacement Remarks
section requirements
parts
2.1 Checking the Error Log 1
3 Checking the Image/ 15
Conveyance
4 Pulling Out the Machine 1
5.1 Removing the Covers 4
(1 Year Intervals)
6 Turning OFF the High- 1
Voltage Switch
8 Checking the Feed/Load 4
Conveyor Unit
8.4.1 Cleaning the Brush Roller -
9 Checking the Side- 2
Positioning Conveyor Unit
9.3.1 Cleaning the Cleaning -
Guide Assembly
13.1 Removing the Lamp 10
Assembly
14 Checking Lamp Assembly -
14.1 Cleaning/Replacing the -
Lamps
14.2 Cleaning the Filter -
16 Turning ON the High- 1
Voltage Switch
17 Cleaning/Reinstalling the 2
Covers and Louvers
18 Cleaning/Replacing the 3
Air Filter
19 Securing the Machine 1
20 Checking the Image/ 15
Conveyance
21 Checking the Error Log 1

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-2
 PM-3
l Maintenance programs for 2 year intervals (when the count 11.9 Cleaning the SUS Belt -
processed has reached about 120,000) ( ) 12 Checking the Light-Collecting Guide 10
Periodic 12.2 Reinstalling the Post-Reading 2
Reference Time
Maintenance program replacement Remarks Conveyor Unit
section requirements
parts
13 Checking the Erasure Conveyor 40
2.1 Checking Error Log 1 Unit
3 Checking the Image/Conveyance 15
13.1 Removing the Lamp Assembly -
13.3 Cleaning the IP Switchback -
4 Pulling Out the Machine 1 Assembly
5.2 Removing the Covers 7 13.4 Cleaning the Reflection Plate Guide -
(2 Year Intervals) and Rubber Rollers
6 Turning OFF the High-Voltage 1
13.5 Cleaning the Shock-Absorbing -
Switch
Roller and Guide
7 Checking the Cassette Set Unit 15 Cleaning the
13.7 Cleaning the Rubber Roller and -
rubber rollers and
Guide
suction cups
8 Checking the Feed/Load Conveyor 45 14 Checking Lamp Assembly 10
Unit 14.1 Cleaning/Replacing the Lamps - Lamps (x5) It is presumed
8.1, 8.2 Cleaning the Shock Absorbing - that the erasure
Rollers, Guides, and Rubber Rollers lamps were lit for
1,800 h.
8.4.2 Cleaning/Replacing the Brush 4 Brush rollers
Roller (x2) 14.2 Cleaning the Filter -

9 Checking the Side-Positioning 10 15 Cleaning Inside the Machine 3

Conveyor Unit 16 Turning ON the High-Voltage 1
9.2 Cleaning the Guide - Switch

9.3.2 Cleaning the Cleaning Guide - 17 Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers 10

Assembly (2 Year Intervals) and Louvers
18 Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filter 3 Filter (x1)
9.3.3 Replacing the Cleaning Guide -
19 Securing the Machine 1
10 Checking the Post-Reading 8
Conveyor Unit 20 Checking the Image/Conveyance 15
10.2 Removing the Post-Reading 2 21 Checking Error Log 1
Conveyor Unit
22 Resetting the Erasure Lamp 1
10.3 Cleaning the Guides, Shock - Lighting Time
Absorbing Rollers, and Rubber
Rollers
10.4 Cleaning the Movable Guide - l Replacement parts for 2 year intervals (when the count processed
Assembly
has reached about 120,000)
11 Checking the Subscanning Unit 30
Reference Parts Name Parts No. Qty. Remarks
11.2 Cleaning the Antistatic Brush - section
Assembly
8.4.2 Cleaning roller 334N5015B 2
11.5 Cleaning the Glass Guide
11.8 Cleaning the Flywheel and Kapton® -
14.1 Lamp 123N0007 5
Belt 18 Air filter 376N0234 1

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-3
 PM-4
l Maintenance programs for 3 year intervals (when the count l Replacement parts for 3 year intervals (when the count processed
processed has reached about 180,000) ( ) has reached about 180,000)
Periodic Reference Parts Name Parts No. Qty. Remarks
Reference Time section
Maintenance program replacement Remarks
section requirements
parts
9.3.3 Guide 363Y0460 1 Side-positioning conveyor unit
2.1 Checking Error Log 1 (surface side)
3 Checking the Image/ 15 363Y0461 1 Side-positioning conveyor unit
Conveyance (back side)
4 Pulling Out the Machine 1 14.3 Filter 603N0225 1 Erasure filter
5.3 Removing the Covers 4
(3 Year Intervals)
6 Turning OFF the High- 1
Voltage Switch
8 Checking the Feed/Load 4
Conveyor Unit
8.4.1 Cleaning the Brush Roller -
9 Checking the Side-
Positioning Conveyor Unit
9.3.3 9.3.3 Replacing the 10 Guide (x2)
Cleaning Guide
11.10 Reinstalling the Side- 2
Positioning Conveyor Unit
14 Checking Lamp Assembly 10
14.1 Cleaning/Replacing the -
Lamps
14.3 Replacing the Filter - Filter (x1)
14.4 Reinstalling the Lamp -
Assembly
16 Turning ON the High- 1
Voltage Switch
17 Cleaning/Reinstalling the 4
Covers and Louvers
18 Cleaning/Replacing the Air 3
Filter
19 Securing the Machine 1
20 Checking the Image/ 15
Conveyance
21 Checking Error Log 1

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-4
 PM-5
1.4 Preventive Maintenance Flow
START A

2. Details of Maintenance Procedures 16. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch

3. Checking the Image/Conveyance 17. Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers and Louvers

4. Pulling Out the Machine 18. Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filter

5. Removing the Covers 19. Securing the Machine

6. Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch 20. Checking the Image/Conveyance

7. Cassette Set Unit 21. Checking the Error Log

8. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit 22. Resetting the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time

9. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit END

10. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit

11. Subscanning Unit

12. Light-Collecting Guide

13. Erasure Conveyor Unit

14. Lamp Assembly

15. Cleaning Inside the Machine

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-5
 PM-6
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures 4. Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows,,and type [“C:\
Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\RuSel\RuSel.exe”] to open the RU
MAINTENANCE UTILITY window.
2.1 Checking the Error Log

1. Power ON the CL.

2. Power ON the RU.
3. Press the [Windows ] key to display the Start menu of Windows.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-6
 PM-7
5. Open the ERROR-DB.
6. Select the log to check the error log.
��������������������������
�����������������
� �
���������������

���������������
���������������
������� ��� �������������������
������� ���������� ������� ������� ���
���������� ��� �� � �� ��� ����������� �������� ���� ��������������������
���� ���� ��� ��� ������

������� ���������� ������������ ������������������

������������
������� �������
���������

������� �������

���������������� ��������

���������������
��������� ����������
�������������
���������������

������
�������

�����
�������

������������

{PM:2.2}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-7
 PM-8
2.2 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time
{PM:3.1}

1. Open the MAINTENANCE UTILITY window.

2. Open the EDIT HISTORY window.
3. Check the erasure lamp lighting time.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-8
 PM-9
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance 3. Perform IP exposures.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
The following checks are made in this section.
- Conveyance checks - Expose two IPs of maximum sizes for each of the IP types (ST/HR type and
- Image checks HR-BD type) used at the institution, with the following doses.
- Check for output characters - With the X-ray tube, the first IP should be exposed in a normal orientation, and
the second in a 180-degree upside-down orientation.
- When the "HR" IP is used in conjunction with the molybdenum X-ray tube, the
3.1 Check Before Procedures IP should be exposed under conditions of "l "For "HR-BD" IP."

u NOTES u
l For "ST/HR" IP
- For the IP used for image/conveyance checks, an IP of the maximum size used in
the hospital should be employed. - X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube
- Make sure that the IP to be used does not contain any important image data - Exposure X-ray dose: 1 mR
exposed. - Maximum size: IP of 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14"x17" (35cm x 43cm)
size
- Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m
1. Check to ensure that the "READY" screen appears. Voltage 80 kV
Amperage 50 mA
Time 0.013 sec
l For "HR-BD" IP
- X-ray tube: Molybdenum X-ray tube
- Exposure X-ray dose: 20 mR
- Maximum size: IP of 18"x24" HR-BD or 24"x30" HR-BD size
- Reference conditions: Distance 0.55 m
Voltage 20 kV
Amperage 100 mA
Time 0.053 sec

2. Perform "Secondary Erasure" on the spontaneous radiation and

image accumulated on the IP to be used.
{Instruction Manual}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-9
 PM-10
3.2 Image/Conveyance Checks 2. Verify that there is no "unusual nonuniformity" found on the output
film or on the image displayed on the image monitor.
{PM:3.3}
u CHECK u
u NOTE u There should be no uneven density difference in the main scan direction.
Because the "MENU" and so forth differ depending on the IP type, image checks
should be performed with the "MENU" specified below. If there is any uneven density difference, compare the films outputted from the
two IPs of the same size, and determine whether such nonuniformity is caused
by the machine or X-ray tube.
1. Record the IP, which was exposed as instructed in "3.1 Check Before
Procedures," under the following film output conditions, and output it. l If there is uneven density difference in the same direction on two films

l "ST/HR" IP
Film output conditions: "TEST", "Image Format", "SINGLE"
l "HR-BD" IP

Film output conditions: "TEST", "Image Format-1", "SINGLE"

→ The machine may be the cause of such nonuniformity.

{Troubleshooting}

l If positions of uneven density difference are different

→ The X-ray tube may be the cause of such nonuniformity.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-10
 PM-11
3 Check the image format. 3.3 Checking the Output Characters
Make sure that the white blank portion is 2 mm or less, as actually measured on
{PM:4.1}
the IP, from the outermost edge of the image frame of the film outputted.
u CHECK u Make sure that the film character format information that was set in “Outputting the
The white blank portion should be 2 mm or less. Film for Image Check” is displayed on the output film. Also verify that none of the
characters look blurred or broken.
If anything abnormal is found:
��
{Troubleshooting} 1. Check the output characters.
u INSTRUCTION u
Check the following.
- The character format information that has been set is correct.
- There is nothing abnormal,such as blurred or broken characters.
If anything abnormal is found;
{MT:Troubleshooting}

REFERENCE

The details of output characters and the character display locations are as
follows.

u NOTE u
The distance measured on the film may differ from the actual size on the IP,
depending on the reading size and film size. The actual size on the IP should be
calculated using the distance measured on the film and the reduction factor for
the film. Compute the actual size on the IP according to the following equation.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-11
 PM-12
4. Pulling Out the Machine 4.2 Disconnecting the Cables
{PM:5.1} {PM:5.2} {PM:5.3}

4.1 Unlocking the Retainers 1. Disconnect the power cable and I/F cable.
{PM:4.2}

1. Power OFF the CL.

2. Power OFF the RU.
3. Unlock the adjustable feet.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-12
 PM-13
5. Removing the Covers

5.1 Removing the Covers (1 Year Intervals)

{PM:8.4.1}

1. Remove the covers.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-13
 PM-14
5.2 Removing the Covers (2 Year Intervals)
{PM:6.}

1. Remove the covers.

u INSTRUCTION u
When removing the upper left-hand side cover, take off the louvers first.
The screw is hidden behind the louvers.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-14
 PM-15
5.3 Removing the Covers (3 Year Intervals) 6. Turning OFF the High-Voltage
{PM:6.}
Switch
1. Remove the covers.
{PM:7.1} {PM:8.4.1}

1. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCT17B board.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-15
 PM-16
7. Cassette Set Unit 1. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit.

7.1 Removing the Feed/Load Conveyor Unit

{PM:7.2}

u NOTE u
Because the feed/load conveyor unit is heavy, pay attention to the following points
when removing, installing, and moving it.
- Before proceeding with the procedures,secure sufficient working space around the
machine.
- Get hold of the portions indicated by the "Hold Here"labels.
- While assuming a comfortable posture, lift or hold up the unit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-16
 PM-17
7.2 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers and Suction 3. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.
Cups

1. Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.

2. Wipe the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-17
 PM-18
4. Remove the suction cup assembly for the first shelf. 5. Clean the suction cups (suction surfaces) with a moistened cloth.

6. Reinstall the suction cup assembly in reverse order of removal.

7. For the rubber rollers and suction cup assemblies for the second,
third, and fourth shelves, repeat steps 1 through 6 to clean them.

l CHECK 1
- To attach the hose, push it all the way.
- Make sure that the route of the hose is stress-free and normal.

{PM:8.1}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-18
 PM-19
8. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit 2. Remove the motor (MB1).

8.1 Cleaning the Shock Absorbing Rollers,

Guides, and Rubber Rollers

u INSTRUCTION u
During the procedures, put down the feed/load conveyor unit in such an orientation as
illustrated below. Otherwise, the feed/load conveyor unit might topple down, so that it
might be damaged.

3. Remove the shock absorbing roller assembly for the first shelf.

1. Remove the spur gears.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-19
 PM-20
4. Clean the shock absorbing roller assembly by use of a vacuum 7. Reinstall the shock-absorbing roller assembly in reverse order of
cleaner. removal.
8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 to clean the shock-absorbing roller, rubber
roller, and guide located on the second, third, and fourth shelves.

9. Reinstall the motor (MB1).

5. Clean the shock absorbing rollers and guides by use of a vacuum

cleaner.

6. Wipe the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-20
 PM-21
10. Attach the spur gears and brackets.

l CHECK1
Make sure that the spur gears are attached in such an orientation as illustrated
below.

{PM:8.2}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-21
 PM-22
8.2 Cleaning the Guides and Rubber Rollers 2. Clean the guides and shock absorbing rollers by use of a vacuum
cleaner.
{PM:8.3}

u NOTES u
- Use care not to exert undue force onto the guide. If undue force is applied to it, the
guide may be deformed.
- Do not place the guide with its IP contacting face down. The contacting face may
be scratched or soiled.

1. Remove the guide for the first shelf, and clean it by use of a vacuum
cleaner. 3. Wipe the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.

4. Reinstall the guides in reverse order of removal.

5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 to clean the shock-absorbing roller, rubber

roller, and guide located on the second, third, and fourth shelves.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-22
 PM-23
8.3 Cleaning the Guides and Rubber Rollers 2. Remove another bracket.

u NOTES u
- Use care not to exert undue force onto the guide. If undue force is applied to it, the
guide may be deformed.
- Do not place the guide with its IP contacting face down. The contacting face may
be scratched or soiled.

1. Remove the bracket.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-23
 PM-24
3. Remove the cam and half-clutch spur gear. l CHECK 1
u NOTE u When attaching the half-clutch spur gear retaining bracket, align the positions of
the half-clutch spur gear, bracket holes, and the bracket shafts.
The inner member of the half-clutch spur gear may pop out. If the inner member
pops out, push it back where it was. If the inner member is removed, it may
cause trouble or failure.

4. Remove the guides and clean them by use of a vacuum cleaner.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-24
 PM-25
5. Remove the spacer. 6. Remove the guides and clean them by use of a vacuum cleaner.

l CHECK 1
Make sure that the spacer is attached properly.
l CHECK 1
When attaching the guide, do so in such an orientation as illustrated below.
Unless this guide is attached properly, other guides could not be attached.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-25
 PM-26
7. Clean the guide by use of a vacuum cleaner. 9. Wipe the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.

8. Clean the guides by use of a vacuum cleaner. 10. Reinstall the guides in reverse order of removal.

{PM:8.4.2}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-26
 PM-27
8.4 Brush Roller 2. Clean the brush rollers and brackets by use of a vacuum cleaner.

8.4.1 Cleaning the Brush Roller

{PM:9.3.1} {PM:9.1}

1. Remove the brush roller assembly.

3. Reinstall the brush roller assembly in reverse order of removal.

l CHECK1
Make sure that the brush roller assembly and brush rollers are attached in their
correct orientations.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-27
 PM-28
8.4.2 Cleaning/Replacing the Brush Roller 2. Clean the brush rollers and brackets by use of a vacuum cleaner.
{PM:8.5}

1. Remove the brush roller assembly.

3. Reinstall the brush roller assembly in reverse order of removal.

l CHECK 1
Make sure that the brush roller assembly and brush rollers are attached in their
correct orientations.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-28
 PM-29
8.5 Cleaning the Antistatic Members 8.6 Reinstalling the Feed/Load Conveyor Unit
{PM:8.6}

1. Clean the antistatic members by use of a vacuum cleaner. u NOTE u

Because the feed/load conveyor unit is heavy, pay attention to the following points
when moving and installing it.
- Before proceeding with the procedures,secure sufficient working space around the
machine.
- Get hold of the portions indicated by the "Hold Here" labels.
- While assuming a comfortable posture,lift or hold up the unit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-29
 PM-30
1. Mount the feed/load conveyor unit onto the housing. 2. Secure the feed/load conveyor unit in place.
u NOTE u
Use care so that the side plate bottom portions of the feed/load conveyor unit do
not ride onto the brackets of the housing.

{PM:9.1}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-30
 PM-31
9. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit 2. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.

9.1 Removing the Side-Positioning Conveyor

Unit
{PM:9.2} {PM:9.3.3}

1. Disconnect the connectors and remove the screws.

{n Detailed Illustration (Step 1)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-31
 PM-32
n Detailed Illustration (Step 1)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-32
 PM-33
9.2 Cleaning the Guide 9.3 Cleaning Guide Assembly
{PM:9.3.2}
9.3.1 Cleaning the Cleaning Guide Assembly
1. Lay down the side-positioning conveyor unit in such an orientation as {PM:13.1}
illustrated below.
1. Remove the guide.

2. Remove the guide.

2. Clean the guide and cleaning guide by use of a vacuum cleaner.

3. Clean the guide by use of a vacuum cleaner.

3. Reinstall the guide in reverse order of removal.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-33
 PM-34
9.3.2 Cleaning the Cleaning Guide Assembly 2. Clean the cleaning guide by use of a vacuum cleaner.

{PM:9.4}

u INSTRUCTION u
If the processed IP count is about 18,000, do not perform the procedures described
below; instead, proceed to "9.3.3 Replacing the Cleaning Guide."
{PM:9.3.3_Replacing the Cleaning Guide}

1. Remove the cleaning guide assembly.

3. Clean the guides by use of a vacuum cleaner.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-34
 PM-35
4. Wipe the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth. 9.3.3 Replacing the Cleaning Guide

1. Remove the cleaning guide assembly.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-35
 PM-36
4. Replace the cleaning guide. l CHECK 1
Make sure that the tension coil springs are attached properly.

5. Reinstall the cleaning guide in reverse order of removal.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-36
 PM-37
6. Put the side-positioning conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated
below.

7. Replace the guide.

8. Reinstall the guide in reverse order of step 7.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-37
 PM-38
9.4 Cleaning the Shock-Absorbing Roller, 3. Clean the guide and antistatic member by use of a vacuum cleaner.
Guide, and Rubber Roller
{PM:9.5}

1. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assemblies.

4. Wipe the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.

2. Clean the shock absorbing rollers and antistatic member by use of a

vacuum cleaner.

5. Reinstall the shock-absorbing roller assemblies in reverse order of

removal.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-38
 PM-39
9.5 Reinstalling the Cleaning Guide Assembly 2. Secure the cleaning guide assembly and guide in place.
and Guide
{PM:10.1} {PM:11.10}

1. Mount the cleaning guide assembly onto the side-positioning

conveyor unit.

3. Connect the connector.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-39
 PM-40
10. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit

10.1 Removing the Retaining Member

{PM:10.2}

1. Remove the retaining member.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-40
 PM-41
10.2 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Unit 1. Disconnect the connectors.
u NOTES u
- To disconnect the CN2, use its special jig. If the jig is not used, the connector
CAUTION located on the board might be damaged.
- When disconnecting the connector by use of the special jig, use a
Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you screwdriver's shaft or the like as a pivot and detach it at right angles relative to
are wearing gloves. the board.

u INSTRUCTION u
Wear gloves when servicing the light-collecting guide.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-41
 PM-42
2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the lower light-collecting guide.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-42
 PM-43
4. Disconnect the connectors and remove the screws. 5. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit.

{PM:10.3}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-43
 PM-44
10.3 Cleaning the Guides, Shock Absorbing 3. Wipe the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.
Rollers, and Rubber Rollers

1. Remove the guides.

4. Reinstall the guides in reverse order of removal.

2. Clean the guides and shock absorbing rollers by use of a vacuum
cleaner.

{PM:10.5}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-44
 PM-45
10.4 Cleaning the Movable Guide Assembly 2. Clean the movable guide assembly by use of a vacuum cleaner.

1. Remove the movable guide assembly.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-45
 PM-46
3. Reinstall the movable guide assembly.

{PM:11.1}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-46
 PM-47
11. Subscanning Unit 1. Disconnect the connectors.
u NOTES u
- To disconnect the CN2, use its special jig. If the jig is not used, the connector
11.1 Removing the Upper Light-Collecting Guide located on the board might be damaged.
- When disconnecting the connector by use of the special jig, use a
screwdriver's shaft or the like as a pivot and detach it at right angles relative to
the board.
CAUTION
Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you
are wearing gloves.

u INSTRUCTION u
When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-47
 PM-48
2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the upper light-collecting guide.

{PM:11.2}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-48
 PM-49
11.2 Cleaning the Antistatic Brush Assembly 2. Remove the transparent cover.

1. Clean the antistatic brush assembly.

3. Remove the shock-absorbing rubber assemblies.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-49
 PM-50
4. Remove the SUS belt.

5. Remove the driven-shaft grip roller (upper).

{PM:11.3}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-50
 PM-51
11.3 Removing the Driving-Shaft Grip Roller 11.4 Removing the Flywheel
{PM:11.4}

1. Remove the driving-shaft grip roller (upper). 1. Remove the Kapton® belt.
u NOTE u
After removing the tension coil spring, support the tensioner by hand. Otherwise,
the tensioner might incline by its own weight, thereby damaging the Kapton® belt.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-51
 PM-52
2. Remove the flywheel. 11.5 Cleaning the Glass Guide
u NOTE u
While inserting an Allen wrench into the hole of the driving shaft to secure the
shaft in place, remove the nut. 1. Remove the motor (MZ3).
{CHECK 1}

{PM:11.5}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-52
 PM-53
2. Remove the spur gears. l CHECK 1
When attaching the spur gears and motor (MZ3), do so in such positions as
illustrated below.

l CHECK 2
Installation should be done in the positions illustrated below.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-53
 PM-54
3. Remove the scanning optics unit. l CHECK 1
WARNING When installing the scanning optics unit, press the positioning brackets of the
scanning optics unit against the frame of the subscanning unit to secure it in
The scanning optics unit should not be removed or installed by other than a place.
service engineer who has been trained to do so.

CAUTION
When servicing the scanning optics unit, be sure to wear an anti-static
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity
built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.

u INSTRUCTION u
Do not remove the top cover of the scanning optics unit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-54
 PM-55
4. Remove the antistatic member. 5. Remove the sensor (SZ1).

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-55
 PM-56
6. Remove the light-collecting mirror. 7. Remove the glass guide.
CAUTION CAUTIONS
Wear gloves when handling the light-collecting mirror. - Wear gloves when handling the glass guide.
- Carefully handle the glass guide so that it is not damaged by hitting it against
surrounding objects.

u INSTRUCTION u
- When removing the screws from the bracket, access them along the route
illustrated below.

- The glass guide retaining bracket is secured by special screws. To attach or

remove them, use the special tool designed for them.

l CHECK 1
After attaching the light-collecting mirror, clean the mirror by use of ethanol.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-56
 PM-57
l CHECK 1
When attaching the glass guide, do so in such an orientation as illustrated below.

8. Clean the glass guide by use of ethanol.

CAUTION
Wear gloves when cleaning the glass guide.

9. Reinstall the removed parts in reverse order of removal.

{PM:11.6}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-57
 PM-58
11.6 Cleaning the Driving Shaft Grip Rollers 3. Attach the driving shaft grip roller.
{PM:11.7}

1. Clean the center guide by use of a vacuum cleaner.

2. Clean the driving shaft grip rollers (upper and lower) with a moistened l CHECK 1
cloth.
When attaching the hook, securely fit it into the slit of the side plate.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-58
 PM-59
11.7 Cleaning the Driven Shaft Grip Rollers 3. Attach the driven shaft grip roller.
{PM:11.8}

1. Clean the center guide by use of a vacuum cleaner.

l CHECK 1
When attaching the hook, securely fit it into the slit of the side plate.
2. Clean the driven shaft grip rollers (upper and lower) with a moistened
cloth.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-59
 PM-60
11.8 Cleaning the Flywheel and Kapton® Belt 3. Reinstall the flywheel.
u NOTE u
While inserting an Allen wrench into the hole of the driving shaft to secure the
1. Clean the flywheel by use of ethanol. shaft in place, tighten the nut.
u INSTRUCTION u
Use care not to damage the surface in contact with the Kapton® belt.

2. Wipe the Kapton® belt with a moistened cloth.

u INSTRUCTION u
When cleaning the Kapton® belt, ethanol should not be used. If ethanol is used,
the date and other markings on the Kapton® belt will be wiped out.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-60
 PM-61
4. Reinstall the Kapton® belt. 11.9 Cleaning the SUS Belt

1. Clean the SUS belt by use of ethanol.

2. Reinstall the SUS belt.

u INSTRUCTION u
After installing the SUS belt, rotate the driving shaft by hand to verify that the
SUS belt does not come off.

l CHECK 1
- The Kapton® belt should be mounted with its date indicating side up, so that
the arrow mark faces the side plate.

- After mounting the Kapton® belt, manually rotate the flywheel to verify that the
Kapton® belt does not come off.

{PM:11.8}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-61
 PM-62
3. Reinstall the shock-absorbing rubber assemblies.

4. Reinstall the transparent cover.

{PM:11.9}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-62
 PM-63
11.10 Reinstalling the Side-Positioning Conveyor 2. Reinstall the side-positioning conveyor unit.
Unit

1. Reinstall the antistatic brush assembly.

3. Secure the side-positioning conveyor unit in place.

{n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 3)}
{PM:12.1} {PM:13.1}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-63
 PM-64
n Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 3)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-64
 PM-65
12. Light-Collecting Guide 2. Reinstall the upper light-collecting guide.

12.1 Cleaning the Upper Light-Collecting Guide

CAUTIONS
- Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you
are wearing gloves.
- Do not wipe the light-collecting guide with a dry cloth. If so, the light-
collecting guide may be scratched or otherwise damaged.
- If the lens cleaning paper becomes soiled, replace it with a new one.
- Wipe the light-collecting surface of the light-collecting guide until the lens
cleaning paper becomes no longer soiled.
- Wipe the light-collecting guide assembly in one direction at a constant speed.
- Do not wipe the photomultiplier attachment face.

u INSTRUCTION u
Wear gloves when servicing the light-collecting unit.

1. Clean the light-collecting face of the upper light-collecting guide by

use of ethanol.
REFERENCE

To clean the light-collecting guide, two sheets of lens cleaning paper should be
folded in four and then moistened with ethanol.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-65
 PM-66
3. Secure the upper light-collecting guide in place. 4. Connect the connectors.
u NOTE u
The CN2 should be connected at right angles to the board. If not, the connector
of the board might be damaged.

{PM:12.2}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-66
 PM-67
12.2 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyor 2. Secure the post-reading conveyor unit in place.
Unit

1. Reinstall the post-reading conveyor unit.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-67
 PM-68
3. Clean the light-collecting face of the lower light-collecting guide by 4. Reinstall the lower light-collecting guide.
use of ethanol.

CAUTIONS
- Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you
are wearing gloves.
- Do not wipe the light-collecting guide with a dry cloth. If so, the light-
collecting guide may be scratched or otherwise damaged.
- If the lens cleaning paper becomes soiled, replace it with a new one.
- Wipe the light-collecting surface of the light-collecting guide until the lens
cleaning paper becomes no longer soiled.
- Wipe the light-collecting guide assembly in one direction at a constant speed.
- Do not wipe the photomultiplier attachment face.

u INSTRUCTION u
Wear gloves when servicing the light-collecting unit.

REFERENCE

To clean the light-collecting guide, two sheets of lens cleaning paper should be
folded in four and then moistened with ethanol.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-68
 PM-69
5. Secure the lower light-collecting guide in place. 6. Connect the connectors.
u NOTE u
The CN2 should be connected at right angles to the board. If not, the connector
of the board might be damaged.

7. Reinstall the retaining member.

{PM:13.1}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-69
 PM-70
13. Erasure Conveyor Unit u INSTRUCTION u
When handling the lamp assembly, take hold of the portions illustrated below.

13.1 Removing the Lamp Assembly

{PM:14.1} {PM:13.2}

CAUTION
Do not touch the surface (filter face)of the lamp assembly immediately after the
operation is stopped. Since it remains at high temperatures, you may suffer
burns.

1. Remove the lamp assembly.

u NOTES u
- When handling the lamp assembly, wear gloves so that the filter located on the
bottom face of the lamp assembly is not soiled.
- Do not grasp the filter face when holding the lamp assembly. Otherwise, the
shock absorbing member might be peeled off.
- Place the lamp assembly with the filter face up. If the lamp is placed with the
filter face down,the filter may be damaged.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-70
 PM-71
13.2 Removing the Erasure Conveyor Unit 2. Remove the erasure conveyor unit.
{PM:13.3} u NOTE u
When puling out and transporting the erasure conveyor unit, take hold of the
1. Open the guide. designated portions to perform the procedures. If you grasp the rollers, guides,
or other portions, they may be deformed.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-71
 PM-72
13.3 Cleaning the IP Switchback Assembly 3. Clean the guides and shock absorbing rollers by use of a vacuum
cleaner.
{PM:13.4}
u NOTE u
1. Close the guide. When disassembling the IP switchback assembly, do not apply excessive force
onto the guides. Otherwise, they might be deformed.

2. Remove the IP switchback assembly.

4. Reinstall the IP switchback assembly in reverse order of removal.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-72
 PM-73
13.4 Cleaning the Reflection Plate Guide and 2. Clean the reflection face and guides with a moistened cloth.
Rubber Rollers
{PM:13.5}

1. Remove the reflection plate guide.

3. Clean the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.

l CHECK 1
When attaching the reflection plate guide, make sure that there is no gap
between the reflection plate guide and the guides. 4. Reinstall the reflection guide and guides in reverse order of removal.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-73
 PM-74
13.5 Cleaning the Shock-Absorbing Roller and 3. Remove the guide.
Guide

1. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly and guide.

2. Clean the shock absorbing rollers and guide by use of a vacuum

cleaner.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-74
 PM-75
4. Clean the guides by use of a vacuum cleaner. 13.6 Removing the Latch Drive Unit

1. Remove the timing belt.

5. Reinstall the shock absorbing roller assembly and guides in reverse 2. Remove the brackets.
order of removal.

{PM:13.6}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-75
 PM-76
3. Remove the spur gears. 5. Remove the timing belt.

4. Remove the grip arm (reference side).

6. Remove the spur gears.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-76
 PM-77
7. Remove the grip arm (opposite reference side). 9. Remove the latch drive unit (overall).
u INSTRUCTION u
When removing the latch drive unit, lift up the reference side and then the
opposite reference side. Otherwise, the latch drive unit could not be removed.

8. Move the latch assembly to the position illustrated below.

{PM:13.7}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-77
 PM-78
13.7 Cleaning the Rubber Roller and Guide 2. Remove the latch assembly (reference side).

1. Remove the motors.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-78
 PM-79
3. Remove the guide. 4. Remove the guide.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-79
 PM-80
5. Clean the guides by use of a vacuum cleaner. 6. Clean the rubber rollers with a moistened cloth.

{PM:13.8}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-80
 PM-81
13.8 Reinstalling the Guides 2. Reinstall the guide.
{CHECK 1}

1. Reinstall the guide.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-81
 PM-82
l CHECK 1 3. Reinstall the motors.
Make sure that the tip of the guide is located above the half-punch.

{PM:13.9}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-82
 PM-83
13.9 Reinstalling the Latch Drive Unit 3. Reinstall the latch drive unit (overall).
u INSTRUCTION u
When installing the latch drive unit, attach its opposite reference side first and
1. Reinstall the latch assembly (reference side). then its reference side. Otherwise, the latch drive unit might be damaged.

2. Move the latch assembly to its home position.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-83
 PM-84
4. Move the latch assembly to the position illustrated below. 6. Attach the grip arm (opposite reference side).

5. Secure the latch drive unit in place.

l CHECK 1
Make sure that the cam and spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-84
 PM-85
7. Attach the spur gears. 9. Attach the grip arm (reference side).

8. Attach the timing belt.

l CHECK 1
Make sure that the cam and spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-85
 PM-86
10. Attach the brackets. 13.10 Cleaning the Antistatic Members
{PM:13.11}

1. Clean the antistatic members by use of a vacuum cleaner.

l CHECK 1
Before attaching the brackets, make sure that the actuator and sensor are in
such a position that they do not interfere with each other.
11. Attach the timing belt.

{PM:13.10}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-86
 PM-87
13.11 Reinstalling the Erasure Conveyor Unit 2. Reinstall the erasure conveyor unit.
u NOTE u
When installing the erasure conveyor unit, take hold of the designated portions to
1. Open the guide. perform the procedures. If you grasp the rollers, guides, or other portions, they
may be deformed.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-87
 PM-88
3. Close the guide.

{PM:14.1}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-88
 PM-89
14. Lamp Assembly 2. Remove the lamps.
u NOTES u
- Remove the lamps in such order as illustrated below.
14.1 Cleaning/Replacing the Lamps

1. Remove the filter.

- While avoiding the tab of the lamp assembly, detach the lamp aslant.
Otherwise, the lamp may be scratched or damaged.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-89
 PM-90
4. Reinstall the lamps.
u NOTE u
- Install the lamps in such order as illustrated below.

3. Clean the reflection plate with a moistened cloth.

{PM:14.2} {PM:14.3}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-90
 PM-91
14.2 Cleaning the Filter 3. Reinstall the filter and reflection plates.
{PM:14.4}

1. Clean the guides by use of a vacuum cleaner.

2. Clean the filter with a moistened cloth.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-91
 PM-92
14.3 Replacing the Filter
{PM:14.4}

1. Replace the filter.

2. Reinstall the filter and reflection plates.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-92
 PM-93
14.4 Reinstalling the Lamp Assembly
{PM:17.} {PM:15.} {PM:16.}

1. Reinstall the lamp assembly.

u INSTRUCTION u
When handling the lamp assembly, take hold of the portions illustrated below to
perform the procedures.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-93
 PM-94
15. Cleaning Inside the Machine 16. Turning ON the High-Voltage
{PM:16.} Switch
1. Using a vacuum cleaner, remove dust deposited inside the machine. {PM:17.}

1. Turn ON the high-voltage switch.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-94
 PM-95
17. Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers 18. Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filter
and Louvers {PM:19.1}

{PM:18.} 1. Clean or replace the air filter.

CAUTION u INSTRUCTIONS u
Before reinstalling the covers,make sure that the high-voltage switch is in the - The air filter should be cleaned at intervals of one year.
ON position. - The air filter should be replaced at intervals of two years.

REFERENCE
1. Clean the covers and louvers.
The air filter should be cleaned by the user at three months intervals.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- The louvers should be cleaned at intervals of one year.
- Clean all of the eight louvers attached on the machine.

2. Reinstall the covers by reversing their removal procedures.

{PM:5.1} {PM:5.2} {PM:5.3}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-95
 PM-96
19. Securing the Machine 20. Checking the Image/Conveyance
{PM:21.}
19.1 Connecting the Cables
1. Check the image/conveyance.
{PM:19.2}
{PM:3_Checking the Image/Conveyance}
1. Connect the cables by reversing their disconnection procedures.
{PM:4.2_Disconnecting the Cables}
21. Checking the Error Log
19.2 Securing the Machine
{PM:22.}
{PM:20.}
1. Check the error log.
1. Secure the machine by reversing the procedures for unlocking the
{PM:2.1_Checking the Error Log}
retainers.
{PM:4.1_Unlocking the Retainers}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-96
 PM-97
22. Resetting the Erasure Lamp
Lighting Time

When the erasure lamps are replaced,be sure to reset the erasure lamp lighting time.
1. Open the MAINTENANCE UTILITY window.
2. Open the EDIT HISTORY window.
3. Reset the erasure lamp lighting time.
��������������������������
�����������������
� �
���������������

���������������
���������������
������� ��� �������������������
������� ���������� ������� ������� ���
���������� ��� �� � �� ��� ����������� �������� ���� ��������������������
���� ���� ��� ��� ������

������� ���������� ������������ ������������������

������������
������� �������
��������� �������������
�������������������
������� ������������������������������ �������
������������������
���������������� ��������
����� ����� ���� �� ��

��������������� ������������������������
��������� ������������ ����������
� ��������� �

������������ � ��������� �

�������������� � ������������� �

���������� � ��������������������� �

���������� � ��������������������� �

������������ �

�����

����� ����� ���� �� ��

��������������������������� � �����

���������������������������� �

������������
����� ����� ����� ���� �� ��
������� ���������������������������������������� � �����

����������������������������������������� �

������ ��������� ���

�������������
������������

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-97
 PM-98
BLANK PAGE

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual PM-98
 Appx PM-1
Appendix 1. Preventive Maintenance for
6 Year Intervals
The procedures to be performed at 6Y (6 year) intervals or when the count processed
has reached about 360,000 are described here.

1. Parts to be Replaced
l Rollers to be replaced l Guides to be replaced
����������������� �����������������

���������� ����������
������������� �������������
�������� ��������

������� �������
������������� �������������

������������

�����������������
�������������
���������������� ����������������
�����������������
�������������

�������
� ��������������
��������������� ��������
������������ ������������ � �����
������������� ��������������� �������������
�����������
� ���� � �����
������������ ������������

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx PM-1
 Appx PM-2
2. Preventive Maintenance Program List Reference Maintenance program MODEL Time Periodic
replacement Remarks
section requirements parts
l Maintenance programs for 6 year intervals (when the count 9. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
processed has reached about 360,000) ( ) 9.2 Replacing the Guide
9.3 Replacing the Shock-Absorbing Shock-absorbing roller
Periodic Rollers (x9)
Reference Time
Maintenance program MODEL requirements replacement Remarks
section 9.4 Replacing the Cleaning Guide Guide (x2)
parts
3.1 Checking the Error Log 10. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit
4. Checking the Image/Conveyance 10.2 Replacing the Guide (B) Guide (x1)
4.3 Checking the Output Characters 10.3 Replacing the Guide (A) Guide (x1)
5. Puling Out the Machine 10.4 Replacing the Movable Guides Guide (x1)
6. Removing the Covers 11. Subscanning Unit
7. Turning OFF the High-Voltage 11.1 Replacing the Center Guide Guide (x2)
Switch 12. Erasure Conveyor Unit
8. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit 12.2 Replacing the Guide (IP Guide (x1)
8.2 Replacing the Guide Guide (x1) Switchback Assembly)
(Convergence Unit Upper Side) 12.4 Replacing the Branch Path Guide (x1)
8.3 Replacing the Convergence Path Guide (x1) Changeover Guide
Changeover Guide 12.5 Replacing the Guide (F) Guide (x1)
8.4 Replacing the Guide Guide (x2) 12.6 Replacing the Guide (E) Guide (x1)
8.5 Replacing the Guide Guide (x1) 12.7 Replacing the Guide (D) Guide (x1)
8.6 Replacing the Guide Guide (x1)
8.7 Replacing the Guide Guide (x2)
8.8 Replacing the Guide Guide (x1)
(Convergence Unit Lower Side)
8.9 Replacing the Guides (for the Guide (x4)
First, Second, Third, and Fourth
Shelves)
8.10 Replacing the Path Changeover Path changeover
Guides (for the First, Second, guide (x4)
Third, and Fourth Shelves)
8.11 Replacing the Shock-Absorbing Shock-absorbing roller
Rollers (Convergence Unit) (x3)
8.12 Replacing the Shock-Absorbing Shock-absorbing roller
Roller Assemblies (for the First, (x18)
Second, and Third Shelves)
8.13 Replacing the Shock-Absorbing Shock-absorbing roller
Roller Assembly (for the Fourth (x6)
Shelf)
8.14 Replacing the Brush Roller Rubber roller (x2)
Assembly

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx PM-2
 Appx PM-3
Periodic
Reference Time
Maintenance program MODEL replacement Remarks
section requirements parts
12.8 Replacing the Guide (C) Guide (x1)
12.9 Replacing the Guide (B) Guide (x1)
12.10 Replacing the Guide (A) Guide (x1)
12.12 Replacing the Filter Filter (x1)
13. Cleaning Inside the Machine
14. Turning ON the High-Voltage
Switch
15. Cleaning/Reinstalling the
Covers and Louvers
16. Replacing the Air Filters
17. Securing the Machine
18. Checking the Image/
Conveyance
19. Checking the Error Log

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx PM-3
 Appx PM-4
3. Detailed Procedures for Servicing 8. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit
3.1 Checking the Error Log 8.1 Removing the Feed/Load Conveyor Unit
{PM:2.1_Checking the Error Log} {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit}

3.2 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time 8.2 Replacing the Guide (Convergence Unit Upper Side)
{MC:6.35_Guide (Convergence Unit Upper Side)}
{PM:2.2_Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time}
8.3 Replacing the Convergence Path Changeover Guide
{MC:6.33_Convergence Path Changeover Guide}
4. Checking the Image/Conveyance
8.4 Replacing the Guide
4.1 Check Before Procedures {MC:6.32_Rubber Rollers (Q and R)}
{PM:3.1_Check Before Procedures}
8.5 Replacing the Guide
4.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance {MC:6.31_Rubber Rollers (O and P)}
{PM:3.2_Image/Conveyance Checks} 8.6 Replacing the Guide
4.3 Checking the Output Characters {MC:6.30_Rubber Rollers (M and N)}

{PM:3.3_Checking the Output Characters} 8.7 Replacing the Guide

{MC:6.29_Rubber Rollers (I, J, K, and L)}

5. Pulling Out the Machine 8.8 Replacing the Guide (Convergence Unit Lower Side)
{MC:6.28_Guide (Convergence Unit Lower Side)}
5.1 Pulling Out the Machine
8.9 Replacing the Guides (for the First, Second, Third,
{PM:4.1_Unlocking the Retainers}
and Fourth Shelves)
{MC:6.27_Guides (for the First, Second, Third, and Fourth Shelves)}
5.2 Disconnecting the Cables
{PM:4.2_Disconnecting the Cables} 8.10 Replacing the Path Changeover Guides (for the First,
Second, Third, and Fourth Shelves)
{MC:6.26_Path Changeover Guides (for the First, Second, Third, and Fourth
6. Removing the Covers Shelves)}

{PM:5.2_Removing the Covers (2 Year Intervals)} 8.11 Replacing the Shock-Absorbing Rollers (Convergence
Unit)
7. Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch {MC:6.22_Shock-Absorbing Rollers (Convergence Unit)}

{PM:6._Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch} 8.12 Replacing the Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies (for
the First, Second, and Third Shelves)

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx PM-4
 Appx PM-5
{MC:6.19_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies (for the First, Second, and
Third Shelves)}
10. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit

8.13 Replacing the Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly (for 10.1 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Unit
the Fourth Shelf) {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}
{MC:6.20_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf)}
10.2 Replacing the Guide (B)
8.14 Replacing the Brush Roller Assembly {MC:8.20_Guide (B)}
{MC:6.7_Brush Roller Assembly}
10.3 Replacing the Guide (A)
8.15 Reinstalling the Feed/Load Conveyor Unit {MC:8.19_Guide (A)
{MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit }
10.4 Replacing the Movable Guides
{MC:8.14_Variable Guide Assembly}
9. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
9.1 Removing the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit 11. Subscanning Unit
{MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
11.1 Replacing the Center Guide
9.2 Replacing the Guide {MC:12.27_Center Guide}
{MC:7.28_Guide}
11.2 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyor Unit
9.3 Replacing the Shock-Absorbing Rollers {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit}
{MC:7.22_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly}
11.3 Reinstalling the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
9.4 Replacing the Cleaning Guide {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit}
u INSTRUCTION u
For the CR-IR362, skip the replacement of the cleaning guide and proceed to "10.1
Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Unit."

{PM:9.3.3_Replacing the Cleaning Guide}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx PM-5
 Appx PM-6
12. Erasure Conveyor Unit 12.10 Replacing the Guide (A)
{MC:9.32_Guide (A)}
12.1 Removing the Erasure Conveyor Unit
12.11 Reinstalling the Erasure Conveyor Unit
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
{MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit}
12.2 Replacing the Guide (IP Switchback Assembly)
12.12 Replacing the Filter
{MC:9.16_IP Switchback Assembly}
{MC:9.8_Filter}
12.3 Reinstalling the IP Switchback Assembly
12.13 Reinstalling the Lamp Assembly
{MC:9.16_IP Switchback Assembly}
{MC:9.2_Lamp Assembly}
12.4 Replacing the Branch Path Changeover Guide
{MC:9.47_Branch Path Changeover Guide}

12.5 Replacing the Guide (F)

{MC:9.46_Guide (F)}

12.6 Replacing the Guide (E)

{MC:9.44_Guide (E)}

12.7 Replacing the Guide (D)

{MC:9.43_Guide (D)}

12.8 Replacing the Guide (C)

{MC:9.34_Guide (C)}

12.9 Replacing the Guide (B)

{MC:9.33_Guide (B)}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx PM-6
 Appx PM-7
13. Cleaning Inside the Machine 17. Securing the Machine
1. Clean dust and other deposits inside the machine by use of a vacuum 17.1 Connecting the Cables
cleaner.
1. Reverse the procedures for disconnecting the cables.
{PM:4.2_Disconnecting the Cables}
14. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch
{PM:16._Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch}
17.2 Securing the Machine
1. Reverse the procedures for unlocking the retainers.
15. Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers and {PM:4.1_Unlocking the Retainers}
Louvers
18. Checking the Image/Conveyance
CAUTION
Before installing the covers, check to ensure that the high-voltage switch is 1. Check the image/conveyance.
placed in the ON position. {PM:3._Checking the Image/Conveyance}

1. Clean the covers and louvers. 19. Checking the Error Log
u INSTRUCTION u 1. Check the error log.
All of the louvers (eight) attached to the machine should be cleaned. {PM:2.1_Checking the Error Log}

2. Reverse the procedures for removing the covers. 20. Resetting the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time
{PM:5.2_Removing the Covers (2 Year Intervals)} {PM:22._Resetting the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time}

16. Replacing the Air Filters

{PM:18._Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filter}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx PM-7
 Appx PM-8
BLANK PAGE

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx PM-8
 Control Sheet
Issue date Revision Pages affected
number Reason

08.25.2003 01 New release (FM4098) All pages

CR-IR 363 Service Manual

Installation (IN)

011-202-01 CR-IR 363 Service Manual

08.25.2003 FM4098
 IN-1
1. Specifications of Machine n Installation Space
l For fixing by adjustable feet
n Product Code
CR-IR 363

n Dimensions
W655 × D740 × H1470 (mm)

l For fixing by machine retainers

n Weight
285 kg approx.

n Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine

Moving : Double-wheel caster (variable-direction/no-brake) x4
Fixing : - Adjustable foot x4
- Machine retainer x2

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-1
 IN-2
2. Installation Work Flowchart
n Workflow for First-Time Installation

START
A

3. Preparation for Installation 7. CL Installation Procedures

3.2 Unloading {FCR XG-1/CR CL Service Manual}

3.3 Transfer 8. Installing RU Software

3.4 Temporary Placement 8.1 Setting the IP Address of the RU

3.5 Checking the Items Supplied 8.2 Setting the CL and Checking Connection

4. Installation Procedures 8.3 Installing Setup PC-TOOL

8.4 Installing RU Software

4.1 Removing Tapes from the Machine

4.2 Removing the Light Protect Plates 9. Image/Conveyance Checks

4.3 Repositioning the Retaining Members 9.1 Check Before Procedures

4.4 Installing the Cover
9.2 Image/Conveyance Checks

5. Connecting the Cables

10. Powering OFF the CL/RU
5.1 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking
Resistance Value 11. Cleaning the CL/RU

5.2 Connecting the Interface Cable

END
6. Final Placement

6.1 Securing the Cable

6.2 Securing the Machine

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-2
 IN-3
3. Preparation for Installation 3.1.2 Precautions on Patient Environment

n Additional Protective Grounding

3.1 Precautions Regarding Installation If the RU is installed in the patient environment with the connected equipment in the
non-medically used room, the additional protective grounding will be required.
The place where the machine is to be installed needs to meet the criteria Definitions of "patient environment", "medically-used room", and "non-medically used
set forth in "Getting Started" and "3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements. room" are given below.
"Preinstallation procedures should be performed beforehand for necessary
construction work, electrical work, and air-conditioning system installation. l Patient Environment
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures
3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements (treatment, tests, diagnosis, monitoring).It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four
Avoid the following installation sites: directions and 2.5 m in height from the area of the patient's body.
- Places where the temperature changes drastically. It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
- Places near heat sources such as heaters.
- Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur. l Medically-Used Room
- Places where corrosive gas may be generated. Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
- Dusty places. grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
- Places where the machine is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock. grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
- Places that are exposed to direct sunlight.
used room.
- Places that are exposed to X-rays while the machine is processing.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
Make sure that the machine will never be exposed to direct and scattered X-rays
while the machine is processing. l Non-Medically Used Room
The size and position of the X-ray shields should be such that the machine is
Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
completely shielded to avoid exposure of direct and scattered X-rays to the
machine.
3.1.3 Handling Precautions for Printed Circuit Boards and
l When installed in the patient environment Optical Unit
In the room where the machine is to be installed, the hospital-grade grounding When servicing a board or optical unit, use a wristband to ground your body.
terminal and outlet should be provided. If you body is not grounded, the electrostatic buildup on your body may damage the
The installation place should be within reach of the cable of the patient environment electronic parts.
support cable kit from the hospital-grade grounding terminal and outlet.

l When installed in other than the patient environment 3.1.4 Precautions for System Connection
Make sure that persons other than routine operators of the machine will not touch the "Accessory equipment connected to be the analog and digital interfaces must be
machine inadvertently. certified according to the respective IEC Standards. Furthermore all configurations
shall comply with the medical system standard, IEC60601-1-1. Everyone who
connects additional equipment configures a medical system, and is therefore
responsible that the system complies with the requirements of IEC60601-1-1. If in
doubt consult with the your local technical service representative."

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-3
 IN-4
3.2 Unloading 3. Remove the front end of the crate.
u NOTES u
CAUTIONS
- The six lug screws located on the front should be removed first. Otherwise,
- When unloading the machine, two persons should always cooperate to do so. the crate may topple down, causing you injury.
- Before unloading the machine, secure a proper machine transfer route. - The removed crate should be moved away to an unobstructive place.

REFERENCE
Before unloading the machine, together with the carrier pallet, from the load-carrying
platform of the truck, make sure that there is enough space (2700 mm or more) on the
rear side of the machine.

1. Move down the machine together with the carrier pallet from the load-
carrying platform of the truck.
2. Remove the corrugated cardboards.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-4
 IN-5
4. Remove the screws from the crate. 6. Remove the top plate from the crate.
CAUTION
The top plate should not be disassembled, because it will be used when
lowering the machine from the carrier pallet.

5. Incline the crate to take it out.

CAUTION REFERENCES
When removing the crate, incline the crate to take it out. If you try to move the - After the top plate is removed, break up the crate and put the resulting pieces
crate, it might hit the machine, thereby damaging the machine. together for conveyance.
- Because the crate is assembled with nails, hit it with a hammer or the like from
inside to break up the crate.
- Use care not to get injured by protruding nails when breaking up the crate.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-5
 IN-6
7. Remove the accessories-containing bug. 9. Lower the adjustable feet bolts to lift up the machine.
CAUTION
Unless the machine is lifted up by the adjustable feet, the machine retainers
could not be removed.

8. Remove the lower portion of the barrier bag that protects the machine.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-6
 IN-7
10. Remove the machine retainers on the right-hand side. 11. Remove the machine retainers on the left-hand side.
When the four nuts are loosened, the machine retainers lower accordingly, so that When the four nuts are loosened, the machine retainers lower accordingly, so that
the machine moves down onto the carrier pallet. the machine moves down onto the carrier pallet.
CAUTION CAUTION
When the nut is loosened, the machine may incline by its own weight. So, use When the nut is loosened, the machine may incline by its own weight. So, use
care not to get your finger pinched by the machine retainer or adjustable foot. care not to get your finger pinched by the machine retainer or adjustable foot.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-7
 IN-8
12. Raise the adjustable feet up to their upper limit. 14. Cut the Insulock ties.

13. Secure the top plate removed at step 6 onto the carrier pallet.
CAUTIONS
- Use the insulock ties to fix the top plate onto the carrier pallet securely.
- Be sure to secure the top plate on the rear side of the machine. The carrier 15. Remove the vinyl cover that protects the machine.
pallet is designed so that the top plate cannot be secured on the front side of
the machine.

u INSTRUCTION u
During the winter season, allow the machine to stand under its cover-attached
condition for sufficient time before unpacking it.
If the vinyl cover is removed immediately after the machine is carried into the
room, moisture condensation may occur on the machine.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-8
 IN-9
16. Lower the machine from the carrier pallet. 3.3 Transfer
CAUTION
CAUTIONS
When lowering the machine from the carrier pallet, one person should be
- When unloading the machine, two persons should always cooperate to do so.
positioned on the right-hand side of the machine, and the other on its left-hand
side. - When transferring the machine by use of its casters, raise the adjustable feet
of the machine all the way up to their upper limit.
- When bringing the machine into the installation place, support it so that it will
not topple down.
- When supporting the machine, grasp the sides and rear of the machine. If
the plastic portion of the machine's front is grasped, the machine may be
damaged.
- When the machine should be moved over some step or bump, move it as
slowly as possible to avoid shock to it. Note that the step over which the
machine may move is about 10 mm high at most.

1. Put the hand lifter underneath the machine.

u INSTRUCTION u
The hand lifter should be oriented aslant with respect to the machine.

2. Transfer the machine into the installation place.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-9
 IN-10
3.4 Temporary Placement 3.5 Checking the Items Supplied
Check whether all the items are supplied in accordance with the PACKING LIST that
1. Secure space required for installation procedures and temporarily is contained in each carton.
place the machine.
n Machine Main Body
Check Item Qty. Remarks
Machine main body 1

n Accessories
Check Item Qty. Remarks
Instruction Manual 1
Test Result Sheet 1
Machine-specific data floppy diskette 1 3.5-inch/1.44 MB
CD-ROM 1 For backup
Fuse set 1 Spare
Clamp 2
Insulock tie 2
1 Cassette insert operation label
Label
2. Secure the machine with the adjustable feet in place. 1 Exposure markers precaution label
Spur gear 1
1 324N3164
Timing belt wheel
1 324N3165
5 TP3x6
Screw
2 T4x8

n Optional Items
Check Item Qty. Remarks
Machine AC power cable for use in U.S. 1
Machine AC power cable for use in Europe
1
(excluding U.K.), TUV certified
Machine AC power cable for use in U.K.,
1
TUV certified
Anti-topple retainer kit 1 For retaining the machine

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-10
 IN-11
4. Installation Procedures 4.2 Removing the Light Protect Plates
1. Remove the lower front cover.
4.1 Removing Tapes from the Machine
1. Remove the tapes.

2. Remove the lower light protect plate.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-11
 IN-12
4.3 Repositioning the Retaining Members 2. Reposition the lower retaining members.

REFERENCE
The retaining members may be removed along the rope.

1. Remove the upper retaining member.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-12
 IN-13
3. Reposition the lower retaining members. 4. Attach the screws and upper retaining member.

u INSTRUCTION u
When the "both-side cassette identification barcode reader" is to be installed
to prevent wrong insertion of a cassette, see "MC 5.12 Barcode Reader
Assemblies."
{MC:5.12_Barcode Reader Assemblies}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-13
 IN-14
4.4 Installing the Cover 5. Connecting the Cables
1. Install the lower light protect plate.
5.1 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking
Resistance Value
CAUTIONS
- Before measuring the resistance value, make sure that the power plug is
unplugged from the outlet.
- If the machine is to be installed in the patient environment, see "APPENDIX 1.
ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING."
{IN:Appendix 1._Additional Protective Grounding}

1. Connect the power cable to the machine, and place the breaker switch
in the ON position.

2. Install the front cover.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-14
 IN-15
2. Measure the resistance value of the power cable. 5.2 Connecting the Interface Cable
(Reference value)
Terminal L-N L-E N-E CAUTION
Resistance value 100k Ω - ∞ ∞ A telephone cable should not be plugged into the I/F cable connector.
The type of cable compatible with this machine is an IEC950/UL1950-listed
cable only.

u NOTE u
For the I/F cable, only the straight cable of UTP type should be used.

1. Connect the I/F cable to the I/F cable connector of the machine.

3. Place the breaker switch in the OFF position.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-15
 IN-16
2. Connect the I/F cable to the switching hub. 6. Final Placement
For final placement of the machine, check the requests of the user, and observe the
procedures described below to secure the machine and cables in place.
When the machine is to be secured by use of the anchor nuts, see "Appendix 4.
Securing the Machine with the Anchor Nuts"

6.1 Securing the Cable

CAUTION
If the machine is to be installed in the patient environment, see "APPENDIX 1.
ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING."
{IN:Appendix 1._Additional Protective Grounding}

CAUTION
Do not tie or bundle the power cable in such a manner that it is overloaded.

1. Plug the power cable into the outlet.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-16
 IN-17
6.2 Securing the Machine 7. CL Installation Procedures
1. Secure the four adjustable feet down onto the floor.
1. Perform the CL installation procedures.
u NOTE u
u NOTE u
When securing the adjustable feet, pay attention to the following points.
- The four adjustable feet should be evenly loaded. Complete "7. CL Installation Procedures" before performing the procedures
described in "8. Installing RU Software."
However, if there is too little space on the right and left sides in the machine
installation place to secure the adjustable feet on the rear side, the two
adjustable feet on the front side should be secured in place. In this case, the {FCR XG-1/CR CL Service Manual}
two adjustable feet and two casters should be evenly loaded.
- When the adjustable feet are secured, the casters should be detached from
the floor.

2. Secure the adjustable feet.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-17
 IN-18
8. Installing the RU Software 3. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
After the main screen appears, sequentially touch the upper left and upper right
corners of the touch panel.
REFERENCE
u NOTE u
This chapter describes the procedures, by way of example, where settings are made
as follows: Because the IP address of the FTP server has not been set yet, it takes about
IP address of the RU : 172.16.1.11 three minutes until the main screen appears.
IP address of the CL : 172.16.1.21
REFERENCE
If your touch is accepted by the panel, a "beep" alarm sound is generated.
8.1 Setting the IP Address of the RU
1. Turn ON the power of the CL. �� ��
������� �������
2. Turn ON the power of the RU.

���������������������������������
��������������������� ������������

u INSTRUCTION u
If you cannot put the RU into the Maintenance Mode, turn OFF the power of the
RU and then reboot the RU all over again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-18
 IN-19
4. Set the IP address of the RU. 5. Set the IP address of the FTP server.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Enter the IP address of the RU that is set in the CL. Enter the IP address of the CL.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-19
 IN-20
8.2 Setting the CL and Checking Connection 8.3 Installing Setup PC-TOOL
1. Execute "Network Check". 1. Put the Install CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the CL.
2. Click on [INSTALL].

3. Click on [NEXT].

4. Click on [Install].

u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{Troubleshooting}

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-20
 IN-21
5. When Install is completed, click on [Finish]. 8.4 Installing RU Software
REFERENCE
This section describes the procedures, by way of example, where settings are made
as follows:
INSTALL VERSION : 1.1
LANGUAGE : JAPAN
BRAND TYPE : JAPAN (FMS)

1. Click on [START].

2. Click on [NEW].

3. Enter Install "RU NAME" and "RU IP ADDR".

u NOTE u
The IP address of the RU that is set in the CL should be entered.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-21
 IN-22
4. Click on [PING]. 6. Click on [INSTALL].

5. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window. 7. Click on [OK].

8. Select "INSTALL VERSION".

l [GOOD indication]
The result is normal when the following message appears.
| Ping statistics for 172.16.1.11: |
| Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
9. Select "LANGUAGE".
l [NO GOOD indication]
Other than above.

u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{Troubleshooting}
REFERENCE
- For "LANGUAGE", either "JAPAN" or "ENGLISH" may be selected.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-22
 IN-23
10. Select "BRAND TYPE" and click on [OK]. REFERENCE

REFERENCES
- For "BRAND TYPE", either "JAPAN", "U.S.A.", "EU", or "OEM" may be
selected.

l RU identification code
When multiple RU's are employed, identification code (one alphanumeric digit)
is set in order to enable the user to verify the image reading RU on film.
l Erasure mode
Set the erasure mode that is selectable in the erasure mode SW of the RU.
- "RU TYPE" is automatically changed, depending on "BRAND TYPE" selected.
Example) When ERASE1, ERASE2" is set:
By pressing the erasure mode SW, either primary erasure or secondary
erasure is selectable.
l Erasure mode unsetting time
Set the time, in seconds, from when the erasure mode setting is changed to
when it reverts back to the "reading" mode.
When "0" is set, it remains changed.
l Alarm setting when the cassette is set
Set to determine whether an alarm sound is generated or not when the
11. Click on [SET]. cassette is set under condition where the CL screen does not allow cassette
processing.
- "ON" (default): Alarm sound is generated.
- "OFF": Alarm sound is not generated.
l Alarm setting for overexposed IP
- LOG&MESSAGE: Written into the log file with an error message displayed.
- LOG ONLY: Written into the log file.
- NONE: Nothing is done.
l Barcode reader setting (CR-IR362 only)
It is set to determine whether the both-side cassette identification barcode
reader is used or not.
- "YES": The barcode reader is used.
- "NO" (default): The barcode reader is not used.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-23
 IN-24
12. Set "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME". 13. Click on [SET].
u INSTRUCTION u CAUTION
Enter IP ADDRESS of the CL to be connected with the RU. While data is being written into the FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the power of
the RU.
REFERENCE If the power of the RU is turned OFF, the program residing in the memory is
corrupted, so that the RU cannot be rebooted.
For "CL NAME", any name (20 bytes: 20 alphanumeric characters, or 10 Kanji
characters) may be entered.

14. Verify that writing into the FLASH ROM has been completed, and click
on the [Enter] key.
REFERENCE
Writing into the FLASH ROM will take about four minutes.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-24
 IN-25
15. Click on [OK]. 9. Image/Conveyance Checks
In this section, the following checks are made as last-time verification for final
placement.
- Conveyance checks
- Image checks

16. Check the version of the RU software, and close Setup PC-TOOL. 9.1 Check Before Procedures
u NOTES u
- For the IP used for image/conveyance checks, an IP of the maximum size used in
the hospital should be employed.
- Make sure that the IP to be used does not contain any important image data
exposed.

1. Check to ensure that the "READY" screen appears.

u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, return to step 1 and perform install procedures
all over again. 2. Perform "Secondary Erasure" on the spontaneous radiation and
image accumulated on the IP to be used.
{Instruction Manual}
17. Turn OFF the power of the RU.
18. Turn ON the power of the RU.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-25
 IN-26
3. Perform IP exposures. 9.2 Image/Conveyance Checks
u INSTRUCTIONS u
u NOTE u
- Expose two IPs of maximum sizes for each of the IP types (ST/HR type and Because the "MENU" and so forth differ depending on the IP type, image checks
HR-BD type) used at the institution, with the following doses. should be performed with the "MENU" specified below.
- With the X-ray tube, the first IP should be exposed in a normal orientation, and
the second in a 180-degree upside-down orientation.
- When the "HR" IP is used in conjunction with the molybdenum X-ray tube, the 1. Using menus "TEST", "Image Format", and "SINGLE", record the IP
IP should be exposed under conditions of "l "For "HR-BD" IP." exposed at "9.1 Check Before Procedures", and generate an image
output.
l For "ST/HR" IP u INSTRUCTION u
- X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube For IP type HR-BD, when the image menu is to be registered, the HQ flag should
- Exposure X-ray dose: 1 mR be set in the "Exposure Parameter Detail Setting".
- Maximum size: IP of 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14"x17" (35cm x 43cm)
size
- Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m
2. Check the S value.
Voltage 80 kV REFERENCE
Amperage 50 mA Reference values for S depending on the X-ray dose:
Time 0.013 sec - For IP type ST/HR (tungsten X-ray tube)
l For "HR-BD" IP For 0.1 mR: The S value is 2000.
For 1 mR: The S value is 200.
- X-ray tube: Molybdenum X-ray tube For 10 mR: The S value is 20.
- Exposure X-ray dose: 20 mR
- Maximum size: IP of 18"x24" HR-BD or 24"x30" HR-BD size - For IP type HR-BD (molybdenum X-ray tube)
- Reference conditions: Distance 0.55 m For 2 mR: The S value is 1200.
Voltage 20 kV For 20 mR: The S value is 120.
Amperage 100 mA For 200 mR: The S value is 12.
Time 0.053 sec

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-26
 IN-27
2 Verify that there is no "unusual nonuniformity" found on the output 3 Check the image format.
film or on the image displayed on the image monitor. Make sure that the white blank portion is 2 mm or less, as actually measured on
the IP, from the outermost edge of the image frame of the film outputted.
u CHECK u
u CHECK u
There should be no uneven density difference in the main scan direction.
The white blank portion should be 2 mm or less.
If there is any uneven density difference, compare the films outputted from the If anything abnormal is found:
two IPs of the same size, and determine whether such nonuniformity is caused {Troubleshooting}
by the machine or X-ray tube. ��

l If there is uneven density difference in the same direction on two films

������������������������ �����������������������������
���������� �����������������������
������������

→ The machine may be the cause of such nonuniformity.

u NOTE u
{Troubleshooting}
The distance measured on the film may differ from the actual size on the IP,
depending on the reading size and film size. The actual size on the IP should be
l If positions of uneven density difference are different calculated using the distance measured on the film and the reduction factor for
the film. Compute the actual size on the IP according to the following equation.

������������������������ ����������������������������
���������� �����������������������
������������

→ The X-ray tube may be the cause of such nonuniformity.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-27
 IN-28
10. Powering OFF the CL/RU 11. Cleaning the CL/RU
1. Shut down the system of the CL. 1. Clean the monitor and covers of the CL with a dry cloth.

2. Shut down the system of the RU. 2. Clean the covers of the RU with a moistened cloth.

3. Power OFF the RU. 3. Peel the seal off the touch panel.

4. Attach the Cassette Insert operation labels and the Exposure Markers
precaution label.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-28
 IN-29
BLANK PAGE

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual IN-29
 Appx IN-1
Appendix 1. Additional Protective n Connection Locations of Cables for Additional Protective
Grounding of the Equipment and Clamp Locations
Grounding <INSTRUCTIONS>
Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the Please use power supply cord and clamp (which is required for keeping the additional
patient environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. protective ground cord in position) approved by the electrical standard of the country
Refer to Medical System Standard, IEC60601-1-1. to which the equipment is to be installed.
However, there may be cases where additional protective grounding is not possible.
(For example in cases like non-metallic faceplate screws as well as boxes and <Counter-measures for additional protective grounding>
isolated supply systems etc.) If this should happen, please refer to “Counter- 1. Engage the services of a professional to make the necessary preparations for the
measures for additional protective grounding” on the next page. connection of additional protective grounding.
This installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle 2. If the connected device possess a hospital grade earth terminal and is mobile,
electrical facility construction. move the connected device and replace with a power supply plug which has
Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used hospital grade earth terminal.
room” are given below. 3. Install a isolating transformer to the connected device. In this way, the power
supply from the connected device will be separated from the main power supply.
l Patient Environment
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures
(treatment, tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four
directions and 2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.

l Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.

l Non-Medically Used Room

Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-1
 Appx IN-2
Appendix 2. Setting the Master CL 3. Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
After the main screen appears, sequentially touch the upper left and upper right
This section describes the procedures for additionally register the CL2 (172.16.1.22) corners of the touch panel.
into the system that consists of the RU (ru0: 172.16.1.11) and CL (master CL: u NOTE u
172.16.1.21), and for switching the master CL from CL1 to CL2.
Because the IP address of the FTP server has not been set yet, it takes about
three minutes until the main screen appears.

REFERENCE
If your touch is accepted by the panel, a "beep" alarm sound is generated.

�� ��
������� �������

1. Additionally Registering the Master CL

(Procedures on the CL1)
1. Turn ON the power of the CL. ���������������������������������
��������������������� ������������

2. Turn ON the power of the RU.

u INSTRUCTION u
If you cannot put the RU into the Maintenance Mode, turn OFF the power of the
RU and then reboot the RU all over again.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-2
 Appx IN-3
4. Press the [Windows ] key to display the Start menu of Windows. 6. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the master CL is to
be added, and enter the "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME" of the master
CL to be added.

5. Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows. When the dialog
opens, type ["C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\
RuPcTool.exe"] and click on the [OK] button.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-3
 Appx IN-4
7. Register the master CL (CL2) created at step 6 into the Master CL. 2. Registering the RU (Procedures on the
CL2)
1. Start the Service Utility.
{FCR XG-1/CR CL Service Manual/Maintenance Utility (MU)/1. Starting and
Exiting the Service Utility}

2. Click on [Setup Configuration Item].

3. Click on [ALL OTHER NODES] of [NETWORK CONFIG].

8. Close the RU PC-TOOL window.

4. Click on .
→ The "New Node" dialog box appears.

FR9H7105.EPS

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-4
 Appx IN-5
5. Enter the host name (ru0) of the RU in and its IP 3. Registering the Machine Information
address (172.16.1.11) in . (CONNECTING EQUIPMENT)
1. Click on [CONNECTING EQUIPMENT] in the "Setup Configuration
6. Select in the "Add Node" field, and click on . Item" window.
→ The "FRUP Setup" screen appears.

7. Check in the "Attribute" field ( → ). 2. Click on .

8. Type "ru0" in . → The "Connecting Equipment" dialog box appears.
REFERENCE 3. Register the machine information as shown below.
The name should not necessarily be the same as the host name.
I READER
9. Click on .
→ Registering the network information is now completed. II ru0

FR9H7108.EPS

I. Select "Reader".
II. Select the host name (e.g., ru0).
III. If several RU's are connected, select the second and subsequent host
name(s) in "Equipment #2" and so on.

4. Click on .
→ Registering the machine information is now completed.
The "Setup Configuration Item" window appears back on screen.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-5
 Appx IN-6
4. Saving Configuration and Exiting Service
Utility
1. From the "Config (F)" menu in the "Setup Configuration Item" window,
select "Save (V)".

→ The save confirmation window appears.

FR9H7110.EPS

2. Click on .
→ The setup is saved.
3. From the "Config (F)" menu, select "Close (C)".
→ The "Service Utility" window appears back on screen.
4. Exit the Service Utility.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-6
 Appx IN-7
5. Verifying Switching of Master CL 6. Turn ON the power of the RU.

1. Turn OFF the power of the RU. 7. Perform reading, and make sure that the image is transferred to the
master CL.
2. Turn ON the power of the RU.
3. Touch the [Utility] button.

4. Touch the [Master CL Setting] button on the [1/2] tag.

5. Touch the icon of CL2, and hit the [OK] button.

REFERENCE
The power of the RU automatically turns OFF about 1 minute after the master CL
is set.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-7
 Appx IN-8
Appendix 3. Securing the Machine with
the Anti-Topple Retainers
The procedures described herein are applicable when the RU is secured down onto
the floor by use of the anti-topple retainers.

1. Components of Anti-Topple Retainer Kit No. Name Qty. Remarks

1 Bracket (front cover) 1
2 Bracket (front) 1
3 Bracket 2
4 Bracket (rear) 1
5 Bracket (rear cover) 1
6 Bracket (spacer) 12 2mm
7 Bracket (spacer) 2 1mm
8 Bracket (spacer) 12 2mm
9 Bolt (12x20) 8
10 Spring washer (SW12) 8
11 Washer (W12) 8
12 Anchor nut (Na12) 8
13 Truss screw (T3x6) 4

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-8
 Appx IN-9
2. Securing the Machine with the Anti-Topple 2. Drill holes for embedding the anchor nuts and then embed the anchor
nuts.
Retainers
u NOTE u
Before drilling holes for embedding the anchor nuts, wear protective goggles.

REFERENCE
When determining the locations for embedding the anchor nuts, temporarily install the
machine and retainers in place, and then mark the locations.

1. Determine the locations for embedding the anchor nuts.

<Reference values>

3. Attach the brackets to the machine.

REFERENCE
The brackets to be attached to the right and left sides of the machine are
identical in shape.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-9
 Appx IN-10
4. Move the machine to the location where it is to be secured, and then
attach the bracket to the rear side of the machine and insert 2mm-
thick spacers.
u NOTE u
While pressing the bracket downward, insert 2mm-thick spacers.

u INSTRUCTION u
Insert 2mm-thick spacers until a 1mm-thick spacer is no longer inserted.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-10
 Appx IN-11
5. Secure the brackets by bolts.

6. Attach the bracket to the front side of the machine, and insert 2mm-
thick spacers.
u NOTE u
While pressing the bracket downward, insert 2mm-thick spacers.

u INSTRUCTION u
Insert 2mm-thick spacers until a 2mm-thick spacer is no longer inserted.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-11
 Appx IN-12
7. Secure the bracket by bolts. 8. Attach the cover brackets.

011-202-01
08.25.2003 FM4098
CR-IR 363 Service Manual Appx IN-12